《Reborn in Konoha; I Think I’m Cultivating Immortality》 Chapter 1: Photosynthesis? No, This Is Cultivation! Chapter 1: Photosynthesis? No, This Is Cultivation! Year 16 of Konoha, Land of Fire, Hidden Leaf Vige. It was nighttime. The silver moon hung high, apanied by a sky full of stars. The soft moonlight cascaded from above, bathing the quiet vige of Konoha in a serene glow. The gentle lights from the houses gave the tranquil vige a warm,forting atmosphere. In one corner of the vige, near the edge of the forest, stood a small wooden house. On top of the housey a young boy, staring quietly up at the sky. He had delicate features,rge, bright eyes, soft hair, and porcin-like skin that glowed under the moonlight. His small body seemed to emit a faint radiance, making him look not only exquisitely cute but also, otherworldly and sacred. This was undoubtedly a very beautiful child. This six-year-old boy¡¯s name was Mochizuki Hui, thest member of the Mochizuki n in Konoha Vige. However, Mochizuki Hui wasn¡¯t originally from the world of Naruto, or at least, his soul wasn¡¯t. He was a transmigrator, having crossed over from a certain blue. His previous life¡­ well, there wasn¡¯t much to talk about. A genius cut down in his prime, dead at a young age. Afflicted with an incurable disease, with no treatment avable. All in all, his past life was rather dull and unremarkable, with nothing worth remembering. But in this new life, Mochizuki Hui was certain that his experiences would be anything but ordinary. The reason for his confidence in leading an extraordinary and brilliant life in the world of Naruto was clear. As everyone knows, the world of Naruto is filled with powerful cheats (Kekkei Genkai) and overpowered techniques. Without some form of cheat, surviving in this world was no easy feat. In this world, intelligence determines your baseline strength, while cheats set your upper limits. As a transmigrator, Mochizuki Hui, with his modern mind, had no doubts about his intelligence. And when it came to cheats? He certainly had one. Mochizuki Hui¡¯s cheat wasn¡¯t some sort of system; it originated from his own body, from a special kind of energy within him. In the world of Naruto, people''s power typicallyes from chakra and natural energy. However, Mochizuki Hui¡¯s body was unique. He possessed a special energy that he called Primordial Qi (Yuan Qi). The power of Primordial Qiy in its ability to assimte and evolve. This energy could absorb all forms of external energy, converting them into Primordial Qi, and in turn, it could transform Primordial Qi into any other type of energy. Primordial Qi seemed to be the fundamental substance that created andposed all things in the universe. It could form different basic particles, which could thenbine into various materials. In the human body, Primordial Qi could strengthen and activate cells, granting the body greater potential for growth and even allowing it to break through its own limitations, evolving into a higher life form. In the Naruto world, the Ten-Tails was powerful enough, being a collection of all the world¡¯s chakra. Given enough time, Mochizuki Hui could also grow into a simr entity¡ªa collection of chakra, or even natural energy, sage chakra, or any other form of energy. The Otsutsuki n¡¯s bodies were certainly strong, far beyond the level of ordinary humans. But with enough time, Mochizuki Hui¡¯s life form could surpass even the Otsutsuki, gaining even greater power. This was the potential that Primordial Qi granted him. The only catch was that this growth process took some time. Nevertheless, at just six years old, Mochizuki Hui¡¯s body, having already been transformed by Primordial Qi, was no weaker than that of a fully grown ordinary adult. In terms of strength, speed, and reaction time, he far surpassed his peers and even most average adults. Additionally, during these six years, his body¡¯s evolution had granted him powerful abilities, such as his eyesight. At this moment, Mochizuki Hui¡¯s vision wasparable to a two-tomoe Sharingan, giving him incredibly sharp dynamic vision and the ability to capture details in motion. So, despite his young age, Mochizuki Hui¡¯s strength was by no means weak. However, he kept a low profile. In his daily life, he presented himself as an average child, performing on par with his peers. In fact, because he hadn¡¯t extracted any chakra, he scored a zero in any ninjutsu-rted exams at the academy. This meant he might not be able to graduate from the Ninja Academy like a normal student. The reason for this wasn¡¯t for show, but simply because it wasn¡¯t necessary. Chakra and Primordial Qi were on entirely different levels. Extracting chakra from his body right now would be a waste. The ninjutsu he could currently learn was too basic¡ªjust the fundamental three techniques (Transformation Jutsu, Clone Jutsu, and Substitution Jutsu). Using these wouldn¡¯t enhance his strength in any meaningful way. He¡¯d rather wait until he could ess more powerful jutsu or simply use sage chakra when the time came. ¡°Yep, I definitely prefer moonlight to sunlight!¡± Mochizuki Hui mutteredfortably, his childish voice surprisingly pleasant. He could absorb all forms of energy into his body, where the Primordial Qi would assimte it, converting it into more Primordial Qi. However, this process took time. The moreplex the energy, the slower the assimtion and conversion. This world contained many forms of energy, some simple, someplex. Absorbing everything at once would be inefficient. Moreover, his body¡¯s ability to absorb energy depended on its strength. The stronger his body became, the more energy he could absorb. Over the past six years, Mochizuki Hui had carefully chosen only one type of energy to assimte from the vast array of energies he could sense. That energy was light. He spent three years assimting light energy, and for the next three years, he had been constantly absorbing light, transforming it into Primordial Qi to aid in his body¡¯s growth. It was almost like a form of photosynthesis. But Mochizuki Hui preferred to call this process cultivation. Chapter 2: Graduating Early Chapter 2: Graduating Early A new day dawned as the sun rose on schedule. Mochizuki Hui strolled leisurely through the vige, surrounded by several girls his age. Although his strength was nothing special, his looks more than made up for it. The title of "Most Handsome Boy at the Ninja Academy" wasn¡¯t just for show. ¡°Hui-kun, I made this breakfast especially for you. Please, you must take it!¡± ¡°Hui-kun, how about having the lunch I prepared for you today?¡± ¡°Hui-kun, mine! Eat mine!¡± ¡°Hmph, mine is the best!¡± Several girls chattered around him, all vying for the chance to have Mochizuki Hui eat the food they had made. This scene made Jiraiya, who happened to pass by, turn blue with envy. Standing in the distance, he shouted in frustration, ¡°Damn it! Mochizuki Hui isn¡¯t even as handsome as me! Why do all the girls like him?!¡± Hearing Jiraiya¡¯s outburst, a student walking by nced at Jiraiya, then at Hui in the distance, rolled his eyes, and walked off. Jiraiya: ¡°¡­¡± ¡°You brat, what¡¯s that supposed to mean?!¡± Jiraiya roared, startling the student, who quickly blended into the crowd, leaving Jiraiya fuming alone. Unfortunately, Mochizuki Hui missed the scene, or he would haveughed about it all morning. With a group of girls in tow, Mochizuki Hui reluctantly made his way to the Ninja Academy. There was no helping it. While he¡¯d love to attract people with his skills, his face simply wouldn¡¯t allow him to. As soon as he arrived at the academy, another wave of excited screams from the girls greeted him, leaving him with a headache. Quickly, he hurried to his ssroom just as the bell rang. He had timed it perfectly, allowing him to avoid being swarmed by the girls in his ss. Sitting down in his seat, he breathed a small sigh of relief and prepared to engage in his daily routine. Spacing out¡­ ss? Please, he had learned everything already ages ago. ¡°Ahem, ahem! Alright, I have an important announcement today.¡± At that moment, their homeroom teacher, Mr. Ota, spoke up in a serious tone. Looking at the curious expressions of the children, his heart softened, but outwardly, he maintained his stern demeanor as he said, ¡°The vige has decided that exceptional students from the non-graduating sses will be allowed to participate in this year¡¯s graduation exam. Are there any students from our ss who wish to sign up?¡± The room fell silent before erupting into chaos. Mochizuki Hui¡¯s expression grew serious. What was bound to happen had finallye. Due to the ongoing First Great Ninja War, the conflict between the viges had reached a critical stage, and arge number of ninjas were needed. Talented students were being selected early to be sent to the battlefield or to assist with logistics. Because of this, Tsunade, Orochimaru, and Jiraiya¡ªwho were also in the same year as Hui¡ªwould graduate at the age of six from the Ninja Academy. ¡°Teacher, I want to sign up.¡± Mochizuki Hui raised his hand and spoke loudly, causing the ssroom to fall silent once more. Everyone froze, even Mr. Ota was surprised by Hui¡¯s sudden request. Frowning, Mr. Ota sternly replied, ¡°Hui, this is for the top students in the ss. You should stay in school where it¡¯s safe. Your strength isn¡¯t enough to handle this.¡± Truth be told, Mr. Ota had a soft spot for the delicate-looking boy and didn¡¯t want him to be cannon fodder on the battlefield. ¡°Yeah, Hui, you shouldn¡¯t sign up.¡± ¡°Hui-kun is so handsome!¡± ¡°Ahhh, I love him even more!¡± A few of the girls looked at Hui with stars in their eyes. No matter his strength, the fact that he had volunteered to graduate early only made him more charming in their eyes. ¡°Teacher, I think my strength is decent enough. Besides, just because I sign up doesn¡¯t mean I¡¯ll pass. Let me give it a try,¡± Mochizuki Hui said as he looked Mr. Ota directly in the eyes, his gaze clear and resolute. Seeing the determination in Hui¡¯s eyes, Mr. Ota felt a strange sense of conviction stir within him. He couldn¡¯t help but ask, ¡°Then tell me, why do you want to sign up?¡± Hearing this, Hui responded earnestly, ¡°I believe the vige needs me right now. Even though my strength may be insignificant, I trust that when many small forcese together, they can form a powerful shield to protect our vige.¡± Mr. Ota was momentarily stunned by his words. He stood in silence for a few moments, staring into Hui¡¯s eyes before he finally sighed and spoke, ¡°Alright, I¡¯ll submit your name. Think of it as a chance to see the skills of the graduating ss.¡± Upon hearing this, a soft, confident smile appeared on Mochizuki Hui¡¯s face as he thanked Mr. Ota and returned to his seat. ¡°So cool, Hui-kun!!!¡± ¡°Ahhhh, I love him so much!¡± ¡°I want to sign up too! I want to graduate with Hui-kun!¡± Hui¡¯s bold decision had already made him look cool, but his earlier words pushed the girls over the edge, making them scream in admiration. The boys in the ss, however, were less impressed, their faces twitching withplicated emotions¡ªpart admiration, but mostly frustration. Mochizuki Hui, you¡¯re making the rest of us look bad! They couldn¡¯t help but curse themselves for noting up with such cool words. ¡°Pfft, he¡¯s just showing off. Wait until the seniors in the graduation ss beat him to a pulp!¡± one boy muttered bitterly. He was especially annoyed when he noticed that the girl he had a crush on was also looking at Hui with stars in her eyes. This imbnce in attention only made him more agitated. Meanwhile, Mochizuki Hui, having signed up, returned to his usual routine¡ªdaydreaming. To be honest, he wasn¡¯t particrly excited about graduating early. Why would he rush? The Ninja Academy was peaceful. Every day he got free meals, and during ss, he could zone out and rx. If possible, Mochizuki Hui would have preferred to stay in the academy for a few more years, ying the part of an ordinary student, living as a civilian until he had grown powerful enough to dominate before revealing himself. But unfortunately, that little troublemaker Tsunade wouldn¡¯t be staying in the academy with him. Thinking of Tsunade, Hui felt a headacheing on. During the Warring States period, the Mochizuki n had been a subordinate n to the Senju, their loyal followers. In the First Great Ninja War, the entire Mochizuki n had been wiped out, leaving only Mochizuki Hui behind. The Senju couldn¡¯t just let him fend for himself, so they took him in. Until he turned five, Mochizuki Hui lived in the Senju n¡¯spound. That¡¯s why he and Tsunade had grown up as childhood friends. In fact, Tsunade had even said more than once that she would marry him when they were older. ¡°Sigh¡­ Even though I know Tsunade won¡¯t have any real problems in the future, I can¡¯t help but feel a little worried.¡± Chapter 3: The Graduation Exam Chapter 3: The Graduation Exam Mochizuki Hui''s decision to sign up for early graduation spread quickly throughout the entire Ninja Academy. For the girls, this made him even more charming and admirable, but they couldn¡¯t help feeling worried for him at the same time. The boys, however, were different¡ªthey were all eagerly waiting to see him fail. Some older students and those in the graduating ss even stated that if they ended up facing Mochizuki Hui in the exam, they¡¯d be sure to teach him a lesson. After all, with his good looks, Mochizuki Hui had be the enemy of all the boys at school. Mochizuki Hui¡¯s reason for signing up, the statement he made about helping the vige, also spread across Konoha that very same day. This caught the attention of many higher-ups in the vige. However, after learning about his limited talent and potential, their interest turned into regret. What a pity. Such a bright, self-aware child, but with such little potential as a ninja. And so, the matter didn¡¯t cause much of a stir. It was just a brief topic of conversation before fading from people¡¯s minds. That night, Mochizuki Hui once againy on his rooftop, watching the stars. At one point, he sensed a presence approaching. ¡°Mochizuki Hui, you''ve really done it this time. How dare you sign up for early graduation with your strength!¡± A young yet familiar voice rang out from a distance. Soon after, a small figure leapt through the air,nding next to Mochizuki Hui. It was a six-year-old girl with golden hair tied into a high ponytail. She stood with her hands on her hips, ring down at him, clearly upset. The little girl was Tsunade. Though they had been in a cold war, after hearing from her family that Mochizuki Hui had signed up for early graduation, she couldn¡¯t help bute to find him. Seeing her, Mochizuki Hui grinned. Sitting up, he reached out and yfully pinched Tsunade¡¯s cheek. ¡°I¡¯m doing this to protect you, of course. I bet you signed up too, didn¡¯t you?¡± His delicate features, sincere and gentle gaze, and affectionate look in his eyes immediately melted away Tsunade¡¯s frustration. ¡°Stop it! Don¡¯t pinch my face; it¡¯ll make me look chubby!¡± She muttered in protest but sat down beside him on the rooftop, leaning against him without saying another word. Wrapping her arms around his, she rested her head on his shoulder. Having grown up together, Tsunade knew that this was how Mochizuki Hui liked to spend time¡ªjust sitting quietly with him was more than enough for him. As for the early graduation issue, Tsunade understood that once Mochizuki Hui made a decision, he rarely changed his mind. She also wasn¡¯t worried about him passing the exam, because, in her mind, he was bound to fail. She had no idea about his true strength. After a long while, Mochizuki Hui nced at Tsunade, who had fallen asleep leaning against him, and a gentle smile appeared on his lips. He released a warm energy from within his body¡ªlike theforting warmth of the rising sun¡ªthat flowed into Tsunade, nourishing her body. Additionally, the energy acted like a nket, gently covering her to keep her warm. Under the night sky, the two small figures sat nestled together on the rooftop, while the soft light from the house below kept thempany throughout the night. Time passed, and before long, the day of the graduation exam had arrived. Mochizuki Hui made his way to the designated exam location¡ªa familiar ce. The training ground... a location that appeared frequently in Narutofanfictions. When he arrived, about a dozen other people had already gathered. Two of them were adults, both wearing the standard ninja vests of Konoha, and both were Chunin. There were also fourteen young students, around ten years old or so, who were supposed to graduate in one or two years but had signed up for early graduation. Finally, there was a white-haired boy standing in the crowd, lookingpletely lost. Among the group, Mochizuki Hui didn¡¯t see Tsunade or Orochimaru. After a brief thought, he realized that their exams were probably being held separately. After all, both Tsunade and Orochimaru were rare geniuses. Coupled with Tsunade¡¯s special background, they had long caught the attention of the vige¡¯s higher-ups. At that moment, Jiraiya, who had been standing clueless among the crowd, noticed Mochizuki Hui¡¯s arrival. His eyes lit up, and he ran over with an eager grin on his face. ¡°Mochizuki Hui, huh? I thought you¡¯d chickened out and wouldn¡¯t show up for the exam!¡± Though Jiraiya¡¯s words were sharp, Mochizuki Hui could tell from his excited bodynguage that Jiraiya was simply relieved to find someone he knew in the group. Among their cohort, apart from Tsunade and Orochimaru¡ªwho were likely being privately tested¡ªonly he and Jiraiya had signed up for early graduation. ¡°Hmph! I can¡¯t wait to teach Mochizuki Hui a lesson!¡± one boy grumbled. ¡°That jerk stole my sister¡¯s heart. Don¡¯t any of you stop meter¡ªI¡¯m going to beat him senseless!¡± another boy snarled. ¡°I¡¯ll make sure Mochizuki Hui learns that being good-looking means nothing in the face of real strength!¡± someone else muttered under his breath. Mochizuki Hui¡¯s arrival caused a stir among the gathered students. ¡°Quiet!¡± a stern voice called out, immediately silencing the crowd. It was one of the Chunin. After gaining everyone¡¯s attention, he scanned the group, instantly turning the mood in the training ground more serious. After a few moments of silence, the Chunin finally spoke, ¡°First of all, wee to the early graduation exam. I am your proctor, Oden Yutian.¡± ¡°By signing up for this exam, you¡¯ve shown that you have confidence in yourselves.¡± ¡°But confidence alone isn¡¯t enough. If you want to graduate, you need strength.¡± ¡°Your strength alone isn¡¯t enough either. If you want to graduate, you must prove it to the vige.¡± His words made the already tense atmosphere even more solemn. The gathered students listened in silence, not daring to breathe too loudly. Satisfied with the response, Oden Yutian continued, ¡°Now, I will exin the rules of the exam. Pay close attention¡ªI will only exin them once.¡± Chapter 4: The Prey? Chapter 4: The Prey? ¡°This exam will be abat assessment. ¡°There are sixteen of you. I will have you draw lots to divide into six groups. Those who draw the same number will form a group. ¡°However, the one who draws number six will form a group alone. ¡°Thebat location will be the small forest behind us. Each group will receive a forehead protector when entering the forest. One hour from now, the groups that return here with three or more forehead protectors will pass the exam. ¡°Now then, go ahead and draw your lots.¡± As Oden Yutian finished speaking, a collective gasp echoed through the group. This format was brutal. At least two-thirds of the participants would be eliminated by the end of the exam. ¡°Come here and draw your lots,¡± called the other Chunin. The examinees rushed over to take a numbered slip of paper from his hand. ¡°I¡¯m number one! Whoever else got one,e over here!¡± ¡°We¡¯re number four. Who¡¯s thest one with number four? Hurry and join us!¡± As the group bustled about, everyone quickly found their teammates. Except for Mochizuki Hui, he remained still. He nced meaningfully at the expressionless Chunin holding the slips of paper, then walked over to take thest one. Opening it, he wasn¡¯t surprised. The number on his slip was ¡°6.¡± Mochizuki Hui would be in a group of one. He rolled his eyes. The Chunin distributing the slips was someone he knew, a member of the Senju n named Senju Seimoku. Clearly, this lottery had been rigged! And the reason? Likely at the request of a certain Senju family youngdy¡ªto make sure Mochizuki Hui wouldn¡¯t graduate. As themotion settled, the sixteen participants were divided into six groups. Fifteen of them eyed Mochizuki Hui, standing alone, with a mix of expressions¡ªsome calcting, some eager. Everyone knew Mochizuki Hui¡¯s reputation. Out of everyone present, he was considered the weakest. Well, slightly better than Jiraiya, who had the lowest ranking. But just barely. Everyone here believed they could easily defeat Mochizuki Hui. And now, on top of his supposed weakness, he was in a solo group. ording to the rules, to pass the exam, you needed to defeat at least one group to gather enough forehead protectors. In an ideal situation, that group would have already defeated another, holding at least two forehead protectors in addition to their own. In reality, most teams would need to defeat two other groups to meet the requirement. Defeating a full team of three, especially ones with the strongest members like Jiraiya¡¯s team, wasn¡¯t an easy task. But stealing a forehead protector from Mochizuki Hui, who was alone? That would be simple. No, it would be effortless. From that moment, Mochizuki Hui became the prime target¡ªthe perfect prey. After handing out the forehead protectors to the groups, Oden Yutian announced, ¡°Thebat exam begins now.¡± With that, the five three-man teams darted into the forest to find hiding spots. Along with them, five shadows silently slipped into the woods as well. Outside the forest, Mochizuki Hui caught sight of Senju Seimoku, who was smirking at him. He rolled his eyes again before turning and walking into the forest. He didn¡¯t hurry. Instead, he strolled leisurely as though he were enjoying a peaceful walk in the woods, rather than participating in a brutal survival exam. Watching him disappear into the trees, Oden Yutian turned to Senju Seimoku. ¡°You rigged the lottery, didn¡¯t you?¡± Senju Seimoku immediately retorted, ¡°What? Of course not! I¡¯d never do that! Stop with the wild usations!¡± Oden Yutian raised an eyebrow but didn¡¯t press the matter. Inwardly, though, he couldn¡¯t help but sigh. Meanwhile, as Mochizuki Hui entered the forest, he immediately sensed several gazes tracking him. As expected, many had already considered him prey. Well, as the supposed ¡°second weakest¡± participant, and in a solo group, it made sense that everyone would view him as the perfect target. But who exactly was the prey here? That was yet to be determined. As he walked deeper into the forest, Mochizuki Hui¡¯s eyes narrowed slightly. He noticed subtle movements in the surrounding trees, and the faint sound of rustling leaves reached his ears. A smile tugged at the corner of his mouth. Couldn¡¯t wait, could they? Impatient fools. Let the hunt begin, then! For a brief moment, a sh of light seemed to flicker in Mochizuki Hui¡¯s dark eyes. Whoosh, whoosh, whoosh! The sound of shuriken cutting through the air echoed as a barrage of them flew at Mochizuki Hui from three directions. At the same time, three boys charged out from different angles, kunai in hand. The three of them formed a triangle around him. They didn¡¯t think any traps or borate strategies were necessary¡ªthey just needed to surround and kill him outright. After all, in their eyes, Mochizuki Hui was so weak that even one of them alone could easily defeat him. The fact that all three were attacking together seemed like overkill. Unfortunately for them, they had no idea how powerful Mochizuki Hui truly was. ng! ng! ng! With lightning speed, Mochizuki Hui threw a few shuriken of his own, deflecting the iing projectiles from the front. He didn¡¯t bother with the shurikening from the other two directions¡ªthey weren¡¯t going to hit him anyway. Instead, he rushed forward, his target the boy charging from the front. The boy, surprised by Mochizuki Hui¡¯s precise and powerful deflections, felt a hint of doubt. But quickly dismissed it. Seeing Mochizuki Hui rushing at him, he smirked. He¡¯s dead. Mochizuki Hui was only six years old, while this boy was eleven. Their physical strength wasn¡¯t even in the same league! For Mochizuki Hui to engage him in closebat was nothing short of foolish. The two closed in on each other quickly. Mochizuki Hui swung his fist with an odd angle, forcing the boy¡¯s eyes to widen in surprise. Before he could react, Mochizuki Hui¡¯s punch had already slipped past his attempted block andnded squarely on his face. The boy¡¯s eyes went wide with shock as the punch sent him crashing to the ground, unconscious. One punch¡ªinstant defeat. Chapter 5: You’re Not Afraid, Are You? Chapter 5: You¡¯re Not Afraid, Are You? The sudden turn of events shocked the remaining two boys from the group. They couldn¡¯t believe what they had just witnessed. Wasn¡¯t Mochizuki Hui supposed to be the one knocked out with a single punch? But the two boys had no time to dwell on their disbelief, as eight shuriken flew from Mochizuki Hui¡¯s hands, curving through the air with a sharp whistling sound, aimed straight at them. The deadly speed and the piercing sound of the shuriken made the boys¡¯ faces pale. Despite how absurd it seemed, they instinctively tried to dodge. Unfortunately for one of the boys, just as he rolled to avoid the shuriken, Mochizuki Hui was already upon him. As the boy got to his feet, Mochizuki Hui delivered a powerful kick, sending him crashing into a tree, instantly knocking him out. The remaining boy''s face twisted in fear. He had never expected the "prey" they were hunting to be such a terrifying and powerful predator. Seeing Mochizuki Hui charging at him, he turned and fled without hesitation. However, he was no match for Mochizuki Hui''s speed. In a few swift strides, Hui caught up and knocked him out with a single punch. It all happened in the blink of an eye. From the moment the three boys attempted to surround Mochizuki Hui to the moment he effortlessly defeated them, less than twenty seconds had passed. And that was only because Mochizuki Hui had intentionally slowed himself down to enjoy the game. If he hadn¡¯t, it would¡¯ve ended even sooner. After searching the unconscious trio, Mochizuki Hui retrieved their forehead protectors. A smile curled across his lips as he raised the two forehead protectors high above his head and shouted loudly: ¡°If you want these two forehead protectors,e and get them! Don¡¯t worry about someone else swooping in to steal them¡ªyou can all work together. ¡°Beat me, and you can decide among yourselves how to divide the spoils. ¡°Come on! Defeat me, and you¡¯ll graduate! Or are you afraid? ¡°If so, that¡¯s pretty disappointing.¡± His voice echoed through the forest, the words carrying an air of arrogance. The other participants, mostly eleven- or twelve-year-olds, were at that impulsive age where they were easily provoked. Hearing Mochizuki Hui¡¯s taunting, many of them couldn¡¯t help but feel a surge of anger. ¡°I can¡¯t stand it anymore! Let¡¯s get him, all of us together!¡± Finally, someone lost his patience and leaped down from a tree. ¡°Yeah, let¡¯s all attack at once!¡± With one boy leading the charge, others quickly followed suit. In moments, nine more boys jumped down from the trees, surrounding Mochizuki Hui in a tight circle. ¡°Mochizuki Hui, you may have been hiding your strength, but you¡¯re way too arrogant. Since you want us to work together, we¡¯ll grant your wish.¡± One of the boys spoke, his voice firm. Though he had been surprised by Mochizuki Hui¡¯s earlier disy of power, it wasn¡¯t enough to scare him off. After all, the three boys that Mochizuki Hui had defeated were from the weaker half of their group. If they hadn¡¯t been, they wouldn¡¯t have been the first to rush after Hui when everyone else had hesitated. Mochizuki Hui nced around at the nine boys, a faint sense of regret in his voice. ¡°Nine people, three teams. What a pity. There¡¯s still one group hiding.¡± It wasn¡¯t that he feared these boys. He was just disappointed that three others were still hiding, meaning he¡¯d have to waste time tracking them downter. ¡°You bastard!¡± One of the boys, unable to bear Hui¡¯s arrogant attitude, charged forward, kunai in hand. But before he could get far, his teammate pulled him back. ¡°Don¡¯t attack alone. We need to do this together!¡± His teammate¡¯s words were sensible. After all, this wasn¡¯t just about defeating Mochizuki Hui and taking his two forehead protectors. The most important thing was what would happen next¡ªonce they had the protectors, the groups would have to fight among themselves to decide who got to keep them. They couldn¡¯t afford to lose members during the attack on Hui. Understanding this, the others nodded and drew their shuriken, throwing them all at once. A barrage of shuriken flew toward Mochizuki Hui from every direction, blocking off all possible escape routes. But once again, they underestimated him. With his dynamic vision, which rivaled that of a two-tomoe Sharingan, Mochizuki Hui¡¯s ability to perceive his surroundings was incredible. The moment the shuriken left their hands, he had already found the optimal path to evade the attack. Mochizuki Hui sprang into action, moving with lightning speed. With a series of swift flips and dodges, he weaved through the rain of shuriken, quickly closing the distance between himself and one of the teams. The three boys from that team were startled but immediately raised their kunai to defend themselves. Seeing this, the remaining six boys abandoned their long-range attacks and rushed in, hoping to overwhelm Hui with sheer numbers. ng! Thud! Mochizuki Hui effortlessly deflected their attacks with his own kunai and followed up with a swift kick to one boy¡¯s stomach, knocking him out instantly. At the same moment, he twisted his body, grabbed another boy¡¯s wrist as the boy tried to stab him, and delivered a sharp elbow to the boy¡¯s head, knocking him unconscious as well. Without missing a beat, Mochizuki Hui leaped into the air and hurled several shuriken at the remaining seven boys. While they were busy deflecting the iing projectiles, hended and rushed at another boy, taking him out with a single punch. In less than an instant, three of the boys were already down. This disy of speed and power terrified the remaining six boys. They had seriously underestimated Mochizuki Hui¡¯s strength. But Hui wasn¡¯t about to give them a chance to recover. Heunched himself at the nearest boy, his superior strength making it feel like a grown man beating up children. Bam! Bam! Bam! One after another, the boys fell to the ground, unable to keep up with Mochizuki Hui¡¯s relentless assault. In under ten seconds, all six were defeated. Nine boysy scattered on the ground¡ªsome unconscious, others groaning in pain, clutching their stomachs. None of them were left standing. ¡°Well, now it¡¯s just Jiraiya¡¯s group. Let¡¯s wrap this up quickly.¡± Mochizuki Hui muttered to himself as he gathered the forehead protectors from the fallen teams. Chapter 6: The Final Group Chapter 6: The Final Group After speaking, Mochizuki Hui nced meaningfully at a few trees around him before walking away. As soon as he left, four shadows emerged from behind the trees, looking in the direction he had gone with expressions of shock. Each of these figures wore white animal masks and ck hooded cloaks¡ªobviously, they were members of the Anbu. The reason these Anbu were present was to ensure the safety of the children. After all, this was a realbat exam, and if things got out of hand, causing serious injury or death, it would have dire consequences. "Everyone underestimated you, Mochizuki Hui," one Anbu member murmured to himself. The others remained silent, all equally astonished by the boy''s abilities. Meanwhile, after dealing with the four teams, Mochizuki Hui made his way directly toward the exit of the small forest. Thanks to his ability to absorb and sense various forms of energy, he knew exactly where Jiraiya¡¯s group was hiding, despite their best efforts to stay concealed. There were different strategies for passing this kind of exam and securing forehead protectors from other teams. The first type of team would actively search for other groups, aiming to defeat them and steal their forehead protectors in an open fight. The second type would hide within the forest, setting traps and waiting for those aggressive teams to fall right into them. The third type was the most cunning: they would quickly enter the forest, sneak back to the exit, and set up traps there, waiting for the victors of the other teams toe to them. It was a strategy of lying in wait to ambush the final survivors. After all, one of the exam''s requirements was to return to the training ground with the forehead protectors. To do that, everyone would need to pass through the exit. So waiting by the exit was often the best n. However, this strategy had a downside: if the victors from within the forest were too strong and had gathered all the forehead protectors, the teams waiting at the exit could end up as easy targets. When Jiraiya¡¯s team saw Mochizuki Hui slowly walking back from the depths of the forest, their first thought was that he had been defeated and had lost his forehead protector to another group, eliminating him from the exam. But when they noticed that he was carrying several forehead protectors in his hands, their eyes widened in disbelief. They exchanged confused nces, utterly baffled. ¡°What¡¯s going on? How does Mochizuki Hui have so many forehead protectors?!¡± ¡°No idea! Did the other teams all take each other out, and he just got lucky?¡± ¡°How could that even happen? Do you even hear yourself?¡± ¡°Well, then what do you think happened?!¡± ¡°Uh¡­ I don¡¯t know¡­¡± Their silent exchange of nces conveyed the unspoken conversation between them. Mochizuki Hui, though fully aware of their hiding spot, pretended to be oblivious and continued walking casually toward the exit of the forest. At one point, he stepped on a thin wire, snapping it. Whoosh, whoosh, whoosh! Immediately, dozens of shuriken and kunai shot out from the leaves of the trees on both sides of him. Above, arge fell swiftly toward him. This was the trap that Jiraiya''s team had meticulously set up, with the thin wire acting as the trigger. In the face of such dangers from both sides and above, most people¡¯s instinctive reaction would be to dodge either forward or backwards. And Mochizuki Hui chose to leap backwards. Whether he moved forward or backward, there were traps waiting for him in both directions. He knew this, but he deliberately moved backward¡ªbecause Jiraiya¡¯s team was lying in wait behind him. ¡°Got him!¡± As Mochizuki Hui leapt into the air, seemingly with no ce to evade, Jiraiya appeared first, swiftly throwing several shuriken at the airborne target. At the same time, the two other boys on Jiraiya¡¯s team emerged from the sides, kunai in hand, rushing toward Mochizuki Hui to finish him off the moment hended. These two were considered the strongest out of all the participants in the exam. They were confident that, with their carefullyid trap, no matter which team they faced, they could eliminate at least one member. Once they took down one, the remaining two could handle the rest. Unfortunately for them, they had no idea how powerful Mochizuki Hui truly was. They were about to find out the hard way. Mochizuki Hui swung his kunai mid-air, deftly deflecting the shuriken aimed at him. At the same time, he had already seen through the iing attacks from the two boys. As hended, he swiftly grabbed the wrists of the two boys just as they attempted to stab him with their kunai. With a powerful tug, Mochizuki Hui yanked both boys toward each other. Bang! The two boys collided, dazed and dizzy, copsing to the ground in a heap. Stars spun in their eyes, and they were no longer capable of fighting. It was so easy. Dealing with academy students like this was child¡¯s y for Mochizuki Hui¡ªit was like an adult fighting toddlers. His strength, speed, reflexes, perception, andbat intelligence... Hepletely outssed them in every aspect. After taking down the two boys, Mochizuki Hui turned to face Jiraiya, who stood there in shock. ¡°If you don¡¯t want to get beaten up, I suggest you hand over your forehead protector,¡± Mochizuki Hui said with a smirk. He hadn¡¯t seen the forehead protectors on the three boys, so they had likely hidden them somewhere. As long as all three weren¡¯t taken out at once, there was always a chance for one of them to escape and make aeback. Mochizuki Hui had to admit, Jiraiya¡¯s teammates had excellent awareness for their age. Too bad they were up against someonepletely out of their league. Chapter 7: Oops, I Accidentally… Chapter 7: Oops, I identally¡­ Jiraiya froze for a moment at Mochizuki Hui¡¯s words, but then, clenching his teeth, he shouted, ¡°Stop looking down on me!¡± With a roar, he grabbed his kunai and charged toward Mochizuki Hui. It was hard to say where he got the confidence from. Seeing this, Mochizuki Hui¡¯s lips curled into a faint smile. As soon as Jiraiya was within range, Mochizuki Hui casually threw a punch,nding it squarely on Jiraiya¡¯s stomach before he could react. The blow knocked Jiraiya to his knees instantly, clutching his stomach in pain, his eyes wide with shock. "Charging in like that takes guts," Mochizuki Hui said as he looked down at Jiraiya, his tone calm. "But without the strength to back it up, courage like that is just recklessness." He nced around, then fixed his gaze on a specific spot nearby, where a slight smile crept onto his face. Mochizuki Hui started walking toward that direction. That spot contained Jiraiya¡¯s group¡¯s forehead protectors, hidden among the bushes and rigged with traps. Jiraiya¡¯s team had prepared thoroughly, and their tactical awareness was impressive. They had tried to make the most of their limited resources and opportunities. Unfortunately, they were still too young and inexperienced. Their traps, while well-intentioned, were clumsy andcked the sophistication of a seasoned ninja¡¯s setup. Any experienced shinobi would have seen right through them. Mochizuki Hui, with his sharp intellect and keen senses, found these traps to beughably obvious¡ªlike cing a bear trap on a smooth, clean floor and expecting someone to fall for it. As he walked toward the forehead protectors, the three defeated boys, lying on the ground pretending to groan in pain, couldn¡¯t help but watch him anxiously, their eyes glued to his every move. Finally, Mochizuki Hui reached the spot. Without hesitation, he casually drove his kunai into the ground and bent down to retrieve the forehead protector hidden among the bushes. ¡°We got him!¡± Jiraiya eximed excitedly. But his sense of triumph was short-lived. His expression froze as he watched Mochizuki Hui lift the forehead protector without triggering the trap. ¡°The trap¡­ why didn¡¯t it go off?!¡± Jiraiya gasped in disbelief. Hearing Jiraiya¡¯s outburst, Mochizuki Hui stopped and turned back, looking at the three stunned boys still lying on the ground. With an amused smile, he said, "If it weren¡¯t for the fact that you guys set them, with traps of this level, I¡¯d think they were designed to insult my intelligence." With that, he turned to leave. Jiraiya and his teammates were left dumbfounded, their faces turning red with embarrassment as the realization sank in. ¡°You bastard, it¡¯s not over yet!¡± Jiraiya yelled, his voice filled with frustration. He shakily pushed himself off the ground, grabbing a kunai and forcing himself to his feet despite the pain in his stomach. But after just a few steps, the sharp pain overwhelmed him, causing him to stumble and fall again. ¡°Damn it!¡± Jiraiya cursed, lying on the ground and ring at Mochizuki Hui¡¯s retreating figure. He couldn¡¯t ept it¡ªhe didn¡¯t know why, but he felt an overwhelming sense of unwillingness, of defeat gnawing at him. Fueled by this feeling, he struggled to his feet once more and charged at Mochizuki Hui again. Mochizuki Hui watched quietly as Jiraiya approached. Just as Jiraiya reached him, Mochizuki Hui extended his arm, grabbing Jiraiya¡¯s wrist. A swift knee to the stomach followed, sending Jiraiya crumpling to the ground once again. This time, Jiraiya was curled up in agony, sweat dripping from his forehead as his face paled from the pain. Mochizuki Hui didn¡¯t bother attacking again. He simply stood there, looking down at Jiraiya¡ªthe boy who would one day be one of the legendary Sannin. After a few seconds, Mochizuki Hui turned and walked away. But before he had gone far, Jiraiya¡¯s trembling voice called out again. ¡°You¡­ you bastard¡­ I haven¡¯t lost yet!¡± Mochizuki Hui paused for a moment but didn¡¯t turn around. Instead, he continued walking away, leaving behind a single parting remark: ¡°If you can hold on to that kind of resolve in the future, I¡¯ll acknowledge you.¡± With that, he left the scene. Back at the training ground, Oden Yutian and Senju Seimoku were chatting to pass the time. They still had about an hour to wait, so with nothing else to do, they had started discussing which group would be the first to graduate. ¡°I think Group Three has the best chance. Their overall strength is solid.¡± ¡°I¡¯m betting on Group Five. Even though they¡¯ve got a weak link in Jiraiya, the other two should have no problem taking two forehead protectors.¡± ¡°Really? I hadn¡¯t noticed much about them.¡± As they talked, Senju Seimoku¡¯s thoughts wandered. Honestly, I don¡¯t care who graduates, as long as Mochizuki Hui is eliminated. After all, that was the mission from the youngdy, and I have no choice but to follow through. Just as they continued their conversation, a figure slowly emerged from the forest¡¯s exit. "It¡¯s¡­ Mochizuki Hui. Looks like he got eliminated," Oden Yutian observed. Seeing the lone, small figure approaching, he assumed Mochizuki Hui had failed the exam. "Fifteen minutes¡­ not bad. For someone who was practically prey,sting this long is impressive," Senju Seimoku added, nodding slightly. Despite himself, he felt a bit of pride. After all, Mochizuki Hui was someone he had watched grow up. But as Mochizuki Hui got closer, their expressions changed. They noticed the forehead protectors hanging from his hand. Clink, clink, clink. The clear sound of forehead protectors colliding echoed as Mochizuki Hui strolled up to the two men. He raised the forehead protectors for them to see, a wide smile spreading across his face. ¡°Oops, I identally collected all six forehead protectors.¡± Chapter 8: Cheating? It’s Clearly a Kekkei Genkai! Chapter 8: Cheating? It¡¯s Clearly a Kekkei Genkai! ¡°So, you¡¯re telling me that you ¡®identally¡¯ took all the forehead protectors and eliminated every other participant in the exam, right?¡± In the Hokage¡¯s office, the Second Hokage, Senju Tobirama, sat in his chair, speaking with a yful tone. Across from him stood Mochizuki Hui, who appeared perfectly innocent. Hearing Tobirama¡¯s words, he quickly nodded and responded earnestly: ¡°Grandpa Tobirama, you have to believe me! It really was an ident! You know I¡¯ve always been an honest kid. ¡®Adorable¡¯ and ¡®obedient¡¯ are my middle names. I, Mochizuki Hui, never lie.¡± Tobirama¡¯s eyebrow twitched. Looking at Hui¡¯s big, innocent eyes and cute expression, Tobirama almost believed him. But he¡¯d watched this boy grow up, so he knew better. This was the grandson of an old ally, thest surviving member of the Mochizuki n, who had always been loyal to the Senju. He was mischievous from birth. Honest? Hah, good one. ¡°Fine. I won¡¯t pursue this any further,¡± Tobirama said, leaning back slightly and crossing his arms. ¡°But what about hiding your true strength? Don¡¯t tell me that was also ¡®idental.¡¯¡± His eyes gleamed with amusement, as if daring Mochizuki Hui toe up with another excuse. But Mochizuki Hui¡¯s face showed shock as he replied in disbelief, ¡°Grandpa Tobirama, you can¡¯t just use me of such things! Be careful, or I¡¯ll sue you for nder!¡± He added with a huff, ¡°And when did I ever hide my strength? I¡¯ve been giving my all in every exam, I swear!¡± His exaggerated performance left Tobirama speechless. The boy¡¯s actions alone told a different story. A six-year-old kid had wiped the floor with fourteen older, more experienced students, and yet in his own ss, he was ranked as merely average? And now he was iming he wasn¡¯t hiding his abilities? Hui¡¯s im of giving his ¡°all¡± was basically pping Tobirama¡¯s intelligence in the face. Seeing Tobirama¡¯s dark expression, Mochizuki Hui realized his excuse wasn¡¯t working. He coughed awkwardly and then tried again. ¡°Well... maybe I hid a little bit of my strength. But, you know, the tallest tree catches the most wind, right?¡± Hearing this, Tobirama paused, pondering the saying. He shook his head, then said seriously: ¡°Hui, you must remember: you are part of the Senju n. You can grow as tall as you want¡ªno wind will knock you down as long as I¡¯m here.¡± Hui felt a warmth in his heart at Tobirama¡¯s words. ¡°Alright... but, Grandpa Tobirama, you really can¡¯t me me! I honestly don¡¯t know how I got so strong,¡± Mochizuki Hui said with a sheepish grin. He decided it was time to start nting seeds for the future. His power would only grow stronger, and who knew what kind of changes mighte with it. Maybe his body would even change drastically if he unlocked some kind of special abilityter on. Rather than face suspicionter, it was better to prepare an excuse in advance. After all, in the world of Naruto, power-ups weren¡¯t unusual. It was a world where kekkei genkai (bloodline limits) weremon, not cheats! If anything, he could just im he had awakened a rare bloodline trait. Tobirama suddenly disappeared from his chair and reappeared next to Mochizuki Hui in the blink of an eye, his hand on Hui¡¯s shoulder. It was the Flying Thunder God Technique, one of Tobirama¡¯s signature jutsu. He had marked Hui with its seal long ago. Not for attacking, of course, but for protection. To Tobirama, Mochizuki Hui was as close as family¡ªhe saw him as a grandson and a member of the Senju n. This bond came not just from the Mochizuki n¡¯s unwavering loyalty to the Senju, but also from the fact that Hui was thest survivor of his n, and he had grown up in the Senjupound alongside Tobirama and Hashirama. They shared a deep familial connection. Moreover, Hui had always been a charming and likable child, which made it easy to grow fond of him. cing his palm on Hui¡¯s back, Tobirama closed his eyes for a moment before snapping them open in surprise. He could feel the immense power coursing through Hui¡¯s body¡ªstrength far beyond what a child his age should possess. This was on par with an adult ninja! ¡°Could it be... a kekkei genkai?¡± Tobirama mused aloud, rubbing his chin in thought. As far as he knew, the Mochizuki n had never been known for possessing any bloodline limits. Could this be a case of gic mutation? It was certainly possible. ¡°Hui, since your strength began increasing, have you felt any unusual changes in your body?¡± Tobirama asked, curious. ¡°Hmm¡­ well, I do feel like my breathing has be lighter, and I¡¯ve noticed I prefer being in bright, well-lit ces,¡± Hui replied honestly. These were actual side effects he had experienced after absorbing light energy. ¡°I see¡­¡± Tobirama was about to say more when an Anbu appeared in the room, waiting to report something. Seeing this, Tobirama waved Hui off. ¡°Alright, you can go for now. Tomorrow morning at eight, meet me at Training Ground One.¡± Tobirama had already made up his mind that Mochizuki Hui¡¯s sudden increase in power must be due to the awakening of a kekkei genkai. He just didn¡¯t know yet what kind of abilities it might grant him. ¡°Got it! See youter, Grandpa Tobirama!¡± Mochizuki Hui waved and headed for home. He knew that news of his graduation would soon spread, causing quite a stir. And when it did, he¡¯d be surrounded by a bunch of adoring girls again, robbing him of his peaceful and quiet life. ¡°Ugh, being handsome can be such a burden sometimes...¡± he sighed dramatically. Chapter 9: Genius Chapter 9: Genius Just as Mochizuki Hui had expected, news of his performance during the graduation exam spread like wildfire throughout Konoha, leaving many people utterly dumbfounded. ¡°No way! Sure, Mochizuki Hui is cute, hardworking, and likable, but I¡¯ve never heard that he¡¯s that strong! My kid told me he was just average in their ss.¡± ¡°Impossible, absolutely impossible! That little runt, Mochizuki Hui? If he managed to graduate early, I¡¯ll jump off this building!¡± ¡°This has to be a joke. I can believe he graduated early, but single-handedly taking down all the other examinees? No way! Some of those kids were top talents!¡± ¡°Hmph, only an idiot would believe something like that.¡± At first, the vigers were full of doubt. The idea that a six-year-old kid could outshine older, more experienced students and dominate the exam seemed ridiculous. But when the official list of graduates was posted, confirming the truth, people had no choice but to believe it. ¡°Wow, this is unbelievable! He really did it!¡± ¡°So it¡¯s true! That kid, Mochizuki Hui, is way stronger than we thought.¡± ¡°He must have been hiding his strength all along!¡± ¡°Amazing! He took down every other early graduation applicant by himself!¡± ¡°Well, technically, they can retake the exam¡­¡± ¡°Ahhh! Hui-kun is so handsome!¡± ¡°I need to find Hui-kun! Where is he? Has anyone seen him?!¡± ¡°Mochizuki Hui¡­ he seems to embody the Will of Fire. Coupled with his talent, this kid¡¯s future is really something to look forward to.¡± Just like that, Mochizuki Hui became the talk of Konoha. He had already been a local celebrity due to his good looks, but now he was known far and wide as a prodigy. Fortunately, Mochizuki Hui had the foresight to avoid his home and went straight to the Senju n¡¯spound. Otherwise, he wouldn¡¯t have had a moment of peace from all the attention. At Tsunade¡¯s house, she was sulking, her back turned, cheeks puffed out in frustration. ¡°Hmph, you lied to me! I¡¯m mad!¡± Mochizuki Hui saw this and immediately put on a serious expression, speaking in a sad, mncholic tone: ¡°Sigh... I thought you would notice the changes in me, Tsunade. You know, I¡¯ve been waiting for you to figure it out on your own. But it seems like you never really cared. You didn¡¯t even notice such huge change in me¡­¡± He dramatically sighed again, turning away as if deeply hurt. ¡°It¡¯s fine. I guess I¡¯ve always been alone, carrying this burden by myself¡­¡± As he counted silently in his head¡ªOne, two, three¡­ Sure enough, Tsunade panicked. She rushed over and hugged him tightly, saying, ¡°That¡¯s not true! I¡¯ve been watching you closely this whole time. I, I¡­¡± Her voice cracked, and tears started welling up in her eyes. Seeing that his n had worked, Mochizuki Hui allowed a small smirk to appear, but he quickly masked it. Gently, he pried her hands off and turned around, pulling her into aforting hug. ¡°Alright, alright. I believe you.¡± ¡°Ahem! Hui-kun, are you bullying my little Tsunade again?¡± came a voice pretending to sound stern. Tsunade jumped in surprise and quickly let go of Hui. The voice belonged to none other than Uzumaki Mito. ¡°Of course not! I would never bully Tsunade, Grandma Mito. You¡¯ve got the wrong idea!¡± Hui replied, immediately putting on an exaggeratedly innocent face. He was a master at ying the cute card. ¡°Alright, alright, stop pretending,¡± Mito said with augh, covering her mouth. ¡°I have to say, Hui-kun, you¡¯ve really be quite impressive.¡± ¡°I¡¯ve always been impressive! Soon enough, I¡¯ll be the number one ninja in the world,¡± Mochizuki Hui dered proudly, his tone full of confidence. His smug expression earned another round ofughter from Mito. ¡°Oh? Well, I¡¯ll look forward to seeing that. Now,e on, future number one, it¡¯s time for dinner!¡± ¡°Coming!¡± For a moment, the house was filled with the warmth of family andughter, a perfect picture of happiness. However, deep within Uzumaki Mito, a far more ancient being was stirring. The Nine-Tails, the most powerful of the tailed beasts, had sensed something odd. Moments ago, the fox had felt a mysterious energy entering that little brat¡¯s body¡ªMochizuki Hui. The energy was faint, so faint that the Nine-Tails had wondered if it had made a mistake. But no. The more it focused, the clearer it became. Mochizuki Hui was indeed absorbing some kind of mysterious power. What was even more rming to the Nine-Tails was that there was a strange familiarity about it. It wasn¡¯t the same kind of energy as its own, but there was something¡­ simr. As if Mochizuki Hui was slowly transforming into an entity like itself, a collection of energy rather than just a human. ¡°How interesting. I¡¯ve never encountered a human like this before. I wonder what he¡¯ll be¡­¡± the Nine-Tails muttered to itself within Mito¡¯s seal. Then its tone turned darker. ¡°Not that it matters. If he bes something other than a human, all the better. Humans¡­ such despicable creatures. I¡¯d love to kill them all.¡± Chapter 10: A Sparring Match Chapter 10: A Sparring Match A new day dawned, and Mochizuki Hui left the Senjupound early, well before six o¡¯clock, heading to Training Ground One. He left so early to avoid running into the girls infatuated with him. This sort of thing would probably go on for a few more days until the hype around his graduation died down. At exactly eight o¡¯clock, Senju Tobirama arrived at Training Ground One, right on time. ¡°Good morning, Grandpa Tobirama!¡± Mochizuki Hui greeted him sweetly, knowing exactly how to act in front of his elders. Being cute and obedient was the perfect strategy for dealing with adults. Sure, it was a little embarrassing, but when weighed against the benefits, it was a small price to pay. ¡°Hui, attack me with everything you¡¯ve got. I want to see your current strength,¡± Tobirama said after nodding, skipping any small talk. He didn¡¯t immediately dive into examining Hui¡¯s body or trying to analyze his awakened kekkei genkai; instead, he focused on evaluating Hui¡¯s currentbat ability. In the past, due to Mochizuki Hui¡¯s limited potential, Tobirama had avoided asking him to demonstrate his abilities, not wanting to embarrass the boy. But now that Hui¡¯s strength had seemingly exploded and his bloodline had potentially awakened, Tobirama needed to assess his actual power. ¡°Got it.¡± Hui¡¯s eyes lit up at the challenge. Sparring with someone like Senju Tobirama, the legendary Second Hokage, renowned as the fastest shinobi in the world, the "Water God," and a master of forbidden techniques, was an unparalleled opportunity. For a rookie like Mochizuki Hui, whockedbat experience, fighting against someone like Tobirama was like reading the best battle manual. Hui was also eager to gauge his own strength, to see where he stood. ¡°I¡¯ming!¡± Hui announced,unching his attack with full force. He quickly flung several shuriken. They sped through the air at an incredible pace, their sharp trajectory apanied by the unmistakable whistling sound of their power. Tobirama¡¯s eyes gleamed with interest. However, he didn¡¯t retaliate. Instead, he leapt into the air, dodging the shuriken with ease. But as Tobirama ascended, Hui swiftly hurled a few kunai at him, targeting him mid-air. Though one¡¯s mobility is limited while airborne, someone of Tobirama¡¯s caliber could easily twist his body to avoid the kunai. Hui, undeterred, threw another set of kunai, these traveling even faster than thest. Still, Tobirama dodged them all effortlessly. However, he noticed something odd¡ªthest few kunai seemed imprecise, as if they weren¡¯t aimed at him at all. ng! ng! ng! The sound of metal colliding filled the air. Tobirama¡¯s eyes widened slightly as he watched the newly thrown kunai strike the earlier ones, altering their flight paths. The redirected kunai were now headed straight for Tobirama¡¯snding spot. It was the shurikenjutsu that would one day make Uchiha Itachi famous¡ªa technique where kunai and shuriken were used to alter each other''s trajectories. Mochizuki Hui, with his extraordinary observational ability and natural talent, had grasped the principles of the technique through self-study and practice. This move earned Tobirama¡¯s immediate praise. ¡°Impressive!¡± he called out. Thunk, thunk, thunk! The kunai struck Tobirama, but instead of hitting flesh, they made a dull thudding sound. The Tobirama they hit transformed into a log. Substitution Jutsu! Bam! Hui sensed a disturbance in the air behind him¡ªTobirama had reappeared at his back, moving at a blinding speed. Without hesitation, Hui spun around,nding a well-timed kick. His leg collided with Tobirama¡¯s arm just as he materialized. After that, they exchanged blows at close range. But it was mostly Hui attacking while Tobirama defended, observing. Hui could tell Tobirama was gathering information on his abilities, so he didn¡¯t hold back. He fought with everything he had, treating the spar as an opportunity to learn and improve. There was no worry about identally injuring Tobirama¡ªhe knew better than to fear that. After another flurry of rapid attacks, Hui realized Tobirama had probably gathered enough data on his close-quartersbat abilities. So afternding a kick, he used the momentum to leap back, putting some distance between them. ¡°Well done, Hui. Honestly! I¡¯m impressed,¡± Tobirama said, nodding with approval. ¡°Your reflexes are excellent, and yourbat awareness is sharp. But yourck of battle experience is still holding you back. Against opponents your age or average shinobi, your physical prowess and reaction speed are more than enough to secure victory.¡± He paused, his gaze sharpening. ¡°But if you were to face an opponent whose physical abilities are on par with yours in a life-or-death battle, the oue would not be in your favor.¡± Tobirama¡¯s words were meant as praise and critique, but inside, he was still reeling from what he had witnessed. Hui¡¯s abilities were far beyond what he expected from a six-year-old child. His potential was undeniable. Tobirama mused to himself that if Hui were given a month of realbat training, fighting every day, he would be even stronger¡ªperhaps astonishingly so. ¡°Do you have any other techniques or skills to show me? Let¡¯s see them all,¡± Tobirama said, though he doubted Hui had any major surprises left. To his surprise, Mochizuki Hui nodded. ¡°Actually, Grandpa Tobirama, I believe my strongest ability is my swordsmanship.¡± Chapter 11: Mysterious Power Chapter 11: Mysterious Power "Swordsmanship?" Senju Tobirama was surprised. He hadn¡¯t expected Mochizuki Hui to im that his strongest skill was swordsmanship. ¡°Yes, swordsmanship,¡± Hui replied with a serious nod. "Alright, show me what you''ve got. Do you need a sword?" Tobirama asked, intrigued. "No need, I brought my own." Hui walked over to a nearby seat and picked up a small, sheathed sword. It was modest in size but finely crafted. Returning to Tobirama, Hui took a stance, one hand gripping the sword''s hilt and the other holding the scabbard, lowering his posture slightly. In that moment, Hui¡¯s entire demeanor changed. His eyes turned cold, his emotions seemingly muted. His breathing grew deeper, and an unseen energy began to stir around him. Tobirama¡¯s expression became serious. From Hui¡¯s posture, he could sense the presence of a warrior, reminiscent of the samurai he had encountered in the past. While samurai weren¡¯t the dominant force in the world of shinobi, many were still formidable, and Tobirama had crossed paths with several of them in battle. ¡°Silver Moon!¡± At the peak of his focused energy, Hui drew his sword. The de left the sheath at a speed so swift it seemed invisible. Along with the de came a sh of silver light, like the arc of a crescent moon. Swish! The light appeared quickly and vanished just as fast. After the strike, Hui didn¡¯t move again. He stood still, breathing slightly heavier, and turned his gaze to Tobirama. Tobirama, meanwhile, examined the kunai he was holding. A thin line extended from one edge of the kunai to the other, almost cutting it clean in half. This was the result of Hui¡¯s strike¡ªthe Silver Moon technique, one of his signature moves, and the foundation of his swordsmanship. Bybining the power of light with his sword, he had formed a cutting wave of energy. "Continue," Tobirama said, suppressing his shock. However, Hui hesitated, coughing awkwardly before admitting, "Uh... that¡¯s actually all there is to my swordsmanship right now..." Tobirama blinked in confusion. Seriously? That one attack was the extent of his so-called mastery? But¡­ thinking back on that sh of silver light, Tobirama couldn¡¯t help but acknowledge its potential. ¡°That¡¯s quite impressive. This power is unlike traditional ninjutsu, yet it behaves like a jutsu that requires no hand signs. If refined, it could be a very effective technique.¡± As a master of forbidden jutsu and innovator of manybat techniques, Tobirama was quick to recognize the value of Hui¡¯s move. His sharp instincts told him this could be developed into something formidable. ¡°How did you manage to produce a strike like that?¡± he asked, needing more details to fully evaluate the potential of this new technique. ¡°It feels like there¡¯s a mysterious energy inside me. When I use my sword, I can guide that energy through it, and it results in a strike like this,¡± Hui exined after some thought, though his tone was uncertain. ¡°A mysterious energy? Can you sense this energy directly within your body?¡± Tobirama continued to probe. ¡°No, I can¡¯t sense it clearly. But when I use the sword, I know I can draw it out,¡± Hui responded. Nodding, Tobirama asked, ¡°What about without the sword? Can you still channel that energy?¡± ¡°Yes!¡± Hui replied confidently. He quickly ran to the edge of the training ground, picked up a fallen leaf from the ground, and then returned. Opening his left hand, palm up, he ced the leaf onto his palm with his right hand and took a deep breath, focusing. Tobirama watched as the leaf began to rise from Hui¡¯s palm, seemingly lifted by an unseen force. It hovered four to five centimeters above his hand. A faint glow radiated from Hui¡¯s palm¡ªso subtle that if Tobirama hadn¡¯t been observing closely, he might not have noticed it. ¡°Like this!¡± Hui said, a note of excitement in his voice as if he had mastered a fun new trick. Tobirama¡¯s sharp eyes narrowed slightly, and he began analyzing the situation, thoughts racing in his mind. ¡°This energy¡­ when did you first notice that you had it? Could you lift the leaf from the beginning, or did thateter? Have you tested the limits of this power? Have you noticed any changes in your body since you discovered it?¡± Tobirama fired off a series of questions, seeking more rity. He had observed no trace of chakra during Hui¡¯s disy, which led him to believe this wasn¡¯t a traditional kekkei genkai but some kind of unique bodily talent. ¡°Um, I noticed it about a year ago,¡± Hui began, answering each question in turn. ¡°At first, I couldn¡¯t lift the leaf, but eventually I could do it naturally. As for its limits... well, the strongest thing I can do is that sh you just saw.¡± ¡°The energy itself feels like it¡¯s growing stronger over time. My breathing feels lighter, and¡­ I¡¯ve developed a preference for being in the light.¡± Hui¡¯s answers caused Tobirama¡¯s eyes to light up even more with each response. A year ago, growth potential, affinity for light, non-chakra-based, undetectable by shinobi, assassination potential, no hand signs, evolving... Tobirama¡¯s mind was flooded with possibilities. He could see countless applications for this mysterious energy. Chapter 12: The ANBU Chapter 12: The ANBU Afterward, Senju Tobirama and Mochizuki Hui spent a considerable amount of time experimenting with Hui''s mysterious energy, collecting various data points about its capabilities. By the end of their session, Tobirama had gained a preliminary understanding of the strange force within Hui, and Hui had sessfully revealed the "secret" of his abilities, ensuring his future growth would be seen as usible and justified. "Hui, your power is unique and full of potential. It holds limitless possibilities. If you can fully master it, your future will be nothing short of extraordinary," Tobirama said with satisfaction. Although Hui¡¯s inability to extract chakra had previously been a concern, Tobirama knew that with the support of the Senju n, Hui could still lead afortable life, even without bing a powerful ninja. However, in a world ruled by strength, power was everything. Tobirama knew that if he or the Senju n ever fell, Hui would need his own strength to survive. Seeing the young boy''s potential gave Tobirama peace of mind. ¡°Hehe, I think my future looks pretty bright too! By the way, Grandpa Tobirama, who¡¯s going to be my and Tsunade¡¯s mentor? Can you give me a hint?¡± Hui asked yfully, grinning. In the original story, Tsunade had formed a team with Orochimaru and Jiraiya, under the guidance of Sarutobi Hiruzen, the future Third Hokage. Hui was curious whether his early graduation would cause a butterfly effect, altering the identity of his mentor. Tobirama, however, gave him a strange look before responding, ¡°Who told you that you¡¯d be on the same team as Tsunade?¡± Hui blinked in confusion. ¡°Wait, seriously? I¡¯m not going to be on the same team as Tsunade?¡± Tobirama smiled. ¡°That was the original n. But now, things have changed.¡± Hui blinked again, hisrge eyes filled with curiosity. ¡°Hui, your path of growth is different from others. Since you can¡¯t extract chakra, learning techniques like ninjutsu and genjutsu, which rely on chakra, won¡¯t be of much use to you. What you need to focus on are taijutsu, swordsmanship, and creating techniques that use your mysterious energy as a source. "I assigned Sarutobi Hiruzen as Tsunade¡¯s mentor because he¡¯s a talented ninja with a deep understanding of ninjutsu, and he¡¯s likely to be a master of it in the future. But his skills in taijutsu and swordsmanship, while adequate, are nothing extraordinary. For you, Hiruzen wouldn¡¯t be the best choice for a mentor. That¡¯s why I¡¯ve arranged for someone else to teach you.¡± Tobirama¡¯s exnation left Hui dumbfounded. Who said he couldn¡¯t extract chakra? He just chose not to because it wasn¡¯t efficient for him right now! And if he wasn¡¯t going to be with Tsunade, then what was the point of him graduating early? Wouldn¡¯t it have been more fun to stay at the academy with the girls? ¡°I¡¯ve assigned you to the ANBU,¡± Tobirama said. Hui was still processing how to exin his chakra situation when Tobirama dropped the bombshell, leaving him speechless once more. The ANBU¡ªknown as the "Assassination Tactical Special Force"¡ªwas a high-profile organization in the world of Naruto, synonymous with mystery, strength, and darkness. They operated in the shadows, carrying out unsavory, highly dangerous, and often grueling tasks. Members of the ANBU frequently danced on the edge of death, and their identities were concealed by code names. To assign a six-year-old child to such a ce? Tobirama¡¯s conscience surely couldn¡¯t be clear about that! Seeing the incredulous and devastated expression on Hui¡¯s face, Tobirama quickly understood what the boy was thinking. He gave him an exasperated look. ¡°I¡¯m not sending you into the depths of the ANBU for assassination missions! You¡¯ll be assigned to protect the Hokage,¡± Tobirama exined, finally putting Hui at ease. Hui let out a deep sigh of relief. So Tobirama wasn¡¯t sending him into the darkest corners of the ninja world after all. Being assigned to protect the Hokage was one of the more rxed and least dangerous ANBU tasks. There was logic behind Tobirama¡¯s decision as well. Having Hui serve in the ANBU would allow Tobirama to monitor the changes in his mysterious energy daily, ensuring a detailed understanding of its growth and fluctuations. It also meant that Hui would be in close proximity to receive Tobirama¡¯s personal guidance. Rather than just standing guard, Hui would be able to train and improve, asionally engaging in sparring sessions with other ANBU members to build hisbat experience. Tobirama¡¯s decision ensured that Hui would grow without being fully immersed in the ANBU¡¯s darker aspects. Hui would be part of the ANBU, but he wouldn¡¯t be tainted by its shadowy nature. This arrangement was more like a form of tutge, a way of grooming Hui. Of course, Tobirama didn¡¯t officially take Hui as his disciple for political reasons. As Hokage, directly taking Hui as an apprentice would draw too much attention, cing unnecessary pressure on the young boy. It might even attract the interest of higher-ups from other viges, increasing the risk to Hui¡¯s safety. But by making Hui an ANBU member assigned to the Hokage, all those potentialplications were neatly avoided. Chapter 13: Teammates Chapter 13: Teammates In the end, Mochizuki Hui had no choice but to ept his fate as a member of the ANBU. Meanwhile, Jiraiya, after showing what was described as an "incredible determination" during his second graduation exam, also sessfully passed. Just like in the original story, Tsunade, Orochimaru, and Jiraiya were grouped together, with Sarutobi Hiruzen as their instructor. When Hui heard about this, he couldn''t help but recall his words to Jiraiya during the exam. "Incredible determination... Could it be because of what I said to him that day?" This thought left Hui somewhat speechless, but he quickly shifted his focus. He was far more curious about who his new teammates in the ANBU were. The structure of the ANBU was hierarchical. At the top were the Captain and Vice-Captain, overseeing four squads. Each squad had seventeen members, led by a Squad Leader and divided into four teams. Every team consisted of four members: a Team Leader and three team members. Mochizuki Hui was assigned to Team Four of the First Squad. That morning, Hui put on his ANBU uniform, admired himself in the mirror for a moment, and smirked. "Man, I look good!" He donned the white fox mask, then headed off to the designated meeting point. The rendezvous location was an abandoned training ground on the outskirts of the vige, near the Forest of Death. It was a ce few people ever visited. When Hui arrived, three figures in simr ANBU uniforms and masks were already there, waiting. These three were his new teammates¡ªthe Team Leader and two other members. Judging from their builds, they were clearly adults. As Hui approached, the silent atmosphere grew even heavier. The three stared at Hui¡¯s small frame, and for a moment, they wondered if they were under some kind of genjutsu. Or perhaps this was just a child ying pretend, dressing up as an ANBU member for fun. That had to be it. There was no way the Second Hokage would assign a kid to their team. It was too ridiculous. Yet as Hui walked closer, stopping directly in front of them, their hopes werepletely shattered. ¡°Reporting in, Code 0215, present for duty,¡± Hui announced, his young voice breaking the silence. The response was deafening silence. After what felt like an eternity, one of them finally spoke. He had short ck hair and a sturdy build, and his voice was low, suggesting he was around thirty years old. ¡°Wee, 0215. I¡¯m Team Leader Bear. You should choose a code name for yourself,¡± he said, his tone calm despite the absurdity of the situation. "A code name?" Hui thought for a moment before replying, "Call me ''Light'', then." Bear nodded. "Alright, Light. Let''s introduce ourselves. For example, what we''re good at and what we''re not good at. I''ll start. My code name is Bear. I specialize in taijutsu and genjutsu, and I can use some Earth Release ninjutsu. I''m not good with other elemental ninjutsu or sword techniques." The other two members followed suit. The first to speak was a man with long ck hair tied into a ponytail. "My code name is Wind. I specialize in swordsmanship, and I can use some Wind Release and Fire Release. I''m not good at genjutsu." Judging from his voice, Wind seemed to be in his twenties. He carried a well-crafted, single-edged de instead of the standard ANBU-issued sword. The second man had short, spiky purple hair and looked slightly younger. "My code name is Lightning. I specialize in Lightning Release, and I know a bit of Wind Release and Water Release. I¡¯m not good at taijutsu." Finally, it was Hui¡¯s turn. The three men stared at him intently, clearly curious about what kind of abilities this small boy could possibly have to be ced in an elite ANBU unit. ¡°My code name is Light. I¡¯m not particrly good at anything. I know a bit of swordsmanship, taijutsu, and some sensory skills. I¡¯m not proficient in any ninjutsu or genjutsu,¡± Hui said confidently, his tonepletely unapologetic. The silence returned. Bear, Wind, and Lightning were left reeling from disbelief. Was this kid serious? Or had the Second Hokage lost his mind? Bear, still maintaining hisposure as Team Leader, finally broke the silence again. ¡°Ahem, alright then.¡± ¡°As Team Leader, it''s my job to ensure we function smoothly as a unit. I hope that in theing missions, we can work together efficiently andplete all tasks given to us by the vige.¡± ¡°Understood, Team Leader,¡± both Wind and Hui responded in unison. Lightning, however, wasn¡¯t convinced. He fixed his cold gaze on Hui. ¡°Team Leader, since we¡¯re going to be working together on missions, I don¡¯t think just knowing each other¡¯s abilities is enough. We should have a sparring session to better understand each other''s skills.¡± His tone was sharp, and it was clear he wanted to test Hui. Chapter 14: Defeat Chapter 14: Defeat The atmosphere instantly tensed at Lightning''s suggestion. His intention was clear¡ªhe wanted to test Mochizuki Hui. But Hui remained calm, merely shifting his gaze toward Bear, the team leader. After all, it was up to him to decide whether they would proceed with a sparring session. Behind his mask, Bear raised an eyebrow, quickly weighing the situation in his mind. It didn¡¯t take long for him to make his decision¡ªhe agreed with Lightning''s suggestion. Since they were all part of the same team, they would eventually be working together on missions. If there was a weak link in the team, it would not only make missions harder toplete, but it could also endanger everyone. It was better to assess Light¡¯s strength now. If his abilities were up to par, all the better. If not, Bear would need to report this concern to the Second Hokage. After all, he couldn''t allow one person to jeopardize the lives of the others. "Lightning has a point. To better understand each other¡¯s abilities, a sparring session is necessary," Bear dered, his decision final. Hearing this, Lightning smirked beneath his mask. "Then I''ll go first. Light, you''re with me," he said, his eyes locking onto Hui with eager anticipation. Hui, unfazed, nodded calmly. "I don¡¯t mind." "Alright, Light versus Lightning it is," Bear confirmed, stepping back along with Wind to give them space. Once the two were in position, Bear slowly raised one hand, then swung it down in a decisive motion. "First Squad, Team Four, sparring session¡ªbegin!" As Bear¡¯s voice rang out, Hui''s eyes shed with a brief glimmer of light, while Lightning''s expression grew serious. In the next instant, both moved at the same time. Huiunched several kunai from his hand, their speed so fast that, with only two or three meters between them, Lightning had no choice but to abandon his attempt at forming hand seals and instead leap backwards to avoid the attack. The first wave of kunai hit the ground where Lightning had just been standing, but Hui had anticipated his movement. As Lightning leapt into the air, three more kunai flew towards the spot he was moving toward. "Naive!" Lightning scoffed, twisting his body mid-air to evade the second set of kunai while continuing his hand seals. Whoosh! More kunai shot towards him, but this time, Lightning, still forming hand seals, spun his body just enough to narrowly dodge them. "Lightning Release¡ª" Just as he was about to finish his jutsu, a faint ng from behind caught his attention, sending a wave of rm through him. "What the¡ª?!" Bear blurted out, his voice filled with shock from below. Lightning, too,pleted his final hand seal just as hended, pressing his palms to the ground. "Lightning Release: Ground Wave!" Electricity crackled, spreading in a web-like pattern across the ground, racing toward Hui, who remained standing in his original spot. But just before the lightning could reach him, Hui gracefully jumped backward, evading the attack with ease. At that moment, Lightning heard a trio of dull thuds behind him. Thud, thud, thud! Three kunai had embedded themselves into the ground around him, forming a triangr pattern. Each kunai was only a mere ten centimetres away from his body. Cold sweat began to trickle down Lightning''s forehead as he stared at the kunai in shock. His first thought was, Where did these kunaie from? His second was, Shadow Clone Technique? But whatever he thought, he knew one thing for certain¡ªhe had lost. Those kunai could have just as easily struck him directly instead ofnding around him. He stood frozen, eyes locked on Hui, unable to believe that the boy hadn¡¯t used any hand seals. Meanwhile, Hui casually hopped backward to avoid the remnants of the lightning technique. Dodging a Lightning Release: Ground Wave was no big deal¡ªit didn¡¯t have arge area of effect, and Lightning had only used it as a supplementary attack, expecting to follow up with something stronger. But with the three kunai surrounding him, that follow-up never came. Hui looked at Lightning, who was slowly rising to his feet, and spoke calmly, "Looks like I¡¯ve won." After a brief moment of silence, Lightning nodded. "You win." p, p, p! A round of apuse came from Bear, who seemed genuinely impressed. "What a brilliant disy of shurikenjutsu! I¡¯ve never seen such an innovative attack method," Bear praised, his voice filled with awe. "Using the first wave of kunai to force your opponent into position, the second to set the stage, and the third to lock in your victory... Truly a genius move." Lightning¡¯s eyes widened as he finally understood how he had been outmanoeuvred. Hui had used the first kunai to make him jump, the second to create an opening, and the third to seal the deal. It didn¡¯t matter how many jutsu Lightning knew or how many tricks he had up his sleeve. In a real fight, those few seconds of misjudgment would have been enough to end his life. "Now, it''s my turn," came a voice from the side. It was Wind, stepping forward with a serious expression, ready to face Hui. Chapter 15: Another Victory! Chapter 15: Another Victory! "Alright," Mochizuki Hui agreed with a nod. Although he had won the earlier fight against Lightning, it hadn''tpletely earned him the respect of his new teammates. The shuriken technique he used to defeat Lightning had been an unexpected tactic¡ªa surprise move. What he had shown wasn¡¯t enough to fully convince them of his strength. "Very well, First Squad, Team Four. The second sparring session begins¡ªnow," Bear dered. As soon as his voice fell, Hui and Wind charged at each other simultaneously. This time, since Wind had already seen Hui''s shuriken technique, repeating the same tactic wouldn¡¯t work. Besides, Hui wanted to test himself further against these experienced Anbu members to see where he truly stood. After all, Wind was a skilled swordsman as well. ng! Their des collided with a sharp metallic sound, ringing out clearly in the air. Just from that single sh, Wind immediately regarded Hui with a newfound respect. The power behind Hui''s strike was surprisingly on par with his own¡ªa fact that left him shocked. Wind was no ordinary fighter. He was a seasoned, twenty-something-year-old warrior, while Hui was just a child. The idea that a mere six-year-old could match his strength was mind-boggling. ng, ng, ng! The two exchanged a rapid series of blows, their swords shing repeatedly and producing sparks with each collision. Wind¡¯s swordsmanship was formidable, supported by his extensive battle experience. However, Hui wasn¡¯t far behind. Though hecked Wind''s years of experience, his physical abilities were far superior. In terms of strength, speed, and reflexes, Hui was nearly Wind¡¯s equal. On top of that, Hui¡¯s perceptive eyes gave him an edge. With his heightened sense of vision, he could see through every move Wind made. Each time Wind prepared to strike, Hui could predict the direction of the attack just by observing his movements. For a time, the two seemed evenly matched. Neither could gain an advantage over the other. Observing from the side, both Bear and Lightning had finally discarded their earlier doubts. In this battle, it was clear¡ªHui had earned their acknowledgment. The sh between Hui and Wind demonstrated that Hui possessed the strength of a full-fledged chunin. He was more than qualified to be their teammate. ng, ng, ng! Their swords continued to sh at breakneck speed. At one point, Wind jumped back, creating a distance of about three or four meters between them. He plunged his sword into the ground and quickly began forming hand seals. "Fire Release: Great Fireball Jutsu!" A massive ball of me surged from Wind''s mouth, forming into an enormous fireball that hurtled toward Hui, warping the air surrounding it. The zing fireball was asrge as a small house, filling nearly all of Hui¡¯s vision. The heat was intense, and even before it reached him, Hui could feel his face growing warm. There was no way he could take it head-on. Without hesitation, Hui dodged to the side, his small frame moving quickly to evade the scorching mes. Despite his young age, Hui''s reaction time was extraordinary, and his speed was nothing to scoff at either. The moment he saw the fireball being formed, his mind had already calcted an escape route. The fireball, powerful as it was, missed its mark. But Wind hadn¡¯t expected to defeat Hui with that fireball alone. It was just a distraction to cover his real move¡ªthe Shadow Clone Jutsu. In the final moments of releasing the fireball, Wind had swiftly created a shadow clone. Now, with two Wind figures closing in from different directions, both wielding swords, they charged at Hui from two angles, aiming to block his escape. This was one of Wind¡¯s signature moves. Hisbination of real and shadow clone strikes often overwhelmed his opponents. Each attack flowed seamlessly into the next, giving the target no time to react. As the two Winds rushed toward him, Hui''s eyes flickered for a brief moment. He realized what was happening, but instead of panicking, a faint smile tugged at the corner of his lips. Calling upon the energy within his body, Hui swung his sword, unleashing a radiant arc of silver light. The crescent-shaped sh, bright and dazzling, shot through the air like a crescent moon¡ªSilver Moon. The glowing crescent flew forward and sliced clean through both of Wind¡¯s shadow clones, reducing them to clouds of smoke. In that instant, the real Wind was revealed, hiding behind his two clones! It turned out Wind hadn¡¯t just created one shadow clone but two. The first clone had been a decoy, meant to mask his true position underground. He had intended for his real body to remain hidden while the two clones distracted Hui with their assault. At thest moment, he would deliver a fatal blow from the shadows. Many opponents had fallen to this strategy, and Wind had hoped it would work on Hui as well. Of course, this tactic had a known weakness¡ªsensor-type ninja. If his opponent had any sensory abilities, they could detect his real body underground, rendering the strategy ineffective. Hui had mentioned that he could sense chakra, so Wind knew it was a risk. However, he also wanted to test just how strong Hui¡¯s sensory abilities were. But to his surprise, Hui wasn¡¯t relying solely on his sensory skills¡ªhe had hidden his full strength. With a powerful technique like Silver Moon, Wind¡¯s strategy had been thoroughly defeated. Looking down at the sword mark that now marred his chest armor, Wind chuckled. "I concede defeat." Upon hearing this, Hui sheathed his sword. Chapter 16: Conclusion Chapter 16: Conclusion In the blink of an eye, the two sparring sessions had concluded, and Mochizuki Hui had emerged victorious in both. If the first battle had showcased Hui''s genius-level tactics and masterful shuriken techniques, the second battle had given his new teammates a direct understanding of his strength. Despite his young appearance, barely a child, Hui¡¯s abilities had earned their full acknowledgment. Though his fighting style still showed signs of inexperience and ack of seasoned battle instincts, those were things that could be learned and honed over time. After all, he was still in his prime growth period. ¡°Was that sword technique of yours some kind of ninjutsu without hand signs?¡± Wind couldn''t help but ask, clearly impressed by the dazzling strike Hui had unleashed during their fight. To Wind, it seemed like a type of ninjutsu that seamlessly fused with swordy, a revtion that inspired him deeply. He couldn¡¯t help but admire the genius behind such a technique. Whoever had created it was undoubtedly a visionary! Hui simply smiled in response. He neither confirmed nor denied Wind''s assumption, leaving an air of mystery as he subtly hinted at eptance. ¡°I knew it! What an ingenious technique! This kind of move could be revolutionary. I think we should call it Sword Ninjutsu!¡± Wind said enthusiastically, clearly enthralled by the idea. As someone who was passionate about swordsmanship, Wind couldn¡¯t help but admire such innovation. For a swordsman like him, such a technique opened up new realms of possibilities in battle. ¡°Oh, it''s nothing special. I¡¯ve still got a long way to go,¡± Hui said modestly, scratching his head in mock embarrassment. In his heart, though, he appreciated Wind''s discerning eye. After all, it was a technique that could be considered akin to ¡°ninjutsu without seals.¡± If it could ever be spread widely, the world might see the birth of a new profession altogether: Sword Cultivators. But if that happened, the entire aesthetic of this world might shift dramatically¡ªfrom a ssic ninja world into something more reminiscent of the world of xianxia. Fortunately, Hui knew that his technique was far too unique to be replicated easily. Its potential wasn¡¯t something that could be mass-produced. ¡°Alright, Captain Bear, does that mean it''s our turn next?¡± Hui asked as he looked over at Bear, his voice once again calm and steady. Hearing this, Bear''s eyes gleamed with excitement. He had been waiting for this moment. ¡°Do you need to rest for a bit first?¡± Bear asked. Despite his eagerness, he wanted to give Hui a fair chance to recover. After all, Hui had just fought two battles back-to-back. Surely, he would have expended a significant amount of stamina and chakra by now. Or so Bear thought. In reality, Hui constantly absorbed energy from the environment around him, particrly light energy. His body processed and converted it into usable energy. However, there was a limit to how much his body could convert at one time, with any excess simply dissipating into the air. In other words, Hui was akin to a person with low chakra reserves but an extremely high rate of recovery. Long battles and drawn-out exhaustion weren¡¯t a concern for him. Still, it wouldn¡¯t do for him to reveal his secret just yet. So, instead, Hui nodded in agreement and sat down, pretending to rest and recover his chakra. After about ten minutes, he rose to his feet and spoke with renewed energy, ¡°Captain Bear, I¡¯m ready.¡± Bear grinned. ¡°Good! Then let¡¯s begin!¡± In a sh, Hui dashed forward, initiating the fight with a swift roundhouse kick. Thud! The sound of flesh meeting flesh echoed through the training ground. Hui winced slightly, feeling the impact reverberate through his leg as though he had just kicked a solid oak tree. On the other hand, Bear was quietly impressed. Despite Hui¡¯s small stature, the strength behind his kick was formidable. Boom, boom, boom! Hui continued his assault,unching attack after attack with a series of kicks, punches, and swift movements. However, Bear¡¯s body seemed to be imprable. He blocked every blow with ease, barely breaking a sweat. Although Hui¡¯s eyesight gave him a significant advantage in reading Bear¡¯s moves and predicting his attacks, his body wasn¡¯t quite able to keep up with the level of precision needed. His smaller frame, though powerful for his age, simply couldn¡¯t match up to Bear¡¯s sheer physical prowess and skill in taijutsu. After another failed attack, Hui used Bear¡¯s counter-kick to propel himself backward, creating some distance between them. ¡°Captain Bear, your taijutsu is really something. I can¡¯tpare,¡± Hui admitted, though his tone was still calm. ¡°Hahaha! Well, I¡¯ve had years of practice, kid. It¡¯s only natural. I¡¯ve spent so much time honing my taijutsu that even my bones ache from it. But you, you¡¯re just a kid¡ªalready a freak of nature with strength like this,¡± Bearughed, clearly impressed with Hui¡¯s performance despite the gap in their skill levels. He continued, ¡°Let¡¯s call it here. This is just a sparring session to get to know each other¡¯s strengths. No need to push ourselves to find a victor.¡± With that, Bear officially ended the match. ¡°Alright then. Tomorrow at 8 a.m., meet at the Hokage¡¯s building. We¡¯ll begin our first mission, protecting the Hokage.¡± With the finalmand, Bear, Lightning, and Wind all vanished using the Body Flicker Technique, leaving Hui alone in the training ground. Hui let out a sigh. ¡°Hmph, what¡¯s so great about having the Body Flicker Technique? Acting all shy like that...¡± He grumbled to himself, feeling slightly envious. Then, after a moment of reflection, he added, ¡°...although, I suppose I really don¡¯t know how to do it yet.¡± [Tl/n: Aight folks, that''s it for today, there''ll be another 10 chapters tomorrow and afterwards, we''ll be reverting to two chapters-per-day schedule, with the added bonus of one chapter every 100 powerstones. You can check out my patreon if you want advanced chapters, I should be done uploading the chapters by now... probably. Don''t trust my past self on that though.] Have a great day Folks(£þ??) Chapter 17: Life in the ANBU Chapter 17: Life in the ANBU After exchanging a few friendly blows with his new teammates, Mochizuki Hui officially began his life in the ANBU. Inside the Hokage¡¯s office, Tobirama Senju lifted his gaze from a stack of documents and peered out the window. A small figure came into view¡ªvigntly patrolling the area. It was Mochizuki Hui, the youngest member of the ANBU. Watching Hui¡¯s serious expression as he carried out his duties, Tobirama couldn¡¯t help but nod in approval. Patrolling and standing guard were monotonous tasks, requiring patience and focus. But despite his tender age¡ªjust six years old¡ªHui had performed his duties withplete dedication for the past week, showing no signs of distraction or boredom. This level of discipline deeply impressed Tobirama. ¡°Light,e to the office,¡± Tobirama called, using Hui¡¯s ANBU codename instead of his real name. This was a small mark of respect for his position within the ANBU. Hearing the Hokage¡¯s voice, Hui swiftly leaped up to the window of the Hokage¡¯s office and gracefully entered the room,nding lightly on his feet. ¡°Lord Second, your orders?¡± Hui knelt down on one knee, his tone respectful and his posture perfect. As an ANBU member, Hui knew when to shed his usual carefree demeanor. In this position, especially in front of the Hokage, he had to present himself as a true ninja of the shadows. ¡°Hui, it''s been a week. How is that energy inside youing along?¡± Tobirama asked, now switching back to his more familiar tone, as this was a private conversation between them. ¡°Grandfather Tobirama, the energy is still growing steadily, though the increase isn¡¯t too drastic. I''d say it''s about one percent strongerpared tost week,¡± Hui replied calmly, having long prepared his response. An increase of one percent in a week was perfectly reasonable for his current stage. At this rate, the energy within him would double in about two years, which seemed like an appropriate and manageable growth curve for a child of his age. Hui had no doubt that if he revealed the true extent of his power to Tobirama, his current rxed life woulde to an abrupt end. Tobirama wouldn¡¯t subject him to any cruel experiments, of course, but he would definitely push Hui to develop as fast as possible. And the fastest way to grow stronger in this world? Realbat. Life-and-death battles that would force Hui to hone his skills through harsh experience. That wasn¡¯t the life Hui wanted. The allure of bing a powerful figure, feared throughout the shinobi world, might seem appealing in theory. But the price for such a life? Constant danger, endless killing, and never knowing when death mighte for you. No, Hui much preferred a life of peace, bing invincible in his own time, and only stepping into the fray when it suited him. ¡°Hmm, not bad. At this rate, it won¡¯t be long before you reach the level of a Jonin,¡± Tobirama nodded approvingly. Though Hui was only six years old, his strength already matched that of a Chunin, despite some obvious shorings. Still, this kind of progress was more than enough to mark him as a genius. If his growth continued like this, within four or five years, Hui could easily reach the level of a Jonin. He¡¯d be a figure of significance in the shinobi world. The only question was whether this mysterious energy would continue to grow. How far could it go? What were its limits? ¡°Go back to your duties,¡± Tobirama instructed, turning back to the documents on his desk. ¡°Yes, Lord Second!¡± With a respectful bow, Hui left the office. As soon as he was outside, he resumed his usual routine¡ªfirst a patrol of the area, then standing guard at the entrance to the Hokage¡¯s office. Standing guard was perhaps the most monotonous of all tasks. For hours at a time, you couldn¡¯t move, couldn¡¯t speak, and had to maintain constant vignce. Most children wouldn¡¯tst a minute. Yet Hui took it all in stride, his posture unwavering, his senses sharp. Beside him, his teammate, Wind, couldn¡¯t help but marvel at Hui¡¯s focus. ¡°Light, don¡¯t you find standing guard boring?¡± Wind asked as they made their way back to the ANBU base after their shift. As Hui removed his ANBU uniform, he responded nonchntly, ¡°Boring? Maybe a little. But I find it meaningful.¡± ¡°Meaningful?¡± Wind raised an eyebrow, curious about the young boy¡¯s mindset. Hui paused for a moment, then spoke seriously, ¡°Boredomes from within. And the mind, Wind... the mind is the foundation of all strength.¡± Wind was taken aback by the depth of Hui¡¯s words. ¡°If your mind is weak, no matter how much power you possess, you''re no better than a wild beast. Such a person will be ruled by their power, and eventually, they¡¯ll be its ve. But if your mind is strong, you can control your power and use it for something meaningful¡ªlike protecting the vige, or the people you care about.¡± Hui¡¯s tone softened as he continued, ¡°The irritation and restlessness thate from standing guard¡ªthey¡¯re just more enemies for me to conquer. Oveing them is part of my growth.¡± After finishing his pre-prepared speech, Hui smiled faintly, then turned to leave, waving casually over his shoulder. ¡°Well, see you tomorrow.¡± Wind stood frozen for a moment, watching the small figure disappear into the distance. He felt a sense of awe, almost disbelief. How could someone so young speak with such maturity? He couldn¡¯t help but mutter to himself, ¡°This kid¡­ how is he only six?¡± Chapter 18: Training Hui to Become Hokage? Chapter 18: Training Hui to Be Hokage? After Mochizuki Hui said those words to Wind, he quickly returned to his daily ANBU life¡ªpatrolling in the mornings and standing guard in the afternoons. Living in a carefree and peaceful manner, Hui paid no attention to the possible ripple effects his words might have caused. What Hui didn¡¯t realize was how his remarks had stirred up quite the storm in Konoha. Three dayster, Hiruzen Sarutobi, after finishing a mission with Tsunade and the others, was heading home alone. On his way, he encountered a young boy, about eight or nine years old, sitting by theke. The boy sat on the grassy shore, staring silently at the sunset. The soft golden light of the setting sun reflected off theke, while the cool evening breeze gently tousled the boy¡¯s hair, revealing a face that was calm, yet faintly sorrowful. This scene struck a chord in Hiruzen¡¯s heart, filling him with a sudden sense of mncholy. He paused for a few moments, then walked over to the boy and sat down beside him. ¡°It''s a beautiful view,¡± Hiruzen said, his tone light, as he gazed at the setting sun. ¡°But watching it alone can feel a bit lonely. I love sunsets too. Let¡¯s enjoy it together.¡± Hiruzen assumed the boy might be a war orphan, sitting here alone with no home to return to. Thoughtfully, he didn¡¯t ask the boy why he wasn¡¯t at home, but instead offered to share the moment with him. However, the boy gave Hiruzen a peculiar look, then responded in a surprisingly mature tone: ¡°Loneliness is a feeling born from the heart. I sit here watching the sunset alone not because I am alone, but because I¡¯m learning to conquer that loneliness and master my own heart. A ninja without a strong heart will eventually be a ve to their own power. Only by mastering one¡¯s heart can a ninja truly control their strength and use it to protect the vige and those they care about. You wouldn¡¯t understand.¡± After saying this, the boy stood up, nced briefly at Hiruzen, and then turned to leave. Hiruzen was left sitting there, stunned, his mouth slightly agape as he watched the boy¡¯s figure disappear around the corner. His expression gradually became more serious as he mulled over the boy¡¯s words. ¡°The strength of the heart¡­ such profound insight. Perhaps I should also take a deeper look at my own heart, to see if it is weak or strong,¡± Hiruzen muttered to himself, a thoughtful smile creeping across his face as he finally stood and walked away. What Hiruzen didn¡¯t see was that, after disappearing from view, the boy stood watching some other children ying ninja games in the distance, his expression filled with envy. However, remembering his father¡¯s strict expectations, the boy let out a sigh and slouched off dejectedly. That night, Hiruzen found himself unable to sleep. The next day, he appeared in front of Tsunade, Orochimaru, and Jiraiya, sporting dark circles under his eyes. He gave them a rather unusual task: ¡°Understand your heart.¡± The assignment left Jiraiya thoroughly confused, prompting him to ask for rification. In response, Hiruzen recounted the encounter he had the night before, causing Tsunade and Orochimaru to fall silent. Jiraiya, however, was stillpletely lost but thought that the boy¡¯s words were even cooler than anything Hui had ever said. Feeling inspired, Jiraiya decided to start acting like a philosophical sage, copying the boy¡¯s style. And so, the influence of that phrase began to ripple through the circles of newly graduated Genin, spreading from there to the ranks of Chunin, Jonin, and eventually throughout the vige. The phrase even reached the ears of the Second Hokage, Tobirama Senju, who, curious about its origin, had his ANBU investigate. It didn¡¯t take long for the trail to lead back to Hui. Apparently, the boy¡¯s father had shared the phrase with him, a lesson the boy took to heart as he struggled to ovee his own loneliness. And as for the boy¡¯s father? He had heard it from a friend¡­ none other than Wind. Wind, of course, had no qualms about revealing that the original speaker was none other than Mochizuki Hui. Tobirama was shocked. He had already thought highly of Hui, considering him a remarkably talented and capable boy. But now, it turned out Hui was even more impressive than he¡¯d realized. At only six years old, Hui possessed not only strength but also such profound wisdom. A thought began to form in Tobirama¡¯s mind, a thought he had never entertained before. If Hui was this exceptional in strength and insight, could he also excel in other areas? Like¡­ politics? If the boy showed even a fraction of this brilliance in political matters, it was conceivable that Tobirama could groom him for something far greater¡­ Could he train this child to be Hokage? Once the idea took root, it was impossible to dismiss. Although Tobirama had always assumed his sessor woulde from among his current subordinates, it didn¡¯t hurt to n for the future. The next Hokage might be set, but the next-next Hokage? ¡°Looks like I¡¯ll need to adjust how I nurture Hui¡­¡± Tobirama murmured to himself, a n already forming in his mind. Meanwhile, Hui was blissfully unaware of the fact that Tobirama had begun to harbor aspirations of grooming him to be Hokage. Instead, he was staring at a smug Jiraiya, deep in thought. Just as Hui had returned home, he saw Jiraiya standing outside his house, staring pensively into the distance, trying hard to look like a wise old sage. Curious, Hui had asked what he was doing, only for Jiraiya to throw Hui¡¯s own words back at him in a dramatic and pompous tone. "Ah, you just wouldn¡¯t understand, would you? For someone as talented as you, it''s hard to grasp the true meaning of having a weak heart. Not everyone is as exceptional as me, after all," Jiraiya said with a haughty grin, clearly enjoying the moment. Hui¡¯s mouth twitched slightly in annoyance, and he replied coolly, ¡°You forgot to add the part about protecting the vige and the weak.¡± Jiraiya froze. ¡°Wait¡­ how did you know that was the next line? Did someone tell you this before?¡± Hui let out a small sigh, his voice tinged with mncholy. ¡°Because¡­ I was the one who said it in the first ce.¡± Silence. Jiraiya stood there, speechless, his face slowly turning red with embarrassment. Finally, without another word, he turned and walked away, muttering to himself, ¡°I don¡¯t believe it. You¡¯re not going to fool me with that¡­¡± But the moment he disappeared around the corner, his voice still echoing in the air, it was clear¡ªhe believed it. Chapter 19: The Onset of War Chapter 19: The Onset of War The next day, Mochizuki Hui resumed his usual routine of patrolling and standing guard. His life hadn''t been disrupted at all, despite the impact his previous words had had on Konoha. Although those words had caused quite a stir in the vige, only a select few knew that they had originated from Hui himself. Most people only knew that a mysterious ANBU member had said them, but the exact identity remained unclear. As a result, Hui¡¯s life remainedrgely unaffected, and the incident soon faded into the background. However, if there was anysting impact, it was that during his asional chats with Tobirama, the Second Hokage would subtly steer their conversations toward political matters. Tobirama began bringing up topics such as the conflicts within the ninja world, the tensions between the Five Great Nations, the rivalry between the Five Hidden Viges, and the future development of the vige. These topics, though significant, were introduced casually, melded into their discussions in a way that didn¡¯t seem forced. Hui noticed this change but attributed it to Tobirama¡¯s preupation with the growing tensions between the viges, which had been escting recently. While Hui didn¡¯t engage in any grand debates with Tobirama, he asionally let slip some insightful ideas that impressed the Hokage. These exchanges only strengthened Tobirama¡¯s resolve to cultivate Hui into the next-next Hokage. However, before Tobirama could fully implement his ns for Hui''s growth, an unexpected event urred¡ªone that would throw the entire vige into chaos. The First Shinobi World War had begun. (Author''s Note: In this story¡¯s setting, the First Shinobi World War began with minor skirmishes in Konoha Year 13 and fully erupted in Konoha Year 16.) After the death of the God of Shinobi, Hashirama Senju, dark clouds of war had loomed over the ninja world. The Five Great Nations had engaged in small-scale skirmishes, each testing the others¡¯ strength. This uneasy stalematested for years, as all sides were cautious, avoiding full-scale conflict. But now, the other four hidden viges could hold back no longer. They assembled their forces andunched a full-scale assault on Konoha. With the war¡¯s sudden outbreak, the entire vige of Konoha was plunged into a grim atmosphere. Gone was the vibrant energy that usually filled the streets; now, the vige was overshadowed by the looming threat of war. Hui¡¯s life, too, was deeply affected. His regr routine of patrolling and standing guard outside the Hokage¡¯s office came to an end. The man he was assigned to protect, the Second Hokage, had personally gone to the frontlines. Now, Hui and his squad¡¯s main task shifted from guarding the Hokage to patrolling the outskirts of Konoha. This was Tobirama¡¯s way of protecting Hui¡ªhe wasn¡¯t about to bring a six-year-old boy into the heart of battle. Yet it wasn¡¯t just Hui¡¯s daily life that changed; his heart also grew heavy with worry. Although the timeline of early events in Naruto was notoriously muddled, with contradictions and vague details, there was one thing Hui knew for certain. The Second Hokage, Tobirama Senju, would die during the First Shinobi World War. This knowledge weighed heavily on Hui, who hade to see Tobirama as family. He wanted to prevent this tragic oue but had no idea how to go about it. His current strength wasn¡¯t nearly enough to alter the course of such monumental events. Moreover, the timeline of the war was so fragmented that Hui had no clear understanding of when Tobirama would meet his fate. All he knew was that the Second Hokage would die while attempting to negotiate with the Land of Lightning, killed by Kinkaku and Ginkaku¡¯s elite forces. This one small piece of information was his only constion, preventing him from spiraling into a state of constant anxiety. Afterpleting his daily patrol, Hui and his team gathered at the abandoned training ground where they had first met. Due to the outbreak of war, most of the ANBU forces had apanied Tobirama to the battlefield. Only two or three squads remained in the vige to oversee its defense. Since the ANBU reported directly to the Hokage, Hui and his team were granted an unusual amount of freedom, not needing to assemble at ANBU headquarters unless called for a mission. "Just received new orders," said Bear, his voice steady. "Squad Four of Unit One will escort a supply convoy to the rear guard tomorrow morning. Assemble in the forest two kilometers outside the vige at 0700 hours. Dismissed!" "Understood!" Hui, Wind, and Lightning replied in unison. With the orders given, Bear, Wind, and Lightning used the Body Flicker Technique to disappear, leaving Hui alone at the training ground. Hui stood still for a few moments, gazing up at the darkening sky before finally turning and heading home. When he had graduated early, it had been expected that he would be sent to the battlefield. However, due to his unique status and Tobirama¡¯s protection, he had remained in the vige. But now, it seemed that his time hade. While the path from the vige to the rear guard was considered the safest route on the battlefield, this mission felt like the first step toward more dangerous assignments. Tobirama, after all, understood that the war required a faster pace for Hui¡¯s growth. Although Hui was still reluctant to face danger so soon, he knew deep down that it was inevitable. Moreover, part of him wanted to grow stronger as quickly as possible, to protect the vige that had be his home over the past six years. He cared deeply for the vige¡ªand for the people he cherished within it. With a soft sigh, Hui muttered to himself, "It seems the good days are over¡­" He straightened, a steely glint shing in his eyes. "Alright, ninja world¡ªhere Ie." Chapter 20: Enemy Attack Chapter 20: Enemy Attack The sun hung high in the sky, with cloudszily drifting by. It was a beautiful day. A dirt road cut straight through the forest, stretching into the unseen distance. Along this road, carts loaded with supplies moved slowly forward. "Sensei Aoki, we''re deep in the heart of the Land of Fire. We¡¯ve made this trip multiple times already. Isn''t it a bit much to stay this cautious?" asked a boy, no older than eleven or twelve, to the middle-aged ninja leading the convoy. Though the boy had only recently graduated from the academy, he had already transported supplies along this route several times. At first, he had been nervous, fearing danger around every bend. But after a few trips, he had grown rxed. After all, they hadn''t encountered even a single rogue ninja or bandit, let alone enemy shinobi. "This is wartime, Mantian. You must always stay alert, no matter where you are," Sensei Aoki replied firmly. "We are responsible for this convoy. It¡¯s our mission to ensure these supplies safely reach the rear guard." The boy, Mantian, sighed and muttered under his breath. His teacher always said the same thing. "Yeah, yeah, I get it. Ninja always need to stay vignt." Still, he couldn¡¯t help but roll his eyes. In his view, his teacher was being overly cautious. He nced toward the back of the convoy, where two other boys, his teammates, were keeping watch. ¡°Seriously, everyone in this squad is such a worrywart. Where¡¯s the fun in that?¡± Mantian thought as he flopped onto the supply carts, staring up at the clouds. Keeping watch from above? No way. There was no chance of anything happening here! This was the Land of Fire, after all. If enemy shinobi were to make it this far into their territory, it would mean Konoha was on the verge of copse. There was no way that was happening. Yawning, Mantian felt his eyelids grow heavy. ¡°Maybe I can sneak in a quick nap. Who¡¯s going to notice?¡± But just as he was about to drift off, a shout rang through the air. "Look out!!" Boom! A massive explosion rocked the ground, shaking the convoy violently. Mantian¡¯s heart leaped into his throat as he scrambled up, frantically looking around. The earth beneath him trembled, and the carts swayed dangerously. Before Mantian could get his bearings, he felt a sudden force pierce through the air towards him. He wanted to move, but his body froze, paralyzed with fear. ng! ng! ng! The sharp ng of metal striking metal echoed nearby. Slowly, Mantian turned his head to see several kunai and shuriken lying on the ground not far from him. Someone had just saved him by deflecting the iing projectiles. "You little brat, die!" A gruff voice roared from the ground ahead. A middle-aged man leaped from the earth, a cruel grin on his face, brandishing a kunai as he charged toward Mantian. "Run, Mantian!" It was Sensei Aoki, shouting from where he was locked inbat. But the enemy ninja had him pinned down¡ªhe couldn¡¯t break free to help. The two other boys guarding the rear were also under attack, each fending off an enemy of their own. Their squad had been ambushed. Sensei Aoki¡¯s shout snapped Mantian out of his terror-induced stupor, but his limbs still refused to move. His breath came in short gasps, and his mind went nk as he watched the enemy shinobi close in. If he couldn¡¯t act soon, he was going to die. The enemy, sensing his prey¡¯s helplessness, bared his teeth in a wild grin. He let out a savage growl as he lunged toward Mantian like a beast hunting its quarry. Suddenly, several kunai flew out from the forest, cutting through the air toward the attacking ninja. He was startled but quickly assessed that the kunai were slower than expected. If he just sped up his charge, they would miss him entirely. With a fierce burst of speed, he ducked under the first wave of kunai. Whoosh! Two more kunai came flying at him, faster and with more precision than the first set. Startled, the enemy ninja twisted his body to avoid them, but in doing so, he lost momentum. ng! ng! The sound of kunai shing with each other rang out, and the ninja felt a sharp, searing pain in his back. His eyes widened in shock. Staggering forward a few more steps, he copsed onto the ground, sliding for another meter beforeing to a stop. His body twitched, but he couldn¡¯t get up. He tried, but his strength was gone. Four kunai were embedded in his back, and they had sealed his fate. Mantian, who had been just meters away from death, gulped and looked down at the fallen ninja. His heart pounded, and his whole body trembled. Slowly, he came back to his senses. It was then that he noticed four figures had appeared on the battlefield. "ANBU?!" He couldn¡¯t help but shout in surprise when he saw their distinctive attire. "Damn it! The ANBU have caught up to us! Retreat!" one of the enemy shinobi shouted, his voiceced with panic. He turned to flee. ¡°Think you can run? In your dreams!¡± growled a deep voice¡ªit was Bear, the leader of Squad Four. The four ANBU who had appeared were none other than the members of Squad Four. The one who had killed the charging ninja with precise kunai throws was none other than Mochizuki Hui. Chapter 21: A Fate Already Decided Chapter 21: A Fate Already Decided ¡°Damn brats!¡± Hearing his captain shout for retreat, Kawaji wasted no time and immediately turned to flee. ncing back at the two kids chasing him, he cursed under his breath, but his mind raced as he calcted his next move. Kawaji and his team were members of Iwagakure''s scouting unit. After a fierce battle with Konoha''s ANBU forces on the front lines, their squads were scattered, and they had been forced to retreat. His group of five was hastily formed from the remnants of those scattered teams. Their original n had been to escape back to their own forces, but Konoha''s ANBU blocked the path, and breaking through with their current strength was impossible. Faced with imminent death, Kawaji''s captain made a bold decision. They would break out in the opposite direction. Instead of heading toward their own forces, they decided to evade Konoha''s main forces by cutting diagonally through enemy territory and into the heart of the Land of Fire. To be honest, it was a desperate gamble¡ªa suicidal one, at that. With only five members, none of them highly ranked, they had no chance of receiving reinforcements deep within enemy territory. Moreover, Konoha would never allow enemy shinobi to roam freely in their homnd. They would surely face relentless pursuit. But at that moment, it was their only option to avoid immediate death. To their surprise, despite being chased multiple times, they had managed to survive each encounter and slip away. It was almost as if fate had been on their side, allowing them to miraculously enter the Land of Fire¡¯s hearnd. Their group of five couldn¡¯t quite believe their luck. Yet they knew the danger wasn¡¯t over. If anything, they were now in even more peril. The hearnd of the Land of Fire meant every corner could hold Konoha shinobi, and there was no way they could expect reinforcements. Unless Iwagakure emerged victorious on the front lines and managed to push deep into Konoha¡¯s territory, they were entirely alone. Their captain, though, had a wild idea. Since their only hope for survivaly in Iwagakure defeating Konoha, why not do something to help that cause? It was an insane n, but the captain set his sights on Konoha''s supply lines. And so, while dodging Konoha patrols, they scouted for a route that could disrupt Konoha¡¯s operations. After much effort, they finally found one¡ªa supply convoy to the rear forces. Thus, today¡¯s ambush was set. It didn¡¯t seem logical, nor did it make sense that a ragtag group of five¡ªone jonin, three elite chunin, and one regr chunin¡ªcould achieve what even elite squads from Iwagakure couldn¡¯t. But then again, neither Kawaji nor his teammates knew that every step of their retreat had been orchestrated by none other than the Second Hokage, Tobirama Senju. From the moment Tobirama noticed their retreat, their fate had been sealed. Their escape route had been subtly guided, their discovery of Konoha¡¯s supply line arranged, and even the encounter with their foes had been predetermined. When they targeted the convoy, they had no idea that Squad Four of the ANBU, including Mochizuki Hui, had been assigned to guard it. Every move they had made led to this confrontation, all part of Tobirama¡¯s n for Mochizuki Hui¡¯s growth. Kawaji¡¯s squad was meant to die by Mochizuki Hui¡¯s hands. Though Hui was a prodigious talent, he was still a shinobi¡ªand shinobi were required to kill. The experience of taking a life was crucial for a ninja¡¯s development. Who they killed, why, and how could shape a shinobi¡¯s heart. And so, these enemy shinobi, who had attacked Konoha¡¯srades, were handpicked by Tobirama to serve as Hui¡¯s stepping stone. Of course, Kawaji and his squad were unaware of this, and so was Hui. Whoosh, whoosh! The sound of kunai slicing through the air made Kawaji¡¯s heart skip a beat. He leaped to the next tree branch just as the kunai struck the branch he had been standing on with a thunk. Landing on a higher branch, Kawaji stopped and turned around. He had witnessed the death of his teammate, the regr chunin, earlier. The skill with which the small ANBU shinobi wielded his kunai had left an indelible mark on Kawaji¡¯s mind. Though his immediate priority was to flee, he and his captain had scattered in different directions. Kawaji noticed that the tall ANBU and the chunin in the Konoha k jacket had gone after the captain. Meanwhile, the ANBU with purple hair and the ck-haired one were chasing the other two elite chunin. That meant the only ones pursuing him were this small ANBU brat and the white-haired kid. The two other young Konoha ninjas with them were irrelevant. They posed no real threat. With his escape route decided, Kawaji¡¯s thoughts shifted to a new n. His captain¡¯s bold decision to flee into enemy territory had kept them alive until now, so perhaps killing these two brats before escaping would increase his own chances of survival. "Two kids really think they can take me down? They must be tired of living!" Kawaji crouched on the tree branch, his eyes cold and murderous as he sized up his two young pursuers with a smirk. "It seems he wants to kill us before he makes his escape," remarked the white-haired boy. He was Mantian¡¯s teammate, and of the three genin, he was the only one who had managed to regain hisposure and fight back after the ambush. "Yeah¡­ Looks like he¡¯s underestimating us," Hui responded calmly. Even though this was his first real life-or-death battle, he felt an unusual sense of tranquillity. Instead of fear, his mind was clear, and his heart was calm. Perhaps Hui was one of those people¡ªa natural-born shinobi, with a strong heart capable of facing any storm. Chapter 22: The Madman’s Gambit Chapter 22: The Madman¡¯s Gambit Mochizuki Hui observed the ninja in front of him. The man looked to be around twenty-five or twenty-six, standing about 175 cm tall and weighing around 60 kilograms. Judging by his attire, he was from Iwagakure, and the disheveled, dirt-caked state of his clothing indicated that he had been on the run for some time. Based on their brief exchange earlier, Hui had already pieced together several details about his opponent. He appeared to be an elite chunin, with average taijutsu, normal strength, speed, and reaction time. His genjutsu capabilities were unknown, but given that he was from Iwagakure, there was a 90% chance he was proficient in Earth Style ninjutsu. As for his temperament, the man seemed irritable, arrogant, and overly confident. In a matter of seconds, Hui¡¯s mind had analyzed and categorized the information he had gathered. ¡°Underestimate you? You give yourself far too much credit. I haven¡¯t taken you brats seriously from the start,¡± Kawaji sneered coldly. ¡°Kids like you should be at home sucking on bottles. The world of ninjas isn¡¯t some yground.¡± His eyes shifted toward the white-haired boy, hoping to see the taunt take effect. But to his disappointment, both of the kids remained unnervingly calm,pletely unfazed by his provocations. They weren¡¯t simple children after all. Fine. If that¡¯s the case, I¡¯ll finish this quickly. Kawaji¡¯s hands moved into a sequence of hand signs, preparing to unleash a jutsu. However, Hui wasn¡¯t going to give him the chance. He swiftly threw a volley of kunai, forcing Kawaji to stop his hand signs and dodge. Meanwhile, the white-haired boy charged forward, wielding a short, white-ded sword. ng! ng! ng! Sparks flew as the white-haired boy and Kawaji exchanged rapid blows. However, it was clear that the boy was at a disadvantage, defending more than attacking. Despite this, he remainedposed, knowing that his partner wouldn¡¯t just stand idly by. Sure enough, as the white-haired boy engaged Kawaji, Hui leaped into the fray, sword in hand, joining the fight. If it had been just one of them, either the white-haired boy or Hui, facing Kawaji alone, they would have surely been outmatched. But together, they managed to hold their ground, matching Kawaji blow for blow. ng! ng! ng! The sound of shing steel echoed as the battle raged on. Kawaji¡¯s attacks grew faster and more ferocious, his eyes turning bloodshot with madness. His strikes came in a furious flurry, relentless and overwhelming. He knew the longer this dragged on, the more dangerous it would be for him. He needed to eliminate these two brats quickly. Realizing that the opportunity to use ninjutsu wasn¡¯t presenting itself, Kawaji abandoned the idea entirely, opting for brute force instead. He would rely on sheer speed and relentless attacks to overwhelm them in closebat. He fought like a madman, throwing caution to the wind. His tactic was simple: outpace them with a relentless barrage of strikes, even if it meant taking a few hits in return. This was the best way to deal with the two kids. As an elite chunin with extensivebat experience, Kawaji knew how to adapt. The two brats were relying on technique to bridge the gap between their abilities and his own. In a normal fight, it would take him a long time to wear them down. But why fight them on equal terms? He was a grown man, and they were just children. There was no need to y fair. These kids were relying on skill to make up for theirck of strength, so he would exploit his advantage in stamina and experience. After all, a child¡¯s endurance was no match for an adult¡¯s. ¡°Die, you little brats!¡± Kawaji roared, his attacks growing more frenzied. He could feel the two kids¡¯ breathing bing heavier. Their stamina was depleting fast. Both Hui and the white-haired boy quickly realized what Kawaji was trying to do. ¡°He¡¯s trying to wear us down!¡± the white-haired boy said, his face growing tense. The Iwagakure ninja wasn¡¯t particrly strong, and with the two of them working together, they could have held him off long enough for reinforcements to arrive. But his fighting style was too reckless¡ªhe was fighting as if he didn¡¯t care about his own life. Because of the difference in physical strength, Hui and the white-haired boy couldn¡¯t afford to engage him the same way. While they could only inflict minor wounds on him, a single hit from him could seriously injure them. As a result, they had to not only fight at a high intensity but also staypletely focused on defense. Things were starting to look bad. ¡°I know, we just have to hold on. Reinforcements will be here soon,¡± Hui responded, his breath quickening, and his strikes slowing just a fraction. It wasn¡¯t that Hui¡¯s stamina was failing¡ªafter all, his endurance was practically a cheat code, allowing him to keep fighting with hardly any loss of energy. No, this was all part of an act. From their exchanges so far, Hui had analyzed Kawaji¡¯s mentality. The man was impatient and overconfident, traits that could easily be exploited. If Kawaji¡¯s goal was to wear them down, Hui would let him believe he was seeding. So, when the white-haired boy hinted at retreat, Hui pretended not to understand, stubbornly continuing to hold his ground. Seeing this, the white-haired boy grew more anxious. ¡°I¡¯m almost out of stamina!¡± he shouted, trying to reinforce his hint. ¡°Hahaha, there¡¯s no point in pretending anymore, kids! You really think you can escape me? You¡¯re underestimating me!¡± Kawajiughed maniacally, his grin growing more savage. He believed he had the situationpletely under control. Chapter 23: Remember, My Name is Light! Chapter 23: Remember, My Name is Light! Crack! The sharp sound of metal breaking echoed through the forest as Kawaji¡¯s kunai finally snapped after the long, intense battle. In that instant, the tip of Kawaji¡¯s de sliced through Hui¡¯s Anbu mask, revealing his young face beneath it. ¡°So young!¡± Kawaji gasped, his initial suspicion now confirmed. Despite having an inkling about the boy¡¯s age, seeing his innocent, youthful face left Kawaji stunned. The kid was only six or seven years old, yet he had this much power. A true prodigy from Konoha! ¡°A genius from the Hidden Leaf, huh? Too bad you¡¯re going to die here today!¡± Kawaji growled with malicious certainty. In his mind, he had already won. If he had been just a fraction faster earlier, or if this brat had been a tad bit slower, he would have already finished him off. He could feel their stamina waning¡ªboth of these children were nearing exhaustion. The white-haired boy realized this too, and panic began to rise within him. His body trembled as he faced the overwhelming odds, but he couldn¡¯t flee¡ªnot without dooming Hui. Yes, the white-haired boy recognized Hui. After all, Hui was known as the most handsome boy in the academy, and this boy had graduated the same year. How could he not know of him? ¡°Run! Go get help! I¡¯ll hold him off!¡± the boy shouted with a resolute voice, making a tough decision. His words caught Hui by surprise. The white-haired boy was clearly ready to sacrifice himself to give Hui a chance to survive. ¡°You little brats, neither of you is getting out of here alive! You¡¯ll both die today!¡± Kawaji roared, his eyes gleaming with madness. Hui¡¯s expression hardened with determination. ¡°If either of us leaves, the other will die. Hold on, if we can justst until backup arrives, we¡¯ll win!¡± Of course, Hui had no intention of running away. He had a n, and the critical moment was drawing near. The white-haired boy was shaken by Hui¡¯s resolve. He realized that Hui had epted the possibility of death too and wasn¡¯t about to leave him behind. ¡°Alright then! Let¡¯s see who falls first¡ªus or him!¡± the boy shouted, steeling himself for what was toe. ¡°Let¡¯s see who¡¯s still standing by the end!¡± Kawaji¡¯s face twisted into a hideous snarl as he attacked with renewed fury, determined to end the fight as quickly as possible. Boom! Shhhh! In a split second, Hui made what appeared to be a critical mistake. He left himself wide open, and Kawaji seized the chance, delivering a powerful kick to Hui¡¯s chest. Hui flew backwards, crashing into the ground with a sickening thud, unable to rise. ¡°Hui?!¡± The white-haired boy¡¯s heart sank, blurting out Hui¡¯s true name in a moment of panic. With Hui seemingly out of the fight, Kawaji¡¯s bloodlust intensified. He threw caution to the wind andunched a relentless assault on the white-haired boy, abandoning defense entirely. Without Hui¡¯s support, the boy couldn¡¯t hold his ground for long. Kawaji¡¯s crazed onught soon overwhelmed him, sending him flying as well. Thud! Coughing up blood, Kawaji wiped his mouth and finally allowed himself a moment of relief. His chest heaved with exhaustion, but a sinister grin spread across his face. It was almost over. He just needed to finish these two kids and then he could make his escape. Hopefully, his captain could keep the rest of the Leaf Ninja at bay long enough for him to get away. ¡°Brats, it¡¯s over,¡± Kawaji sneered, picking up a discarded kunai. He strode toward Hui, whose body was curled up in pain on the ground. ¡°Damn it!¡± the white-haired boy groaned, struggling to get up but finding it impossible. He was wracked with guilt, cursing his own weakness for not being able to protect the six-year-old prodigy. Even though he was only twelve himself. ¡°Hui, huh? A true genius!¡± Kawaji chuckled darkly. ¡°If you had more time, you¡¯d have grown into a powerful ninja. But unfortunately for you, you met me today. This is your fate, and it all ends here.¡± As Kawaji closed the distance, stopping just two meters from Hui, he raised his kunai, preparing to deliver the final blow. But at that precise moment, Hui moved. He had been waiting for this¡ªthe perfect distance. He had been conserving his energy, and now he was ready. A brilliant silver light shed. It looked like the curve of a new moon or the streak of a shooting star. The light shot out from Hui¡¯s sword, straight into Kawaji¡¯s body. ¡°Yes, it¡¯s over,¡± Hui said calmly as he rose from the ground. ¡°You¡­¡± Kawaji tried to speak, but the words wouldn¡¯te. Blood spurted from his throat. The light had cut through his neck, severing his throatpletely. Thud! Kawaji¡¯s body copsed to the ground, his eyes wide open in disbelief. Even in death, his expression was frozen in bitter resentment. He had evaded the elite forces of Konoha time and time again, only to be struck down by two kids. It was an end he could never have imagined. ¡°Whew, it¡¯s finally over. Are you alright?¡± Hui asked, breathing a deep sigh of relief. He walked over to the white-haired boy, helping him to his feet. The boy looked at Hui, staring at his delicate, youthful face. Slowly, a smile crept across his lips. ¡°Not bad, Hui. Your acting was wless.¡± Finally understanding Hui¡¯s strategy, the boy couldn¡¯t help but feel a deep admiration for him. Hui simply smiled without saying a word. After helping the boy to his feet, he walked over and picked up his broken mask. Then, he turned back to the white-haired boy, shing him a wide grin. ¡°Even if you recognize an Anbu member during a mission, you¡¯re not supposed to call out their real name.¡± ¡°If we meet again, remember¡ªI go by Light.¡± As he spoke, a ray of sunlight broke through the clouds, streaming through the leaves and casting a soft glow on Hui¡¯s face. It was a beautiful scene. The white-haired boy gazed at the image before him, imprinting it in his memory. As Hui turned and leaped into the trees, ready to leave, the boy called out loudly, ¡°Light!¡± Hui paused mid-jump, turning his head to look back with a questioning expression. Below, the white-haired boy smiled brightly and shouted, ¡°I¡¯m Sakumo Hatake! It¡¯s been a pleasure to meet you!¡± Hui¡¯s lips curved into a grin. Landing on a branch, he gave one final nod before continuing his way into the forest, leaving only two words behind in the air. ¡°Got it.¡± Chapter 24: Rogue Ninja Chapter 24: Rogue Ninja That very day, the detailed report of the skirmish hadnded on Tobirama Senju''s desk. As he reviewed the information, an unusual smile tugged at his lips. Hui hadn¡¯t disappointed him. During the battle, Hui demonstrated the qualities a top-tier ninja should possess. However, Tobirama knew it wasn¡¯t enough. After some contemtion, he turned to the Anbu squad leader beside him. "Send Squad Four to the Heichuan Line. The mission... protect the supply convoy." "Yes, sir!" the squad leader responded without hesitation. The Heichuan Line was one of the logistical routes that connected Konoha to the Mist Vige''s battlefield. Located within the Fire Country, it was a vital route leading toward the nation''s borders. This area was already fraught with danger. Transporting supplies here often meant running the risk of encountering rogue ninjas or enemy vige scouts. But this route wasn¡¯t excessively dangerous¡ªit was still deep within the Land of Fire¡¯s borders. Even if they encountered enemies, they wouldn¡¯t facerge groups¡ªmost likely just small scouting squads. More frequently, the danger woulde from rogue ninjas, and wandering ouws scraping by in the war-tornnds. It was the perfect ce for Hui''s next step of growth. When Hui received this mission, he wasn¡¯t surprised in the slightest. As he had expected, afterpleting the first mission where danger was present, a more dangerous task had arrived shortly after. He had already mentally prepared himself for it. Unlike the weather in the area where Sakumo Hatake and the others were stationed, the Heichuan Line was frequently gloomy and misty. The skies were often overcast, casting a grey pall over everything and giving thend an oppressive atmosphere. The constant dampness seemed to seep into one''s soul, bringing a sense of unease and depression. Hui didn¡¯t particrly like this kind of weather. But as a ninja, he worked hard to adapt, turning the negative emotions brought on by this environment into another form of mental training. On the third day of their mission, escorting the supply convoy silently as they moved along the route, Hui suddenly stopped in his tracks. Bear, who was apanying him on this side of the convoy, also halted. "What is it?" "Two o''clock direction, around five hundred meters out. Six of them. One Ch¨±nin, five Genin," Hui said quietly, his senses tingling with the presence of chakra. Hui''s sensory ability allowed him to detect chakra signatures, and he had just picked up the presence of six enemies in the distance. Bear nodded, then gestured to Wind and Lightning on the other side of the convoy. Once they gathered, Bear repeated Hui''s findings before directing Hui to lead the way. The four of them moved swiftly and silently toward the indicated direction. When they arrived, Hui¡¯s sharp eyes quickly found the six figures hidden within the forest. From their attire, there were no visible insignias to indicate they were from any particr vige. These were likely rogue ninjas, and the odds were high. Their bodies were thin and malnourished, their clothing mismatched and tattered, giving the impression that they had been wandering like this for a long time. Moreover, their ambush techniquecked the precision and coordination typical of thevige-trained ninjas. Rogue ninjas often had a rougher, more desperate approach. Typically, vige ninjas would take up ideal positions for ambushes, carefully considering both attack and escape routes. But these six had all clustered together in a small area, all on one side of the road. Worse, they were chatting quietly among themselves when they should¡¯ve been focused on the approaching target. "Are we really going to attack Konoha¡¯s supply convoy, Kimura? We¡¯ll get killed doing this!" one of the ninjas, dark-skinned and scrawny, spoke in a trembling voice. "I know we can¡¯t afford to cross Konoha," Kimura, the apparent leader, responded in a gruff voiceced with frustration. "But if we don¡¯t do something, we¡¯re going to starve to death anyway!" The wars had ravaged thend, and the Hidden Mist Vige wasn¡¯t known for leaving anything behind when they invaded. They piged all avable resources, leaving civilians and weaker rogue ninjas without food or supplies. These six, clearly of weak standing, had no choice but to look toward Konoha''s convoys as theirst hope for survival. The irony wasn''t lost on Hui and his team. Konoha had spared these rogue ninjas, not plundering their meager resources, but now, driven by desperation, they had be the targets of these same rogues. "Kimura¡¯s right. If we don¡¯t act now, we¡¯re done for," the dark-skinned rogue fell silent, unable to argue with the grim truth. Bear¡¯s eyes glinted coldly as he listened to the conversation below. He signaled to Hui, Wind, and Lightning with a simple gesture¡ªeliminate them. Without a word, the four of them vanished, blending into the shadows, preparing to strike. For the rogue ninjas, this would be thest mistake they ever made. Chapter 25: Growing Accustomed to Killing Chapter 25: Growing ustomed to Killing Six rogue ninjas¡ªone Ch¨±nin and five Genin. Against such opponents, Squad Four made short work of them. The battle didn¡¯t even require tactics. Within mere seconds, the six rogue ninjas were dead. They hadn¡¯t even managed to fight back. In the forest, six bodiesy piled on top of each other, surrounded by the four Anbu members. "They really didn¡¯t know their ce," Bear muttered coldly. With a series of hand seals, he used an Earth Release jutsu to bury the six bodies. "Let¡¯s continue with the mission," he ordered. The other three members, Wind and Lightning included, quickly dispersed using Body Flicker, vanishing into the trees. Hui, however, lingered for a few moments, standing silently before the fresh mound of dirt. After a few seconds of reflection, he finally turned and left. Six people, two of whom had died by his hand, felled by his shuriken. It had been effortless. There was no need for borate tactics or even swordy. No need for a drawn-out battle. All it had taken was the throw of a few shuriken to snuff out their lives. The six rogue ninjas had died quietly, alone in the forest. Other than Hui and his squad, no one would ever know they had died. And perhaps no one would care. In that moment, Hui realized just how cheap the lives of the weak were. So fragile. So insignificant. The war had intensified. Mist, Rock, Cloud, and Sand¡ªfour major ninja viges had mobilizedrge forces into the Land of Fire, all aiming for Konoha. Under the leadership of the Second Hokage, Tobirama Senju, Konoha fought back against thebined might of the four viges, managing to hold the battle lines at the borders of the Land of Fire. But Konoha was ultimately outnumbered. The war was gruelling, and many shinobi lost their lives¡ªincluding the parents of Orochimaru. The frontline slowly inched closer to Konoha, pushing deeper into the Land of Fire, albeit at a painstakingly slow pace. Fortunately, the four ninja viges were not fully united in their efforts. They were each fighting for their own gain, and their conflicting interests led to internal strife and shes. Additionally, many smaller countries and minor ninja viges were either dragged into the war or forced to join, making the conflict even more chaotic. In the midst of this chaos, the Heichuan Line became increasingly dangerous. Numerous rogue ninjas and enemy scout teams turned their eyes toward this route, seeking to prey on Konoha¡¯s supply lines. sh! The sound of a de slicing through flesh echoed as Hui''s sword cut cleanly across an enemy¡¯s throat. The rogue ninja¡¯s eyes filled with disbelief and unwillingness before Hui moved on to his next target. Months had passed, and Hui had grown ustomed to the act of killing. By now, the number of rogue and enemy scouts who had fallen by his hand had surpassed thirty. Most of his victims had been rogue ninjas¡ªmany of them hired by small viges to defend their meager supplies. But when the battlefield shifted, a unit from Iwagakure entered the Heichuan Line, putting Konoha under tremendous pressure. Konoha was forced to pull back certain defensive positions. As a result, many small viges, once shielded by Konoha¡¯s forces, were left exposed to the predatory forces of the Mist and Rock Viges. They were looted and ravaged. This left the rogue ninjas, even those with decent skills, with nowhere to go. Their survival was severelypromised. Desperate, they sought to escape deeper into the Land of Fire. But in times of war, Konoha couldn¡¯t allowrge numbers of rogue ninjas to infiltrate the heart of the country. And leaving the Land of Fire meant crossing dangerous warzones, where being caught by enemy ninjas meant certain death. In such dire circumstances, there was only one option left for these rogue ninjas: survive by preying on Konoha¡¯s supply lines. sh! The sharp sound of steel slicing through flesh rang out again as Hui¡¯s de imed the life of thest enemy. His sword returned to its scabbard, his expression beneath the mask calm and indifferent, as if he hadn¡¯t just killed a man, but merely dispatched a wild animal. "Nicely done, Light. Your swordsmanship is improving," Wind said as he approached from another part of the forest, his gaze falling on the corpse at Hui¡¯s feet. "It seems like there are more enemiestely, but they''re all just rogue ninjas. No real challenge," Lightningmented, his tone casual, even dismissive. Hearing this, Bear, who had just leapt down from a nearby tree, smacked Lightning on the back of the head. "You idiot, do you even know what you¡¯re saying? If the enemies here were squads of enemy vige scouts, things would be far worse! You should be thankful it¡¯s only rogue ninjas!" Bear scolded, his voice gruff. "That¡¯s not what I meant!" Lightning protested, rubbing the back of his head. "Besides, we¡¯re supposed to be in the Anbu, right? The Special Assassination and Tactical Squad! Look at the other squads¡ªthey''re all on the frontlines, making a name for themselves! Meanwhile, what do we do? Escort supply convoys! I¡¯m starting to wonder if we¡¯re even in the Anbu at all!" Lightning had always been direct, speaking his mind openly. His frustrations had been building for months, and now, hearing of the glory other Anbu squads had earned on the frontlines, his dissatisfaction had reached a peak. Bear and Wind exchanged a subtle nce before both shifted their gaze toward Hui. By now, they knew the reason their squad was given such special assignments. It was because of him. "Listen, if the Hokage gave us these missions, he must have had a reason. What¡¯s the matter, Lightning? Are you questioning the Hokage¡¯s judgment?" Wind teased, his tone yful, but his words carried weight. Lightning stiffened under his mask, his attitude shifting. The Second Hokage, Tobirama Senju, was his idol. The whole reason he had joined the Anbu was because of his admiration for the Hokage. After all, he wasn¡¯t an orphan, and with his blunt personality, he had initially been rejected by the Anbu. Had it not been for him pestering his father and his n to pull strings, he would have never made it in. "Hey, hey! That¡¯s not fair, Wind! I would never question the Hokage! You know he¡¯s the person I respect most!" Lightning protested, his voice rising in panic. Bear, Wind, and Hui couldn¡¯t help but chuckle at his reaction. Though the mission on the Heichuan Line had been mentally exhausting, Lightning¡¯s outbursts always provided some much-needed levity for the team. Chapter 26: Warmth, Then Shock Chapter 26: Warmth, Then Shock ¡°Ugh, so annoying!¡± Lightning grumbled, his voice full of frustration as he reacted to theughter of his teammates. But his words only made themugh even harder. ¡°Alright, enough. Let''s clean up the battlefield,¡± Bear eventually ordered, bringing theirughter to an end. The four Anbu members swiftly and skillfully destroyed or buried the bodies of the rogue ninjas they had just killed. Afterward, they set new traps in the surrounding forest, resetting the area for potential threats. As night fell, the weather remained gloomy. The sky was void of the moon and stars, shrouded in a nket of oppressive darkness, like an ink-ck abyss. The ever-present mist and rain in the area only deepened the sense of suffocating bleakness, making the entire world seem swallowed by shadow, with no trace of light in sight. The four Anbu members¡ªBear, Wind, Lightning, and Hui¡ªgathered in a damp cave for the night, taking time to rest and prepare for the next day¡¯s mission. A small campfire burned in the center, casting faint warmth and dim light that barely illuminated their surroundings. As Anbu, they were trained to operate in the shadows. Lighting a fire outdoors was risky, as it could expose their position. Usually, they relied on their uniforms to stay warm and ate tasteless ration bars or soldier pills when they needed energy. But tonight, they made an exception. The constant dampness of the environment had seeped into their bones, and the thick mist outside meant the light wouldn¡¯t travel far. Plus¡­ tonight was a special asion. ¡°Today¡¯s New Year¡¯s Eve,¡± Lightning said, tossing another piece of wood onto the fire, his voice distant as he stared into the mes. He was clearly lost in thought¡ªhomesick, perhaps. Unlike Bear, Wind, and Hui, Lightning had afamily. He had a n. His life circumstances were not suited for an Anbu, yet here he was. Hui heard Lightning¡¯s words and also drifted into his thoughts. While he had no family in this world, the image of a small figure appeared in his mind. I wonder how Tsunade is doing. Is she asleep yet? Does she miss me? His mind wandered, thinking of the people who had be his family here¡ªSecond Hokage Tobirama Senju, Uzumaki Mito, and the other members of the Senju n. ¡°Time really flies. Hard to believe it¡¯s already been seventeen years since Konoha was founded,¡± Bear mused, his voice thick with nostalgia. At over forty years old, he was one of Konoha¡¯s original shinobi and civilians. Wind chuckled softly, his lips curving into a faint smile as though some forgotten memory had resurfaced. Despite living a solitary life without attachments, even the coldest and most isted people had a soft spot buried deep within. ¡°Such an important day, and here we are, suffering in this damp cave, without even a decent meal to enjoy,¡± Lightning grumbled, clearly bitter about the situation. ¡°Damn this war. I wish it would just end already!¡± Lightning¡¯s frustration boiled over, making it clear he was itching to get back to the frontlines, fight, and end the war so he could return home to Konoha. ¡°It¡¯ll end,¡± Hui said with a soft smile. ¡°We just have to trust the Hokage and all of ourrades in the vige. Besides, the reason we¡¯re here, enduring all of this, is so that the people back home can sit down and enjoy their dinners in peace.¡± As a transmigrator who knew the events of this world, Hui was confident in Konoha¡¯s eventual victory in the Ninja World Wars. The vige wouldn¡¯t lose. ¡°You really live up to your name, Light. Always so understanding,¡± Bear remarked, admiration evident in his voice. Initially skeptical of Hui due to his young age, Bear had quicklye to respect him. He saw Konoha¡¯s future in the boy, which made him more than willing to stay on the Heichuan Line rather than requesting a transfer to the frontlines. ¡°I believe in the Hokage too!¡± Lightning eagerly chimed in. He was a diehard fan of the Second Hokage¡ªTobirama Senju. Suddenly, Bear turned to Hui with a curious expression. ¡°Light, what¡¯s your goal for the future?¡± ¡°My goal?¡± Hui blinked, surprised by the question. He paused for a moment to think before answering. ¡°I guess... my goal is to protect the people I care about.¡± ¡°A noble goal,¡± Bear nodded thoughtfully. Then, after a brief moment of silence, he added, ¡°Light, have you ever thought about bing Hokage?¡± Hui, Lightning, and Wind all froze at the unexpected question. ¡°Hokage? I¡¯m only six years old, Captain. I¡¯ll be seven soon, but that¡¯s still way too far from bing Hokage!¡± Hui replied, shaking his head in disbelief. Bing Hokage was something that had never even crossed his mind. Not to mention, the mere thought of being buried under stacks of paperwork like the Hokages he had seen made his scalp tingle with dread. The position was far from appealing. Bearughed heartily. ¡°I was just asking about your long-term goals, not suggesting you be Hokage right now! And besides, it¡¯s not up to me who bes Hokage anyway. If it were, I¡¯d pick¡­ Lightning! He¡¯s always going on about bing Hokage.¡± Lightning puffed out his chest dramatically, sitting up straight. ¡°If I were Hokage, no worries! Bear, you¡¯d be the head of the Anbu. Wind, you¡¯d be my deputy. And Light... well, I¡¯d graciously make you the captain of Squad One.¡± ¡°Get out of here! If you became Hokage, Konoha would be doomed!¡± Wind scoffed, rolling his eyes. The group burst intoughter again, their teasing and banter bringing a sense of warmth to the cold, damp cave. Despite the war, despite being away from home, their camaraderie provided a sliver offort on this special night. This was what it meant to haverades. But then, in the midst of the lighthearted atmosphere, Hui¡¯s expression suddenly changed. His eyes widened, and his body tensed. He sucked in a sharp breath, his voice low and urgent. ¡°At the entrance of the cave, ten o¡¯clock direction. Three hundred meters away... three J¨­nin... and twenty-four Ch¨±nin.¡± His words hit the group like a thunderp. All at once, the warmth in the cave evaporated, reced by a chilling, suffocating tension. Their eyes filled with shock. Chapter 27: Escape! A Choice Chapter 27: Escape! A Choice All four of them were instantly struck with panic. Without a second''s hesitation, Bear swiftly extinguished the fire, plunging the cave into darkness. "It must be an enemy scout squad. I didn¡¯t expect them to get this deep into the area," Bear muttered, already trying to devise a n. But before he could say more, Hui¡¯s voice cut through the ckness. "They¡¯ve noticed us¡ªthey¡¯reing this way!" ¡°Damn it, that means they¡¯ve got a sensor ninja on their side!¡± Lightning growled, turning to Bear. ¡°Captain, what do we do?¡± ¡°Run!¡± Bearmanded without hesitation. There was no chance of winning against an enemy force consisting of three J¨­nin and twenty-four Ch¨±nin. Staying to fight would mean certain death. Immediately, the four of them bolted out of the cave, sprinting toward the Konoha frontlines as fast as they could. Meanwhile, the enemy sensor ninja reported back to their squad. "Captain, the three chakra signatures we detected¡ªthey¡¯ve started moving fast, heading towards the Konoha base." One of the J¨­nin, upon hearing this, quickly pieced together what was happening. "So they¡¯re Konoha ninjas, not just some wandering rogues. And there¡¯s a sensor among them, too." His eyes narrowed with resolve. ¡°We can¡¯t let them escape. If they get away and alert their forces, our whole mission could be ruined!¡± he barked, immediately giving the order to pursue. This enemy squad was from Kirigakure, a scout team carrying out a critical mission. Three kilometers behind them, arger force of four to five hundred ninjas was waiting. The strategy was to take advantage of the heavy fog andunch a nighttime assault on Konoha¡¯s frontline camp. While the main force attacked from the front, this scout team was to lead a group for a surprise rear assault, catching Konoha in a pincer movement. The n was set for tonight, and failure was not an option. The scout team had initially mistaken Hui¡¯s group for some wandering ninjas and nned to capture them for information. But realizing they were Konoha shinobi, the stakes had risen dramatically. Thunder cracked through the night sky, lightning streaking across the dark clouds. Soon, raindrops began to fall, drenching the ground and trees, making everything slick and treacherous. ¡°Captain, they¡¯re now only 350 meters behind us!¡± Hui warned as he ran, his voice tense. His clothes were already soaking wet from the rain, which made running even more difficult. ¡°Damn this fog! I can¡¯t see the road ahead at all!¡± Lightning muttered in frustration. They had started fleeing when the enemy was about 300 meters away. They¡¯d managed to put another 100 meters between themselves before the enemy began their pursuit. Now, though, the gap had shrunk by 150 meters. Under normal circumstances, they wouldn¡¯t have been caught up so quickly, but tonight was different. The thick fog and heavy rain had slowed them down significantly. Hui¡¯s enhanced vision allowed him to see more clearly than the others, but it didn¡¯t matter if he could see¡ªthe rest of the team couldn¡¯t. The Kirigakure ninjas, however, thrived in these conditions. Raised in constant mist and rain, they were ustomed to fighting in such environments and could even move faster here than usual. ¡°This isn¡¯t working,¡± Bear said, his voice calm but firm. ¡°We need to split up. Wind, head towards the frontline camp. Lightning, go towards Heichuan Lake. Hui, you head back towards the vige.¡± Hui¡¯s heart tightened at the order. ¡°What about you, Captain?¡± Wind asked, already suspecting what Bear¡¯s answer would be. ¡°I have my own n. Now, split up¡ªthis is an order,¡± Bearmanded, his voice hardening. ¡°You¡¯re nning to stay behind and buy time, aren¡¯t you?¡± Wind¡¯s voice rose in anger, having realized Bear¡¯s intentions. Wind¡¯s memories shed back to a past mission, where his former captain had said the same words. That time, Wind had survived, but his captain never returned. ¡°Damn it, Captain! We¡¯re a team! How could we abandon you to hold them off by yourself?¡± Lightning shouted, his voice filled with frustration and anger. Hui also quickly understood why Bear had ordered him to head toward Konoha. It was the farthest destination, and by sending him in that direction, Bear knew the enemy would prioritize chasing after himself¡ªthe one with the most critical information to deliver, and the strongest. ¡°Captain, it¡¯s not that desperate yet! We still have a chance to escape together,¡± Hui urged. Logically, he knew Bear¡¯s n was their best shot at survival, but emotionally, he couldn¡¯t ept it. ¡°Hui, how far are they now?¡± Bear asked, his tone making it clear he already knew the answer. After a brief pause, Hui responded quietly, ¡°Three hundred meters.¡± The weight of that distance hit them all like a punch to the gut. At this pace, the enemy would catch up soon. ¡°Captain, you¡¯re faster and stronger than I am. I¡¯ll stay behind, you head for the frontline camp!¡± Wind shouted suddenly,ing to a stop. Lightning split the sky, illuminating the area with a bright, white sh. Bear, Lightning, and Hui all saw Wind standing still, resolute. ¡°Wind?!¡± The three of them skidded to a halt, but Wind¡¯s voice cut through the rain and thunder. ¡°This is the only way! Do you want all of us to die here? Now go, get help!¡± Wind roared, his voice trembling with emotion. His words hit them hard. ¡°Move!!¡± Bear bellowed, turning and running forward again. He wasn¡¯t heartless, nor was he running away out of fear. He had been the first to suggest staying behind, after all. But he knew Wind was right. The longer they stayed, the more danger they were all in. Reluctantly, Lightning and Hui followed Bear, sprinting into the night. As they ran, Hui cast one final nce over his shoulder. In the dim light of the storm, he saw Wind frantically setting up traps¡ªtraps that wouldn¡¯t stop the enemy for long, but might buy them a few extra seconds. Gritting his teeth, Hui pushed himself to run even faster, the rain soaking him to the bone. Raindrops streamed down his face, mingling with something else. Tears. Both rain and tears slipped down his cheeks, unnoticed under his Anbu mask, as he pressed forward into the night. join my patreon for 30+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 28: Kaze Chapter 28: Kaze As rain poured down relentlessly, Wind hastily set up a crude trap, then paused, standing alone in the downpour, his sword in hand. He removed his Anbu mask, revealing his true face. It was the face of a handsome young man, about twenty-five or twenty-six years old, with an expression of utter calm. His real name was Fujita Kaz¨¦. Kaz¨¦ had been an orphan since he was five, when his parents had died. Wandering aimlessly, he eventually made his way to the Land of Fire, where he met a man who took him in. Together, they joined the newly founded vige of Konoha, and Kaz¨¦ became a ninja. That man had been his previous captain. More than just a superior, he had been like a father to Kaz¨¦. "Six years ago, you stayed behind to buy me time to escape," Kaz¨¦ muttered under his breath, the rain mixing with his voice. "And now, six yearster, I¡¯ve made the same choice." His eyes hardened, filled with resolve. The enemy was closing in. Whoosh, whoosh, whoosh! Kirigakure¡¯s ninjas spotted him standing in the rain, and instinctively halted. ¡°A Konoha Anbu!¡± one of them eximed, his voice tinged with rm as lightning briefly illuminated Kaz¨¦¡¯s silhouette, confirming his identity. The Konoha Anbu¡ªthe elite assassination and tactical squad¡ªwas renowned in the ongoing war. These elite soldiers thrived in darkness, striking with lethal precision when enemies least expected it, like venomous serpents or merciless hunters. Many of Kirigakure¡¯s ns had been foiled by them, and many high-ranking officers had fallen victim to their silent strikes. The Anbu had earned a fearsome reputation, bing a nightmare for enemy shinobi. Even Kirigakure¡¯s warmanders had been so impressed that they spoke of creating their own version of the Anbu after the war ended. Facing a lone Anbu warrior in the midst of a storm, the Kirigakure ninjas hesitated. ¡°He¡¯s just one Anbu!¡± the J¨­nin leading the group shouted, though his heart sank. This was no ordinary enemy. For him to stand alone here, blocking their path, surely meant he had some kind of n or backup. But then the sensor ninja moved closer to him. ¡°Captain, he¡¯s alone. He¡¯s just trying to buy time!¡± The J¨­nin¡¯s expression shifted to one of grim realization. Kaz¨¦, hearing this, let out a loud, mockingugh. ¡°So you¡¯ve finally figured it out? A pack of cowards, terrified of a single man!¡± The Kirigakure ninjas, already on edge, now bristled with rage at his taunts. "Kill him!" "Don¡¯t let him escape!" "That bastard!!" With a united roar, twenty-seven shinobi unleashed a storm of kunai and shuriken, raining down upon Kaz¨¦ as if the very sky itself were attacking. ng, ng, ng! Kaz¨¦ swung his sword in rapid arcs, parrying what he could. But with so many projectiles flying toward him, he could only deflect the most deadly strikes. Despite his efforts, several kunai found their mark, slicing through his skin, staining his clothes with blood. ¡°Die!!!¡± one of the enemy ninjas screamed as the hail of projectiles ceased, and they all charged at Kaz¨¦ in unison. Kaz¨¦¡¯s lips curled into a snarl, his voice a beastly roar as he threw himself into the fray. Sword in hand, he rushed forward to meet the twenty-seven ninja head-on. Boom! Thunder rumbled overhead, casting jagged shes of light across the battlefield. And in the midst of the storm, in the rain-soaked forest, one man charged alone against an overwhelming force, his de glinting in the brief shes of lightning. Shluck! Kaz¨¦¡¯s sword pierced the chest of one of the enemy ninjas. But in the same moment, his own body was pierced by countless kunai, and his throat was shed open by the lead J¨­nin¡¯s de. He paid no mind to his defence as he had thrown everything into his attack, intending to take down as many as he could before his inevitable death. His body faltered, and Kaz¨¦ crumpled to the ground. The J¨­nin leader spat on the ground, barking out orders, ¡°Keep moving! Don¡¯t let them escape!¡± None of the Kirigakure ninjas bothered to finish off Kaz¨¦. The wounds he had sustained were clearly fatal, and they knew he would die soon. They pushed forward, now slightly dyed. The few seconds Kaz¨¦ had bought had allowed hisrades to widen the gap, but it wouldn¡¯t be long before the chase resumed. However, just as one of the pursuing Ch¨±nin stepped forward, he tripped a wire from Kaz¨¦¡¯s hastily set trap. Several shuriken shot down from the trees, embedding themselves in his body. ¡°Arghhhh!¡± he screamed, copsing in agony. The J¨­nin leader¡¯s face twisted in frustration, but he could only shout, ¡°Damn it! Keep moving!¡± They left the injured man behind, continuing their pursuit with grim determination. Lying on the ground, Kaz¨¦ saw the trap seed in slowing the enemy, if only for a moment. His vision grew hazy, but a faint smile tugged at his lips. His mouth opened as if to speak, but no sound emerged. Blood pooled around him, seeping into the rainwater and slowly spreading outward, turning the earth beneath him red, like a blooming crimson flower. As the rain poured down, Kaz¨¦¡¯s bodyy still. His breathing slowed, and the world around him began to fade. In his mind, shes of memory passed before him¡ªimages of Bear, Lightning, and Hui, and of friends andrades back in the vige. Finally, he saw the face of his former captain. Boom! A crack of thunder echoed through the storm as the lightning illuminated the scene onest time. And there, in a pool of rain and blood, a young Anbu warrior took his final breath. The wind hade to a halt. join my patreon for 30+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 29: Bear Chapter 29: Bear Boom! Thunder rumbled across the sky as rain poured harder and harder. Hui and Lightning were still running with all their might, unwilling to let Wind¡¯s sacrifice be in vain. Bear had already split off from them, heading in the direction of the Konoha forces'' camp. His route would surely draw more of the enemy away from them. Before they parted ways, Bear had ordered Hui and Lightning to split up as well¡ªLightning heading toward Heichuan Lake, while Hui was to head toward the vige. Hui had agreed, but not fully. After running about twenty meters, he looped around to reunite with Lightning. He had already watched Wind stay behind to cover their retreat, and he wasn¡¯t about to let Bear and Lightning die the same way. But Bear had made his decision, and he would never allow Hui to flee with him, which is why Hui had returned to Lightning''s side. Though the situation was dire, Hui was determined to get Lightning out of this alive. "Light?! Why are you back?!" Lightning shouted, shocked and confused. "Save your breath, conserve your energy, and follow me!" Hui replied, not bothering to exin. He surged ahead, clearing the path a few meters in front of Lightning. Thanks to his extraordinary vision, Hui could see clearly even in the dark, rainy night. Lightning, though puzzled, didn¡¯t ask more questions and instead focused on keeping pace with Hui. On the other side, the Mist Vige scouts had split into two groups. One group of two Jonin and sixteen Chunin was pursuing Bear, who was heading toward the Konoha forces¡¯ camp. The other group, led by one Jonin and eight Chunin, was chasing after Hui and Lightning. The Mist Vige''s sensor ninja had gone after Bear, as the ninja heading toward the Konoha forces¡¯ camp posed a more immediate threat than those running toward the vige. Boom! Thunder echoed again, shing in the rainy mist as Bear dashed through the forest. As master of taijutsu, Bear''s physical stamina far surpassed that of an average ninja. Even though the rain obscured the path, he charged forward at full speed, crashing through the foliage without hesitation. He had no sensory abilities and couldn¡¯t gauge how many enemies were behind him or how far they were, so he just kept running, pushing himself to the limit. Truthfully, Bear wasn¡¯t concerned about his own safety. As a member of the Anbu, he had long epted death as part of his life. What he was worried about was Lightning¡ªand more importantly, Hui. He saw the future of the vige in Hui. Hui¡¯s codename, "Light", was fitting. To Bear, Hui was a light capable of illuminating the path forward for Konoha. So, if sacrificing himself could ensure Hui¡¯s survival, Bear would do so without hesitation. ¡°You have to live, Hui!¡± Bear muttered to himself, no longer thinking of Hui as just a codename, but as a person¡ªHui, the future of the vige. Despite his imposing appearance, Bear was a man with a sensitive heart. From a few subtle hints, he had pieced together Hui¡¯s true identity. Ssh! Ssh! Ssh! The sound of feet sshing through puddles reached Bear''s ears. The enemy was getting closer. Though his wild dash had increased his speed, it also left a clear trail for his pursuers to follow, making it easier for them to catch up. With a quick nce back, Bear first saw nothing but darkness. But as a sh of lightning illuminated the sky, he caught a glimpse of the enemies closing in on him. The Mist Vige ninjas had also spotted him. Whoosh! Whoosh! Whoosh! Several kunai and shuriken were hurled at him without hesitation. "Earth Release: Earth Wall!" Bear swiftly formed hand seals while running, then abruptly stopped, mming his hands into the ground. A tall earthen wall erupted from the ground a few meters in front of him. "Watch out!" The Mist ninjas shouted warnings as they quickly reacted, some leaping over the wall while others nked around it. "Earth Release: Earth Spears!" As the Mist ninjas soared over the wall, spikes of earth shot up from the wall, impaling one of the enemy ninjas, who let out a scream of pain. "You¡¯re courting death!" By this time, the remaining Mist ninjas, especially the two Jonin leading the charge, had reached Bear. Without hesitation, Bear pulled out a kunai and charged at them. From the beginning, he had never intended to flee. He had already epted his fate. ng! ng! ng! Kunai shed violently, sparks flying in the rain. Shing! The sound of flesh being sliced open was faint amidst the downpour and the sh of weapons, but it was unmistakable. Bear¡¯s body was riddled with wounds, blood seeping from the gashes. As a Special Jonin with exceptional taijutsu skills, Bear was strong¡ªbut his opponents were two fully-fledged Jonin. The surrounding Chunin had encircled them but refrained from joining the battle, knowing that they would only be a hindrance in such a high-level fight. Shing! Another deep cut opened on Bear¡¯s body, yet his face, hidden beneath his mask, remained expressionless. He fought ferociously, using every ounce of his strength and ignoring the mounting injuries on his body. This was the battle of a cornered beast. Death was the only oue awaiting him. But for someone who had already embraced death, there was no fear¡ªonly the resolve to give everything he had. Unfortunately, the gap in strength was simply too vast to ovee with sheer will. As time passed, Bear¡¯s wounds increased. His strength ebbed away, his movements slowed, and his breathing becamebored. His pale face was a clear sign of his body¡¯s exhaustion. Boom! Boom! Thunder roared, the sky filled with shing white light as rain cascaded down in torrents. Bear fought on, even as his body teetered on the edge of copse. His sole purpose was to hold the enemy back for as long as possible. The longer he could keep them here, the higher the chance that Hui and Lightning would survive. The two Mist Jonin had already grown less concerned. As long as they could take down this Anbu, the other target was of little importance. Even if the other ninja managed to escape and deliver a message to Konoha, it would be toote to disrupt their n. By the time the information reached Konoha and was ryed to the frontline, their ambush would already beplete. Shing! At that moment, Bear realized his strength was nearly depleted. Knowing he couldn¡¯t hold out much longer, he made a desperate move¡ªhe deliberately allowed one Jonin¡¯s kunai to pierce his body. In that brief, unexpected moment, Bear delivered his final blow, shattering the enemy¡¯s throat with a punch. But the price was his own life, as the other Jonin plunged a kunai deep into his heart. Gurgle! Blood gushed from Bear¡¯s mouth as he slowly fell to the ground. It was worth it. Not only had he bought Hui and Lightning precious time, but he had also taken down an enemy Jonin in the process. Lying there, Bear¡¯s thoughts were filled with peace as more Chunin rushed forward to finish him off, plunging kunai into his chest. Hui, you must survive. Be the light of Konoha... and guide its future. With this final thought, Bear''s life slipped away. join my patreon for 30+ advanced chapters: Chapter 30: Promise Me! Chapter 30: Promise Me! Hui and Lightning were still running for their lives, sprinting toward Heichuan Lake with all their remaining strength. "Hah! Hah! Hah!" Lightning was gasping for breath. The intense effort of fleeing at full speed had drained his stamina, leaving his body aching and weak. ¡°Damn it! Light, how far behind are the enemy?¡± he asked, his pace slowing as exhaustion set in. Hui felt a pang of frustration. His unique physique allowed him to absorb light and energy even at night, which made him nearly tireless. But Lightning was different¡ªhe was a normal ninja, and the strain of the chase was pushing his body to its limits. And the enemy was still closing in. They¡¯d catch up soon. ¡°They¡¯re about five hundred meters away,¡± Hui replied, not breaking his stride as he mentally scrambled for a way to escape their dire situation. ¡°Only five hundred? Damn it, I¡¯m already running on fumes!¡± Lightning¡¯s face twisted with frustration. As he nced at Hui, who was cutting a path ahead of him, determination shed in his eyes. "Light, you go ahead! I¡¯ll stay behind and hold them off!" Lightning shouted, his voice resolute as he thought of Wind and Bear. Hui didn¡¯t even hesitate. "We¡¯re a team. I¡¯m not leaving any of myrades behind to face death alone." If he had been willing to abandon Lightning, he wouldn¡¯t have circled back to reunite with him in the first ce. ¡°Light, I¡¯m at my limit. I can¡¯t run anymore!¡± Lightning¡¯s voice was strained, his breathing in ragged gasps. Sweat mixed with the rain on his forehead, streaming down in rivulets. ¡°You¡¯re faster and stronger than me. You¡¯ve got a real chance to escape. Don¡¯t worry about me, just go! Get out of here!¡± Lightning yelled, his steps faltering as he slowed to a stop. He leaned heavily against a tree, his face pale as his chest heaved with the effort of trying to catch his breath. Hui stopped too, rushing over to Lightning¡¯s side. Without a word, he bent down, hoisted Lightning onto his back, and continued running. Hui was only six¡ªalmost seven¡ªyears old, while Lightning was in his twenties. The sight of the young boy carrying a fully grown man on his back would¡¯ve been almostical in any other situation. ¡°Light?! Put me down! If you keep this up, we¡¯ll both die!¡± Lightning shouted in frustration, unable to believe that he was now a burden. ¡°The enemy¡¯s speed has dropped. Their sensor ninja must have gone after Bear, leaving this group without one. In this weather, it¡¯s much harder for them to track us without that advantage,¡± Hui exined, his voice calm and steady even as he carried Lightning forward. ¡°Your stamina may be running out, but so is theirs. We¡¯re being chased by one Jonin and eight Chunin. They¡¯re getting tired too. "I¡¯ve altered our escape route. We¡¯re heading toward Konoha, not theke. ¡°Those scouts¡ªon the night of Konoha¡¯s New Year, they¡¯ve likely been sent to strike from the rear of the battlefield, setting up a surprise attack on our forces. ¡°The farther we run in this direction, the less of a threat we¡¯ll be to them. The longer we run, the higher our chances of encountering other Konoha ninja. ¡°The rain and fog might slow us down, but it¡¯ll also wash away our tracks faster. ¡°If we find the right terrain, I can lose thempletely. ¡°Lightning, trust me¡ªI¡¯m getting you back to Konoha. ¡°As long as there¡¯s a sliver of hope, we can¡¯t give up!¡± Hui¡¯s words were rapid and precise as if he had been analyzing the situation from the moment they first encountered the enemy. Though not entirely certain, he believed his reasoning was close to the truth. Lightning was stunned. He hadn¡¯t expected this young boy to have thought through everything so thoroughly ande up with such a well-thought-out escape n. But¡­ as impressive as Hui¡¯s stamina and nning were, Lightning could hear theboured breathing of the boy carrying him. Even Hui¡¯s exceptional body was reaching its limits. He had be a burden. And then¡­ Lightning finally understood why Wind and Bear had made such quick, resolute decisions to stay behind and face certain death. They had done it to protect the future of the vige. With a sudden motion, Lightning stretched out his legs, forcefully pushing off of Hui¡¯s back. Caught off guard, Hui stumbled and fell, crashing to the ground, with Lightningnding beside him. "Lightning?!" Hui eximed, confused as he scrambled to his feet. His mask had fallen off in the fall, revealing his young, delicate features. "Light... or should I call you Mochizuki Hui? I had a feeling it was you," Lightning said with a knowing look as he stood up, brushing off the dirt. ¡°But I¡¯ll stick with Light. It¡¯s what I¡¯m used to.¡± "Your n is solid. It really does give us a good chance of survival. "But once you put me on your back, that chance drops to zero." Lightning''s voice was steady, though tinged with exhaustion. ¡°I know you don¡¯t want to leave me behind. But listen to me!¡± His voice grew louder, more urgent. ¡°Light, either you go ahead¡­ or we both die. "Don¡¯t say that we¡¯ll face it together. Wind¡¯s sacrifice, Bear drawing away more enemies¡­ he might already be gone. You can¡¯t let both their sacrifice be for nothing!¡± ¡°Promise me. Leave me behind, okay? You have to live, Light. You must live.¡± Lightning¡¯s voice cracked, and for the first time, it held a note of pleading. join my patreon for 30+ advanced chapters: Chapter 31: Gamble! Chapter 31: Gamble! Hui mind was filled with internal conflict at Lightning¡¯s words. He fully understood Wind and Bear¡¯s intentions, but to abandon hisrade and flee? He knew that decision would weigh on him for the rest of his life. In his past life, Hui had been an ordinary person, and one who had died young at that. Now, after living just over six years in this world of shinobi, his heart was still growing and learning to navigate these harsh realities. If he were someone with a cold and detached nature, perhaps he could have made the rational decision to flee alone without a second thought. But that wasn¡¯t who Hui was. As long as there was even the smallest chance of sess, he wouldn¡¯t give up. He refused to leave Lightning behind if there was a way for both of them to survive. "I¡¯m going to live, Lightning. Tsunade is still waiting for me to grow up and marry her," Hui dered firmly, his tone resolute. He paused briefly before continuing, "From the moment we started running until now, we¡¯ve been pushing ourselves without a break, which is why your body has reached its limit. "But the enemies chasing us? They haven¡¯t had any rest either. Their stamina must be nearly spent too. "Lightning, I have a n. If it works, we can both make it out of here alive." As Hui looked at Lightning, who was clearly drained from the restless sprint, he realized this was the opportunity. If they had been facing a fully rested team of three Jonin and twenty-four Chunin, there would¡¯ve been no hope. It would¡¯ve been suicide to even think about fighting. Courage alone couldn¡¯t recemon sense. But now? They were up against eight Chunin who were likely just as exhausted, and a Jonin who had also pushed his body to the limit. Hui realized this was their moment¡ªa chance created by the sacrifices of his teammates. Wind had bought them time, stretching what should¡¯ve been a brief pursuit into a long, grueling chase. Bear¡¯s decision to split off had drawn away two-thirds of their enemies, drastically weakening the remaining group. And now, with Lightning¡¯s stamina depleted, it was clear to Hui that the time hade to act. What remained was to test his luck¡ªand his skill. "A n?" Lightning asked, puzzled. "Lightning, right now, in your state, you¡¯re only able to use maybe thirty percent of your strength. A regr Genin could kill you easily. And if I wanted to, I could end your life more easily than hunting a wild animal. "But here¡¯s the thing¡ªthe enemies chasing us? They¡¯re in the same condition as you." Hui¡¯s words caused Lightning¡¯s eyes to light up with sudden hope. But then, Lightning furrowed his brow. "But what about the Jonin¡­?" "We¡¯ll gamble. If that Jonin happens to be a taijutsu specialist, and he¡¯s still got plenty of stamina, then I¡¯ll retreat immediately. But if he¡¯s not? Lightning, do you trust me?" Hui asked, his voice steady, his gaze unwavering as he looked directly into Lightning¡¯s eyes. There was confidence there. A deep, unshakeable certainty. "Alright!" Lightning agreed, nodding firmly. "But if he¡¯s a taijutsu Jonin, don¡¯t hesitate. I¡¯ll stay behind to give you time to escape." He had no choice but to trust Hui now. Even in his current state, he knew that if he fought Hui at full strength, he wouldn¡¯tst more than ten seconds. This was their best chance. "They¡¯re almost here," Hui warned. "Lightning, your role in this n is to simply hide. Stay hidden for as long as possible. That way, I¡¯ll have the time I need to take them out, one by one." His expression darkened slightly as he added, "But¡­ if that Jonin is a taijutsu specialist¡­" "Understood. I¡¯ll be ready," Lightning said, his voice grim. He knew what Hui was implying. With that, Hui disappeared into the shadows, vanishing silently among the trees. It was the perfect night for stealth. The rain, the fog, the darkness¡ªthey all worked in Hui¡¯s favor, providing cover that allowed him to move undetected. The constant crack of thunder would drown out any small sounds, masking his movements as he prepared to strike from the darkness. And with their exhaustion, the enemy¡¯s senses and reflexes would be dulled, giving Hui an even greater advantage. Everything was in his favor¡ªtime, terrain, and the enemy''s fatigue. Now, the only thing left to gamble on was whether or not that Jonin was a taijutsu specialist. If Hui¡¯s luck held, this gamble could turn everything around. Footsteps sshing through puddles broke the silence. The Mist ninja had arrived. "Hah¡­ hah¡­ Captain, the¡­ the trail¡­ it ends here!" gasped one of the Chunin, barely able to catch his breath. At those words, the entire group came to a halt, each of them leaning against trees, panting heavily. Their faces were pale, the signs of oxygen deprivation evident from their strained breathing and shaky legs. They were clearly exhausted from the long pursuit. Under normal circumstances, no seasoned ninja would allow themselves to be pushed to such a dangerous state. But they were sure that the Konoha ninja they were chasing was in just as bad a condition as they were. Once they finished him off, they could rest. After all, it wasn¡¯t like a few ninjas would affect the sess of the overall mission. "We¡¯ve got him now," the Jonin captain sneered, though his breath came in gasps. "Search the area." He ordered his men to fan out. In his mind, their target was as good as dead. There was no way someone could effectively hide in this environment, not from Mist ninja. They were experts in tracking prey through fog and rain. Besides, they had already closed the distance. Their prey couldn¡¯t be far. What the Jonin didn¡¯t know, however, was that they weren¡¯t just hunting one person¡ªthey were hunting two. And in the darkness, a pair of eyes locked onto him, gleaming with murderous intent. I won the gamble, Hui thought to himself, his resolve hardening as he prepared to strike. join my patreon for 30+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 32: A Successful Assassination! Chapter 32: A Sessful Assassination! "Strike the leader first to take down the army," Hui reminded himself. His first target was clear¡ªthe Mist Jonin leading the group. It might seem easier to start by eliminating the Chunin, but ninjas could recover quickly. Hui didn¡¯t want to find himself facing a Jonin who had regained some strength after he¡¯d finished dealing with the Chunin. Hidden in the darkness, Hui had chosen a spot that would seem like a poor hiding ce for an adult¡ªit was too exposed, too obvious. But for a child like him, barely seven years old, it was the perfect fit. His small body fit snugly into the space, making him almost invisible. The rain continued to pour, and thunder rumbled across the sky. "I found him! Over here!" a Mist Chunin shouted, drawing the attention of the others, who quickly gathered around. The Jonin¡¯s eyes lit up, and despite his fatigue, he pushed forward eagerly. He was certain they had found the real target¡ªhis prey wouldn¡¯t have enough chakra left to create any more shadow clones. Boom! Lightning shed, illuminating the night sky for a brief moment before plunging the world back into darkness. Now! Hui''s eyes gleamed as the Mist Jonin approached, mere feet away. His grip tightened around his de, and without hesitation, he struck. In that instant, the world seemed to slow. The de in Hui''s hand gleamed with a silvery light, cutting through the darkness like the rising moon. The Jonin¡¯s eyes widened in shock, unable toprehend the sudden situation. The Jonin reflexively raised his weapon, thinking he could block the strike. But in the blink of an eye, Hui¡¯s sword sliced cleanly through the man¡¯s throat. "Guh... guh..." The Jonin tried to speak, but blood gushed from his neck, silencing him. Another sh of lightning illuminated the scene, revealing the young boy who had struck him down¡ªa child¡¯s face, far too young for the battlefield. The Jonin¡¯s eyes were filled with disbelief, the light fading from them as his body crumpled to the ground. There had been no prolonged fight, no dramatic showdown. It was a single, decisive blow¡ªa perfectly executed assassination. Hui stared at the fallen Jonin, his heart racing with exhration. He could feel the blood pumping through his veins, every sense heightened. He had won. The countless scenarios he had yed out in his mind had led him to this¡ªthe best possible oue. Everything had gone perfectly, with no unexpectedplications. Then again, it made sense. The Jonin hadn¡¯t expected an attack, especially not from someone who was fully rested and waiting in ambush. In his mind, the only enemy was the exhausted ninja he had been chasing¡ªhe had no reason to suspect that a second, fully capable foe was lying in wait. His overconfidence,bined with his physical exhaustion, made him slow to react. By the time he realized what was happening, it was already toote. Everything had unfolded in less than two seconds¡ªperhaps not even that long. From the moment Hui struck until the Jonin fell, only a single second had passed. Now, it was time to deal with the Chunin. Hui quickly suppressed the rush of excitement that threatened to overtake him. There was still more work to be done¡ªhe had to rescue Lightning. In his original n, Hui had asked Lightning to simply hide. The idea had been for Hui to find the right moment to assassinate the Jonin. While the sess rate of this n was lower, it was safer for Lightning. If things went wrong, Hui wasn¡¯t sure he could kill the Jonin before Lightning was overwhelmed. But Lightning, understanding Hui¡¯s thinking, had taken a risk. He had intentionally revealed himself to the enemy, lowering their guard and allowing Hui the opportunity to strike. Lightning had put his own life on the line to create the best possible chance for Hui to seed. Thankfully, everything had gone ording to n. With the Jonin¡ªtheir greatest threat¡ªnow dead, the remaining Chunin posed little danger to Hui. Meanwhile, Lightning was struggling. Surrounded by the Chunin, he was doing his best to fend off their attacks, but he had already sustained several injuries. Lightning specialized in ninjutsu, not closebat, and his weakened state only made things worse. "Keep running! What¡¯s the matter? Tired already?" one of the Mist Chunin taunted, his voice dripping with malice as he closed in on Lightning. "Is this what they call the elite of Konoha''s ANBU? Pathetic. You¡¯re nothing more than a rat that¡¯s good at running away," another Chunin sneered. The Mist ninja didn¡¯t attack immediately. They were waiting for their captain to arrive and decide Lightning''s fate. But what they didn¡¯t know was that their captain was already dead. Instead of their leader, what wasing for them now¡­ was death itself. join my patreon for 30+ advanced chapters: Chapter 33: Turning Back Chapter 33: Turning Back "You bastards! How dare you insult the ANBU!" Lightning''s furious shout echoed through the rain, momentarily startling the eight Chunin surrounding him. None of them noticed the glimmer of joy in his eyes. Thud! Thud! Thud! "Argh!" Screams abruptly filled the air as three Mist Chunin staggered forward, sharp pain erupting from their backs. In the shes of lightning, they could see kunai lodged in their spines. It was Hui. He had arrived. Leaning against the tree, Lightning had seen Hui approaching. His enraged shout was a deliberate distraction, drawing the attention of the Chunin to give Hui the perfect opening. In the rain-soaked night, the downpour masked the sound of the kunai slicing through the air, and the darkness hid their deadly trajectory. Lightning¡¯s outburst had ensured the Chunin were too focused to even consider looking behind them. In mere moments, Hui''s kunai had taken out three Chunin, rendering them incapable of continuing the fight. "Who¡¯s there?!" The pained cries of theirrades snapped the remaining five Chunin to attention. Instinctively, they spun around, raising their defenses as they peered into the gloom. sh! But the nearest Chunin never stood a chance. As he turned, Hui''s de shed in the dark, slicing cleanly across his throat. That made four. Hui did not pause. With deadly precision, heunched himself at his next target. ng! The Chunin, barely conscious of the attack, managed to block the first strike. But as he prepared for the next, he realized his body had no strength left. Exhaustion had dulled his reflexes, leaving him helpless as Hui''s second strike tore through his leg. Slice! Blood sttered as Hui''s sword cut deep into the Chunin''s abdomen. Five down. "You bastard!!" The remaining three Chunin, now in a panic, were overtaken by fury. With a final burst of energy, they charged at Hui, kunai in hand. Under normal circumstances, facing three Chunin at once would have been a difficult task for Hui, one that might have forced Hui into a desperate struggle. But these Chunin were already drained, their strength sapped by exhaustion. They were merely shells of their former selves. Even though their minds screamed at them to defend, their bodies were far too slow. They could only watch as Hui methodically cut down theirrades, one by one, until his de wasing for them. sh! The sixth Chunin fell. Thud! Then the seventh. Slice! Finally, thest. As thest of the Mist Chunin copsed in a pool of rain and blood, the scouting squad sent to hunt down Hui and Lightning¡ªone Jonin and eight Chunin¡ªwas no more. Hui had turned the tide and achieved the impossible. But it hade at a terrible cost. Wind¡­ Bear¡­ "We did it. We didn¡¯t let Wind and Captain Bear''s sacrifice be in vain," Hui said quietly, turning to face Lightning. His voice was steady, but his eyes glistened with unshed tears. "We did it¡­ We really did it¡­ Wind, Captain, we survived..." Lightning''s emotions finally overwhelmed him. The intense mix of relief and grief broke him, and he copsed to his knees, sobbing uncontrobly. "Lightning, you head back to the vige. I need to warn the frontline camp," Hui said after taking a deep breath, trying to calm his own turmoil. The immediate danger had passed. Hui was confident that the Mist¡¯s other scouting teams wouldn¡¯t being their way. They had probably killed Bear and would now focus on continuing their mission. It was likely they would only send a few people back to report to the main force while the rest pressed forward toward the Konoha frontlines. After all, whether they caught the ninja fleeing toward Konoha or not, it didn¡¯t matter much anymore. Their real goal was to reach the frontline base without being detected. What they didn¡¯t expect¡­ was that the team sent to chase Hui and Lightning would bepletely wiped out. So, for now, both of them were rtively safe. But just to be cautious, Hui wanted Lightning to return to Konoha while he set out to warn the troops. "Light¡­" Lightning began, wanting to protest, but he quickly held back. "Don¡¯t worry," Hui said with a reassuring smile. "You know I¡¯m different. Their sensory ninja can¡¯t track me, and as long as I stay careful, they won¡¯t find me." He was already turning to leave. Every second he dyed put the frontline camp in greater danger. Hui knew he had to move quickly¡ªhe had to outrun the Mist scouting teams and beat the main force to the Konoha base. His task was daunting. He not only had to be faster than the scouting team but also faster than the Mist¡¯s main force, and the distance he had to cover was greater because of his earlier escape route. "Light! You better make it back alive!" Lightning shouted after him, tears streaming down his face once again. Hui turned his head slightly, shing Lightning a confident smile. "Don¡¯t worry. I¡¯m not dying here." With that, he sped off into the storm. Boom! Thunder crashed across the sky, and the rain continued to pour down. Amid the shes of lightning, a small figure could be seen dashing through the rain and mist, moving with unwavering determination. A figure that seemed to radiate light, even in the darkest of nights. join my patreon for 30+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 34: Arrival! Chapter 34: Arrival! The rain continued to pour, turning the road into a slippery mess of mud. Running across it was difficult. Thud! A small figure running at full speed slipped and fell face-first into the mud, sending a spray of water and dirt flying. But in an instant, the figure was back on his feet, continuing to sprint without missing a beat. Hui, covered in mud, his once clean and delicate face now smeared with dirt, pushed forward relentlessly. He had already fallen multiple times, but none of it slowed him down. Faster. I need to be faster! That was Hui''s only thought as he pushed his body to its limits, running even faster than he had when fleeing for his life earlier. Now, it wasn¡¯t his life he was trying to save. Death was chasing the lives of hisrades stationed at the Konoha frontline camp, and if he failed, many would die. He couldn¡¯t let that happen. As he sprinted, the exertion began to catch up with him. His body was reaching its limit. His breathing grew heavier, his legs started to feel like they were made of lead, and every step sent a burning sensation through his lungs and throat. But there was no time to rest. Stopping now would mean letting the Mist Vige''s raid party reach the camp first, bringing death with them. Hui knew that if he stopped, he would lose¡ªand hisrades would pay the price. On the other side, the Mist Vige scouts had done exactly what Hui predicted. A few of them had split off to meet with the main assault force, while the others continued toward the Konoha frontline camp. Their pace was quick, but they had to be cautious, taking care to scout the terrain and avoid detection. The sess of their surprise attack depended on them remaining unseen. If they were spotted, the Konoha ninja could easily use summoning techniques to send a warning to the camp. Thankfully for them, the three Konoha ANBU members they had been pursuing hadn''t used any summoning jutsu. Otherwise, they would have abandoned the mission and called off the attack. Still, despite their speed, the Mist ninja couldn¡¯t match Hui''s pace. He was running at full tilt, with no regard for anything but getting there in time. This race wasn¡¯t just a contest of speed. For Hui, it was also a battle against his own body and willpower. He was running t-out, without stopping, forcing his legs to keep moving even as they screamed for rest. His breathing grewbored, and his legs felt heavier with each step. His body began to falter, his movements sluggish as fatigue set in. Step by step, kilometer after kilometer, Hui pressed on. The trees on either side blurred past him, and soon, they seemed to disappear entirely from his field of vision. All that remained was the path ahead, and his legs moved almost automatically, driven by sheer will. Boom! The sky above roared with thunder, and shes of lightning cut through the dark clouds, illuminating Hui¡¯s small, determined figure. The rain continued to pour, drenching him as he ran, but the lightning seemed to light his way, and the thunder echoed like a battle cry. He was getting closer. The distance to the Konoha frontline camp was shrinking. Finally, a distant light appeared ahead of him, flickering through the rain. The rain began to lighten, and the thunder grew softer, as if the storm itself was calming. On a lookout post near the Konoha frontline camp, a ninja spotted the rapidly approaching figure. He quickly signaled to hisrades and shouted, "Who goes there?!" The shout reached Hui¡¯s ears, snapping him back to reality. "ANBU, Squad One, Unit Four! I have urgent information to report!" Hui shouted back, though exhaustion was evident in his voice. His legs wobbled beneath him, and he stumbled, crashing to the ground and sliding several meters in the mud. Whoosh! Whoosh! Several figures quickly appeared around him, cautiously eyeing the mud-covered child. Even though he was clearly wearing ANBU gear, his small size and youthful appearance made them hesitate to approach too closely. After all, some enemy ninja were known for using deceptive tactics, and it was too dangerous to rush in without caution. Hui struggled to lift himself up, but his strength had beenpletely drained. He could barely raise his head before copsing again. His face twisted in pain, yet he summoned thest of his willpower to shout: "Mist Vige scouts¡­ found near the Heichuan Line¡­ I suspect a raid on the camp tonight. Warn themander immediately!" With that, Hui finally sumbed to exhaustion, his body going limp as he passed out. The Konoha ninjas surrounding him froze, their eyes widening in shock. A squad leader¡¯s pupils contracted before he barked orders. "Quick! Report this to themander!" Whether this ANBU child was truly who he imed to be or not, the information was far too critical to ignore. If it was true, the entire camp could be in grave danger. Within minutes, the camp¡¯smander rushed to the scene, apanied by several ANBU members dispatched by Tobirama Senju himself. They had been assigned to oversee critical missions in this area and were immediately alerted when they heard an ANBU member had arrived with urgent news. As soon as the ANBU arrived, one of them recognized the unconscious figure on the ground. His expression shifted to one of rm, and he rushed forward. "That¡¯s Hui!" join my patreon for 30+ advanced chapters: Chapter 35: Awake Chapter 35: Awake When Hui opened his eyes again, he found himself lying in a hospital bed in Konoha. For a moment, he felt dazed, but then everything came rushing back to him. "The raid!" He bolted upright, shouting the words instinctively. The sudden movement woke up Tsunade, who had been resting with her head on the edge of his bed. The moment she saw Hui awake, she immediately flung herself at him, her voice trembling with tears. "Hui, you¡¯re finally awake! You scared me to death!" The warmth of the girl''s body and the fragility in her voice snapped Hui back to reality. His mind raced as he quickly scanned his surroundings, piecing together the situation he was now in. Suppressing his thoughts, Hui wrapped his arms tightly around Tsunade, speaking softly tofort her. "It''s okay, it''s all over now." Just then, the door to the room swung open, and before anyone stepped inside, a voice called out from the hallway, "Is he awake? Is it true?" A young man with purple hair rushed in but stopped abruptly when he saw the two embracing. He paused awkwardly for a moment before quietly backing out of the room. "Hui, don''t go back to the frontlines. Stay here in the vige and take on missions with me, okay?" As the granddaughter of both the First and Second Hokage, Tsunade¡¯s words carried weight, especially during this time of war when every hand was needed. Yet, her plea was personal, her eyes filled with unshed tears, her voice pleading softly. Hui felt a warmth spread through his chest. Gently, he pressed Tsunade¡¯s head against his shoulder, whispering in her ear. "Don¡¯t worry. I won¡¯t let anything happen to me." Tsunade opened her mouth to say more, but as she felt Hui¡¯s strong embrace, she could only manage a quiet sob, resting her head against him as tears trickled down her cheeks. Hui continued to gently pat her back,forting the girl who clearly held him so dearly in her heart. After some time, Tsunade¡¯s sobs finally subsided. It was then that the door opened again, this time revealing a medical-nin. Tsunade quickly moved away from Hui, standing quietly at his side. The medical-nin gave them a kind smile before approaching Hui and conducting a thorough examination. After a few moments, he nodded in satisfaction and surprise. "Your recovery has been remarkable, almost unbelievable. It¡¯s as if you¡¯re alreadypletely healed." Pausing, he added, "But to be safe, we¡¯d like to keep you here for another day or two. When you were brought in, you were running a high fever, and your body was nearly in a state of copse." The medic¡¯s astonishment was clear. Everyone had been shocked by Hui''s rapid recovery. When he had first arrived at the hospital, most of the staff had believed there was little chance he would ever wake up. His condition had been too severe, and at just six years old, it seemed impossible that a child could withstand such physical strain. Yet only a dayter, it became clear that Hui''s body was recovering far quicker than expected. What everyone thought would take a month took mere days. Three dayster, Hui had made a full recovery, leaving the medical-nin in awe. They had never seen anything like it. Some evenpared his recovery ability to the stories they¡¯d heard about the First Hokage. Of course, all this information had been ced under strict orders from Tobirama¡ªnothing was to be spoken of. "Rest here for another day or two, and if there are noplications, you¡¯ll be cleared to leave." "Understood. Thank you, doctor," Hui replied politely. The medical-nin gave a nod and exited the room. Lightning entered next, his eyes filled with relief and admiration as he looked at Hui¡¯s young face. "You did it, Hui!" Lightning said seriously. "Because of the message you delivered that night, the frontline forces were prepared. They set traps, and the Mist Vige''s entire raid force was wiped out!" Hui exhaled deeply, a wave of relief washing over him. "Thank goodness¡­ we seeded." Lightning smiled at him, and with a teasing nce at Tsunade, who had turned slightly red, he excused himself. "I¡¯ll leave you two to talk. I should go rest up too." He gave Hui a wink before slipping out, leaving Tsunade blushing slightly, her eyes filled with mixed emotions. But after Lightning left, she quietly sat back down on the edge of Hui¡¯s bed, gazing at him intently. Hui couldn¡¯t help but chuckle. Tsunade blinked in confusion, pouting a little. "What are youughing at? You don¡¯t even know how worried I was! And why does Grandpa Tobirama send you on such dangerous missions?!" Shaking his head, Hui replied, "You¡¯ve misunderstood. Grandpa Tobirama didn¡¯t send me to the frontlines for anything particrly dangerous. It was just bad luck that I ran into the Mist scouts. This kind of situation won¡¯t happen again." He shed her a reassuring smile before continuing, "Do you want to know why I wasughing?" "Why?" Tsunade asked, still a little unsure. "Because your eyes are beautiful," Hui said, and Tsunade¡¯s eyes lit up in surprise, and joy. But Hui continued after a pause, his voice suddenly turning serious. "But¡­ I think mine are even better." Tsunade blinked again, this time confused. The fluttering butterflies in her heart swirled around in confusion, but before she could respond, Hui leaned in, his voice dropping to a tender whisper. "Because my eyes¡­ have you in them." !!! In that moment, it felt as though the room filled with pink bubbles of warmth and affection. join my patreon for 30+ advanced chapters: Chapter 36: Honoring the Fallen, Looking Toward the Future Chapter 36: Honoring the Fallen, Looking Toward the Future The sky was a deep clear blue, and white clouds driftedzily overhead. A cool breeze rustled through the trees, their shadows swaying gently on the ground. In an abandoned training field, where weeds had long since overtaken the space, a small figure stood motionless for what seemed like an eternity. Hui stood there, head slightly tilted upward, his gaze distant. It was as if he could see familiar figures in the empty space before him. Arge, sturdy man with a broad chest, and a carefree figure with ck hair, casually wielding a sword. "Captain Bear, Wind... I did it. I delivered the message, and I got Lightning out of danger," Hui spoke softly to the air, his voice tinged with a sense of loss. His mind flooded with memories¡ªshes of their first meeting in Squad Four, Wind busily setting traps during his final stand, Captain Bear¡¯s resolute figure walking away to lure the enemy. Everything felt like a fleeting dream, yet he knew it had all truly happened. Bear and Wind, the two brothers and mentors who had always taken care of him, were gone. He would never see them again. This wasn¡¯t a dream or a scene from a movie; they weren¡¯t actors ying a part. They had been real, and now¡­ they were dead. That thought shattered thest remnants of distance he had felt from this world. Hui, once a soul from another world, now felt the weight of reality pressing down on him. From this moment, Hui was no longer someone who had reincarnated into the world of "Naruto." He was Mochizuki Hui. "Light..." Lightning¡¯s voice called out softly as he approached Hui from behind, his eyes heavy with understanding as he saw the boy standing there, silent and sorrowful. "Captain Bear and Wind¡­ they¡¯d be proud of you for everything you¡¯ve done. I¡¯m sure of it." Lightning looked up at the sky as well, as if he too could see Bear and Wind¡¯s silhouettes above. "This is the life of a ninja¡­ we never know when we¡¯ll die on a mission," Lightning said, a mncholic tone in his voice. Even though he had long epted the reality of being a ninja, it didn¡¯t make it any easier whenrades died¡ªespecially not when they were people who had fought and bled beside him. But Lightning couldn¡¯t afford to let himself or Hui sink into despair, so he spoke again, his voice steadying with resolve. "Every ninja knows that death is part of the path. But dying doesn¡¯t mean it was all for nothing. Our deaths have meaning when they leave something behind for the living to carry forward." Lightning turned to Hui, his eyes sharp and serious. "You, Light, are what Bear and Wind left behind. You carry their legacy. And if Bear could say onest thing, I bet it¡¯d be that he wanted you to be Hokage one day." "Light, you have to keep moving forward. Take what they left behind and be the light that illuminates Konoha¡¯s future." Lightning¡¯s words hung in the air like a solemn vow. Hui stood in silence, his face unreadable. After several long moments, he raised his head, looking Lightning in the eye with fierce determination. "I won¡¯t let their sacrifice be in vain. And I¡­ I won¡¯t let this happen again." Beneath the warm sunlight, Hui¡¯s face was etched with conviction. The war continued. On the battlefield between Konoha and the Mist Vige, things had begun to turn in Konoha¡¯s favor. The failed ambush had been a significant blow to the Mist Vige. Not only had Konoha annihted an elite force of hundreds, but the psychological toll on the Mist¡¯s forces was immense. Their morale had plummeted. The Mist¡¯s fieldmander was furious, seething with hatred for Konoha¡¯s infamous Anbu, the mysterious force that had disrupted their ns. Yet, despite the pivotal role yed by the First Division¡¯s Squad Four, not a single word was spoken about them. No honors, no recognition. Captain Bear and Wind¡­ their names, like all Anbu, would fade into the shadows. This was the life of an Anbu¡ªthose who walked in darkness. While alive, they had no name. When they aplished great things, there was no glory. And when they died, no one remembered. For now, Hui remained in Konoha, ordered to rest and recover, awaiting new squad members to join his team. But the order did not specify when those new members would arrive. For the moment, Hui had nothing but time. And so, he began to reflect, organizing his thoughts, considering his next steps. After the recent events, Hui realized that hisbat options were too limited. He primarily relied on shurikenjutsu, swordsmanship, and taijutsu for closebat and single-target attacks. His ultimate technique, the Silver Moon, a strike infused with light energy, was his trump card¡ªunpredictable and deadly. However, Silver Moon had a fatal w: it required time to charge. Moreover, without being able to extract chakra like other ninjas, Hui¡¯s arsenalcked the versatility and unpredictability that most shinobi possessed. He had norge-scale attacks, no way to handle multiple enemies at once. It frustrated him. Technically, Hui could extract chakra from his body. But every time he did, it was immediately absorbed and transformed into Primordial Qi, leaving him without usable chakra. This transformation process was slow, and Hui had no idea when it would beplete. Only after his chakra had fully converted into Primordial Qi would he be able to turn that energy back into chakra and use it. And once that happened, Hui knew his strength would skyrocket. After all, with Tobirama as his mentor, he had ess to countless powerful ninjutsu. Once he could harness chakra, those techniques would be at his fingertips, filling the gaps in his fighting style. And the best part? Chakra sensors wouldn¡¯t be able to detect him. Since his energy wasn¡¯t stored in his body like normal chakra, it wouldn¡¯t leave a trace. He could produce it on demand, use it, and then disappear from detection again. But until then¡­ he was limited. With a sigh, Hui reminded himself that he was still young, and his potential remained untapped. His power was immense, but it required time to manifest. If he had ten more years, he wouldn¡¯t need to worry about these things. Time would turn his potential into unstoppable strength. join my patreon for 30+ advanced chapters: Chapter 37: A New Sword Technique Chapter 37: A New Sword Technique Mochizuki Hui had been waiting for five days, but no new teammates had arrived. However, he hadn¡¯t spent that time idly; instead, he had been thinking deeply about how to improve his strength. Chakra was out of the question for now¡ªthere was no telling when the assimtion process would finish. That left him with only one option: enhancing his current skills. The energy he could use right now was light energy, the only power that had fully assimted within him. Previously, he had focused on condensing light into a powerful force, such as his Silver Moon sword energy, which acted as a primary offensive move. However, Silver Moon required a brief moment of concentration before it could be unleashed. If used instantly, it would only produce a harmless sh of light. But that harmless sh sparked an idea in Hui¡¯s mind. While a simple sh of light couldn¡¯t injure an opponent, it could certainly disorient them! In the heat of battle, when opponents were fully focused on his sword, what would happen if, just as they zeroed in, his de suddenly emitted a blinding sh of light? Their reaction would be instinctive¡ªthey¡¯d squint, close their eyes, or turn their heads away to shield themselves from the re. That would create a massive opening! In ninja battles¡ªespecially in swordbat¡ªevery strike was aimed at vital points. To expose such a ring weakness in a life-or-death situation would almost certainly spell defeat, if not death. The more Hui thought about it, the more feasible it seemed. He immediately began experimenting. He first tested how much light he could emit, then how long he could sustain it. He also worked on ways to time the burst effectively duringbat. After several days of trial and error, Hui finally crafted a new sword technique. In the overgrown, abandoned training field, Hui stood opposite a purple-haired young man¡ªLightning. Hui wanted to test his new sword technique, and he needed a living partner to help. Upon hearing Hui''s request, Lightning had enthusiastically volunteered, eager to see what his savior had developed. Now, they faced each other, ready for the demonstration. "Come on, Light! Show me what you''ve been working on!" Lightning called out, his voice brimming with excitement. Hui had saved his life, and after witnessing Hui¡¯s potential firsthand, Lightning had be just as invested in the boy¡¯s growth as their fallenrades, Xiong and Wind, had been. "Alright. Here Ie!" Hui responded, drawing his sword with a focused gleam in his eyes. In an instant, he dashed forward, his de slicing through the air toward Lightning. Lightning, armed with a kunai, met the strike head-on, more focused on defense than offense, as he knew his closebat skills couldn¡¯t match Hui¡¯s. ng, ng, ng! Steel shed rapidly as the two exchanged blows. Hui wasn¡¯t holding back, forcing Lightning to concentrate fully, defending with all his might. And then, at the perfect moment, Hui noticed that Lightning¡¯s eyes were glued to his sword, tracking its every movement. Now! Hui narrowed his eyes slightly, shifting his gaze subtly. In that instant, his de red with a burst of bright, blinding light, like a sudden sh from a powerful bulb. Lightning¡¯s eyes, locked onto Hui¡¯s sword, were assaulted by the intense brightness. Instinctively, his eyelids snapped shut, and his head jerked away from the re. He felt a cold breeze sweep past his neck, sending a shiver down his spine. "It seems¡­ this technique works well," Hui said, satisfied as he sheathed his sword. Lightning opened his eyes cautiously, though they still stung from the residual light. He blinked rapidly, trying to clear his vision, before looking back at Hui. "Using a sudden burst of light to blind your opponent in the middle of a focused battle, and create an opening¡­ Light, that¡¯s awesome!" Lightning eximed, now fully grasping the purpose of Hui¡¯s technique. "This isn¡¯t just swordsmanship¡ªit¡¯s more like a new form of ninjutsu. And what¡¯s more, it¡¯s a jutsu without hand seals! No one will see iting. Add the fact that you¡¯re using a sword as the medium, and the enemy won¡¯t suspect a thing." He couldn¡¯t help but admire the brilliance of it. "This technique is truly impressive!" Hui, however, smiled humbly. "It has potential, but there are still many ws." "ws?" Lightning blinked, surprised. He hadn¡¯t noticed any major weaknesses. "For one," Hui began, "this technique is useless against someone who¡¯s blind." "Second, if the enemy has trained their reflexes to handle bright shes, they¡¯ll be less affected." "Third, if they have poor light sensitivity or are wearing tinted goggles, the technique will lose much of its impact." "Fourth, to achieve the best result, the light must sh directly in their line of sight. If it¡¯s even slightly off, it won¡¯t be as effective." "And finally," Hui continued, "I have to be cautious, too. I¡¯ll need to avert my eyes or close them briefly when I use it, otherwise, I¡¯ll end up blinding myself as well." He sighed. "So, yeah¡­ it still has a long way to go." Lightning, however, couldn¡¯t help but feel a bit speechless at the boy¡¯s humility. True, those ws existed¡ªbut how often would a ninja encounter someone who was blind or who had undergone specific sh-resistance training? Even finding someone who wore goggles all the time was rare. Most of these weaknesses were negligible in realbat. As for the final points about positioning and self-blinding? Those were more about finesse and control, things that would improve with practice. "Honestly, Light¡­ it¡¯s still an amazing move!" Lightning thought to himself but decided not to argue further. "So¡­ what are you going to call this technique?" Lightning asked instead. Hui pondered for a moment, rubbing his chin thoughtfully. "How about¡­ ¡®Open Your Damned Dog Eyes, You Bastard!¡¯" Hui said with a grin. Lightning¡¯s expression immediately soured, a dark line forming on his forehead as he stared at Hui in disbelief. "Haha, just kidding!" Hui burst outughing. "I wouldn¡¯t actually name it something like that." He then grew more serious, his tone softening. "This technique uses light to disorient and attack the enemy. Light¡­ it drives away the darkness and brings safety to others and myself." Hui paused, his gaze steady as he looked up at Lightning. "I think I¡¯ll call it¡­ ¡®Radiance.¡¯" join my patreon for 30+ advanced chapters: Chapter 38: A New Mission, Assassination Chapter 38: A New Mission, Assassination After testing the practical use of his new sword technique, Radiance, with Lightning, Mochizuki Hui was satisfied. Despite its ws, it had the potential to be a trump card in the right situation. However, Radiance was best suited for ambushes and killing blows. If it failed to be lethal on the first attempt, the enemy would be on guard, making it far less effective in subsequent uses. It was a technique best deployed when fighting a single opponent, or in a scenario where all witnesses would be eliminated. If too many saw the technique, future opponents would be wary, and the surprise factor would be lost. Mochizuki Hui had hoped to continue developing more techniques, but an unexpected mission interrupted his ns. He hadn¡¯t received any new teammates yet, but the new mission had arrived. That day, Hui donned his freshly issued ANBU uniform, his mask hiding his youthful features, as he stood alongside a simrly outfitted Lightning in the ANBU training grounds, awaiting their orders. "Another mission already, huh?" Lightning muttered with a sigh. It had been nearly a month since theyst wore these uniforms. For a moment, Lightning had almost believed he had left the shadows behind and returned to the light. In truth, if he had asked to leave ANBU and return to the regr ranks, the Second Hokage would likely have granted his request. But the events of that fateful night had left a deep impression on him. He wanted to stay, to watch over Hui as he grew, and to protect him during that growth. "Yeah, it feels like it¡¯s been a while since thest mission," Hui replied, realizing he probably wouldn''t be leaving ANBU anytime soon. This was clearly the decision of Tobirama Senju. After all, his growth in ANBU would be much faster than being in a regr shinobi team. Suddenly, a figure appeared before them in a sh of movement. Both Hui and Lightning straightened their postures instinctively, standing at attention. The figure was a chunin from the vige. His eyes lingered on Hui for a few moments longer than usual, a glimmer of surprise in them. But, trained as a shinobi with strict discipline, he said nothing, simply handing over a sealed letter to Hui with a bow. "This is your mission. The rest is up to you," he said before disappearing in another burst of speed. Hui and Lightning exchanged nces, both sensing a bit of uncertainty. Without wasting time, Hui tore open the envelope and pulled out the contents. It was a letter¡ªhandwritten by none other than the Second Hokage, Tobirama Senju. The mission described within wasn''t just for them¡ªit was almost entirely for Hui alone. Because this was an assassination mission. With the full-scale war now raging, countless countries and shinobi viges had be entangled, plunging the entire shinobi world into chaos. However, after several months of intense conflict, the tides of battle were beginning to shift, and the outlines of the war¡¯s ultimate victors were bing clear. Under the leadership of the Second Hokage, Konoha had managed to hold its ground despite being outnumbered, inflicting heavy losses on the other four great viges. Some smaller nations that had chosen to attack Konoha were even wiped out entirely. As a result, some farsighted individuals had already begun nning for the post-war future. However, not all powerful figures were wise. Some foolish individuals, seated in high positions, were steering their countries toward ruin. The target of Hui¡¯s mission was one such figure¡ªa high-ranking minister in a certain country. This country held considerable influence among the small nations in its region and had remained neutral, avoiding involvement in the shinobi world war. However, Tobirama had received intelligence suggesting that this nation was considering joining the war to secure some spoils of victory. Unfortunately, the side they intended to support was not the Land of Fire, but its enemies. Hui''s mission was to assassinate one of this country''s influential ministers¡ªsomeone with significant power who was pushing for an attack on the Land of Fire. The assassination would serve as a warning¡ªa clear message to that nation¡¯s daimyo: if you attack the Land of Fire, no matter what happens in the war, you will die first. Why had such a critical mission been entrusted to Hui? And why was it almost entirely his task toplete? Because the country had two highly skilled sensory ninja guarding the minister and the daimyo at all times. For most shinobi, approaching them unnoticed was nearly impossible. If an ordinary ninja tried to infiltrate orunch a direct assault, the resulting conflict would only fuel the nation''s anger, potentially rallying other nearby countries to join in an attack on Konoha. Thus, this mission couldn''t be handled openly. The daimyo couldn''t be killed¡ªnot yet, at least¡ªand the assassination needed to be carried out without alerting anyone, especially the sensory ninja. For most shinobi, this would be an impossible task as their chakra signatures would be detected instantly, exposing the intruder before they even got close. But Hui was different. His body produced no detectable chakra, allowing him to move perfectly undetected by sensory types. This made him the ideal candidate for such an assassination. Moreover, his youth made it easier for him to blend into the background of this foreign nation, allowing him to get closer to the target. As Hui finished reading the mission details, a weight settled in his chest. This mission was dangerous. But it was also the ultimate test of his abilities. join my patreon for 30+ advanced chapters: Chapter 39: Intelligence and Difficulty Chapter 39: Intelligence and Difficulty Having confirmed the details of the mission, Mochizuki Hui and Lightning gathered the necessary supplies for the task ahead and set out immediately. This mission was clearly centred around Hui¡ªhis stealth and assassination skills were crucial for sess. Lightning¡¯s role, on the other hand, was to provide support, ensuring Hui¡¯s safe extraction, whether the assassination seeded or failed. It took them three days of hard travel to reach their destination, a nation far from the Land of Fire and its hidden vige, Konoha. The town they arrived at was vastly different from the ninja viges they were used to. There were hardly any shinobi here, only regr soldiers. However, the town itself was bustling, filled with life. The streets were crowded with merchants, vendors, and townspeople, the atmosphere more vibrant than even Konoha''s busiest districts. Mochizuki Hui, now disguised as a dirty-faced street urchin, blended seamlessly into the crowd. His clothes were filthy and his face smudged with grime¡ªanyone who saw him would think he was just another war orphan,pletely harmless. No one would ever associate this small, ragged boy with the elite ANBU of Konoha, feared throughout the ninja world. And more importantly, his young appearance and theck of chakra fluctuations from his body made him invisible even to sensory-type ninjas. Even if the two skilled sensory ninjas were standing right next to him, they wouldn¡¯t suspect a thing. Upon arriving in the town, Hui didn¡¯t rush into action. As always, he believed in careful nning before execution. For the first day, he wandered the streets like any other beggar, observing the town¡¯syout, getting a feel for the ce. He noted the position of key locations, potential escape routes, and began formting a n. He then took a casual walk around the minister¡¯s estate, memorizing the patrol patterns of the guards, andlooking for possible points of entry and exits. With the generalyout in mind, Hui shifted focus to his target¡ªthe minister who was pushing for a military campaign against the Land of Fire. The man was cautious. After two days of careful observation, Hui noticed that the minister rarely left the daimyo''s side during the day. Only at night did he return to his estate, and even then, his movements were highly regimented. He would spend his evenings reading, asionally losing his temper and breaking objects before retiring to bed in frustration. From this behavior, Hui concluded that the minister had a vtile temper and was likely being pressured by external forces to remain cautious. This suggested that the daimyo had anticipated a potential assassination attempt, possibly expecting shinobi from Konoha toe after the minister. It was also clear that the decision to wage war on the Land of Fire likely came from the daimyo himself, not just the minister. Still, the minister was heavily guarded. At all times, he was nked by a dozen or more bodyguards, both visible and hidden. Hui sensed the presence of seven shinobi in the shadows, including a skilled sensory ninja, who was constantly on alert. These seven shinobi worked in shifts. Four of them¡ªthree chunin and one jonin¡ªformed one group. The sensory ninja, a special jonin, was paired with two other chunin, forming the second group. Altogether, the minister was protected by two jonin and five chunin at all times. But that wasn¡¯t all. Hui also realized that this wasn''t just the minister¡¯s personal guard. There were two distinct factions protecting both the daimyo and the minister. The sensory ninja and three of the chunin belonged to this country¡¯s forces. However, the other jonin and three additional chunin appeared to be outsiders. Given the intelligence gathered by Tobirama, Hui realized that these extra shinobi were likely sent by another great nation to protect the minister and the daimyo. The geographical location of this country, positioned between the Land of Fire and the Land of Wind, made it highly likely that these shinobi were from Sunagakure, the Hidden Sand Vige. If this country dered war on the Land of Fire, it would ease the pressure on Sunagakure, which was struggling in its battles against Konoha. A shift in this small nation¡¯s allegiance could turn the tide of the war back in Sunagakure¡¯s favour. The two sensory ninjas were well aware of the Sand shinobi¡¯s presence but had chosen to ignore them, likely understanding their shared goals. After carefully analyzing the situation, Hui¡¯s heart grew heavy. Assassinating the minister itself wasn¡¯t impossible. He was confident in his ability to infiltrate the minister¡¯s estate without being detected. But the real challengey inpleting the assassination without being discovered, and more importantly, escaping unnoticed. If he were discovered during or after the assassination, the Sand shinobi would descend on him with full force. Hui didn¡¯t stand a chance against them in a direct confrontation, especially given their numbers. Risking his life in a one-for-one exchange? That wasn¡¯t an option. He needed a wless n, one that would allow him to eliminate the target and disappear without a trace. Hui took a deep breath. It was time to formte the perfect strategy. join my patreon for 30+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 40: A Successful Assassination! Chapter 40: A Sessful Assassination! Mochizuki Hui knew thatpleting this mission would require cunning, not brute force. While the defenses around the target were formidable, Hui had his own advantage: the enemy''s sensory ninja couldn¡¯t detect him. That was his greatest asset in this mission. After three more days of careful observation and preparation, Hui was ready to act. On this particr day, the minister followed his usual schedule, returning to his residence in thete afternoon from the daimyo''s pce. Before his return, the ninja guards had meticulously swept through his quarters, ensuring there were no threats or suspicious changes. After eating a dinner that had been carefully inspected for poison, the minister indulged his frustrations on one of the pce¡¯s handmaids¡ªone of the few forms of entertainment he was still allowed in his restricted state. Afterward, drained and angry, he dismissed the maid and eventually drifted off to sleep, oblivious to the danger lurking below. Outside his bedroom, more than a dozen guards patrolled diligently. Hidden in the shadows, seven shinobi stood ready, with the sensory ninja scanning the premises at regr intervals. Every hour, the entire estate was swept, and asionally, additional random checks were conducted. It was a fortress, nearly imprable. And yet, Mochizuki Hui had already infiltrated. He had entered the estate well before the minister¡¯s return, taking advantage of the times when the guards and shinobi were not yet on high alert. Hui had hidden himself in a tunnel he had meticulously dug over the past few days¡ª a small and narrow tunnel, barelyrge enough for his seven-year-old body to crawl through. No adult could have fit, and even Hui had to squeeze through with effort, moving slowly. The tunnel led directly beneath the minister''s chambers, emerging in the fish pond that adorned the garden just outside. The water-filled tunnel was Hui¡¯s secret weapon. For an ordinary person, staying in the tunnel for too long would have meant death by drowning. But Hui¡¯s body, far beyond that of a normal human, allowed him to hold his breath far longer than most. Once the minister was asleep, Hui made his move. In the dead of night, the floor of the minister¡¯s room shifted slightly, with barely a whisper of sound. A thin crack appeared, and a panel of the wooden floor was gently lifted. The minister¡¯s snores masked the faint noise. Hui emerged, his body slick with water but silent as a shadow. He was naked, not for any perverse reason, but because wet clothes would have made noise and slowed his movements. His bare skin, covered in only a few drops of water, allowed him to move with precision. Once inside the room, Hui immediately got to work. He retrieved a set of kunai and wire from his tunnel and began setting a trap¡ªpainstakingly designed for this very moment. Each movement was deliberate, slow, and calcted. Finally, the trap was set. A delicate wire, nearly invisible, was rigged near the door. The moment someone pushed the door open, the wire would trigger, sending a deadly flurry of kunai towards the bed, where the unsuspecting minister slept. Hui had carefully studied the minister¡¯s routine. Every morning, someone from the household came to wake the minister, as he couldn¡¯t rise on his own. When they opened the door to rouse him, they would unknowingly trigger the trap, and the kunai would do the rest. Satisfied with his work, Hui quietly retreated, lowering himself back into the tunnel and recing the floor panel. By morning, the tunnel would likely be discovered, but it wouldn¡¯t matter. Once submerged in the pond again, Hui moved carefully along the bottom until he reached the edge, where he slipped into another, much shorter tunnel leading to the roots of a nearby tree. From there, he exited the estate unnoticed. None of the guards, neither the shinobi nor the soldiers, suspected a thing. Their focus was solely on protecting the minister¡¯s room. And even though they had anticipated an assassination attempt, after so many uneventful days of guarding, their vignce had waned. As long as the sensory ninja didn¡¯t detect any chakra signatures and the minister¡¯s snores continued, they believed all was well. Thus, Hui¡¯s infiltration went perfectly. Now, all that remained was to wait for morning. When dawn broke, Hui, still in his disguise as a filthy street urchin, sat in a corner of the bustling marketce. From where he was, he had a clear view of the minister¡¯s estate. Then, just as he expected, a panicked servant burst through the gates of the estate and rushed off towards the daimyo¡¯s pce. A short whileter, the daimyo himself, nked by a dozen guards, arrived in haste. Hui smirked. The assassination had been a sess. join my patreon for 30+ advanced chapters: Chapter 41: The State of War Chapter 41: The State of War When the daimyo first heard of the minister¡¯s assassination, he was in utter disbelief, finding the whole thing absurd. But after personally inspecting the minister¡¯s corpse and understanding how he had been killed, a chill ran down his spine. The traces left at the scene, along with the unhidden tunnel entrance, clearly conveyed a message¡ªa warning. It was evident: whoever had assassinated the minister wanted to show that if they could kill him under such tight protection, they could just as easily kill the daimyo, even with the same level of security. This realization struck fear into the daimyo¡¯s heart. While he had always known that ninjas were powerful and mysterious beings, he hadn¡¯t truly grasped just how terrifying they could be until now. He had ambitions¡ªhe wanted to profit from the chaos of the war¡ªbut he feared death more. Thus, during a meetingter that very day, the daimyo made it clear that his country would abandon any ns to join the Shinobi World War and would instead maintain a neutral stance. With this, Mochizuki Hui¡¯s mission was sessfullypleted. The goal had been achieved. Meanwhile, the two squads of Sand Ninja, filled with shame and frustration, were forced to retreat quietly, knowing they had failed miserably. At least they had been operating in the shadows and hadn¡¯t openly dered themselves responsible for the safety of the minister and the daimyo; otherwise, their disgrace would have been even greater. The daimyo¡¯s decision to remain neutral quickly spread to the surrounding smaller nations, triggering a chain reaction. Upon hearing this, some of the smaller nations also decided to remain neutral, giving up any thought of joining the war. Others, however, chose to side with the Land of Fire, impressed by the strength of Konoha¡¯s ninja. This further shifted the bnce of the war, giving Konoha an even greater advantage in the ongoing conflict with Sunagakure (The Vige Hidden in the Sand). The battlefield on this front grew increasingly favorable for Konoha. When Tobirama Senju received the report on Mochizuki Hui¡¯s mission, he was very pleased, and his evaluation of Hui rose even higher. To be honest, Tobirama hadn¡¯t been entirely confident that Hui couldplete such a mission. But Hui had exceeded his expectations,pleting the mission wlessly and demonstrating remarkable skill. This led Tobirama to make a critical decision. In truth, it wasn¡¯t just the battlefield between Konoha and Sunagakure, or this neutral small nation where Hui had operated that was seeing action. Mochizuki Hui wasn¡¯t the only one working in the shadows. Konoha¡¯s ANBU had been relentlessly carrying out missions during this period, targeting war hawks in various nations, andinitiating a wave of assassinations. Though not every assassination had been sessful, many had, leading to the deaths of numerous influential figures in other countries who were pushing for continued war. This string of assassinations caused considerable anxiety among the remaining high-ranking officials in many nations, each one fearing they might be the next target. At the same time, certain influential figures in these nations, bribed or influenced by Konoha, began to promote the idea that ¡°Konoha is simply trying to end this pointless war. If we stop the war, the assassinations will cease.¡± This narrative had an impact. In truth, by this stage of the war, many leaders had long since grown weary of the conflict. Although the shinobi were the mainbatants in this war and the regr armies werergely uninvolved, war still required funding. And the war expenses for their own shinobi viges were being entirely shouldered by these nations. If the war had brought significant victories or spoils, the cost might have been justifiable. After all, risks are eptable when there¡¯s a good return. But this war had be a losing proposition for many, with the tide of battle shifting increasingly against them. A war that offered no benefits and no clear path to victory was of no use to them. As a result, with fewer and fewer war hawks standing in their way, many national leaders began pressuring their shinobi viges to end the conflict. This put the shinobi viges¡ªparticrly the Four Great Nations¡ªunder high strain. They wanted to retaliate against Konoha in the same way¡ªthrough assassinations and political interference¡ªbut theycked an organization like Konoha¡¯s ANBU, which specialized in such activities. Furthermore, the pressure wasn¡¯t justing from their nations¡¯ leaders. The war had also begun to breed discontent among their own citizens. Families were mourning fallen shinobi, and the quality of life had diminished. Anti-war sentiments were growing. In such an environment, continuing the war became increasingly difficult. However, the leaders of the Four Great Nations were unwilling to simply walk away in defeat. After all, Hashirama Senju¡ªthe godlike figure who had cast a long shadow over them for so many years¡ªwas finally gone. With his passing, they had believed that Konoha was no longer invincible. They had joined forces, along with countless smaller shinobi viges, to take down Konoha, and yet they had ended up in this humiliating situation. It was uneptable. Thus, under mounting pressure from both their leaders and their citizens, the leaders of the Four Great Nations made a final, desperate decision. They would not go down quietly. They would stage onest, all-out counteroffensive. If they seeded, they would take Konoha down in one fell swoop, seizing the fertilends of the Land of Fire as spoils of war, perhaps even carving up the Land of Fire itself and erasing Konoha from history. But if they failed, then they would have no choice but to retreat, admit defeat, and return to their respective nations. And so, with this decision made, the shinobi world braced for the war¡¯s final, climactic battle. The First Shinobi World War had reached its most critical juncture. join my patreon for 40+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 42: We Won! Chapter 42: We Won! The final battle of the Shinobi World War had erupted¡ªast-ditch counterattack from the four great shinobi viges, a battle that would decide the victor. However, this war no longer had much to do with Mochizuki Hui. He was just a small ANBU member, only seven years old and not even at the level of a Jonin. He had no ability to influence the oue of this final battle. In fact, even a Jonin would find it difficult to sway the course of such a war. This was a conflict involving thousands, tens of thousands ofbatants¡ªa life-and-death struggle where countless forces shed. In such arge-scale battle, an individual''s strength seemed insignificant. Only those with truly extraordinary power could sway the direction of a war¡ªfigures like the Kage of the five great viges, Madara Uchiha, Jinchuriki hosting the Tailed Beasts, and other Kage-level shinobi. Their personal might could singlehandedly shift the tides of battle and alter the oue of the war. Alternatively, there were those with strategic brilliance who could devise the most effective battle ns for their shinobi viges. These tacticians could lead their forces to gain significant advantages on the battlefield, tipping the scales toward victory¡ªindividuals like the future Shikaku Nara or Shikamaru Nara. Mochizuki Hui, at this moment, was neither of those. Thus, afterpleting his assassination mission, Mochizuki Hui found himself with nothing to do once again. He was ordered to remain in Konoha and await further instructions, but in reality, this was to keep him away from the frontlines. With the final battle underway, Tobirama Senju dared not risk having Mochizuki Hui on the battlefield, fearing any potential harming to him. Mochizuki Hui understood this well. He knew his current strength was stillcking. Even if he went to the battlefield, he wouldn''t be able to contribute much, and in critical moments, he might even be a burden to Tobirama. So, he quietly stayed in Konoha, focusing on his training while waiting for the war''s conclusion. Not only Mochizuki Hui, but Tsunade, Jiraiya, and Orochimaru had also ceased their missions and stayed within Konoha. Their teacher, Hiruzen Sarutobi, an exceptional shinobi, was undoubtedly at the frontlines during this time. This, at least, kept Mochizuki Hui from getting too bored. He wasn¡¯t particrly worried about the oue of this war. He didn¡¯t believe that the small actions of a yet-to-mature "butterfly" like him could drastically alter the results of the First Shinobi World War. However, the waiting was simply torturous, especially when you cared about the oue. During the final battle, Konoha became unusually quiet. Ninjas were rarely seen in the vige anymore, aside from some young Genin and essential guard forces. Konoha had thrown almost everything it had into this final battle. A loss would lead to unimaginable consequences. Even the vigers wore expressions of anxiety and worry, their faces seldom showing smiles. Everyone was awaiting news from the battlefield, their attention fixed on updates from the frontlines. The tense atmosphere began to affect Mochizuki Hui as well. Though he knew rationally that his actions likely wouldn¡¯t alter the oue, a growing concern gripped his heart. Perhaps the small things he had done on the battlefield had set off a chain of events that could lead to an unexpected shift in the war¡¯s oue. Because he cared, he couldn¡¯t help but overthink. On this day, the weather was clear, the sky filled with clouds, and a gentle breeze blew through the vige. The vige remained as quiet as before, with many staying inside, staring nkly out of their windows, silently praying for good news. From one of Konoha¡¯s training grounds, the rhythmic sounds of shuriken and kunai striking wooden targets could be heard. Four young figures were scattered around the field. Mochizuki Hui was practicing his shuriken techniques, each thrown kunai and shuriken hitting their mark, with manynding on the bullseye. This was unusual. Normally, in a distraction-free environment, Mochizuki Hui wouldn¡¯t miss the bullseye. It was clear he was distracted. Not far from him, Tsunade sat on a bench, her eyes on Mochizuki Hui, but her gaze distant and unfocused. Orochimaru stood on the grass, staring at a dried leaf in his hand, lost in thought. As for Jiraiya, he wanted to talk to someone, but seeing his three friends all lost in their own worlds, he gave up andy under a tree, letting his mind wander. Then, suddenly, the quiet of the vige was broken by a risingmotion. A noise began to spread, growing louder and louder. This caught the attention of the four young shinobi. ¡°What¡¯s going on?¡± Jiraiya stood up, standing on the tree to get a better look, curious. Mochizuki Hui, on the other hand, stopped his repetitive practice, closed his eyes, and focused on the growing noise from the vige. Tsunade and Orochimaru both turned toward the direction of themotion, confusion on their faces. Finally, a smile spread across Mochizuki Hui¡¯s face, a smile of pure joy. He had heard the wordsing from the vige. It was news of victory from the battlefield. ¡°We¡¯ve won.¡± He spoke aloud, surprising the other three. Tsunade, unsure, asked again, ¡°We¡¯ve won the war?¡± ¡°Yes,¡± Mochizuki Hui confirmed with a firm voice, ¡°We¡¯ve won this war.¡± Konoha had won the war. The entire vige erupted with excitement, as if life had returned to every corner. Mochizuki Hui and his three friends ran through the vige, joining countless children and teenagers who were also running through the streets. As they ran, they shouted at the top of their lungs, ¡°We¡¯ve won! We¡¯ve won the war!¡± Hearing the shouts, people began flooding out of their homes, faces filled with joy and relief. Soon, the streets of the vige were filled with people. Everywhere, voices rang out, filled with the same message. ¡°We¡¯ve won!¡± join my patreon for 40+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 43: Return, Loss, and What I Must Protect in My Heart Chapter 43: Return, Loss, and What I Must Protect in My Heart On this day, all of Konoha was filled with an air of joy. Nearly everyone had gathered at the vige gates, lining both sides of the road, waiting. It was a spontaneous weing ceremony, organized to honor the heroes of Konoha returning from the battlefield. Mochizuki Hui stood among the crowd, his heart filled with anticipation as he gazed into the distance, toward the path where the heroes would return. At a certain moment, figures appeared at the end of the road. Leading the procession was none other than the Second Hokage himself, Senju Tobirama! Behind him were the n heads of Konoha¡ªHyuga, Uchiha, Sarutobi, Shimura, Nara... Following them were squads of elite shinobi, all walking proudly with their chests held high, their strides full of confidence. These people were the heroes of Konoha. Thanks to their presence and protection, the vige had remained unscathed throughout the war, bing one of the rare havens untouched by the chaos of the shinobi world. "Lord Second Hokage!" As Senju Tobirama approached, the crowd erupted into cheers. Countless voices called out, faces filled with joy and excitement. The cheers were especially exuberant among the young people and children, their voices full of admiration and reverence. Then came the n leaders. As they approached, their nsmen cheered and shouted their names with pride. The shinobi units that followed were greeted with shouts and waves from friends and family in the crowd. Some people spotted their loved ones among the ranks, and with hands over their mouths, tears streamed down their faces in relief and joy. All of Konoha seemed to have plunged into a sea of celebration. But not everyone was cheering. Some stood silently, their eyes scanning the returning shinobi, but they couldn''t find the faces of their sons, daughters, husbands, wives, fathers or mothers they had sent to war. Mochizuki Hui watched the returning soldiers with a smile. He looked at the unfamiliar yet vaguely familiar faces, and his heart gradually settled into a calm stillness. The weing ceremony wasn''t long. The number of returning shinobi was small, as most had silently returned to the borders of the Land of Fire, continuing their watch and formingyers of defence to protect Konoha. These shinobi, though they received no des during this moment, were the unsung heroes, protecting the vige in silence. As the crowd followed the returning troops back into the vige, it was a time of joy, a time of reunion, and a time of homing. Mochizuki Hui stood at the end of the now-empty road, staring into the distance. He seemed to see two figures standing there. They wore masks and gazed back at Mochizuki Hui. They waved to him before slowly walking away, their figures growing faint and transparent, until they finally vanished. "Mama, why didn¡¯t Daddye back? Uncle Yoshida came back." A child''s innocent voice snapped Mochizuki Hui out of his reverie. He turned toward the sound and saw a little girl, no more than three or four years old. Her delicate face was full of confusion, her big eyes misty with unshed tears. She looked up at her mother, clearly disappointed that she couldn¡¯t find her father among the returning shinobi. The girl''s mother covered her mouth with one hand and clutched a bloodstained handkerchief¡ªlikely a keepsake from Yoshida¡ªwith the other. Hearing her daughter¡¯s words, tears began to pour from her eyes. "Mama, why are you crying? Don''t cry, Mama. You said crying means you''re not a good girl!" Seeing her mother in tears, the little girl spoke seriously, raising her hand as if to wipe away her mother¡¯s tears. But she was too small, and her hand could only reach her mother''s waist. At her daughter¡¯s words, the mother seemed to break down. She knelt, hugging her daughter tightly, sobbing. "Your father... he... he¡¯s nevering back." The woman spoke, her voice choked with grief, as tears streamed uncontrobly down her face. The little girl, held tightly in her mother¡¯s arms, looked lost and uncertain. "Mama, why isn¡¯t Daddying back?" The girl asked again, still not understanding. After all, her father had promised her that he woulde back in a few days. She didn¡¯t know how long ¡°a few days¡± was, but she felt like it had been a very long time. "Because your father is a hero, sweetheart. Heroes have many important missions toplete." A gentle voice interrupted them. The little girl looked up to see a young boy, his face clean and delicate, gazing warmly at her. "A... hero?" The little girl was confused. She didn¡¯t know what a hero was, and so she asked. "Yes, a hero. Just like the Second Hokage." "My daddy is like Lord Hokage?! When will hee back, then? He promised toe back for my birthday." The girl¡¯s voice was full of excitement, but also tinged with disappointment and a longing she couldn¡¯t fully understand. "Well, when you grow up, he¡¯lle back." "Really?" Her eyes sparkled with hope. "Of course. When you¡¯re all grown up, he¡¯ll return from far away, bringing with him the gifts he¡¯s been preparing for you." Mochizuki Hui spoke seriously, but as he looked into the little girl¡¯s eyes, filled with innocent hope, his heart ached. "That¡¯s wonderful! Then I¡¯ll grow up really fast, so Daddy cane back soon! Mama, let¡¯s go home! I¡¯ll drink lots of milk and eat all my food, so I can grow up quickly!" The little girl dered earnestly, her voice brimming with hope. Her mother bit her lip, then wiped away her tears. She gently cupped her daughter¡¯s face and said, ¡°Alright, let¡¯s go home.¡± Then, she stood, gave Mochizuki Hui a small bow, and said softly, ¡°Thank you.¡± With that, she took her daughter¡¯s hand and slowly walked away. As Mochizuki Hui watched their figures grow distant, he called out loudly, "If you ever need help, you can find me at the Senju n! The vige and I will always protect you, just like he did with his life!" The woman turned back, staring at Mochizuki Hui as though she could see the man she longed for standing beside him. "Thank you," she said once more, and then she and her daughter disappeared into the distance. Under the warm sunlight, the seven-year-old boy stood there, watching them walk away. He looked at the streets filled with both joy and sorrow, and at the families who had finally reunited or would never reunite. At that moment, a small hand gently grasped his. Feeling a tug, Mochizuki Hui was pulled forward. ¡°Come on, Hui! Let¡¯s go celebrate with Grandpa Tobirama!¡± Tsunade¡¯s warm hand held his tightly as she led him along. As Mochizuki Hui nced at the people around him, some appearing and then fading from his view, he suddenly understood something. These people¡ªthese lives¡ªwere what he was meant to protect. join my patreon for 40+ advanced chapters: Chapter 44: Teaching, Encounter with Might Duy Chapter 44: Teaching, Encounter with Might Duy In Konoha¡¯s training grounds, two figures, onerge and one small, shed with their swords. Their iron des collided, sending sparks flying and filling the training ground with the ringing of sharp metallic sounds. Suddenly, a burst of light shed, and the two stopped their movements. ¡°Not bad. You''ve improved a lot. That sword technique you just used is quite interesting and creative. It seems you¡¯ve begun to actively develop ways to utilize the energy within you,¡± Senju Tobirama praised as he nodded with satisfaction, observing Mochizuki Hui as he sheathed his sword. This child had never once disappointed him. ¡°It¡¯s all thanks to your teaching, Grandpa Tobirama,¡± Mochizuki Hui responded. After the war ended, the fact that Senju Tobirama could take time out of his busy schedule to assess his growth and strength was a testament to how much Tobirama valued him. ¡°This isn''t something I taught you.¡± Tobirama shook his head. ¡°Hui, your strength has been growing steadily. Your taijutsu, swordsmanship, andbat experience have all improved significantlypared to before. The only thing holding you back now is likely your body,¡± Tobirama continued. During their sparring session, Tobirama had gauged Mochizuki Hui¡¯s current abilities. He was undoubtedly at the level of an elite chunin. Though "elite chunin" might sound underwhelming, it was important to remember that Mochizuki Hui was only seven years old. How many people at that age had reached such a level of strength? In all of Tobirama¡¯s life, there had only been one¡ªMochizuki Hui himself. Even his older brother, Senju Hashirama, who was hailed as the ¡°God of Shinobi,¡± had been nothing more than a weakling at the age of seven¡­ The same went for Uchiha Madara... Still, predicting a shinobi''s future was difficult. Too many factors influenced a person¡¯s growth¡ªbloodline talent, determination, mental strength, fortuitous encounters, and even the environment they grew up in. All of these could drastically shape a person''s development. As far as Mochizuki Hui was concerned, his mindset, determination, and environment were all ideal. His luck and fortuitous opportunities also seemed promising. The only issue was his bloodline talent. Since Mochizuki Hui couldn¡¯t extract chakra, he couldn¡¯t utilize many typical shinobi techniques, limiting his potential growth. However, the mysterious energy within him provided him with unseen growth potential, offering him almost limitless possibilities for the future. As long as his internal energy continued to increase, even if it didn¡¯t reach overwhelming levels, Tobirama was confident he could train Mochizuki Hui to be an elite jonin. ¡°But there¡¯s still room for improvement in your techniques. How about this? From now on, I¡¯ll personally guide you.¡± After a moment of thought, Tobirama made this suggestion seriously, catching Mochizuki Hui off guard. Senju Tobirama¡ªthe Hokage¡ªwas incredibly busy. The fact that he would take time to train Mochizuki Hui personally? Did this mean he was going to take him on as a student? Mochizuki Hui¡¯s eyes were filled with doubt as he nced at Tobirama. Seeing the suspicious look on his face, Tobirama, knowing exactly what Mochizuki Hui was thinking, couldn¡¯t help but feel a bit exasperated. He quickly rified, ¡°What are you thinking? It¡¯ll be my shadow clone doing the teaching, of course.¡± Hearing this, Mochizuki Hui realized his misunderstanding. He hadn¡¯t used any ninjutsu himself yet, so he had almost forgotten that shadow clones were a thing for shinobi. ¡°Hehe, what? I never doubted you! I¡¯ve always had full faith in you, Grandpa Tobirama!¡± Mochizuki Hui quickly retorted as he pumped his chest, identally revealing his earlier thoughts. Seeing Tobirama¡¯s amused smile, Mochizuki Hui felt a bit of dread and was about to use some charm to get out of it, but Tobirama nced at the sky, then said, ¡°It¡¯s gettingte. That¡¯s enough for today.¡± As soon as Tobirama finished speaking, his body vanished in a puff of white smoke, leaving Mochizuki Hui stunned for a moment, then darkening his expression. The training ground was on the outskirts of Konoha, far from both his home and the Senju n¡¯s residence. Tobirama could have easily taken him back using the Flying Thunder God technique, but instead left him to walk home by himself. That was definitely on purpose! All because he had a moment of doubt? So petty. Mochizuki Hui rolled his eyes but could only resign himself to walking back alone. By this time, the sky had turned orange with the setting sun, casting long shadows as Mochizuki Hui made his way down the quiet path. Suddenly, he paused. His sharp ears picked up the sound of rustling from the nearby forest. Momentster, a teenage boy emerged from the trees. He was panting heavily, drenched in sweat, and his steps were unsteady, clearly exhausted beyond his limits. ¡°One morep¡­ Just one morep¡­¡± The boy muttered to himself as he trudged forward with great effort. Though he looked as if he could copse at any moment, his legs never gave out, and he didn¡¯t stop. The boy finally noticed Mochizuki Hui as he left the forest. Slowing down, he eventually stoppedpletely, taking a moment to catch his breath. He looked at Mochizuki Hui and asked, ¡°Hey, little guy, are you lost? Do you need me to help you get home?¡± Mochizuki Hui nced at the boy¡¯s familiar yet unfamiliar face before replying, ¡°I¡¯m not lost. I¡¯m just taking a walk around the vige. Are you... training?¡± ¡°Yeah, I¡¯m training my taijutsu. I¡¯m going to be a hero just like the Hokage one day!¡± The boy replied, forcing himself to sound confident, though there was doubt in his voice. ¡°Is that so? I believe you. Someone once told me that hard work never betrays you! You¡¯ll definitely be a hero one day. Keep at it!¡± Mochizuki Hui said earnestly, then turned to leave. The boy, stood there stunned for a moment. He watched Mochizuki Hui¡¯s silhouette as it disappeared into the sunset. He stood there in a daze. After a moment, a broad smile spread across his face. He raised his thumb toward Mochizuki Hui¡¯s retreating figure and shouted, ¡°Thank you for the encouragement! My name is Might Duy, and I will definitely be the vige¡¯s hero someday!¡± join my patreon for 40+ advanced chapters: Chapter 45: Tobirama Senju’s Teachings Chapter 45: Tobirama Senju¡¯s Teachings From that day on, Mochizuki Hui began his training under the guidance of Tobirama Senju. There was no denying that Tobirama was a truly versatile shinobi, a master of ninjutsu, taijutsu, genjutsu, and kenjutsu. There was nothing he wasn¡¯t proficient in. Under his instruction, Mochizuki Hui¡¯s strength increased rapidly, though due to his physical limitations, his growth wasn¡¯t overly extreme. Even so, Mochizuki Hui was advancing quite rapidly under Tobirama¡¯s guidance. In the 17th year of Konoha, Mochizuki Hui was seven years old. That year, with the war recently concluded, the post-war responsibilities were immense. Sometimes Tobirama didn¡¯t even have enough time for shadow clones, so his teaching focused mainly on the basics, building a solid foundation for Mochizuki Hui throughout the year. In the 18th year of Konoha, after a year of nned development, the vige began to grow in an orderly manner. While there were still many vige matters to address, Tobirama had more time to teach Mochizuki Hui. That year, Tobirama primarily focused on teaching swordsmanship and taijutsu. In just one year, Mochizuki Hui¡¯s proficiency in both areas reached the level of a special jonin. In the 19th year of Konoha, Tobirama began teaching Mochizuki Hui in-depth knowledge about the nature of energy and techniques. He nurtured Mochizuki Hui¡¯s ability to analyze and utilize energy, imparting knowledge on how to create jutsu. Tobirama guided Mochizuki Hui to explore his mysterious inner energy and to develop techniques unique to him. This was crucial because, after multiple analyses, Tobirama had understood that the essence of the energy within Mochizuki Hui was light. In Tobirama¡¯s view, the energy of light held tremendous potential. If used correctly, it could rival or even surpass chakra. However, because light energy and chakra were entirely different systems, and only Mochizuki Hui could control this light energy, Tobirama couldn¡¯t directly create jutsu based on it. Instead, he passed on his experience in developing techniques, guiding Mochizuki Hui to build his own system of training. Thus, in the 19th year of Konoha, Mochizuki Hui spent the entire year studying vast amounts of knowledge. In the 20th year of Konoha, after a year of study, Tobirama had Mochizuki Hui begin creating his own techniques. He instructed Mochizuki Hui to write down the intended effects, advantages, disadvantages, principles, applications, technical difficulties, ways to ovee those difficulties, and the stages of development for each jutsu. After Tobirama reviewed these ns, Mochizuki Hui could start practising. During the creation process, Tobirama kept a close watch, ready to intervene if anything went wrong. Thus, Mochizuki Hui spent this year experimenting with jutsu creation while constantly refining his ideas. By the end of the year, Mochizuki Hui had created several useful techniques, which greatly satisfied Tobirama. Then, Tobirama shifted his focus into training Mochizuki Hui. He began nurturing Mochizuki Hui¡¯s political awareness, leadership skills, and his ability to view situations strategically. He trained him to think about the future of the ninja world, the direction of shinobi, and how the vige should develop¡ªall necessary qualities for a future Hokage. This left Mochizuki Hui speechless. He was only ten years old, and Tobirama was already making him think about such matters. It seemed far too early. Thus, Mochizuki Hui yed his trump card. ¡°Grandpa Tobirama, I think¡­ I can extract chakra now.¡± That day, Mochizuki Hui excitedly barged into the Hokage¡¯s office. As he spoke, he demonstrated by extracting chakra from his body. With a hand seal, he created a shadow clone. Tobirama was dumbfounded. He stared at Mochizuki Hui¡¯s shadow clone, sensing the chakra flowing within him, and nearly exploded. He thought, I spent three years teaching you how to establish a light energy system, and now that you¡¯ve made some progress, you¡¯re telling me you can extract chakra? For a moment, Tobirama was overwhelmed by frustration, but soon, that emotion was reced with excitement. The fact that Mochizuki Hui could now use chakra meant that his potential for growth had increased significantlypared to before. He could now learn many of Tobirama¡¯s forbidden techniques, allowing his strength to skyrocket. ¡°How did you manage to extract chakra all of a sudden? Does it conflict with the light energy in your body?¡± Tobirama asked, cautious but thrilled. He needed to understand Mochizuki Hui¡¯s situation fully to ensure there was no dangerous conflict between the two energies inside his body. ¡°I¡¯m not really sure,¡± Mochizuki Hui replied, scratching his head. ¡°I was just bored and decided to try extracting chakra using the usual method. Before I knew it, I seeded!¡± Tobirama: ¡°¡­¡± He was at a loss for words. Such an absurd thing had happened¡ªhow could this be? As a result, Mochizuki Hui found himself in an unexpected predicament. His initial reason for revealing that he could extract chakra was to avoid being taught "the basic qualities of a Hokage." He had hoped to use the excuse of learning and developing ninjutsu to dodge the political lessons. But Tobirama turned the tables on him, reasoning, ¡°Learning ninjutsu is simple, and you already have the mindset for creating jutsu. You can do both.¡± He then presented Mochizuki Hui with a tightly packed schedule, detailing tasks from morning until night. With great satisfaction, Tobirama handed the schedule to Mochizuki Hui and said, ¡°Perfect. Not a single minute is wasted. From now on, you¡¯ll follow this schedule.¡± Holding the schedule and seeing the overwhelming number of tasks, Mochizuki Hui was dumbfounded. I was so foolish. So foolish. I should never have revealed I could extract chakra. It would¡¯ve been better to secretly study ninjutsu as a hidden ace. It¡¯s not like I couldn¡¯t ess the Scroll of Seals. Why did I make such a stupid mistake? Mochizuki Huimented silently, tears welling up in his heart. join my patreon for 45+ advanced chapters: Chapter 46: Eleven-Year-Old Mochizuki Hui Chapter 46: Eleven-Year-Old Mochizuki Hui In the twenty-first year of Konoha, Mochizuki Hui felt like he was living in hell. From six in the morning until ten at night, his schedule was packed to the brim. Reminding him of his exhausting high school senior year before he transmigrated. It was terrifying! Of course, after enduring such a rigorous schedule for a year, the rewards were immense. His overall strength had seen incredible growth. In terms of ninjutsu, because he had chakra of all five basic elements, he had mastered nearly everything he could learn¡ªexcept for certain forbidden techniques like Edo Tensei (Reanimation), Shiki Fujin (Dead Demon Consuming Seal), and Tandem Paper Bombs, which Tobirama forbade him from learning. Tobirama did want Mochizuki Hui to learn the Flying Thunder God Technique, but Hui¡¯s body hadn¡¯t yet developed spatial abilities, and he couldn¡¯t sense spatial energy, so it was impossible for him to master the jutsu. Even so, Mochizuki Hui was already impressive enough. However, his limited chakra capacity constrained him. Otherwise, he would have felt invincible. But then, thinking about the ¨­tsutsuki family and the future overpowered characters, Mochizuki Hui realized he still had a long way to go. So, he decided to stay humble. Not only had his strength increased, but his knowledge had grown as well. This past year¡ªand indeed, thest few years¡ªhe had studied relentlessly, never rxing. Given his extraordinary intellect andprehension, despite being only eleven, Mochizuki Hui had amassed a vast amount of knowledge that many people wouldn¡¯t achieve in a lifetime. This was his hidden strength, but it was also a crucial part of his overall capabilities. After all, being a powerful shinobi wasn¡¯t just about raw strength¡ªintelligence, emotional intelligence, andbat experience were all equally important. One only had to look at the battle between Kaguya ¨­tsutsuki and the Sage of Six Paths-era Naruto and Sasuke to see the truth of this. If Kaguya had possessed Uchiha Madara¡¯s intelligence, emotional intelligence, and battle experience, the oue of that battle would have been very different. One evening, Mochizuki Hui sat in his home, pulling out a piece of paper to assess his current stateprehensively. Name: Mochizuki Hui Age: 11 (Born in Konoha Year 10) Power Boost: Yuan Qi (Primal Energy) Fully Assimted: Light energy, chakra. In Progress: Natural energy (Estimatedpletion: five to six years) Physical Abilities: Chakra System: Light Energy System: (Details on Light Energy techniques will be exined in the story as they appear.) Soft Skills: Vast knowledge base, equivalent to a PhD-level schr in the ninja world. Strengths: Handsome, knowledgeable, wise, calm (a thousand other merits omitted). Weaknesses: Limited energy capacity¡ªequivalent to Kakashi¡¯s chakra reserves. Overall Strength: Elite Jonin. Eleven years old and already an elite jonin. This was the assessment Mochizuki Hui gave himself, and it was confirmed by Tobirama Senju¡ªalthough not without a side eye. It was also a fair evaluation. Mochizuki Hui was now somewhat simr to the future Kakashi, proficient in all elemental ninjutsu, taijutsu, and kenjutsu. He understood everything, and was excelled in all fields. However, his limited energy capacity prevented him from fully utilizing his theoretical peak strength, which kept him ssified as an elite jonin. ¡°I never thought the thing holding back my strength would be my energy reserves. I¡¯m damn speechless,¡± Mochizuki Hui muttered to himself, feeling a bit helpless. In terms of energy, Mochizuki Hui actually had a considerable amount of Yuan Qi in his body. However, it wasn¡¯t under his control since it was still busy assimting natural energy. For now, he could only tap into a small portion of it¡ªequivalent to what he imagined was Kakashi¡¯s chakra reserves. But his avable energy was slowly increasing over time. Right now, it grew at a rate of about one "Kakashi unit" per year. ¡°Well, at least my recovery rate is good,¡± Mochizuki Hui said, somewhat satisfied. Although his usable Yuan Qi was limited, it replenished quickly. He hadpared his recovery rate with others and found that it was about five times faster than the average shinobi. This meant that if a normal ninja needed five hours to fully recover their chakra, Mochizuki Hui could do it in just one. ¡°If only my chakra recovery was as ridiculous as my stamina recovery, I¡¯d be a walking ninjutsu machine gun,¡± His stamina recovery was indeed outrageous. He had trained with Might Duy for an entire day once. By the end of it, Duy was lying on the ground like a dead dog, while Mochizuki Hui was still ready to go for another round¡ªor several. ording to Tobirama, his stamina recovery was simply monstrous. Might Duy, on the other hand, said nothing¡ªhe simply questioned his life choices. His healing rate for injuries was also fast, though not as absurd as his stamina recovery. It was about ten times faster than the average ninja. ¡°So, technically, I¡¯m stronger than Kakashi when he¡¯s in his elite jonin mode, huh? I guess I could say that. But I wonder if I¡¯m at kage level yet¡­¡± Mochizuki Hui murmured to himself before summoning a small me in his palm and burning the piece of paper. This was a jutsu he performed without hand seals. Actually, it couldn¡¯t even be called a proper jutsu¡ªit was a direct use of chakra without seals as a medium. After all, real shinobi don¡¯t need hand seals~ Of course, because it was a direct use of chakra, or maybe because his chakra came from a different source, the power was much smaller. ¡°I finally have a day off tomorrow. I should spend it with Tsunade,¡± Mochizuki Hui said, a soft smile forming on his face as he thought of her. join my patreon for 45+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 47: Sarutobi Hiruzen’s Troubles Chapter 47: Sarutobi Hiruzen¡¯s Troubles It was another sunny day, with a clear blue sky, white clouds driftingzily, and a light breeze that would normally make anyone feel at ease. But for Sarutobi Hiruzen, it was far from that. He sat alone on a bench at the training grounds, staring absentmindedly at his three students in the distance. Orochimaru was focused on practicing his ninjutsu, and the ground in front of him asionally softened into a swamp. This sight filled Sarutobi with pride. Orochimaru was a genius, the kind that appeared once in a hundred years, and to Sarutobi, he was... the second-greatest genius he''d ever seen. Yes, the first would be that little monster, Hui, whom Tobirama-sensei had been training. Orochimaru had incredible talent. Orochimaru would quickly grasp everything Sarutobi taught him. And not only was he talented, but Orochimaru also had ambition, ideals, and an unyielding determination. His future aplishments were bound to be significant. When Sarutobi thought of Orochimaru, his heart was filled with satisfaction, with no worries whatsoever. With a content smile on his face, Sarutobi then turned his gaze toward his second disciple, Tsunade, who was deeply focused on chakra control exercises. Tsunade, being the granddaughter of the First Hokage, was naturally gifted. Her talent was anything but mediocre; in fact, it was outstanding. She mastered ninjutsu quickly, and she would grasp anything she was taught with ease. Moreover, Tsunade''s mental strength and sense of responsibility were simply remarkable. Although she was currently absorbed in her feelings for someone, she was far from being a lovesick fool. She could restrain herself and focus on what needed to be done. Sarutobi had no worries about Tsunade either. In his eyes, she, too, was destined for great things. This disciple made him equally proud. And then¡­ Sarutobi¡¯s eyesnded on his third disciple¡ªJiraiya, who was lying on the ground, looking bored. asionally, Jiraiya would have a sly grin, likely thinking about something inappropriate. Sarutobi''s expression darkened, though it was also tinged with helplessness. This disciple... wasn''tcking in talent. But his attitude was the problem. Jiraiya was careless,zy, and extremely stubborn. He didn''t act like a shinobi at all, and it was clear hecked the resolve and discipline expected of one. To make matters worse, Jiraiya''s ultimate dream as a ninja was to win the hearts of all the pretty girls! This gave Sarutobi constant headaches. Yet, despite all of Jiraiya''s shorings, Sarutobi couldn''t bring himself to just let his disciple continue down this idle path. After all, Jiraiya was his student, and they shared... rather simr interests. (Peeking at pretty girls in the bath?) Ahem. Regardless of Jiraiya''s ws, Sarutobi couldn''t bear to watch his disciple waste his talent and end up as an average, unremarkable ninja. So, Sarutobi had a special fondness for Jiraiya, hoping to guide him. He had observed that Jiraiya seemed tock a clear goal to motivate him. With that in mind, Sarutobi decided to give Jiraiya something to strive for. He summoned his contract beast, the Monkey King Enma, and introduced Jiraiya to the world of summoning¡ªexining that it was a space-time ninjutsu. This unusual and incredibly mysterious technique immediately caught Jiraiya''s interest. Seizing the opportunity, Sarutobi carefully taught Jiraiya. And Jiraiya did not disappoint. He quickly memorized the hand signs for the summoning jutsu, showing great potential. For a while, Jiraiya became dedicated to his training, driven by this new goal. However, it was short-lived. Jiraiya''s true aspiration¡ªwinning over the hearts of beautiful women¡ªremained his primary focus. The monotony of long training sessions,bined with theck of immediate results, gradually drained his enthusiasm, and he soon returned to hiszy habits. This caused Sarutobi''s already recovering headache to re up once more. Sigh. He let out a deep sigh, racking his brain over how to give Jiraiya asting goal¡ªsomething that would push him to stay focused and train diligently over the long term. "Sensei, why the long sigh? That doesn''t seem like the confident, optimistic Sarutobi-sensei I know." A pleasant voice interrupted his thoughts, causing Sarutobi''s body to tense briefly before quickly rxing again. There was no need to turn around¡ªhe already knew who it was. "Ah, it''s Hui. Youe here every day on your breaks to apany Tsunade. You''re quite the dedicated boyfriend," Sarutobi remarked, looking at Mochizuki Hui sitting beside him. His tone was light, but internally, he was full of admiration. Not surprising at all. Mochizuki Hui, the most talented youth Sarutobi had ever seen, seemed to have grown even stronger in the past month. It was getting to the point where Hui was close to matching him in power. And Hui was only eleven years old. His brilliance was enough to leave others in despair. Moreover, Hui''s excellence wasn''t limited to hisbat strength¡ªhe excelled in every aspect. Other than his limited chakra capacity, Hui had no weaknesses. Sarutobi couldn''t help but think, If Hui were my student... no, I don''t even deserve to be his teacher anymore. In some areas, like creating jutsu and understanding their nature, Hui surpasses me. "Well, Tsunade is the most adorable girl, so I can''t help but spend time with her," Mochizuki Hui said yfully before his expression shifted to one of curiosity. "But, Sarutobi-sensei, what¡¯s troubling you so much? I can''t imagine something that would cause you to sigh like that." Sarutobi, being a student of the Second Hokage, was known for his skills and widely respected judgment. People often said he was the most likely candidate for the Third Hokage position, so it was hard to imagine anything troubling him. "It''s because of Jiraiya," Sarutobi exined. He then shared Jiraiya''s current situation, hoping Hui, with his brilliant mind, might offer a solution. After listening, Mochizuki Hui nced at Jiraiya lying on the grass, asionally grinning mischievously, and he began to ponder. If his memory served correctly, in the original story, Jiraiya had always been like this in his early years. The turning point in Jiraiya¡¯s life came when he tried to win Tsunade''s heart. After overhearing her say she¡¯d rather choose Orochimaru than him, Jiraiya was determined to win her over. In his desperation, he attempted a summoning technique without having made any contracts, which led him being reverse-summoned to Mount Myoboku. Mount Myoboku was the ce that changed Jiraiya¡¯s destiny. But now, due to Tsunade¡¯s rtionship with Mochizuki Hui¡ªand the dynamic between Hui and Jiraiya¡ªJiraiya had no romantic aspirations for Tsunade, which left him without a goal. This was why, even at eleven years old, Jiraiya remained aimless and unmotivated. "I think I can help with that. I have an idea we could try," Mochizuki Hui said, his eyes lighting up with a n. Since Jiraiya had lost his motivation because of Hui¡¯s influence, it was only fair that Hui be the one to help awaken Jiraiya¡¯s drive. join my patreon for 45+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 48: A Mission for Jiraiya Chapter 48: A Mission for Jiraiya After quickly discussing his n with Sarutobi Hiruzen, Mochizuki Hui made his way over to Tsunade. At the time, Tsunade was fully focused on controlling her chakra and waspletely immersed in her training, leaving her clueless of Hui¡¯s arrival. On the other hand, Orochimaru had already noticed Hui¡¯s presence but didn¡¯t react much. He was used to seeing Huie to apany Tsunade, and it no longer surprised him. Plus, he was a bit far from where Hiruzen and Hui were talking, so he couldn¡¯t hear their conversation, he assumed it was just ordinary chatter. As for Jiraiya, he was still lost in his daydreams, sprawled on the grass with a goofy grin on his face. After a while, Tsunade finished her training and looked up, spotting Hui gazing at her fondly from not too far away. "Hui!" she eximed happily, rushing over and jumping into his arms, hugging him tightly. Her joyful shout snapped Jiraiya out of his fantasies. He sat up, looking at the affectionate disy between Tsunade and Hui, pouting while his eyes filled with envy. I wish I had a beautiful girl rushing into my arms too... he thought bitterly. "Hey, enough with the lovey-dovey stuff! There are other people here, you know!" Jiraiya shouted at the pair, his voice filled with mock annoyance. Tsunade reluctantly let go of Hui and shot Jiraiya an icy re before wrapping her arms around Hui¡¯s again. "Grandpa Tobirama is too much! He only gives you one day off a month, it¡¯s like he¡¯s some heartless Hokage!" Tsunadeined as she clung to Hui. Sarutobi Hiruzen, standing nearby, chuckled awkwardly at thement but remained silent. After all, Tobirama was his teacher, but he was Tsunade¡¯s grandpa. "Alright, alright, it will get better soon. My training is almost done," Hui said, gently patting Tsunade¡¯s head, his voice full of warmth. Tsunade¡¯s face lit up with a smile at his words, clearly happy. Meanwhile, Jiraiya¡¯s heart ached even more. Sweet, sweet love, when will it be my turn? he thought. "Oh, right! Tobirama-sensei asked me to deliver this mission to you guys," Hui said, pulling a scroll from his ninja pouch and handing it to Sarutobi. This immediately caught the attention of both Jiraiya and Orochimaru, while Tsunade groaned dramatically, "Ugh, I want to spend time with Hui! I don¡¯t want to go on a mission!" Pretending not to hear Tsunade¡¯sint, Sarutobi opened the mission scroll and after reading it, he spoke to the group, "It¡¯s a D-rank mission to find a lost item. The objective is to retrieve a heart-shaped red stone that was lost." He continued, "The stone was lost somewhere within five kilometers of the vige along the main road and around Mokusei Lake." Hearing this, Jiraiya¡¯s face fell, and he immediately began toin, "Ugh, not another boring mission like this! What¡¯s the big deal about finding some dumb rock?" Hui smiled at his reaction and exined, "Oh, I heard that the stone is a treasured keepsake of a girl. She nned to give it to her future sweetheart. She went to Mokusei Lake yesterday and only realized she had lost it when she returned, so she¡¯s really anxious about it. That¡¯s why she requested a mission." "Wow, that¡¯s so romantic! Hui, should I prepare a gift for you like that too?" Tsunade¡¯s eyes sparkled as she looked up at Hui. "Hahaha, no need for that," Hui replied warmly. "Because you are the best gift I could ever receive." Tsunade blushed, her face turning a deep shade of red from his sweet words. Meanwhile, Jiraiya scoffed loudly and muttered, "Which desperate woman came up with such a childish idea?" Hui retorted, "Desperate woman? Not at all! From what the mission officer said, she¡¯s a beautiful sixteen-year-old girl!" That immediately caught Jiraiya¡¯s attention. His eyes widened, and his demeanor changed in an instant. A sixteen-year-old... beautiful girl... The words repeated in his mind, sending his imagination into overdrive. In his mind¡¯s eye, he was already picturing himself finding the red stone, handing it over to the girl, and seeing her gaze at him with adoration. Then... Lost in his fantasy, Jiraiya¡¯s mouth began to water. His face suddenly became serious as he dered, "Sarutobi-sensei, we mustplete this mission without dy! Let¡¯s get going right away!" He was already pushing Sarutobi along, eager to set off. Orochimaru shot Hui a strange look, as if sensing something off about this situation, but he couldn¡¯t quite put his finger on it. As for Tsunade, she was too busy asking Hui whether he thought that girl was prettier than her. And so, the group bantered and joked as they made their way toward the vige gate. It was a simple task¡ªsearching for a lost object within a five-kilometer radius of the vige, along the main road, and near a smallke. There wasn¡¯t much need for preparation. After all, it was a peaceful time, and this was a D-rank mission with virtually no danger of encountering enemies. Passing through the vige gate was uneventful. Though the guards on duty were Uchiha n members, they didn¡¯t question anything when they saw that Sarutobi Hiruzen was leading the team on the mission. As soon as they stepped out of the gate, Jiraiya quickly spoke up, "Sarutobi-sensei, you guys can search along the main road. I¡¯ll take care of the area around Mokusei Lake! No time to waste, let¡¯s go!" Before anyone could object, Jiraiya had already sprinted off in the direction of theke. It wasn¡¯t hard to guess that the stone had likely been lost around theke while the girl was ying, so that¡¯s where Jiraiya wanted to search first. Sarutobi and Hui exchanged knowing nces, with Orochimaru looking at them suspiciously. Their n proceeding exactly as intended. join my patreon for 45+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 49: The Show Begins Chapter 49: The Show Begins ¡°Where is it, where on earth is that red heart-shaped stone?¡± Jiraiya muttered to himself as he searched the shores of Mokusei Lake. ¡°Damn it, I can¡¯t find it anywhere. Maybe it fell on the main road?¡± After searching for about ten minutes, Jiraiya plopped down on the grass, thinking that perhaps he had been looking in the wrong ce. He didn¡¯t notice a shadow swiftly passing behind him. ¡°Jiraiya, did you find the mission item yet?¡± A few minutester, a voice called out from a distance. Jiraiya looked up and saw Mochizuki Hui walking towards him. Seeing Hui, Jiraiya assumed that Sarutobi-sensei had sent him to ¡°protect¡± him. Seriously? Hui isn¡¯t that much stronger than me! Why does Sarutobi-sensei keep saying how great he is? Jiraiya fumed internally but merely rolled his eyes outwardly. Hui quickly approached Jiraiya, ready to put his n into action. ¡°Nope, nothing. It¡¯s probably over where Sarutobi-sensei and the others are searching,¡± Jiraiya said with a shrug, getting up and preparing to head toward the main road. ¡°Is that so? But the item is far more likely to be around here. That¡¯s odd.¡± Hui raised an eyebrow, then shot Jiraiya a skeptical look. ¡°You weren¡¯t cking off, were you? I saw you sitting around from a distance.¡± Jiraiya¡¯s heart skipped a beat, but he quickly shot back, ¡°Of course not! I¡¯ve already searched everywhere! That stone definitely isn¡¯t here!¡± He spoke with confidence, a smug look on his face. Hui, however, rolled his eyes. ¡°Yeah, right. I don¡¯t believe you for a second. Whatever, I¡¯ll search myself.¡± With that, Hui began to search in earnest. ¡°Damn it! I told you, I was serious about looking!¡± Jiraiya shouted, but internally he was panicking. What if Hui actually finds the stone? After all... I didn¡¯t really search that thoroughly, Jiraiya thought, feeling even more anxious. He quickly started searching again. If the stone was really here, he needed to find it first, then drop it on the main roadter, pretending it had been there all along. As Hui pretended to search for the stone, he caught a glimpse of Jiraiya out of the corner of his eye and smirked internally. The fish took the bait. Jiraiya, now genuinely searching, eventually wandered into the forest near theke. Suddenly, something red caught his eye under a tree. His eyes lit up, and he hurried over to it. From afar, Hui noticed Jiraiya¡¯s reaction and called out, ¡°Jiraiya, did you find the mission item?¡± He started walking in Jiraiya¡¯s direction. Seeing Hui approaching, Jiraiya panicked and quickly turned to him. ¡°No, no! There¡¯s nothing here!¡± Hui¡¯s face showed obvious disbelief as he quickened his pace towards Jiraiya. Panicking even more, Jiraiya quickly thought of an idea. He took a few casual steps, then suddenly eximed, ¡°Oh! I think it¡¯s here!¡± He sprinted toward the red object. Hui¡¯s expression changed, and he sped up, shouting, ¡°Watch out! Don¡¯t get near that stone!¡± Jiraiya froze for a moment, and then he heard the unmistakable sound of shuriken whizzing through the air. Shhhhick! Shhhhick! Shhhhick! Jiraiya¡¯s face turned pale as he saw several shuriken flying toward him. Instinctively, he bolted from the forest. Behind him, a masked man holding a kunai emerged, chasing after him. ¡°Die, brat!¡± A low growl came from behind, making Jiraiya¡¯s heart pound wildly as adrenaline surged through his veins. ¡°Shunshin no Jutsu!¡± Hui¡¯s voice echoed from behind Jiraiya, and suddenly, Hui appeared between Jiraiya and the masked attacker. However, because of the brief stiffening effect of using Shunshin, Hui couldn¡¯t dodge or block the kunai aimed at Jiraiya. Thwack! The sound of a de piercing flesh echoed. Jiraiya turned around just in time to see Hui standing with his arms spread out, shielding him. The masked ninja¡¯s kunai had stabbed deep into Hui¡¯s back! Before Jiraiya could even process what had just happened, Hui, despite his injury, grabbed Jiraiya and pulled him forward, dragging him away from danger. Once they had gained some distance, Hui shoved Jiraiya behind him, kunai in hand, ring coldly at the masked ninja. ¡°It¡¯s an Anbu from another vige! How dare you attack Konoha ninjas? What, are you trying to start a war?¡± Hui¡¯s voice was icy, and blood continued to seep from his back. With his other hand, hidden from view, Hui discreetly signaled Jiraiya to run. But Jiraiya stood there frozen, staring at the blood pouring from Hui¡¯s back in horror. ¡°Start a war with Konoha? Hahaha! If I kill the two of you and leave no witnesses, who¡¯s going to know it was me?¡± The masked Anbu sneered, his tone filled with mockery. ¡°To fall for such a simple trap, you two must be fresh academy graduates. ¡°Still, you¡¯re quite sharp, kid. Using the Shunshin no Jutsu¡ªKonoha¡¯s young genius, huh? Killing you will surely make your vige grieve and rage, hahaha!¡± Hearing this, Jiraiya¡¯s heart tightened. Hui, however, calmly asked, ¡°I¡¯m curious. How did you know our mission objective? How did you know we were searching for a red stone?¡± The masked ninja burst intoughter, looking smugly at Jiraiya. ¡°Thanks to a certain foolish brat who practically handed me that information on a silver tter.¡± Jiraiya¡¯s face flushed crimson with embarrassment. join my patreon for 45+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 50: Perhaps I Can’t Fight Alongside You Anymore Chapter 50: Perhaps I Can¡¯t Fight Alongside You Anymore Yes, it was Jiraiya himself who had carelessly mentioned their mission objective, giving the masked ninja the opportunity to set a trap. As Jiraiya thought about it, a wave of guilt washed over him. "And Konoha has fallen so low that even kids like you can graduate? You can¡¯t even smell the blood in the air." The masked Anbu continued his taunts. Though hidden behind a mask, Jiraiya could almost see the mocking expression in his eyes. "Oh, and by the way, why don¡¯t you stop hiding your hand behind your back? I bet you were signaling your idiot friend here to run for help, right? Not that it matters. He¡¯s too dumb to have noticed." The ninja''s words not only intensified Jiraiya''s guilt but also stoked a rising fury within him. Hui, unfazed by the taunts, calmly withdrew his hand and addressed Jiraiya, "Jiraiya, I¡¯ll hold him off. You should go get help." Before Jiraiya could respond, the masked ninja burst intoughter again. "Hold me off? You¡¯re dreaming. Maybe you would have had a chance if you weren¡¯t injured. But now? There¡¯s no way you¡¯re getting out of here alive." The ninja then turned to Jiraiya, adding, "You¡¯re quite the lucky charm for me, kid. If it weren¡¯t for you, I wouldn¡¯t have been able to deal with you two this easily." These words only deepened Jiraiya¡¯s guilt and ignited his anger. ¡°You bastard! Hui, you go get help! I¡¯ll hold him off!¡± Jiraiya shouted, charging toward the masked ninja with nothing but his bare fists. ¡°Jiraya!¡± Hui called out. And then... Thud! The ninja effortlessly kicked Jiraiya, sending him flying through the air. Hui quickly caught him mid-flight, preventing a harsh fall. "Jiraiya, only I can hold him off. You''re not strong enough," Hui said, setting Jiraiya down gently. He stepped forward, standing between Jiraiya and the attacker, his back still bleeding. "Go get help, now!" Hui ordered before dashing forward to engage the ninja, kunai in hand. ng! ng! ng! Hui and the masked ninja exchanged rapid blows, their kunai shing and sparking with each impact. ¡°Damn it! How is this brat so strong?!¡± the masked ninja grumbled, clearly not expecting Hui to put up such a fight. ¡°I guess it¡¯s lucky you¡¯re already wounded. Today, the so-called genius of Konoha dies here!¡± Hui fought back fiercely, blood still pouring from the cuts on his body. ¡°Jiraiya, go find Sarutobi-sensei! My survival depends on you!¡± Hui shouted, his voice strained as the battle wore on. From a distance, Jiraiya trembled. He wanted to rush forward and help his friend, but a voice of reason echoed in his head. If I jump in now, I¡¯ll just be a burden. I¡¯m too weak... ¡°Just wait for me! I¡¯ll be back!¡± Jiraiya screamed, tears in his eyes as he forced his battered body to rise and sprint toward the main road, seeking help. ¡°Damn it!¡± he cursed, hearing faint angry shouts from behind as he ran. As Jiraiya disappeared into the distance, Hui and the masked ninja paused their fight. ¡°By the way, does this make me the toughest Shadow Clone in the ninja world after taking so many kunai to the body?¡± the masked ninja asked. ¡°Talking to yourself again? Good thing I heal fast, or I wouldn¡¯t have dared to pull off such an act. If Jiraiya doesn¡¯t change after this, all of this will have been for nothing,¡± Hui muttered, wincing as he felt the sting from his injuries. After all, all of the wounds were real. Meanwhile,pletely unaware of the truth, Jiraiya ran as fast as he could, his mind in turmoil. He suppressed all his chaotic emotions¡ªfear, guilt, frustration¡ªand focused only on one thing: finding Sarutobi-sensei. ¡°Sarutobi-sensei! Where are you?!¡± Jiraiya shouted with all his strength as he ran, his voice trembling. He had never felt such desperation in his life. The teacher who always seemed to hover nearby was nowhere to be found now when he needed him most. Jiraiya¡¯s emotions¡ªfear, guilt, frustration, and anger¡ªswirled together, overwhelming him. At longst, what felt like an eternityter, he heard a response. ¡°Jiraiya, what¡¯s wrong?¡± The voice came from a distance, but it was like music to Jiraiya¡¯s ears. He turned around and sprinted toward Sarutobi Hiruzen. In his frantic rush, he stumbled, falling hard on the ground. His hands and knees scraped, but he felt no pain. ¡°Sensei! Hurry! Hui¡¯s holding off an enemy! He¡¯s buying us time!¡± Jiraiya blurted out in a panic. Sarutobi¡¯s face grew serious. He quickly pulled Jiraiya up. ¡°Where? Lead me to him, now!¡± Meanwhile, back in the forest, Hui sensed Sarutobi and Jiraiya approaching. He immediately resumed the act with his Shadow Clone, engaging in another intense battle. The two shed fiercely once again, right as Sarutobi and Jiraiya arrived. They saw Hui, bloodied and pale, barely holding on as he fought. Seeing Sarutobi¡¯s arrival, the masked ninja immediately fled, vanishing into the forest. Sarutobi quickly spoke, ¡°Jiraiya, take Hui to the hospital. I¡¯ll chase down the enemy!¡± Without waiting for a response, Sarutobi sprinted after the fleeing ninja. Jiraiya hurried to Hui¡¯s side, catching him just as he copsed. Hui, now utterly exhausted, weakly gazed at Jiraiya and spoke in a barely audible voice, ¡°Jiraiya, do you remember the graduation exam five years ago? I told you that if you could keep that same will you showed then, I would acknowledge you¡­¡± He coughed, his voice faltering. ¡°Since that day¡­ I¡¯ve always looked forward to fighting by your side. But as time went on, you disappointed me, and I thought¡­ I had been wrong about you. ¡°But today¡­ I see that you still have that same will deep inside you. ¡°If you channel that will into your training¡­ I will acknowledge you once more.¡± Hui¡¯s voice grew weaker and weaker, his strength fading. ¡°But it¡¯s a shame¡­ we may never¡­ fight together¡­ again¡­¡± With those final words, Hui¡¯s body went limp as he copsed into Jiraiya¡¯s arms. ¡°Huuiii!¡± Jiraiya screamed in despair, his voice echoing through the forest. Lying in Jiraiya¡¯s arms, Hui feigned unconsciousness, thinking to himself, Looks like everything went ording to n. join my patreon for 50+ advanced chapters: Chapter 51: Return Chapter 51: Return The n that Mochizuki Hui and Sarutobi Hiruzen came up with for Jiraiya was a sess. This incident left asting impression on Jiraiya, forcing him to truly recognize the importance of strength and the fundamental qualities of being a ninja. It made him understand what it meant to be a ninja. After all, it was a lesson learned from almost losing apanion, a lesson that would be deeply etched into his memory. From that point forward, Jiraiya became serious. He never wanted to experience that feeling of helplessness and despair again. He wanted to one day stand shoulder to shoulder with Mochizuki Hui, rather than relying on Hui to risk his life to cover for him. This time, Mochizuki Hui was only "seriously injured," but what about next time? Next time, it might not only be Mochizuki Hui; it could be his other friends too. Next time, it might not just be an injury but death. The thought of such a possibility weighed heavily on Jiraiya¡¯s heart. He didn''t want to be a burden anymore. The next time they faced a situation like this, he wanted to be the one left behind. It was a transformation of the heart. While it couldn''t change Jiraiya overnight, his newfound focus and determination were visible to the naked eye. This shift in Jiraiya brought great relief to Sarutobi Hiruzen. In private, Sarutobi even expressed his gratitude to Mochizuki Hui. Meanwhile, Mochizuki Hui took advantage of the opportunity during this "performance" and enjoyed his time resting in Konoha Hospital, indulging in good food and rxation for days on end. In fact, he was sofortable that Tobirama Senju himself could no longer tolerate it. In the Hokage¡¯s office, Tobirama Senju sat at his desk, his eyes shing with a cold gleam as he read through thetest intelligence reports. Four years had passed since thest war ended. Four years were enough time for many people to forget certain memories. But as the Hokage, the leader of Konoha, Tobirama could never forget the issues that surfaced during thest Shinobi World War. For example, the surrounding small countries! While the previous Shinobi World War had primarily been a battle between the five great viges, numerous small viges either actively participated or were dragged into the conflict, with almost all of them getting involved. These small viges weren¡¯t necessarily the most dangerous¡ªafter all, their individual power was negligible in therger conflict. But the real threat came from those who remained neutral. During the height of the war, when the great viges were evenly matched and the battlefield was in a delicate bnce, the decisions of these neutral viges could tip the scales. They were the hidden dangers of war! If Tobirama hadn¡¯t dispatched the ANBU forrge-scale assassination operations during thest conflict, the oue of the war might have been very different. Tobirama kept this in mind. In his view, these small viges were unnecessary. Or rather, only a few of them were necessary. Tobirama recalled a conversation he had with Mochizuki Hui some time ago, where Hui had said: ¡°No one knows when the next war might break out. It¡¯s best to have a buffer zone between the great nations.¡± Tobirama had wholeheartedly agreed with that statement. Having direct borders between great nations increased the chances of conflict, making it hard to maintain peace along their frontiers. It was far better to have one or two small nations act as a buffer zone, a neutral space where conflict could unfold in times of peace. When war did break out, these small countries could be the battlefield, keeping the violence away from the homnds of the great nations. Even though people might feel a sense of guilt for allowing the destruction to happen on foreign soil, humans are inherently selfish. As long as it¡¯s not happening to them, most people wouldn¡¯t care enough to intervene. So, these small nations did serve a purpose. But the rest¡­ in the future, the Shinobi world wouldn¡¯t need so many small countries! Tobirama had waited four long years. Four years was enough time for these smaller nations to lower their guard and forget their fear of the Land of Fire and Konoha. It was also enough time for Konoha to recover from the war and train a new generation of highly skilled ANBU operatives. Tobirama nned to use the ANBU to eliminate these small nations one by one. Of course, openly attacking other nations during peacetime wouldn¡¯t look good¡ªit would seem like an act of tyranny. And it wouldn¡¯t reflect well on Konoha¡¯s image. If it¡¯s something dishonorable, then it¡¯s better to let the people in the shadows do it. The ANBU were nameless, faceless agents of the dark. When they wiped out these small nations, what would that have to do with Konoha? As for getting caught, all of the five great viges had their own ANBU divisions. Who could prove it was Konoha¡¯s doing? No proof, no case! ¡°Notify Mochizuki Hui. He is to report back to the ANBU tomorrow. Also, I¡¯m promoting him to captain of the First Unit, Fourth Squad." Tobirama¡¯s voice cut through the quiet room. "And transfer those two promising rookies to his squad.¡± ¡°Yes!¡± a voice responded from the shadows¡ªa hidden ANBU operative. Tobirama picked up a dossier from his desk. It detailed all the information he had on Mochizuki Hui. ¡°Hui, if you want to be Hokage, you¡¯ll need to show a ruthless determination. ¡°Your strength, your mind, everything about you, makes you a great candidate for Hokage. ¡°But if youck the courage to face the darkness and make the hard decisions, then you¡¯ll never be more than just an exceptional ninja. ¡°This is your test. Don¡¯t disappoint me.¡± Tobirama stared at the picture of Mochizuki Hui, speaking quietly to himself. join my patreon for 50+ advanced chapters: Chapter 52: New Teammates in Awe Chapter 52: New Teammates in Awe Sunlight streamed through the window of Mochizuki Hui''s home, casting light on the ANBU equipment and appointment letterid out on the table. Sitting beside the table, Mochizuki Hui stared into space, his eyes slightly dazed. "Fourth Squad..." Four years had passed, and in that time, Hui had lived under the sun, blending into the life of an ordinary ninja. It almost made him forget that he was still a member of the ANBU. After all, who would choose to live in darkness when they could walk freely in the light? "It seems the reckoning is about to begin." Muttering to himself, Mochizuki Hui began to put on his gear. Once fully dressed, he looked into the mirror, seeing his own delicate features, a small smile ying on his lips. But that smile slowly faded. It was as if, with that smile, he was bidding farewell to the peaceful life in the light. He then slowly lifted the white mask and ced it on his face, gazing at the single exposed eye in the mirror. "From now on, I am... ¡®Light.¡¯" ... It wasn''t the abandoned training ground anymore. With the expansion of Konoha Vige, that area had been repurposed and transformed into the vige''s Training Ground Four. Now, they were in a training ground situated deep in the forest behind the ANBU base¡ªa clearing that had been slightly modified to serve as an ANBU practice ground. At that moment, Mochizuki Hui and Lightning were casually chatting. "Who would''ve thought? After four years, you''re returning to the ANBU. This ce isn¡¯t exactly the best ce to be." Mochizuki Hui looked at Lightning as he spoke. Despite the passing years, Den''s physique hadn''t changed much. After all, he was already in his twenties four years ago. "Returning? Light, you¡¯ve got it wrong. The Fourth Squad was never disbanded. We¡¯ve always been members of ANBU¡¯s First Division, Fourth Squad." Lightning replied seriously, though there was a hint of a smile beneath his mask as he looked at the young man before him. ¡°Lightning-senpai, you must have rejoined ANBU just to avoid your family¡¯s pressure to get married! Come on, you¡¯re already twenty-three. You should be finding a girlfriend and settling down, noting back to a ce like ANBU. I bet your parents are furious with you." Lightning froze for a moment, and then a dark expression crossed his face. In the past four years, Mochizuki Hui and Lightning had gotten to know each other¡¯s real identities and had be good friends. Lightning¡¯s real name was Uzuki Ryokawa, from Konoha¡¯s small Uzuki n, though Hui still called him Lightning. ¡°Light, that¡¯s going too far! What do you mean, avoiding marriage? And what¡¯s with the ¡®already twenty-three¡¯? Don¡¯t you know how to talk properly?!¡± Lightning retorted, his face darkening further. The youth standing before him was suddenly not so adorable anymore! Mochizuki Hui was about to tease Lightning further, but he stopped and changed the subject. ¡°Our rookies have arrived.¡± He sensed two distinct chakra signatures approaching their location. Sure enough, not long after, two ANBU figures emerged from the forest. They were about the same height, with one having silver-white hair and the other, jet-ck. ¡°I¡¯ve been assigned to ANBU¡¯s First Division, Fourth Squad as of today. My name is Hatake Sakumo. Please take care of me.¡± The silver-haired one spoke first. From his voice, he sounded around sixteen or seventeen years old. Given his name and his hair, Mochizuki Hui immediately knew who he was. This was Hatake Sakumo, the future legend known as the "White Fang of Konoha," and also the father of the yet-to-be-born Kakashi. Hui remembered him from a dangerous mission they had once shared as young ninja. ¡°I¡¯m also joining ANBU¡¯s First Division, Fourth Squad today. My name is Takahara Shuhei. Please take care of me!¡± The ck-haired man introduced himself next. His voice suggested he was around twenty years old. After their introductions, Mochizuki Hui stepped forward and spoke. ¡°I¡¯m the captain of ANBU¡¯s First Division, Fourth Squad. My codename is Light.¡± Lightning followed suit. ¡°ANBU First Division, Fourth Squad. Codename: Lightning.¡± After Lightning spoke, Mochizuki Hui continued, ¡°For the sake of future missions, you should both choose your codenames. But first, let¡¯s share our strengths so we can coordinate better.¡± At this moment, Hatake Sakumo was staring at Mochizuki Hui in disbelief. Light¡ªthere was no way he could forget that codename. Not only had he never forgotten it, but it was also because of their past battles together that he had recently chosen to join the ANBU. Sakumo hade to the ANBU partly in search of Light. But he had never imagined that this young boy standing before him was the very same person from his memories. As for Takahara Shuhei, he waspletely stunned. The captain of their squad... was a mere eleven or twelve-year-old kid?! ¡°As captain of the Fourth Squad, I¡¯ll go first,¡± Mochizuki Hui began. ¡°My codename is Light. I¡¯m proficient in all nature transformations, basic ninjutsu, taijutsu, kenjutsu, genjutsu, sensory techniques, and shurikenjutsu. ¡°I possess the ¡®Light Release¡¯ kekkei genkai, and my strength is at the j¨­nin level.¡± He paused before adding, ¡°My weakness is my limited chakra reserves...parable to Hatake Sakumo¡¯s chakra capacity.¡± Once Mochizuki Hui finished, the entire forest seemed to fall silent. Lightning was still somewhat surprised, though he had sparred with Mochizuki Hui many times and knew that Hui was an all-around exceptional ninja. But Hatake Sakumo and Takahara Shuhei were in shock. Behind their masks, their mouths hung open, eyes wide in disbelief. All attributes? All-around? J¨­nin level...? This all sounded way too absurd! He was only an eleven or twelve-year-old boy! ¡°I guess I¡¯ll go next. My codename is Lightning. I specialize in Lightning, Water, and Wind Release ninjutsu. I know some basic genjutsu but I¡¯m not very good at taijutsu. In terms of strength... I¡¯d say I¡¯m at the tokubetsu j¨­nin level.¡± Lightning¡¯s words snapped Hatake Sakumo and Takahara Shuhei out of their stupor. join my patreon for 50+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 53: ANBU Assembly Chapter 53: ANBU Assembly ¡°I¡¯ll use... hmm, what should my codename be?¡± Hatake Sakumo frowned slightly, clearly unsure about what to choose. But Mochizuki Hui cut in with a suggestion. ¡°Your weapon is a white short de, sharp like a fang. Why not call yourself ¡®White Fang¡¯¡ªKonoha''s White Fang?¡± Hatake Sakumo was startled for a moment before a smile spread beneath his mask. ¡°My codename is White Fang. I specialize in kenjutsu using my chakra short de. I can use ninjutsu across several elements, taijutsu, and a bit of genjutsu, though I¡¯m not particrly skilled in any of them. My chakra reserves are limited. As for my strength... I¡¯d say I¡¯m at the Tokubetsu J¨­nin level.¡± With his introductionplete, the three others turned their attention to Takahara Shuhei. Feeling a bit awkward, Takahara Shuhei''s lips twitched beneath his mask before he spoke. ¡°I¡¯ll go with ¡®Hunter¡¯ as my codename. I¡¯m good at sensory and tracking techniques, and I can use Earth Release ninjutsu. I¡¯m bad at taijutsu, genjutsu, and I can¡¯t use kenjutsu at all... As for my strength, I¡¯m a bitcking since I¡¯m only an elite ch¨±nin.¡± His voice grew quieter toward the end. Takahara Shuhei had thought his rank as an elite ch¨±nin would put him in the upper middle ranks within ANBU. But nothing could have prepared him for joining a squad like this! Look at his squadmates¡ªwhat kind of monstrous team was this?! A squad leader who was barely eleven or twelve years old, already a j¨­nin-level all-rounder. An old hand in the squad, skilled in three elemental releases, at the Tokubetsu J¨­nin level! And the other neer? A master of kenjutsu, also a Tokubetsu J¨­nin! A j¨­nin and two Tokubetsu J¨­nin in a single squad? Was this really just an ANBU team? ¡°Alright, since we¡¯ve gotten to know each other a bit, we¡¯ll meet at the ANBU base entrance at 6 AM tomorrow. If there¡¯s nothing else, you¡¯re dismissed,¡± Mochizuki Hui said, ncing at his three teammates. Lightning shrugged, indicating he had no issues. Hatake Sakumo and Takahara Shuhei also expressed their agreement. Mochizuki Hui nodded at Sakumo, acknowledging the recognition between them before leaving with Den. Sakumo smiled beneath his mask, realizing that this ¡°Light¡± was indeed the same ¡°Light¡± he had once fought alongside. His decision to join ANBU seemed to be paying off. ¡°Well, I¡¯ll head back too. See you tomorrow!¡± Sakumo said to Takahara Shuhei, then vanished in a flicker using the Body Flicker Technique. This left Takahara Shuhei standing alone, feeling conflicted. ¡°But still... at least having strong teammates should make missions much easier,¡± he muttered to himself after a long pause, before heading off as well. Meanwhile, on the path back, Mochizuki Hui teased Lightning, ¡°Such a shame... I was expecting them to ask for a little sparring session to ¡®get to know each other better,¡¯ don¡¯t you think?¡± Lightning immediately understood that Hui was poking fun at their first meeting, where Hui had used shurikenjutsu to defeat him in their sparring match. With a nostalgic smile, Den replied, ¡°Brat, you still remembering that, huh?¡± ¡°Of course. That¡¯s something I¡¯ll never forget,¡± Mochizuki Huiughed. If Bear and Wind were still around, they¡¯d surely be teasing Lightning about that moment too. ¡°Tomorrow¡¯s mission day, huh? I better go say goodbye to Tsunade. See you tomorrow, single guy!¡± Mochizuki Hui said with a smirk before disappearing with the Body Flicker Technique. Lightning was left standing there, dark lines forming on his forehead as he shouted at the direction Hui had vanished into. ¡°Damn brat! You¡¯re not cute at all!¡± ... The next morning, at 6 AM, before the sun had risen. Many people were still sleeping, but a few stood diligently at attention in the open space outside the entrance to the ANBU base. The ANBU base was carved into a massive mountain, and to enter it, one had to traverse a long tunnel. Blue-green lights lined the tunnel, casting an eerie glow. At that moment, on the open ground outside the base entrance, all the ANBU members stood in orderly rows, their eyes fixed on the steps above where the Second Hokage, Senju Tobirama, stood. There were far more ANBU present than just seventy members. As previously mentioned, ANBU was divided into four divisions, each consisting of four squads, with four members per squad. This meant each division, including its captain,prised seventeen people, for a total of sixty-eight across the divisions, plus the ANBUmander and deputy, making seventy in total. But now, the ANBU numbered in the hundreds! This was because, due to the special wartime circumstances and Senju Tobirama''s efforts to train more ANBU, the organization had expanded to eight divisions. Each division now had ten squads, with four members per squad. So, eight divisions, including their captains, amounted to 328 people, plus the two ANBUmanders, making 330 in total! Gathered here were 330 elite ninja! It was also thanks to this mass recruitment that Hui¡¯s Fourth Squad now consisted of members with families and ns, leaving only him as the orphan... From the high steps, Senju Tobirama surveyed the ANBU members below with a satisfied nod before speaking. ¡°These are your mission scrolls. Inside, you¡¯ll find the targets for your assignments. ¡°Remember, your mission is simple: in order to avoid exposing Konoha, you are to use any means necessary to destroy your targets!¡± As he spoke, Tobirama¡¯s tone turned cold, carrying an unmistakable edge of killing intent. The chill in his voice, coupled with the orders themselves, made it clear to every ANBU member present that their uing missions would be soaked in blood. Having delivered his instructions, Tobirama used the Flying Thunder God Technique to disappear, leaving the rest to the ANBUmanders. Once Tobirama had departed, the ANBUmander stepped forward, his gaze sweeping over the crowd below. The ANBU deputy began distributing mission scrolls to each division captain. Once all the captains had their scrolls, themander spoke again. ¡°The details for your missions are in your scrolls. Review your assignments and create your ns. All squads are to depart by noon. Dismissed!¡± With those final words, all the ANBU members disappeared in a flurry of Body Flicker Techniques. Of course, they didn¡¯t just scatter¡ªeach division went to their respective gathering points. The First Division¡¯s meeting point was in a certain section of the forest behind the ANBU base¡ªa secluded area, much like the ones used by the other divisions for their own gatherings. The purpose of this assembly? To discuss the mission details assigned to each division, and to break down the tasks for each squad. join my patreon for 50+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 54: Strategy Chapter 54: Strategy The First Division had ten squads, each consisting of four members, making forty people in total, including the division captain, which brought the number to forty-one. They all gathered swiftly at their designated meeting point. Everyone wore masks, standing in ten neat rows, with the squad captains standing at the front. The Division Captain''s gaze swept over the assembled members, pausing momentarily on Mochizuki Hui. In fact, it wasn¡¯t just the captain; nearly all the ANBU members from the First Division were discreetly ncing at the four members of Squad Four. After all, Squad Four was something of a legend. For four years, despite not being fully staffed, it had never been disbanded, nor had it received any new members. Moreover, ever since the end of thest war, Squad Four''s only mission had been to guard the Hokage¡ªan assignment they had held continuously without interruption. But none of the ANBU members who had also been assigned to protect the Hokage had ever actually seen the members of Squad Four in person. Squad Four was the only squad not under the control of the division captain or even the ANBUmanders¡ªit reported directly to the Hokage and was exempt from participating in ANBU meetings. For four years, Squad Four had remained out of sight, bing something of a myth within ANBU. No one knew who its members were, or how many there were. But now, with this mission, the legendary Squad Four had reappeared, and it was no wonder they drew so much attention. And with their squad leader appearing to be a mere child, their curiosity only deepened. ¡°Alright, let''s go over our mission for the First Division,¡± the Division Captain said, his eyes sweeping over the gathered ranks. ¡°Our task, as outlined in the mission brief, is to destroy a country.¡± His words caused several of the ANBU members to stiffen, many of them drawing sharp breaths. No wonder the Second Hokage, Senju Tobirama, had spoken with such cold detachment and killing intent earlier¡ªthis mission wasn¡¯t just about taking down a vige; it was the destruction of an entire nation. ¡°The country we are to destroy is the Land of the Moon, located between the Land of Fire and the Land of Earth.¡± The Division Captain continued, ¡°Based on the intel we¡¯ve gathered, the Hidden Moon Vige within the Land of the Moon has one elite j¨­nin, three j¨­nin, forty-five ch¨±nin and elite ch¨±nin, and an unknown number of genin. ¡°You have one hour to prepare. After that, meet at Point 12 in the vige. Dismissed!¡± With those instructions, the ANBU members scattered to gather whatever supplies they needed for the mission. Mochizuki Hui returned to prepare as well, although there was little he needed to gather. He had already known about this mission beforehand. Senju Tobirama had once posed a political question to him, a hypothetical scenario about international rtions, and the topic was uncannily simr to this mission. Back then, Hui had suggested that wiping out certain smaller nations, while leaving others as buffers between therger powers, would be the most strategic approach. He had also proposed manipting these buffer nations into bing allies and informants, serving as eyes and ears against other major nations. That question had been posed earlier this year, and the moment Hui saw it, he had understood Tobirama¡¯s intent. It also shed light on why the Land of Fire had grown sorge inter years and why there were so few nations left in the world. It was all thanks to the Second Hokage¡¯s strategy. Mochizuki Hui didn¡¯t feel particrly interested in the political ramifications, nor did he harbor any resentment towards the mission. The behavior of these smaller nations during thest Great Ninja War had already sealed their fate. An hour passed quickly, and the First Division reassembled, ready for their mission. Five dayster, the First Division reached the border of the Land of Fire. They didn¡¯t immediately storm into the Hidden Moon Vige, as that would have been pointless. Their task was not simply to destroy a vige; they had to dismantle an entire country. After all, they couldn¡¯t realistically kill every citizen of the Land of the Moon, nor could they hope to conquer an entire nation with only forty-one people. ¡°I suggest we start by destroying the Hidden Moon Vige. Once the vige is eradicated, we can assassinate the Daimyo of the Land of the Moon, which would essentially render the country powerless,¡± one of the squad captains suggested during a meeting held in a cave. ¡°I think we should incite internal conflict within the country, gain control over several key generals, and have them turn against each other. By dividing them from within, we could tear the country apart,¡± said another squad captain. ¡°I suggest...¡± Each captain proposed their ideas in turn, but Mochizuki Hui remained silent in the corner, quietly observing the discussion. The Division Captain, noticing this, specifically addressed him. ¡°Squad Four Captain, Light, what do you think?¡± he asked, drawing everyone¡¯s attention toward Mochizuki Hui. There was a mixture of curiosity and anticipation in their eyes. After all, Squad Four was legendary¡ªANBU¡¯s most unique squad. Everyone was eager to see what kind of person led such a remarkable team. Mochizuki Hui had anticipated being asked for his opinion. He nced at the group before calmly stating his n: ¡°To destroy a nation, the most effective strategy is to use the power of another country. ¡°The Land of Fire cannot directly attack the Land of the Moon¡ªthat¡¯s the baseline. So, our target should be the neighboring country, the Land of Trees. ¡°I believe we should first create internal chaos within the Land of the Moon, then leak information to the Land of Trees, prompting them to dere war. ¡°Once the war begins, we must ensure that the Land of Trees gains the upper hand but leave the Land of the Moon with enough hope to keep fighting. ¡°Hope is what will drive them to seek help from the Land of Fire. ¡°At that point, we guide the Land of the Moon to offer concessions in exchange for aid¡ªterritory, resources, or even poption. ¡°The key is ensuring that their request for help remains secret at first. Only after the Land of Fire''s forces arrive should the Land of the Moon make their plea for assistance public. ¡°Meanwhile, the Land of Trees, eager to avoid drawing attention from other nations and hoping to im the Land of the Moon for themselves, will refrain from seeking help from outside powers. ¡°The Land of Fire will naturally ept the plea for aid; that part doesn¡¯t require our interference. ¡°Our job is to ensure that, just as the Land of Fire¡¯s forces begin to make a difference but before they can solidify their position, we assist the Land of Trees in swiftly conquering the Land of the Moon. ¡°This will give the Land of Fire a reason to retaliate against the Land of Trees, allowing them to annex both countries in one fell swoop. ¡°That¡¯s my proposal.¡± When he finished speaking, the entire cave fell into a stunned silence. join my patreon for 50+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 55: The Plan in Motion Chapter 55: The n in Motion "What about the Hidden Moon Vige?" Someone quickly voiced the question, noting that the n had not ounted for how the Hidden Moon Vige should be dealt with. The others also turned their gaze toward Mochizuki Hui. Under his mask, Hui¡¯s lips curled into a small smile before he began speaking, ¡°Ninja viges have always depended on the nations they serve. The Hidden Moon Vige will have two choices in the midst of this internal conflict. ¡°First, they could choose a side, aligning themselves with one of the factions. ¡°Or, they could remain neutral and wait for the civil war to end, pledging allegiance to whoever emerges victorious. ¡°But regardless of which option they choose, it won¡¯t affect our n much. ¡°If the Hidden Moon Vige pledges itself to one faction, then we¡¯ll simply pose as rogue ninjas hired by the opposing faction. ¡°If the vige itself bes divided, with different factions backing different sides, let them tear each other apart. ¡°And if the Hidden Moon Vige chooses to remain neutral, they will be forced to fight against the Tree Nation once our n reaches the stage where the Tree Nation invades the Moon Nation. ¡°When the Fire Nation intervenes and the Moon Nation copses, whatever the Hidden Moon Vige wants to do by then will be too little, toote. ¡°The only thing we need to ensure is that the Hidden Moon Vige remains unaware that all of this is being orchestrated behind the scenes. ¡°As for wiping out the Hidden Moon Vige? That would only alert them unnecessarily, and I don''t rmend it. ¡°Once the Moon Nation falls and the Fire Nation steps in, everything will be settled. Without the Moon Nation to support them, the Hidden Moon Vige will just be a group of wandering ninjas within the Fire Nation¡¯s territory. ¡°I think we all know what happens to wandering ninjas within a nation''s borders.¡± Why does it seem like some people can think so deeply and n so far ahead? Staring at Mochizuki Hui¡¯s small frame, the gathered ANBU members were internally shaken. Some were even feeling a bit ufortable. If they could, they would have probably said, "You''re making us look useless!" ¡°An excellent strategy! Now, based on Squad Four¡¯s captain¡¯s proposal, let¡¯s discuss any suggestions or improvements,¡± the Division Captain said with admiration in his voice. It was clear that the reputation of Squad Four hadn¡¯t disappointed him. ¡°I agree with the strategy proposed by Squad Four¡¯s captain.¡± ¡°I do as well.¡± ¡°We can discuss the finer details.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s go with his n!¡± One by one, the squad captains voiced their agreement, fully supporting Mochizuki Hui¡¯s proposal. ¡°Since we¡¯re all in agreement, let¡¯s refine the specifics and proceed with the n,¡± the Division Captain concluded. ... In the Moon Nation, inside a high-ranking official¡¯s estate. This official was a general with military power,manding a strong force. Four years had passed since thest Great Ninja War, and the Moon Nation had long since returned to a state of peace. For those four years, the general had lived infort. But every now and then, the memory of his failed power grab still gnawed at him. He had been so close to seizing the position of Daimyo back then¡ªjust a little more and he would have seeded. But in the end, he had failed. If not for his control over thousands of soldiers, he might have been killed in the power struggle. Today, however, a mysterious guest arrived at the general¡¯s estate. This guest was supposedly a man of great talent who had initially sought to offer his services to the Daimyo, hoping to fulfill his political ambitions. However, after being humiliated by a minor official in the Daimyo¡¯s court, he left in anger and turned to the general for support instead. The general received the man warmly, and after a lengthy conversation, they found they shared simr views and aspirations. They quickly became allies. Soon after, secret orders began circting. The general¡¯s army started moving. Two dayster, the general¡¯s forcesunched a surprise attack on several towns loyal to the Daimyo, employing blitzkrieg tactics. Before the Daimyo¡¯s forces could respond, the general had already captured several key locations. The news spread like wildfire, and the Daimyo was furious. In response, the Daimyo¡¯s loyalists began their counterattack, and civil war broke out within the Moon Nation. The sudden conflict left the Hidden Moon Vige in a state of confusion. They had always dealt with foreign ninja viges, and now an internal war had erupted¡ªwho were they supposed to help? Some suggested aiding the Daimyo in suppressing the rebellion, while others advocated supporting the general to reshape the country. But the leader of the Hidden Moon Vige quelled all these voices, deciding to remain neutral and await the oue, while watching which side offered better incentives. The Moon Nation was a small country. Therger nations had no interest in involving themselves in such a minor internal conflict¡ªthey simply didn¡¯t care about this backwater ce. But the neighboring Tree Nation thought differently. Under the influence of certain officials, the Daimyo of the Tree Nation was persuaded tounch an invasion of the Moon Nation. War erupted as the Tree Nation attacked, and the already strained Moon Nation, weakened by its civil war, struggled to defend itself. They were forced into negotiations, temporarily uniting to fend off the external threat. This development put the Hidden Moon Vige in a tough spot. They had nned to profit from both sides of the internal conflict, but with the Tree Nation¡¯s invasion, their position had be awkward. Faced with no choice, the Hidden Moon Vige fullymitted itself to the fight against the Tree Nation, intending to send a message to both the Daimyo and the general: ¡°We may stay out of your internal struggles, but when ites to external threats, we don¡¯t hesitate.¡± With the Hidden Moon Vige now fully engaged, the Moon Nation was able to stabilize the battlefield somewhat. Although they were still at a disadvantage, they hadn¡¯t yet lost hope. At this critical juncture, the mysterious man advising the general proposed a new strategy: seek aid from the Fire Nation and be prepared to make some sacrifices. ¡°As long as we can destroy the Tree Nation, anything we sacrifice can be reimed from them, and more,¡± the man had said. This idea resonated with both the general and the Daimyo. If they could borrow the strength of the Fire Nation to crush the Tree Nation, their territory would expand significantly, and they could avoid further infighting. Thus, an emissary from the Moon Nation was dispatched to the Fire Nation, seeking aid. In response, after receiving the message from Mochizuki Hui, Senju Tobirama began to act. He worked with the Fire Nation¡¯s Daimyo to squeeze as many concessions as possible from the Moon Nation. In the end, a treaty was signed. In exchange for ceding somend and poption, the Moon Nation asked the Fire Nation to secretly send reinforcements. With everything in ce, the n moved into its final phase. Fire Nation forces, including ninja squads, quietly made their way into the Moon Nation. Mochizuki Hui, having received confirmation of the Fire Nation¡¯s involvement, began the next step of his n: assisting the Tree Nation in destroying the Moon Nation once the Fire Nation¡¯s troops had entered and the Moon Nation had publicly announced the arrival of their reinforcements. That day, the ten squads of the First ANBU Division began their mission of assassinating key figures within the Moon Nation. join my patreon for 50+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 56: Instant Kill Chapter 56: Instant Kill Since the founding of the Five Great Ninja Viges, the nature of warfare between nations had gradually changed. Ninjas became increasingly pivotal in wars, and with the outbreak of the First Shinobi World War, battles between nations had essentially turned into battles between their ninja viges. In the war between the Moon Nation and the Tree Nation, the conflict between the Hidden Moon Vige and Hidden Tree Vige had be especially critical. While the civil war in the Moon Nation drained the strength of its regr military forces, the Hidden Moon Vige remainedrgely unscathed. It was only after the Hidden Moon Vige joined the fray that the Moon Nation was able to temporarily halt its decline and gain a glimmer of hope. Mochizuki Hui and his team¡¯s task was to shatter that hope and assist the Tree Nation in swiftly destroying the Moon Nation. Their objective was clear: eliminate the key figures of the Moon Nation. These key figures included not only the Daimyo and the general but also the ninjas from the Hidden Moon Vige, especially the two elite jonin. Mochizuki Hui¡¯s squad, Fourth Squad, was specifically assigned to eliminate the Hidden Moon Vige¡¯s leader, the sole elite jonin¡ªHayakawa Bo. As the leader of the Hidden Moon Vige, Hayakawa Bo resided in the most secure location within the vige: the main ninja base. In the ongoing war between small viges like the Hidden Moon and Hidden Tree, tactics and strategy were practically non-existent. The entire force of both sides simply gathered and shed in open battle¡ªafter all, theirbined forces barely amounted to a couple hundred ninjas, so dividing them for strategic maneuvers would only lead to their downfall. Killing Hayakawa Bo within the Hidden Moon Vige¡¯s base was an exceedingly difficult task, unless all of Konoha''s ANBU moved together. But such arge-scale operation would undoubtedly alert the Hidden Tree Vige. If the Hidden Tree Vige discovered a mysterious and powerful force at y, they would likely realize that everything was a setup, throwing Mochizuki Hui¡¯s n into chaos. Thus, under the leadership of the First Division¡¯s ANBU, both the Daimyo and the general of the Moon Nation issued a secret order to Hayakawa Bo, instructing him to meet with ninjas from Konoha and coordinate an effort to eliminate the Hidden Tree Vige. Receiving this order, Hayakawa Bo suspected nothing. He discreetly set off with three chunin, aiming to meet the supposed Konoha ninjas. What Hayakawa Bo didn¡¯t know was that, at the very spot where he was to meet the Konoha ninjas, Mochizuki Hui and the Fourth Squady in wait. It was a bright day, with blue skies and scattered white clouds¡ªa pleasant weather that seemed to uplift the spirit. As Hayakawa Bo leaped through the forest with his three chunin, eager to reach the rendezvous point, he couldn¡¯t help but feel excited. The prospect of working with Konoha to crush the Hidden Tree Vige filled him with anticipation. However, a sudden sense of unease stopped him in his tracks. ¡°Who¡¯s there?!¡± Standing on arge tree branch, Hayakawa Bo adopted a defensive stance and called out, his voice sharp. His three chunin, sensing the same danger, spread out around him in a defensive formation, scanning their surroundings. Then, from the shadows of the forest, four masked figures emerged. ¡°ANBU? Which vige are you from?¡± Hayakawa Bo¡¯s wariness deepened as he eyed the masked ninjas whose attire revealed nothing of their origin. These four were, of course, Mochizuki Hui and his team. One of the mission¡¯s key requirements was to ensure that no evidence could link the attack back to Konoha or the Fire Nation, so they wore non-standard gear. ¡°Attack,¡± Mochizuki Hui ordered, without bothering to respond to Hayakawa Bo¡¯s question. The moment he spoke, Lightning, Kakashi¡¯s father Sakumo, and Hunter¡ªformerly known as Takahara¡ªrushed toward the three chunin, leaving Hayakawa Bo to Mochizuki Hui. Mochizuki Hui himself didn¡¯t move. He simply gazed at the Hidden Moon Vige leader, who remained perched on his tree branch above. ¡°Could this be a trap set by the Hidden Tree Vige? Perhaps they have reinforcements we didn¡¯t anticipate,¡± Hayakawa Bo muttered, watching the youth below him closely. From the boy¡¯s stance, it was clear that he was the leader of the group. Yet, despite his youth, this boymanded such authority¡ªeither his background was exceptionally high, or his strength was far beyond ordinary. As Hayakawa Bo analyzed the situation, he stole a nce at the battle unfolding between his men and the intruders. Within seconds, his breath hitched. One of his chunin had already been taken down, and the other two were barely holding on. It made sense. After all, they were up against two elite jonin and one special jonin¡ªthere was simply too much of a gap in strength. Still unaware of the extent of the enemy¡¯s capabilities, Hayakawa Bo was only able to conclude that these four were incredibly skilled. ¡°We¡¯ve already requested reinforcements from Konoha! The Konoha ninjas are just up ahead. If you dare continue attacking us, be prepare for their retaliation!¡± Hayakawa Bo bluffed, hoping to intimidate the attackers as he prepared to flee. These enemies were clearly formidable, and with his three chunin about to fall, even as an elite jonin, he didn¡¯t like his odds in a four-on-one fight. The best course of action was to escape. He turned toward the direction of the supposed rendezvous point with Konoha¡¯s forces. But before he could make his move, the boy below him acted first. In one fluid motion, the youth leaped into the air, his hand resting on the hilt of his sword. He charged forward like a samurai poised to deliver a fatal strike. Seeing this, Hayakawa Bo¡¯s eyes lit up, and he quickly leaped backward to create distance. As he did so, he kept his eyes trained on the boy while rapidly forming hand seals. "Silver Moon!" Hui called out, seeing the hand signs, a faint smile forming beneath his mask. ¡°How foolish.¡± In an instant, his sword shed out of its sheath, unleashing a brilliant arc of silver light. A massive, crescent-shaped de of energy shot forth, resembling the pale glow of a rising moon. ¡°Fire Release: Great Fireball Technique!¡± Hayakawa Bo had finished his seals just in time, spitting out an enormous fireball, three to four meters in diameter, intending to engulf Mochizuki Hui mid-air. This technique had always worked well against closebat fighters like swordsmen. If the boy couldn¡¯t get close, he¡¯d be helpless. But Hayakawa Bo had underestimated his opponent. Though Mochizuki Hui¡¯s energy reserves were limited, against a single opponent, conserving energy wasn¡¯t necessary. This attack was infused with 80% of his total light energy. The silver crescent effortlessly cleaved the fireball in two, its sheer power stunning Hayakawa Bo. Before he could even react, the crescent de of light passed through him, bisecting him in an instant. As Hayakawa Bo¡¯s severed body fell, his wide, disbelieving eyes locked onto the youth who had just killed him. Mochizuki Hui calmly sheathed his sword as he descended through the remnants of the fireball,nding gracefully on a nearby branch. Hayakawa Bo, leader of the Hidden Moon Vige, elite jonin was in in a single strike. join my patreon for 50+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 57: The Four Great Nations in Shock. Chapter 57: The Four Great Nations in Shock. With a single sword strike, Mochizuki Hui had effortlessly killed Hayakawa Bo. The scene was so terrifying that the two remaining chunin from the Hidden Moon Vige, who were barely holding their ground, were overwhelmed with fear. In their panic, they exposed fatal weaknesses, allowing Sakumo Hatake and Takahara to swiftly eliminate them. "That was incredible, Captain! ording to the intel, Hayakawa Bo was an elite jonin!" Takahara eximed excitedly after dispatching his opponent, his gaze toward Mochizuki Hui filled with newfound respect. Even though Mochizuki Hui had introduced himself as an immensely skilled and versatile young ninja, witnessing him take down an elite jonin in a single blow was a shocking experience. "It wasn''t that difficult. He let his guard down, thinking I was just an ordinary swordsman without any ranged abilities," Mochizuki Hui said casually as he leaped down from the tree. He showed no sign of excitement, as if he had just taken down a mere genin rather than an elite jonin. "No, even though he was careless, an elite jonin¡¯s reaction time is incredibly sharp. That you killed him in one strike... it¡¯s mostly thanks to your exceptional swordsmanship, right?" Sakumo Hatake marvelled, deeply impressed. After so many years, he had once again witnessed Mochizuki Hui¡¯s deadly precision¡ªa single attack that resulted in instant death. Both times, the strike had been nothing short of breathtaking. "It''s not just the swordsmanship," Lightning chimed in with a knowing smile. "When you¡¯re on missions with Mochizuki Hui, you¡¯re going to witness a lot more surprises." Having worked with Mochizuki Hui the longest, Lightning had long since learned that this young ninja was a prodigy, constantly defying expectations with his brilliance. "Alright, let¡¯s clean up the battlefield. The situation in the Moon Nation is nearing its end, but I have a feeling there are more missions ahead," Mochizuki Hui remarked, signaling the others to begin tidying up the site. Meanwhile, it wasn¡¯t just Mochizuki Hui and his squad who were on the move¡ªother ANBU members were also carrying out targeted assassinations of the key figures within the Moon Nation. At the same time, Mochizuki Hui¡¯s team, disguised as Hayakawa Bo, ryed a message to the Moon Nation¡¯s Daimyo and general, falsely informing them that they had sessfully contacted the Konoha ninjas and were ready tounch an attack on the Hidden Tree Vige. Upon receiving this message, the Moon Nation¡¯s Daimyo and general made an official announcement to the public, iming that they had secured the assistance of the Fire Nation by offering territory in exchange. They dered their intent to destroy the Tree Nation, further stating that the Fire Nation''s forces, along with Konoha¡¯s ninja, had already entered the Moon Nation¡¯s territory. They warned surrounding nations not to interfere, lest they be caught in the crossfire. This promation sent shockwaves through the region. The Tree Nation was filled with fear, while the neighboring small nations were equally astonished. None of them had anticipated that the Moon Nation would devise such a cunning n, secretly allying with the Fire Nation. But before these small nations could fullyprehend the situation, events took an even more dramatic turn. On the very day the Moon Nation announced its alliance with the Fire Nation, the Tree Nationunched a surprise attack. Before the Fire Nation¡¯s forces could officially enter the battlefield, the Tree Nation¡¯s army decisively crushed the Moon Nation¡¯s military, defeated the ninjas of the Hidden Moon Vige, and killed the Moon Nation''s Daimyo. The Tree Nation promptly dered the Moon Nation¡¯s destruction. The abruptness of this event stunned everyone. Up until that point, the war between the two nations had been marked by only minor advantages for the Tree Nation, yet this sudden assault had resulted in the Moon Nation¡¯splete obliteration! Following the Moon Nation¡¯s downfall, the Tree Nation immediately sent emissaries to the Fire Nation to negotiate peace. They even offered to transfer the territory and poption that the Moon Nation had promised to the Fire Nation as part of their earlier agreement. The Tree Nation was even willing to cede half of the Moon Nation''snd to appease the Fire Nation. But it was toote. The Fire Nation, citing the destruction of its ally, the Moon Nation, as justification, dered war on the Tree Nation. Faced with one of the Five Great Nations, the Tree Nation stood no chance. Moreover, Mochizuki Hui and the ANBU were already inside the Tree Nation, sowing chaos from within. And so, to the astonishment of the surrounding small nations, and before the Land of Earth could even react, the Fire Nation swiftly annihted the Tree Nation. The Fire Nation then seamlessly annexed both the Moon Nation and the Tree Nation, absorbing theirnds into its own. This sudden expansion left the Land of Earth in a state of panic. Fearing that the Fire Nation might take advantage of its momentum to invade their territory, the Land of Earth hurriedly prepared to deploy troops to its borders. But before they could fully mobilize, they realized that the Fire Nation¡¯s army had already withdrawn, leaving only a small garrison at the newly established border. There appeared to be no intention of further conquest. This unexpected withdrawal left the Land of Earth perplexed. However, as they investigated further, the truth began to emerge. The Land of Earth¡¯s intelligence operatives discovered that mysterious ninjas had been causing upheaval in several small nations, engaging in acts of sabotage and political subversion. Before they could identify the origin of these mysterious forces, yet another small nation was overthrown, this time by one of its neighboring countries. After the conquest, the Fire Nation appeared once again, stepping in to im the newly acquired territory. The puzzle pieces finally fell into ce. While the Fire Nation¡¯s actions were publicly justified and carried out under the guise of righteousness, it became clear to the other Four Great Nations that the Fire Nation was methodically annexing the surrounding small countries. The identity of the mysterious ninja forces became apparent as well¡ªKonoha¡¯s ANBU. Once the truth dawned on them, the other Four Great Nations delved deeper into their investigations and discovered a troubling pattern. Every small nation that had been targeted was either aligned against the Fire Nation during the previous war or had shown inclinations to oppose the Fire Nation in the future. The Fire Nation was systematically eliminating potential threats. Moreover, the small nations that were being annexed upied strategically valuable locations¡ªterritories that were easy to defend and difficult to attack. By securing these areas, the Fire Nation was ensuring that in any future war, the other Great Nations would be unable to quickly breach its borders, unlike in the previous Shinobi World War. "Quickly! Deploy the ANBU and seize control of those small nations!" Realizing Konoha¡¯s intentions, the other Great Nations couldn¡¯t remain idle any longer. However, they didn¡¯t deploy their main armies to directly invade the small nations, as that would likely drive the smaller countries to seek refuge with the Fire Nation. Additionally, any overt military action could lead to the smaller nations forming an alliance against the Great Nations, and possibly trigger the outbreak of the Second Shinobi World War. Instead, the other four nations followed Konoha¡¯s lead, sending their own ANBU units to secretly intervene and destabilize the small nations. Thus, while the surface of the shinobi world seemed calm, beneath the tranquil facade, a storm was brewing. If the First Shinobi World War had been a straightforward sh between the Five Great Nations, this new conflict was shaping up to be a shadow war¡ªa covert battle between the ANBU units of the Five Great Viges. join my patreon for 50+ advanced chapters: Chapter 58: Hunt the Iwagakure ANBU! Chapter 58: Hunt the Iwagakure ANBU! Ever since thest Shinobi World War, where Konoha stood against thebined might of the other four great nations and emerged victorious, the leaders of those defeated viges had been in deep reflection. After retreating in disgrace, the Kage of the four viges pondered: why, even after the death of the God of Shinobi, Hashirama Senju, were they still unable to defeat Konoha, despite their superior numbers? While it was clear that Tobirama Senju was incredibly strong, he didn¡¯t possess the overwhelming, near-invincible strength of his elder brother, Hashirama. Then, after careful analysis, they realized the truth. Their defeat wasn¡¯t solely due to Tobirama¡¯s strength, but because all of Konoha¡¯s shinobi were remarkably formidable. In this recent war, Konoha¡¯s ninja had demonstrated superior tactical prowess,bat effectiveness, execution, and unity¡ªqualities that far surpassed those of the shinobi from the other four viges. What stood out even more was the performance of Konoha''s lower- and mid-ranked ninja, who hadpletely outssed their counterparts. When the high-level powerhouses were evenly matched, it was the performance of the mid- and lower-level forces that tipped the scales in battle. Victory or defeat in many small-scale skirmishes had snowballed into Konoha¡¯s victory. And then there was the ANBU. Konoha¡¯s elite ANBU force, while not necessarily brimming with powerhouse members, had yed a significant role in the war¡¯s oue. So, after returning to their viges, the four nations began infiltrating Konoha to gather intelligence, to learn its systems, and to replicate its methods. Four years had passed since then, and each of the four great viges had established their own ninja academies and formed their own ANBU units. They had started creating new tactics and strategies based on the unique abilities of their shinobi. Now, upon learning of Konoha¡¯s recent strategy of neutralizing the small nations around them, the other four nations followed suit, sending their own ANBU to start eliminating potential threats. Suddenly, the shinobi world was thrown into turmoil. Waves of political and military upheaval swept through the smaller nations. Meanwhile, Mochizuki Hui and his team from the First Division had sessfullypleted their mission. But as expected, a new mission had already been delivered. This time, the target was once again a smaller nation, but instead of immediate destruction, the goal was to form an alliance. Failing that, they were to annihte it. At the end of the mission briefing, there was an additional instruction: "Eliminate any ANBU from other viges whenever possible!" This sentence made it clear to Mochizuki Hui and his team that the mission had just be far moreplicated. "Other vige ANBU, huh? This should be interesting," Lightning remarked as the Fourth Squad moved through the trees toward their target. His tone carried an air of nonchnce, and it was clear he wasn¡¯t taking the other viges'' ANBU seriously. After all, in his eyes, Konoha¡¯s ANBU was the best. The other viges were merely trying to copy what Konoha had already perfected. "I¡¯m sure we¡¯ll run into them soon enough," Mochizuki Hui responded with a slight smile. In truth, he was also excited. It wasn¡¯t arrogance that spurred him on¡ªit was a desire to grow through battle. As his power and experience grew, so did his ambition. He no longer just sought to quietly bide his time and improve. Now, he wanted to test his strength against worthy opponents. Real growth only came through real battles. Even legends like Hashirama Senju and Madara Uchiha had achieved their strength through countless deadly skirmishes. "I have a feeling that after this mission, Captain Hui will be a name known throughout the shinobi world!" Takahara eximed as he leaped through the trees alongside his teammates. Over time, he had be a devoted follower of Mochizuki Hui,pletely in awe of his strength and wisdom. "I think so too. The name ¡®Light¡¯ will one day strike fear into the hearts of many," Sakumo Hatake added, nodding. As a skilled swordsman himself, he had sparred with Mochizuki Hui once and knew all too well the vast gap between them. Mochizuki Hui¡¯s swordsmanship, particrly his mastery of sword-based energy techniques, had greatly inspired him. "Definitely," Lightning chimed in with a grin. "Light is destined to shine like the sun, bing a figure no one in this world can ignore!" Listening to his teammates¡¯ praise, Mochizuki Hui could only shake his head. These seemingly cold, aloofrades were really just a bunch of goofballs at heart, throwing cringeworthy lines left and right. "Let¡¯s focus on the task at hand for now," Mochizuki Hui said. "This mission is different from thest one. Our goal isn¡¯t to destroy the Land of Fogpletely but rather to secure an alliance with the Land of Fog, turning them into our eyes against the Land of Earth." "But it¡¯s highly likely that the Iwagakure ANBU have a simr mission¡ªto form their own alliance with the Land of Fog." "If that¡¯s the case, our mission will most likely involve direct confrontation with the Iwagakure ANBU. Only the victor will have the right to decide the Land of Fog¡¯s fate." Mochizuki Hui¡¯s analysis was calm and rational. He had already anticipated theing sh. "An ANBU showdown, huh? Let¡¯s see whoes out on top," Lightning replied confidently after hearing Mochizuki Hui¡¯s assessment. "Typically, ANBU squads areposed of four elite chunin or one jonin leading three elite chunin," Sakumo Hatake pointed out. "But our squad consists of one elite jonin, two special jonin, and one elite chunin¡ªan absolute powerhouse team." "And both Hunter and the Captain are skilled in sensory and tracking ninjutsu," he continued, clearly excited. "So, I think we should take the initiative and go hunt down the Iwagakure ANBU." "Agreed!" Takahara¡¯s eyes gleamed with enthusiasm. "If we¡¯re going to fight anyway, let¡¯s make the first move!" "Great idea," Lightning added, also showing his approval. "Given the strength of our squad, the Iwagakure ANBU won¡¯t know what hit them." Mochizuki Hui paused for a moment, considering the n, before nodding in agreement. "Indeed. With our team¡¯s strength, we can venture deeper into the Fog Nation, close to the Earth Nation¡¯s border, and directly infiltrate the Iwagakure ANBU¡¯s territory." "With our sensory capabilities, we¡¯ll have no trouble choosing the right targets and avoiding any ambushes." "In that case," he continued with a confident smile, "I agree with White Fang¡¯s proposal." "Finally! I¡¯ve been itching for a proper fight for a while now!" Lightning eximed with excitement. "Alright, then," Mochizuki Hui dered, his eyes sharp with determination. "Target: The Fog Nation, near the Earth Nation¡¯s border. Mission: hunt the Iwagakure ANBU. Let¡¯s move out!" This time, the Fourth Squad had already parted ways with the rest of the First Division, giving Mochizuki Hui full autonomy over their actions. The hunt was on. join my patreon for 50+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 59: The Slaughter Begins, Shadow Clone Chapter 59: The ughter Begins, Shadow Clone [Tl/n: I''ll be tranting Takahara Shuhei''s name as ''Hunter'' even when narrating to avoid confusion from now on unless the narrative or conversation explicitly uses his name. I''ll alternate between Hatake Sakumo and White Fang though, since he''s an established character.] In the border region of the Land of Fog, close to the territory of the Land of Earth, an Iwagakure ANBU squad was moving swiftly through the forest. It was a typical ANBU team, consisting of four members. Their masks and uniforms indicated that they were from Iwagakure, and it was clear that they had only recently entered the Land of Fog, as they had not yet swapped their identifiable uniforms for more discreet attire. "Captain, are we up against Konoha''s ANBU this time?" asked one of the members, his voice sounding like he was in his twenties. "Yes, it''s Konoha¡¯s ANBU. Be extremely cautious. I''ve encountered them before... They''re tough to deal with," the squad leader replied, his expression darkening beneath his mask as he recalled previous encounters with Konoha¡¯s elite forces. "I can''t wait to fight them already!" another member chimed in, his excitement barely contained. Iwagakure¡¯s ANBU had been established because of Konoha''s ANBU. Many of their techniques and strategies were modelled directly after Konoha''s methods. In essence, Konoha¡¯s ANBU had been their textbook. While they hadn''t fought Konoha¡¯s ANBU before, they weren¡¯t strangers to their reputation. "Fight them? We''ve only just entered the Land of Fog. We probably won¡¯t run into Konoha¡¯s ANBU for another day or two, once we reach the heart of the region," their captain responded. They were still near the border with the Land of Earth. To encounter Konoha¡¯s ANBU here would be highly unlikely, as this area was primarily patrolled by Iwagakure squads. It would be suicidal for Konoha¡¯s ANBU to venture this far. What they didn¡¯t know, however, was that a Konoha ANBU squad had indeed infiltrated this area¡ªand had already chosen them as their first targets. In the shadows of the forest, Mochizuki Hui sensed the approaching Iwagakure ANBU team and turned to his squad. "Four of them¡ªone jonin, three elite chunin. I¡¯ll take the jonin. The rest are yours." "Understood!" came the unified response from his team. "Move out!" Huimanded. The four of them quickly sped toward the Iwagakure squad. There was no need to waste time setting traps. Against ANBU, who were highly skilled in detecting ambushes, it would be inefficient. Given the strength of Hui¡¯s squad, they could simply charge in and finish the job directly. On the other side, the Iwagakure ANBU captain suddenly halted, his gaze scanning the forest. "Someone''sing!" he said sharply. Since they didn¡¯t have a sensory-type ninja with them, they had to rely on their eyesight to identify potential threats. "Konoha ANBU?!" the captain''s eyes widened in disbelief as he spotted the uniforms of the approaching squad. The rest of his team was momentarily taken aback but quickly regained theirposure. "How did they get this deep into the territory? Could this be part of somerger plot?" one of the Iwagakure ANBU muttered as he unsheathed his sword, preparing for battle. "It doesn¡¯t matter how they got here. They¡¯re Konoha ANBU, which makes them our enemies!" The captain growled as he brandished a kunai and charged forward. While ninjutsu was a major part of a ninja''s arsenal, for ANBU, close-quartersbat was equally crucial. At this distance, ninjutsu would be too easy to dodge, and would only waste chakra. ng! ng! ng! Leading the charge on Mochizuki Hui¡¯s side was Sakumo Hatake, wielding his signature White Fang short sword. He engaged one of the elite chunin from the Iwagakure squad almost immediately. In just a few exchanges, Sakumo gauged his opponent¡¯s speed and strength. It was clear¡ªthis ninja was no match for him. Perfect. Time to test my new sword technique, he thought to himself as he continued the fight without missing a beat. The Iwagakure ninja facing him, however, was growing increasingly desperate. His opponent was obviously the strongest of the group¡ªhe must be the Konoha squad''s captain. How unlucky could he be to go up against him right from the start? His only hope was that his own captain could quickly finish off the enemy ande to his aid. Simrly, the elite chunin facing Lightning was thinking the same thing, believing he had encountered the leader of the Konoha squad. Only the Iwagakure ninja fighting Takeshi felt that the battle was evenly matched, his focus solely on the fight at hand. As for the Iwagakure squad captain, when he saw the young, seemingly teenage Konoha ANBU heading straight for him, he sneered inwardly. This kid¡¯s asking for death, he thought. But that suited him fine¡ªhe would quickly take out this foolish youngster and then go help his subordinates. But as soon as he engaged Mochizuki Hui, his face fell. The boy''s strength... It was greater than his own! What kind of monstrous child is this?! the captain thought, his mind racing as he struggled to keep up with Mochizuki Hui¡¯s relentless assault. Mochizuki Hui, however, wasn¡¯t concerned with the man¡¯s thoughts. He pressed his advantage, his movements quick and precise. Truth be told, he could easily finish this fight with a single blow. But there was no need for that. While Mochizuki Hui had techniques capable of a surprise one-hit kill, it wasn¡¯t a method based solely on raw strength like Madara Uchiha¡¯s overwhelming power or Hashirama Senju¡¯s godlike prowess. His "instant kills" relied on the element of surprise, catching the opponent off-guard. In reality, this Iwagakure jonin wasn¡¯t that much weaker than him¡ªjust a bit slower and less powerful. Using his one-hit-kill techniques too frequently would also diminish their value. If his enemies learned about his abilities and gathered data on him, his advantage would disappear, leaving him at a significant disadvantage in future battles. That was the pitfall of relying too much on "trick" techniques. Look at Hidan from the Akatsuki. His unusual ability made him a fearsome, capable of killing an elite jonin like Asuma and a jinchuriki like Yugito Nii. But once his enemies understood his technique, his threat level dropped dramatically. So, instead of using his trump cards, Mochizuki Hui decided to use this fight to hone his skills further. sh! In a brief moment, Mochizuki Hui found an opening and shed the Iwagakure captain¡¯s arm, drawing blood. "Don¡¯t get cocky! you little brat!!" the captain roared,pleting a series of hand signs and mming his hands into the ground. Earth Release: Multiple Earth Spikes! A barrage of spikes erupted from the ground, aimed at impaling Mochizuki Hui. If close-quartersbat wasn¡¯t working, he would resort to ninjutsu! Mochizuki Hui darted around, skillfully avoiding the spikes as he leaped through the air. The Iwagakure captain¡¯s eyes narrowed as he quickly began forming more hand signs. Earth Release: Swamp of the Underworld! The ground beneath Mochizuki Hui softened, transforming into a swamp. Midair, with limited control over hisnding, Mochizuki Hui would be swallowed up by the muck as soon as he touched down. Once he was trapped in the swamp, there would be no escape. "It¡¯s over, kid!" the Iwagakure captain sneered as he prepared to finish the job. But before he could act, a voice whispered in his ear. "No, it¡¯s over for you." A sword pierced through his back, the tip emerging from his chest. Across the swamp, the "Mochizuki Hui" that had been about to fall into the muck vanished in a puff of smoke¡ªit just a shadow clone. "When... did you¡­?" the captain gasped, blood dripping from his mouth. "From the very beginning," Mochizuki Hui replied, withdrawing his de as the captain copsed lifelessly to the ground. He turned calmly, surveying the battlefield. join my patreon for 50+ advanced chapters: Chapter 60: Cleaving the Mountain Chapter 60: Cleaving the Mountain Just as Mochizuki Hui nced over, a streak of white light shed through the air. The light wasn¡¯trge¡ªit was a curved arc, resembling a crescent moon in the night sky, but it bore a greater resemnce to the fang of a colossal beast. That fang sliced cleanly through the elite chunin¡¯s body, killing him in an instant! On the other side, a crackling sound of lightning echoed through the forest as Lightning also finished off his opponent with a swift Lightning Release technique. Now, only one elite chunin remained. Witnessing the swift deaths of hisrades, his face drained of color in sheer terror, and he stumbled into a panicked frenzy. Thispse allowed Hunter to seize the opportunity and swiftly eliminate him. Thus, Mochizuki Hui¡¯s Fourth Squad sessfullypleted their first hunt of Iwagakure¡¯s ANBU team. But this certainly would not be thest. ¡°Let¡¯s move. The battlefield will be cleaned up by our enemies, and we might even gain something unexpected,¡± Mochizuki Hui remarked, and the four swiftly disappeared into the depths of the forest. Two hourster, another Iwagakure ANBU team passed through the forest and discovered the bodies. After a quick examination, the squad leader waved his hand, and one of his subordinates used Earth Release to bury the four corpses. ¡°Judging by the battlefield and the scope of the fight, it wasn¡¯t a prolonged battle. It ended quickly,¡± one of the Iwagakure ANBU members said. "Yes, their opponents were strong," the squad leader responded solemnly, deep in thought as he tried to deduce who could have executed such an efficient ambush. After pondering for a while, only one conclusion seemed likely: Konoha¡¯s ANBU. Although the entire world of smaller nations was embroiled in ANBU skirmishes, the Land of Fog was a buffer zone between the Land of Fire and the Land of Earth. It wouldn¡¯t make sense for other nations to interfere here without a clear gain. "Could it be Konoha¡¯s ANBU? Have they prated this deeply into the region already?" another team member asked, puzzled by the possibility. It seemed too bold, too risky. "It must be them. Report this to the division leader and the ANBUmander," the squad leader said grimly. If Konoha¡¯s ANBU dared operate in such a deeply entrenched Iwagakure-controlled area, they should be prepared for a swift counterattack. Suddenly, the sound of projectiles slicing through the air pierced the forest. Whoosh! Whoosh! Whoosh! ¡°Ambush!¡± the squad leader shouted instinctively, leaping out of the way. His reflexes were quick; the instant he sensed the attack, he alerted his team. His two elite chunin quickly followed suit, dodging the iing barrage. But one of his subordinates, a mere chunin, wasn¡¯t so lucky. Despite the warning, the ambush came too swiftly for him to react in time. BOOM! BOOM! BOOM! A series of explosions rocked the forest as explosive tags attached to kunai detonated, instantly killing the chunin caught in the st. Kunai, after all, weren¡¯t just simple throwing knives. As the dust from the explosion settled, four figures darted out of the forest¡ªMochizuki Hui and his squad. They had deliberately avoided cleaning up the battlefield earlier to bait another team. And now, their trap had worked. No words were exchanged as the fourunched their attack. With the element of surprise on their side, it was now a four-on-three battle. Mochizuki Hui set his sights on the Iwagakure squad leader, leaving the remaining elite chunin to Lightning and the others. Gripping his sword, Mochizuki Hui dashed between the trees, readying a powerful strike. Earth Release: Hardening Jutsu! The Iwagakure squad leader instinctively used a jutsu to harden one of his arms, turning it into a stone-like shield. In his other hand, he brandished a kunai, preparing to counter the moment Mochizuki Hui¡¯s strikended, aiming to take advantage of the slight numbness his opponent would feel from the impact to plunge the kunai into his abdomen. Cleaving the Mountain! But Mochizuki Hui had something far more devastating in mind¡ªhe wanted to test out one of his new sword techniques, and the Iwagakure jonin was about to pay the price. Cleaving the Mountain: A single sword strike, capable of cleaving through mountains. The techniquebined wind-nature chakra, sharpening the de, and added a powerful light-based sword energy. The result was an immensely powerful sh, somewhat reminiscent of Sarutobi Asuma¡¯s Flying Swallow technique, but much stronger. It also bore a resemnce to Uchiha Madara¡¯s fully-formed Susanoo sh that cleaved through mountains, though Mochizuki Hui¡¯s technique involved more finesse and less raw destruction. Shing! In the blink of an eye, Mochizuki Hui¡¯s sword sliced through the Iwagakure leader¡¯s hardened arm with ease. The de didn¡¯t stop there¡ªit continued downward, cleaving the jonin¡¯s upper body in half. Another instant kill. The opponent was an Iwagakure ANBU jonin. The shock and terror of this scene left the remaining two elite chunin frozen in ce. Paralyzed by fear, they became easy prey for Sakumo Hatake and the others, who swiftly dispatched them. "Come on, man! You¡¯re making it so that I can¡¯t even enjoy the fight properly," Lightning said, his tone a mix of exasperation and admiration. It was always the same¡ªMochizuki Hui would eliminate the strongest enemy with terrifying speed and power, leaving the remaining opponents too rattled to fight effectively. For the rest of them, defeating disoriented elite chunin had be far too easy, offering no real challenge whatsoever. "That¡¯s because our captain is too strong!" Hunter said with admiration. These jonin, whom he once would have feared facing, were now being sliced down by Mochizuki Hui like mere fodder. It left him feeling a rush of excitement. ¡°That sword technique waspletely unexpected,¡± Sakumo Hatake chimed in, nodding in agreement. He understood all too well what it meant. Even he, with his mastery of the de, would likely fall in a simr number of strikes if pitted against Mochizuki Hui. Two ninja with simr-looking kunai face off, but while the opponent believes they can block an iing strike, they quickly realize that what they¡¯re trying to block is no ordinary de¡ªit¡¯s aser sword that cuts through steel like butter. In such a scenario, there would be no time to react or counterattack unless one possessed extraordinary reflexes, and none of their current opponents had demonstrated such a capacity. "Alright, let¡¯s move. We¡¯ve taken out two Iwagakure ANBU squads in this area, so the next time they send forces, it¡¯s bound to be a muchrger group. There¡¯s no point in confronting them now. They¡¯ll analyze our tactics and most likely send a specialized ANBU team next, one fully prepared for us. We¡¯ll face tougher battles in the future," Mochizuki Hui said, cutting off the praise and signaling for the team to move out quickly. This time, they really did leave. Just as Mochizuki Hui had predicted, the next group of Iwagakure ANBU to arrive wasn¡¯t a single team, but three squads. As they surveyed the wrecked battlefield, still scarred from the explosive tags, and gazed upon the corpses of theirrades, their fists clenched in anger. ¡°Damn it, who did this?!¡± one of them spat, shaking with rage. ¡°Based on the battlefield, they used Wind and Lightning Release. Judging by the wounds on our men, they also possess incredibly powerful swordsmanship and closebat skills,¡± another ANBU member analyzed. "Hmph, there¡¯s no need for such analysis. This was definitely the work of Konoha¡¯s ANBU!" dered the squad leader. "It seems Konoha has dispatched a particrly elite ANBU team to infiltrate deep into this region to specifically hunt down our Iwagakure ANBU squads," another member growled. "They¡¯re treating us like prey? Damn it, Konoha¡¯s ANBU are too arrogant!" the group fumed, anger rising with every word. "Report this to the higher-ups. Since Konoha¡¯s ANBU has made the first move, we¡¯ll respond in kind!" "Yes, let¡¯s have our vige assemble an elite ANBU team of our own,plete with sensory-type ninja. We¡¯ll show these Konoha ANBU that Iwagakure¡¯s ANBU are not to be underestimated!" With that, the Iwagakure ANBU left to report the grim situation. The news quickly reached the desk of Iwagakure¡¯s ANBUmander. Hearing that two of his jonin-led ANBU squads had been wiped out, he mmed his fist onto the desk in fury. ¡°Konoha¡¯s ANBU¡­ Fine. If you¡¯re going to break the rules, we¡¯ll y along!¡± he snarled. join my patreon for 50+ advanced chapters: Chapter 61: The Iwagakure ANBU Commander! Chapter 61: The Iwagakure ANBU Commander! For the next three days, Iwagakure¡¯s ANBU teams stationed in the Land of Mist lived in constant fear, dreading that they might be targeted by that elite Konoha ANBU squad. In just three days, another four of Iwagakure ANBU squads were hunted down. Adding the previous two squads, a total of six ANBU teams had fallen to that Konoha squad, amounting to 24 shinobi in total¡ªthe equivalent of an entire ANBU division from Iwagakure. Despite attempts to band together andunch counterattacks, their efforts were futile. First, they couldn¡¯t track the enemy¡¯s movements. Second, even when their sensory ninjas detected the enemy¡¯s presence, the Konoha squad would vanish before they could form a proper encirclement. This revealed that Konoha¡¯s elite squad had at least one sensory ninja, and this individual¡¯s sensory abilities were far superior to most of Iwagakure¡¯s own sensory shinobi. Thus, the Iwagakure ANBU squads had no choice but to retreat, gather in groups, and avoid being caught alone. This situation greatly frustrated the Iwagakure ANBU Commander, Kamizuru Ishigawa who had recently entered the battlefield in the Land of Fog. He was determined to eliminate the Konoha squad entirely. Inside a cave that served as the Iwagakure ANBU headquarters, a group of ANBU members gathered for a meeting in a hastily set-up conference room. "Commander, here¡¯s the information we''ve gathered on the Konoha ANBU squad," said one ANBU operative, holding a notebook as he addressed Ishigawa, the Iwagakure ANBU Commander. Around them sat several Iwagakure ANBU division and squad leaders, each listening intently. "Based on the data we¡¯ve collected, the Konoha squad consists of four members. In terms of strength, the team includes one elite jonin, two jonin, and one elite chunin. ¡°At least one of the members is a sensory ninja with a range of approximately three kilometers. ¡°Regarding their abilities: the elite jonin is a small figure, likely under 50 kilograms, and appears to specialize in Wind Release and Fire Release ninjutsu, along with expert swordsmanship. ¡°One of the jonin uses Lightning Release and Fire Release techniques and is likely a full-grown adult weighing around 65 kilograms, based on footprint analysis. ¡°The second jonin is also proficient in swordsmanship, with a weight estimated to be around 67 kilograms¡ªalso an adult. ¡°Lastly, the elite chunin doesn¡¯t seem to specialize in anything specific, likely the weakest member, weighing around 60 kilograms. However, our fallen ANBU, both elite chunin and chunin, were defeated by this individual. ¡°We believe this elite chunin is the sensory ninja of the team. Without a sensory ninja, there would be no need to bring someone who appears to be a ¡®weak link¡¯ in an otherwise elite squad. ¡°That¡¯s all we¡¯ve been able to determine about their abilities so far, though there could be more we are unaware of. ¡°Their area of activity is broad but primarily focuses on the region of the Land of Fog near the Land of Earth. Thest sighting was near the Nanchuan River." The ANBU finished and sat down, waiting for Ishigawa¡¯s response. Kamizuru Ishigawa, a middle-aged man appearing to be in his forties, was a member of the Kamizuru n, which produced both the First Tsuchikage and the future Third Tsuchikage. Drumming his fingers on the table, his brow furrowed in thought. After several seconds, he finally spoke in a cold and displeased tone. "So, we¡¯ve lost 24 excellent ANBU members and still haven¡¯t gathered any concrete information on the enemy?" Several division leaders stood up immediately, bowing their heads in apology. "It¡¯s our failure!" "Hmph! Konoha¡¯s elite ANBU, huh? They¡¯ve sent an elite jonin and two jonin, along with an elite chunin, to form an assassination squad. Very well then. Let¡¯s make Konoha feel the pain of losing their finest shinobi!" Kamizuru Ishigawa spoke icily, a dangerous glint in his eyes. He was confident that he could track and destroy this Konoha squad because he was a direct disciple of the Second Tsuchikage, just like his cousin Kamizuru Onoki. While Onoki inherited the Bloodline Limit Dust Release, Ishigawa inherited the Second Tsuchikage¡¯s sensory abilities. That was precisely why he had personally entered the battlefield in the Land of Fog: to deal with this squad. "Starting tomorrow, each team will operate in pairs. If that Konoha squad is bold enough to remain in the area, they won¡¯t be able to resist attacking arger target. And once they enter my sensory range, there will be no escape for them!" Ishigawa ordered, his mind already formting a n to corner Mochizuki Hui and his team. Meanwhile, Mochizuki Hui¡¯s squad was unaware that Iwagakure¡¯s ANBU Commander had personally entered the Land of Fog to hunt them down. At that moment, the four of them were resting in a hidden location far from Iwagakure¡¯s ANBU gathering point, ensuring they were out of sensory range while they nned their next move. "Captain, we¡¯ve already taken down four more Iwagakure ANBU squads. I bet Iwagakure is panicking by now!" Hunter said, his voice filled with excitement. The recent hunts had left him feeling as if he were living in a dream. Never had he felt so powerful before. "That¡¯s a given! If this were four years ago, six ANBU squads would be more than an entire division!" Lightning boasted, enjoying the taste of his soldier pill. However, after chewing for a moment, his face twisted in disgust. Internally, Lightning cursed: Damn, these things are still as disgusting as ever! "Don¡¯t underestimate Iwagakure," Mochizuki Hui cautioned, swallowing his own soldier pill in one gulp to avoid tasting it. "By now, they¡¯ve likely gathered a fair amount of information about us. Iwagakure won¡¯t just sit back and let us keep hunting their teams. Their next move will probably be a targeted n against us." Hearing this, both Lightning and Hunter¡¯s faces grew serious as they nodded in understanding. While things seemed to be going smoothly now, they were still living in the world of shinobi¡ªa world where death coulde at any moment. join my patreon for 55+ advanced chapters: Chapter 62: Let Them Play Alone! Chapter 62: Let Them y Alone! "Captain, since Iwagakure is nning to target us, what¡¯s our next move?" asked Hatake Sakumo. Although Mochizuki Hui was younger than everyone else in his team, they had long since grown to trust his leadershippletely. "Our next move? Naturally, we retreat and let Iwagakure y their game alone," Mochizuki Hui replied with a sly grin. "After all, our mission isn¡¯t about conducting deep strikes and assassinations; it¡¯s about forming an alliance with the Vige of Fog. We¡¯ve already done more than enough by taking down six Iwagakure ANBU squads and drawing their elites towards us. That¡¯s a huge win. ¡°Now that they¡¯re focused on us, we should pull out, leave this dangerous area, and return to the region of the Vige Fog. ¡°This way, while their forces are still chasing shadows, we can take on Vige of Fog andplete our primary mission," Mochizuki Hui exined his strategy, causing the others'' eyes to light up. "As expected from the captain! Iwagakure is going to be running in circles thanks to us!" Hunter eximed, full of admiration for Mochizuki Hui. "You''re such a sneaky little fox, Hui," Lightning remarked with a chuckle, causing Mochizuki Hui to roll his eyes. Hatake Sakumo stood by, silently smiling. He had the rare gift of foresight, and whenever he looked at Mochizuki Hui, he saw a radiant future. Mochizuki Hui was a beacon, a source of light that could bring life and hope to all things. "Alright, let¡¯s take a break. We¡¯ll prepare to move out in one hour. I expect Iwagakure¡¯s reinforcements will arrive soon, and they¡¯ll likely make their move in the next day or so. Stay alert and be cautious," Mochizuki Hui instructed before walking to the cave¡¯s entrance, where he leaned against the rocky wall and closed his eyes to rest. The other three nodded, tidied their gear, and took the opportunity to rest and recover their strength, ensuring they were in peak condition. An hour passed quickly. Hui and his squad silently left their hiding spot, making their way out of the region. Meanwhile, Kamizuru Ishigawa, so confident in his hunt, had no idea that his intended prey had already left the game, slipping away and leaving him to y alone. If he knew, he might have rolled on the ground in rage. The next day, as expected, Iwagakure began their operation. Teams of two ANBU squads patrolled the area. Kamizuru Ishigawa used all his sensory abilities to try and catch Mochizuki Hui''s team. But by the end of the day, they had achieved nothing. "This is normal. Since they¡¯re moving in pairs, even though they¡¯re elite, they must be cautious and gather information before making a move. Tomorrow, they¡¯ll likely feel more confident and take action. Make sure everyone is ready," Kamizuru Ishigawa said confidently, unfazed by theck of progress. To him, it was natural for an elite ANBU squad to act cautiously in enemy territory, especially when the stakes were high. The other Iwagakure ANBU agreed with his assessment, preparing themselves for what they believed would be the decisive confrontation the next day. That second day arrived, and the Iwagakure squads continued their patrols in pairs. However, this time, they didn¡¯t stick together as closely, leaving gaps in their formations¡ªan intentional strategy to lure Hui¡¯s team into attacking. Yet, as the day ended and night fell, Kamizuru Ishigawa found himself staring at his map with a grim expression, wondering why the Konoha ANBU had yet to make a move. "It seems the prey is craftier than I thought¡ªthey¡¯ve realized we¡¯re targeting them," he mused aloud. "In that case, we¡¯ll go back to single-squad operations. If they still don¡¯t show themselves, then their entire presence here bes pointless. And the moment they do appear, that¡¯s when we¡¯ll kill them." He calmly issued new orders, confident that he was forcing Hui¡¯s team into a corner. To him, it was clear that Konoha had sent this specialized squad with a specific mission: to assassinate Iwagakure ANBU squads and draw attention away from the Vige of Fog, allowing Konoha¡¯s forces to more easily establish control there. It was an obvious strategy: lure Iwagakure¡¯s forces into focusing on the squad, then take Vige of Fog in the meantime. Kamizuru Ishigawa believed his enemy had finally realized they were being targeted and had be overly cautious. But that wouldn¡¯t matter anymore. By restoring normal patrols, he would force them to act, making it impossible for them to escape detection. To him, it was an open-and-shut case¡ªa ssic, unavoidable trap. But what he didn¡¯t know was that Mochizuki Hui¡¯s squad was far from ordinary. They operated with great autonomy, and their assassination spree had been a spontaneous decision, not an official mission. Since Kamizuru Ishigawa had misread Mochizuki Hui¡¯s team from the start, his entire strategy was built on wed assumptions. His seemingly foolproof n would ultimately amount to nothing¡ªjust an exercise in futility, like trying to catch water in a sieve. In reality, Mochizuki Hui had simply chosen to leave the game, allowing Kamizuru Ishigawa to battle wits with thin air. join my patreon for 55+ advanced chapters: Chapter 63: Something Went Wrong! Chapter 63: Something Went Wrong! Two days were all it took for Mochizuki Hui¡¯s team to return from the area near the Land of Earth back to the center of the Land of Mist, where Vige of Fog was located. They wasted no time and immediately resumed their covert campaign against the Iwagakure ANBU operatives in the area. Once again, they acted independently, choosing not to link up with other Konoha ANBU units. Instead, they patrolled the region, relying on their sensory skills to seek out Iwagakure¡¯s ANBU squads that operated alone. Against Mochizuki Hui¡¯s team, none of the Iwagakure squads stood a chance. Once detected, their fate was sealed¡ªand death inevitable. In just two days, Mochizuki Hui¡¯s team eliminated two more Iwagakure ANBU squads, bringing their tally to eight squads in total! Eight squads¡ªback in thest war, that would have been equivalent to two entire divisions, half of Iwagakure¡¯s ANBU force. The news quickly reached Kamizuru Ishigawa, the Iwagakure ANBUmander, who stood in shock for a moment before erupting in a fit of rage. His entire body trembled with fury, and his eyes reddened with anger. ¡°Damn it!!!¡± His fist mmed down onto the table, causing it to crack under the force. He panted heavily, trying to contain his seething wrath. He had been yed. There was no doubt about it. Amander of Iwagakure¡¯s ANBU, meticulously nning and leading an operation, had been outmanoeuvred by a single Konoha ANBU squad. ¡°Order all units to move to the region of the Fog Vige immediately!¡± Kamizuru Ishigawa barked themand. If his quarry had left this area, there was no point in remaining here. He could not tolerate the humiliation of being outsmarted; he vowed to capture that Konoha squad and make them pay. Meanwhile, in another cave, Mochizuki Hui¡¯s team rested. It seemed they had a preference for caves as hideouts, finding them perfect forying low. They always picked small, concealed caves¡ªones where the entrance could only be seen when up close, providing excellent cover. Their advantage was their sensory skills, allowing them to detect threats well before being discovered themselves. Other ANBU units wouldn¡¯t risk using such spots, knowing that being cornered in a cave could turn them into sitting ducks if the entrance was blocked. ¡°Captain, we¡¯ve taken out two more Iwagakure squads! I bet those ANBU back in the Land of Earth are losing their minds right now!¡± Hunter chuckled, imagining how furious their enemies must be upon hearing the news. Mochizuki Hui couldn¡¯t help but smile. He knew that if he were in their shoes, he¡¯d be just as enraged. "Thanks to our distractions, the other Konoha squads are making good progress. If everything goes as nned, we¡¯llplete this mission in just a few more days,¡± Mochizuki Hui noted. Although they hadn¡¯t directlymunicated with the other ANBU teams, Konoha had a system of coded symbols for exchanging information. When the other units learned of Mochizuki Hui¡¯s arrival, they left messages detailing the progress on their end. ¡°Heh, our Fourth Squad¡¯s actions have been pretty significant after all,¡± Lightningmented, clearly satisfied with their contribution. ¡°It¡¯s going well so far. But we need to be careful moving forward. The Iwagakure ANBU will surely regroup ande to this area. We should avoid further solo actions and join up with the others,¡± Mochizuki Hui advised as he nced outside the cave. The sun was setting, casting long shadows as dusk approached. ¡°Let¡¯s rest for a bit. We¡¯ll move out in an hour,¡± he ordered, opting not to stay the night in the cave. ¡°Yes, sir!¡± the three replied in unison, beginning to inspect their equipment and supplies. ¡°Hey, I¡¯m almost out of water. I¡¯m going to refill at the stream. Do any of you need me to grab some?¡± Hunter asked, noticing his water pouch was nearly empty. Water was essential for ninja, whose intense physical activity demanded constant hydration. After suffering through a severeck of water during one mission, Hunter had made a habit of keeping enough tost at least two days. ¡°I¡¯m good, I¡¯ve got plenty,¡± Mochizuki Hui replied. He made sure to stay on top of these little details. ¡°Get some for me, too. My supply¡¯s okay, but it never hurts to have extra, haha,¡± Lightning said, passing his water pouch to Hunter. ¡°I¡¯ve still got enough, so I¡¯m fine,¡± Hatake Sakumo added, continuing to adjust his gear. ¡°Got it, I¡¯ll be back soon,¡± Hunter said, taking Lightning¡¯s water pouch before heading out. ¡°Stay alert, and keep your senses sharp,¡± Mochizuki Hui reminded him. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Captain. I¡¯m a sensory ninja, remember? I¡¯ve got this!¡± Hunter replied with a confident wave before leaving. The water source wasn¡¯t far; he¡¯d be back in about half an hour. It seemed unlikely that he¡¯d encounter any danger. Yet sometimes, fate has other ns. As Hunter headed toward the stream, another group was also making their way in that direction¡ªthe team led by Iwagakure¡¯s ANBUmander, Kamizuru Ishigawa! Back in the cave, Mochizuki Hui and the others sat in quiet meditation, resting and conserving their energy. After about twenty minutes, Mochizuki Hui suddenly opened his eyes. He nced toward the cave entrance, where a small squirrel scurried toward him. It stopped in front of him, offering a tiny scroll held in its bushy tail, deftly passing it over with its little paws. The squirrel was a summoning creature from Konoha¡¯s ANBU First Division¡¯s captain¡ªa familiar ally to Mochizuki Hui. He unfolded the scroll and read the message inside. ¡°The division captain wants us to head back to Iwagakure territory immediately. There¡¯s a critical mission,¡± he informed Lightning and Hatake Sakumo before patting the squirrel¡¯s head in acknowledgment. The squirrel vanished in a puff of white smoke, returning to its summoner. ¡°We¡¯ll set out as soon as Hunter returns. He should be back any minute now,¡± Mochizuki Hui said, referring to Hunter. Five minutes passed, bringing the total time since Hunter had left to twenty-five minutes. Mochizuki Hui closed his eyes again, extending his senses to locate Hunter. His brows furrowed when he sensed nothing¡ªHunter was not within his range. This stirred unease within him. Five more minutes slipped by, making it a full half-hour since Hunter had left. Mochizuki Hui opened his eyes, his expression grim as he addressed Lightning and Hatake Sakumo: ¡°Hunter is in trouble.¡± join my patreon for 55+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 64: Luring the Enemy Away Chapter 64: Luring the Enemy Away The water source wasn¡¯t far from their location, only about a half-hour round trip. But when half an hour had passed, and Hunter hadn¡¯t returned¡ªand when Mochizuki Hui could no longer sense his chakra¡ªthere was only one exnation: something had gone wrong. Let¡¯s rewind to when Hunter left to fetch water. After he departed from the cave, he remembered Mochizuki Hui¡¯s reminder to stay alert and proceeded with extreme caution, not daring to let his guard down. On his way to the stream, he encountered no surprises. Upon reaching the stream, he filled up the pouches and, as a habit, used his sensory abilities to check the surroundings before heading back. Just like before, he sensed nothing unusual. But he couldn¡¯t shake a growing sense of unease from welling within him. So, instead of heading back immediately, Hunter slowed his pace, paying close attention to the strange feeling in his gut. As a sensory ninja, Hunter was naturally attuned to such things, and his sixth sense was highly reliable¡ªa rare gift of intuition. It was this sense that told him there was a good chance he was being watched. It felt as if someone with greater sensory abilities than his own was tracking him from a distance, following his movements closely. As for who this person might be, Hunter could easily deduce that. An Iwagakure ANBU. After all, aside from Konoha ANBU, the only others active in this area were the Fog shinobi and Iwagakure¡¯s ANBU. It was unlikely that the Fog shinobi would follow him so stealthily. And based on intelligence reports, the Vige of Fog didn¡¯t have any particrly strong sensory ninjas. Which meant it had to be Iwagakure ANBU. More likely, it was the ANBU that hade over from the area near the Land of Earth. As to why these ANBU hadn¡¯t attacked yet, Hunter quickly reasoned that they were using him as a guide, letting him unwittingly lead them to hisrades. Their squad had been hunting Iwagakure ANBU ever since entering the region near the Land of Earth, and up until two days ago, they had thoroughly humiliated their enemy. So, it wasn¡¯t hard to imagine the kind of grudge these Iwagakure ANBU harbored against them. Now that they had finally found a lead, the Iwagakure shinobi weren¡¯t about to settle for capturing just him¡ªthey wanted the entire Fourth Squad. Having figured this out, Hunter¡¯s heart sank as he quickly considered his options. Slowly, he began altering his path as he walked, leaving subtle signs along the way. Time ticked by, and Hunter could feel the presence of his unseen pursuers growing more and more intense. He also sensed that the pressure was nowing from multiple directions, indicating that the enemy was setting up a perimeter around him. Hunter allowed a small, cold smile to form at the edge of his lips. He had already shifted his course, moving further and further away from the cave where the captain and the others were, deliberately leading his pursuers away. In the forest all around Hunter, things were ying out just as he suspected: ten or more ANBU squads were tightening a circle around him, keeping themselves at a distance beyond his sensory range. These were all Iwagakure ANBU squads,manded by Kamizuru Ishigawa, who coordinated their movements. All they had to do was wait for their prey to lead them back to his nest, and then they could close in, wiping out the whole group of Konoha shinobi. He firmly believed in his insight. ¡°Hmph, let¡¯s see where you run this time. You¡¯ve killed so many of my men¡ªtime to pay for their lives with your own,¡± Kamizuru Ishigawa had muttered under his breath as he followed Hunter, anticipation flickering in his eyes. Although he had been outyed before, if he could now eliminate all the Konoha ANBU operating in the Land of Fog, it would be a victory worth the previous setbacks. Of course, even if this little mouse didn¡¯t lead him to the nest, capturing just one squad would still give him leverage. He was confiLightningt he could extract more information about other Konoha ANBU squads from their prisoners. ¡°Good thing you decided to step in personally,mander. Dealing with a sensory ninja like this would have been much more difficult otherwise,¡± one of the division leaders remarked, clearly trying to tter Kamizuru Ishigawa. ¡°Yes, sensory ninjas are a real nuisance. Unless you have overwhelming power or arge number of attackers, they¡¯re almost impossible to catch,¡± Kamizuru Ishigawa replied, understanding the challenge all too well as a sensory ninja himself. From their conversation, it was clear that both were in high spirits, even making small talk. But as more time passed, Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s expression had grown darker and darker. No ninja would go out of their way just to fetch water from a ce that took half an hour to reach. Yet here they were, following this Konoha ANBU mouse for over twenty minutes already. It was bing clear¡ªthey¡¯d been tricked, yet again! ¡°Close the!¡± Kamizuru Ishigawamanded, suppressing his rising fury as he sped toward Hunter. The other Iwagakure ANBU, despite their lingering doubts, followed orders, converging from all sides on their quarry. As soon as someone entered his sensory range, Hunter¡¯s feeling of being watched grew even sharper. He halted, activating his sensory jutsu to get a clearer picture of the situation. ¡°They really are Iwagakure ANBU... and there are so many of them. Looks like this is the force that came from the Land of Earth. Good thing I didn¡¯t head back; I¡¯d have put the captain and the others in danger.¡± Hunter felt a shudder of fear at the thought. He didn¡¯t hesitate to turn and flee, racing in the direction where he sensed no enemies. His n was to draw his pursuers as far away as possible from Mochizuki Hui¡¯s team, then, before they could capture him... take his own life. He had no other choice. As an ANBU, Hunter was well aware of the gruesome methods used to extract information from prisoners. If he were captured alive, the enemy would subject him to torment beyond imagination, trying to extract every piece of intelligence they could. Just the thought of such torture made Hunter¡¯s skin crawl. Moreover, with the unpredictable variety of ninja techniques in the world, he couldn¡¯t be certain that the Iwagakure ANBU wouldn¡¯t use some jutsu to extract information directly from his mind. Given all this, taking his own life seemed the only viable option. At least that way, he could ensure the safety of his captain, his squad, and the other Konoha ANBU. join my patreon for 55+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 65: Captured Chapter 65: Captured Hunter ran as fast as he could, taking quick moments to sense the positions of his pursuers. With each scan, he felt them drawing closer. Finally, when he sensed that they were only about 500 meters away, he came to a stop. He leaned against a tree, breathing heavily. It was almost dusk now, and in the distant sky, the sun had nearly set, casting the forest into deepening shadows. Hunter looked around, as if trying to take in onest glimpse of the fading light. "Captain, Lightning, Sakumo... it looks like I won¡¯t be able to stay by your side anymore. What a pity¡ªjust when I¡¯d found such a great captain and teammates." Hunter muttered regretfully to himself. Then, he took out a kunai, gritted his teeth, and prepared to thrust it into his own heart. But just as he moved to end his life, a force struck the back of his neck, plunging him into darkness. Behind Hunter, Kamizuru Ishigawa, who had delivered the blow, let out a sigh of relief. "Just in time. If this little mouse had managed to kill himself, all my efforts would have been for nothing," he thought, feeling a mixture of frustration and relief. Fortunately, he had inherited not only the sensory skills of his mentor, Mu, the Second Tsuchikage but also his stealth techniques. These were the specialized methods of concealment taught by Mu, allowing Kamizuru Ishigawa topletely evade Hunter¡¯s senses as he approached and prevented the self-inflicted death. Soon, the other Iwagakure ANBU arrived. As they saw the unconscious Konoha ANBU lying on the ground and noted theirmander¡¯s dark expression, they quickly realized that they had been outmanoeuvred once again. "Tie him up and prepare for interrogation!" Kamizuru Ishigawa ordered coldly, his voice dripping with frustration at the repeated failures. Now, his only hope was to extract some valuable information from this captive. The idea of a broader ambush against the Konoha ANBU had already vanished from Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s mind the moment he realized they had been tricked. It was obvious what the other Konoha ANBU would do now that this one hadn¡¯t returned to them¡ªof course, they would relocate their base and change any information the captive might have known, minimizing potential losses. But this would take time. What Kamizuru Ishigawa needed now was to act quickly and extract whatever information he could from this prisoner before the Konoha ANBU could finish adjusting their positions. So, he nned to conduct the interrogation right here, without dy. All he could hope for now was that the captured ninja knew enough to make this whole effort worthwhile¡ªotherwise, this entire operation would have been aplete failure. When Hunter awoke, he found himself surrounded by a circle of Iwagakure ANBU. He was tied tightly to a tree, and his heart sank as he realized his predicament. Instinctively, he tried to bite down on the poison capsule hidden in his mouth, but it was already gone. Moreover, he quickly discovered that his jaw muscles had been manipted, making it impossible for him to exert any force¡ªhis captors had clearly taken precautions to prevent him from taking his own life. "Looks like Konoha¡¯s ANBU training is quite thorough. They¡¯re all prepared to die if necessary," said a cold voice. Hunter looked up and saw a middle-aged man approaching him step by step. The man wasn¡¯t wearing a mask, and under the flickering torchlight, Hunter could clearly see his face. "Kamizuru Ishigawa!" He gasped, a look of shock spreading across his face. The man standing before him was none other than Iwagakure¡¯s ANBUmander! "Oh? You know me." Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s expression darkened slightly as he replied. "It seems my identity isn¡¯t much of a secret in Konoha." He sighed, continuing, "It¡¯s truly impressive how Konoha¡¯s ANBU manages to gather information. We still don¡¯t know who your ANBUmander is." Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s face grew even more severe as he spoke. Indeed, he found it troubling that while Konoha¡¯s ANBU had information on him, Iwagakure was still in the dark about who led Konoha¡¯s covert operations. He stepped closer, gripping Hunter¡¯s chin firmly and studying his face. "Such a young face... It¡¯s really enviable, tch, the talent Konoha has. "From the way you tried to end your own life without hesitation, it¡¯s clear that you have the resolve of an ANBU... and that you hold important intel. "I¡¯d wager that you know either crucial strategic ns or the whereabouts of important personnel. "Your eyes tell me that I¡¯m right." Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s voice was confident as he grinned, brimming with certainty about his interrogation skills. "As I¡¯m sure you know, ANBU interrogation techniques are quite... thorough. Tell me, how many rounds do you think you¡¯llst before you break?" Kamizuru Ishigawa paused, then leaned closer, his voice bing more insidious. "Tell us what you know. It would be a waste for someone as young as you to die here. I¡¯ve heard that many of Konoha¡¯s ANBU are orphans, with no ties or family. "So why not join us? In Iwagakure, you could make your lifest longer and be more valuable. "Choose wisely, because time is precious. "After all, the end result is the same¡ªwhether you reveal the information willingly, or we extract it from you during interrogation." Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s confidence was absolute, as though he had no doubt that his methods would eventually break the captive. Hunter, however, found his body trembling involuntarily. Yet, his gaze remained defiant, ring straight at Kamizuru Ishigawa. Kamizuru Ishigawa hesitated for a moment, then sighed. "I see you¡¯ve made your choice¡ªthe hard way it is." With a gesture of his hand, several Iwagakure ANBU stepped forward. And soon after, the forest echoed with the sound of tortured screams. Chapter 66: A Companion is Worth More than a Rule Chapter 66: A Companion is Worth More than a Rule The interrogation had begun. It was a process no one wanted to endure, one that no one even wanted to imagine. It was a process that could break a person¡¯s mind, body, and spirit. For those who experienced it, there were usually only two oues: The first¡ªsubmission. The secondplete mental and physical copse. ¡­. Back at the cave, at the moment when Hui realised something had gone wrong, the atmosphere between the three of them grew heavy with tension. Hui rose to his feet and headed toward the cave entrance, his voice steady as he spoke. "Stay behind me. We''re going to find Hunter." Lightning immediately got up to follow. But Hatake Sakumo hesitated, a sh of hesitation in his eyes as if he were weighing something deeply. In the end, he also rose to follow. Leaving the cave, Hui maintained his focus on his surroundings, using his unique sensory abilities as he led the way. Unlike most sensory ninjas who relied on active techniques¡ªmethods that required the deliberate casting of a jutsu to sense others¡ªHui¡¯s sensing came naturally through the energy within his body, a constant awareness of the world around him. It was like having eyes that were always open. Just as the mind filters out unnecessary visual details, his senses did the same, only focusing on what he chose to notice. This meant that Hui¡¯s awareness was always active, only varying in how much attention he devoted to the information it gathered. As they moved through the forest, Hui¡¯s senses swept outward, seeking any sign of Hunter¡¯s presence. Soon, he found a clue¡ªsmall marks left behind, a sign from Hunter, warning that he was in danger. Using this information, Hui began scanning the area for further traces. Eventually, he found signs left behind by Iwagakure ANBU¡ªa few subtle disturbances in the forest floor, evidence of their passage. This discovery helped Hui to piece together the likely scenario of what had happened to Hunter. Following the faint traces left behind by the Iwagakure ANBU, he cautiously advanced, slowly closing in on the ce where their movements had finally stopped. Trailing a short distance behind him, Lightning and Hatake Sakumo followed at a distance of about a hundred meters¡ªclose enough to support Hui if needed, but far enough to escape should things go south. This had been Hui''s instruction. At a certain point, Hui stopped in his tracks. He motioned for Lightning and Hatake Sakumo to halt, then focused inward, transforming every bit of chakra in his body yuan qi, leaving no trace of chakra that could betray his presence. Hunter was a skilled sensory ninja¡ªhe could detect danger well before most ordinary shinobi could. Under normal circumstances, he could have easily retreated back to them. But he hadn¡¯t. Instead, he had chosen to lead the enemy away. Moreover, there were no signs of a struggle along the way. Hui understood the situation; Hunter had likely encountered a sensory ninja stronger than himself, one who had been tracking him all along. If the enemy had a highly capable sensory ninja, Hui knew he couldn¡¯t afford to leave even the slightest trace of his own chakra. With his chakra fully converted, Hui continued to inch forward silently. Atst, through the darkness, he spotted a distant glimmer of firelight. Holding his breath, Hui reached out with his senses¡ªand what he felt caused his heart to sink. He sensed Hunter¡¯s presence. His energy was weak, flickering like a candle in the wind, close to being snuffed out entirely. At the same time, Hui detected numerous Iwagakure ANBU nearby. Among them were six at the level of ch¨±nin, twenty-nine at the level of elite ch¨±nin, five j¨­nin, and... One whose strength surpassed that of an elite j¨­nin¡ªan individual he assumed to be at the Kage level. Hui¡¯s heart began to race. Particrly that one presence¡ªan Iwagakure ANBU of Kage-level strength. Such a powerful shinobi was a rarity even among the Five Great Nations. Recalling the presence of a powerful sensory ninja among them, Hui quickly surmised the identity of this individual. It could only be one person: Kamizuru Ishigawa, the ANBUmander of Iwagakure. With this understanding, Hui slowly retreated, returning to Lightning and Hatake Sakumo. "Light, what''s the situation? Did you find Hunter? How is he?" Lightning asked urgently, his concern clear in his voice. He had grown fond of Hunter, seeing a reflection of his younger self in the young ninja. "I found him," Hui replied, his tone grave. "He''s in bad shape. The Iwagakure ANBU captured him alive. And... it''s highly likely that their leader, Kamizuru Ishigawa, is the one who caught him." At these words, both Lightning and Hatake Sakumo tensed, their pupils contracting in shock. "The ANBU...mander?!" "Yes. And they aren¡¯t alone. Besides Kamizuru Ishigawa, there are five j¨­nin, twenty-nine elite ch¨±nin, and six ch¨±nin with him." The air grew cold as Lightning and Hatake Sakumo sucked in sharp breaths. "This... this is..." Faced with such overwhelming odds, even Lightning struggled to find the right words. "You two need to head back and inform our division leader and themander," Hui said after a moment of thought. "I¡¯ll stay here and look for an opportunity to rescue Hunter." Lightning immediately objected, his voice rising in protest. "No way, Hui! This time is different. The enemy is too strong¡ªyou¡¯ll just be throwing your life away!" "Exactly, Captain! There''s no way to rescue him in a situation like this¡ªit¡¯s impossible!" Hatake Sakumo added, his voice tinged with a trace of desperation. He seemed to hesitate, battling with himself internally before finally pressing on, his expression tense. "And don¡¯t forget¡ªwe have direct orders to return and carry out a critical mission." Hearing this, Lightning furrowed his brow but eventually nodded in agreement with Hatake Sakumo. "Hui, we need to leave. Now." He spoke firmly, making his decision clear. Hui fell silent for a moment, then shook his head and met Lightning¡¯s gaze. "You know my abilities. As long as I don¡¯t want to be seen, they won¡¯t find me. And I¡¯m not talking about storming in recklessly¡ªI''m talking about watching for a chance." Lightning hesitated, the conflict visible in his eyes. But Hatake Sakumo gritted his teeth and spoke earnestly, his tone taking on a hard edge. "Captain, our orders are to return immediately in a situation like this!" His voice was almost rigid with tension as he tried to assert his point. Lightning turned, stunned by Hatake Sakumo''s intensity. Hui turned to face Hatake Sakumo as well, studying his eyes. He could see the struggle roiling within him. It reminded Hui of what he knew from Hatake Sakumo¡¯s fate in the original story¡ªhow, faced with a choice between a mission and saving arade, he chose thetter, resulting in a failed mission and his subsequent ostracization. The pressure and criticism eventually led him to take his own life. "In a hero''s heart, there exists both the cold resolve to sacrifice for duty and a deep bond withrades. These forces create unending turmoil." His death had been described as: "A life lost between the cracks of duty and emotion." Because of that, Hui had always had a special fondness for Hatake Sakumo. Now, seeing this internal struggle y out, he understood just how deeply Sakumo was torn between loyalty and duty. But this time, it seemed, he had chosen duty. Hui stood up slowly, meeting Hatake Sakumo¡¯s gaze with not a hint of hesitation. Night had already settled in, obscuring Hui¡¯s features from view. But his voice rang out clearly through the night. "True, in the world of shinobi, those who break the rules are scorned as trash. "But those who abandon theirrades... are worse than trash!" join my patreon for 60+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 67: Ninja Way Chapter 67: Ninja Way Hui''s words echoed through Hatake Sakumo¡¯s mind, leaving him frozen in ce. Rules¡­ andrades. These were the two things that gued Sakumo¡¯s heart with endless conflict. As a shinobi, he knew the importance of following the rules, of prioritizing the mission above all else. A mission was an absolute for a ninja, and his every action must serve its sess. Yet, his training in the vige, the teachings at the ninja academy, had also stressed the value ofradeship. A shinobi shouldn¡¯t be a cold, emotionless tool¡ªthey must cherish theirrades. All this time, Sakumo had managed to follow both teachings. He had done well. But that was only because he had never been forced into a situation where he had to choose between both of them. Until today. After a deep struggle within himself, he had decided to prioritize the mission. Sakumo didn¡¯t know if his decision was right, only that it was the one he had instinctively made. But now, Hui¡¯s words had shaken him, filling him with uncertainty. Rules¡­ emotions¡­ being a shinobi... His mind felt like a nk te, unable to process anything clearly. Watching Hatake Sakumo¡¯s expression, Hui understood that an invisible battle was raging within his heart. In a time like this, he needed someone to guide him¡ªsomeone who could help him reach a personal decision But Hui didn¡¯t have time for that. He had arade enduring unspeakable torture, waiting for him to arrive. ¡°If a shinobi has no emotions, then there¡¯s no difference between them and a mere tool,¡± Hui said firmly, his voice unwavering. ¡°It¡¯s because we have emotions that we¡¯re able to create a world full of wonders and miracles. Missions are important, but life is the most precious thing in this world.¡± Missions versusrades¡ªthere was no single right choice between them, Hui thought. It was a matter of staying true to one''s heart. Yes, he had a mission to fulfill. He was supposed to regroup with the squad leader and carry out the important task assigned to them. But to abandon his subordinate and rush off toplete that mission¡­ Hui just couldn¡¯t do it. Not when there was still hope of saving Hunter. ¡°As long as there¡¯s even a sliver of hope, I will never give up. That¡­ is my ninja way!¡± Hui dered, his voice filled with determination. His words left both Lightning and Hatake Sakumo momentarily speechless, their hearts shaken. After a few seconds of silence, Lightning finally spoke. ¡°Hui, if you believe there¡¯s hope, then go for it. What¡¯s your n? Do you need my help?¡± Hui¡¯s lips curled into a slight smile, while Hatake Sakumo¡¯s expression shifted once more as he absorbed what was said. ¡°My initial n was to create a Shadow Clone and use it to pose as myself, appearing to deal with Hunter. That way, I could draw Kamizuru Ishigawa and the majority of their forces away. My real body would then seize the opportunity to attempt a rescue,¡± Hui exined. Lightning shook his head. ¡°That¡¯s too risky. A Shadow Clone won¡¯tst long before it¡¯s taken out, and losing half of your chakra in the process would leave your true self in serious danger.¡± ¡°I know that. But it¡¯s the best option I¡¯vee up with so far. Now that you¡¯re staying, Lightning, we can work on a new n together.¡± Hui¡¯s tone lightened slightly, knowing that with Lightning¡¯s support, the chance of rescuing Hunter had just increased. ¡°Count me in too!¡± Hatake Sakumo suddenly said, his voice firm. ¡°Hunter is myrade too, and I am a part of the Fourth Squad.¡± As he spoke, a newfound resolve gleamed in his eyes. Hui and Lightning both smiled at that. ¡°Alright then, if we¡¯re all in this together, it¡¯s time to give it our all!¡± Hui¡¯s voice brimmed with confiLightningce, and that assurance spread to Lightning and Hatake Sakumo, steadying their hearts. Lightning nced at Hui, feeling a surge of admiration. This¡­ this was what made Hui the ¡°Light¡± of Konoha. It was what made him¡­ his light as well. Hatake Sakumo, too, allowed a small smile to break through¡ªa smile of liberation. Though he hadn¡¯tpletely resolved his inner struggle between duty and camaraderie, for this moment, he felt free. Free from the chains that had bound him between the cracks of rules and emotion. And suddenly, he understood why he saw that hopeful, guiding light in Hui. It was because Hui himself was a light¡ªone that had the power to reveal the truth to others, a light that could guide everyone in the shinobi world to a realization of their true selves. ¡­. ¡°Now that we¡¯ve all decided to stay, our chances of sess have just gotten better,¡± Hui continued, his voice calm yet filled with a sense of urgency. ¡°First, we¡¯ll set up a few traps around here¡ªthey¡¯lle in handyter. ¡°After that, I¡¯ll create a Shadow Clone that will stay hidden somewhere beyond Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s sensory range. My real body will go in and make it look like I¡¯m trying to deal with Hunter. ¡°Lightning, Sakumo, your job is to back me up after my ¡®attempt¡¯ fails, and we¡¯ll all flee together toward the Country of fire. ¡°Since they¡¯ll sense chakra from three individuals¡ªthree high-level shinobi¡ªKamizuru Ishigawa will assume we¡¯re the entire team and will likely pursue us with all his forces. ¡°Moreover, when he sees us risk returning to deal with Hunter, he¡¯ll believe that Hunter has crucial information. He won¡¯t kill him immediately; he¡¯ll either take Hunter with him during the chase or send him back to their base with a smaller team. ¡°At that point, as long as Kamizuru Ishigawa isn¡¯t present, my Shadow Clone will have a chance to rescue Hunter. Meanwhile, after our retreat, I¡¯ll use the traps we set to dy their pursuit while you two head back to seek help from the squad leader. ¡°That¡¯s the n,¡± Hui concluded, calmly outlining the strategy he hade up with in his mind. There wasn¡¯t much time¡ªthis was the best he could devise given the circumstances. There might still be ws or gaps, but there was no time to refine it further. Lightning and Hatake Sakumo frowned as they listened to the n, their brows furrowing with concern. ¡°Captain, if you stay behind to hold them off, then what¡¯s the point of rescuing Hunter?!¡± Hatake Sakumo protested. Even if someone had to remain behind, it shouldn¡¯t be Hui. Lightning, however, didn¡¯t immediately object. He simply asked, ¡°Hui, do you really think you can pull it off?¡± Hui¡¯s smile deepened, a confident glint in his eyes. ¡°Trust me, you know what I¡¯m capable of. With my recovery abilities and certain skills, I should be able to manage it. Just focus on getting help as quickly as you can.¡± His confidence was contagious¡ªit was as if he had already envisioned the sessful rescue. Lightning took a deep breath, nodding. ¡°We¡¯ll be back with reinforcements as fast as possible.¡± Despite the deep concern gnawing at him, Lightning knew that once Hui made up his mind, there was no changing it¡ªunless there was a better alternative. And he knew that among them, Hui alone had the unique physical capabilities and secret techniques necessary to hold back the enemy. If he and Hatake Sakumo stayed, they¡¯d only end up bing liabilities. Hatake Sakumo seemed ready to argue further, but Lightning cut him off with a stern look. ¡°Sakumo, trust the Captain!¡± And Hui¡¯s voice joined in, ¡°Don¡¯t worry. My abilities are beyond what you have seen.¡± With that, he issued his final order, his voice brimming with the authority of a leader. ¡°Then, as the leader of the Fourth Squad, I order you: Lightning, Sakumo, your mission is to return and rendezvous with the squad leader.¡± Hatake Sakumo¡¯s eyes widened. Rules¡­ duty¡­ being a shinobi¡­ and now, his captain¡­ So, this was what it truly meant to make a choice. join my patreon for 60+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 68: Instant Kill, and rescue Chapter 68: Instant Kill, and rescue Deep within the pitch-ck forest, the dim glow of a dozen torches pushed back the darkness, casting flickering light across a small clearing. That light fell upon Hunter, who was bound to a tree, his face as pale as death. He appeared to be on the brink of copse, barely clinging to life, as if a breath of wind might extinguish him entirely. But he was still alive¡ªbecause Kamizuru Ishigawa wouldn¡¯t allow him to die. "Such a stubborn spirit, to endure this long. But what good does it do you? It only prolongs your suffering,¡± Kamizuru Ishigawa remarked, standing before Hunter. His tone wasced with a mockery of pity as he studied the young face before him. "Continue," he ordered coldly, after noting that Hunter didn¡¯t respond. Those words caused Hunter¡¯s body to shudder involuntarily. He opened his mouth, but no words came out. And so, a new wave of torture began. Meanwhile, Hui had returned to this scene, hiding himself in the shadows behind a tree, blending seamlessly into the darkness. He steadied his breathing, forcing himself to calm his emotions. Then, without hesitation, he made his move. His hands flew through a series of seals with lightning speed. Inhaling deeply, he gathered his chakra and released it in a powerful breath. ¡°Fire Style: Great Fireball Jutsu!¡± A massive fireball erupted from the depths of the forest, surging towards the clearing where Hunter was tied. "Who¡¯s there?!" Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s sharp voice rang out, cutting through the night as the fireball¡¯s glow lit up the surrounding darkness. The sudden ze was impossible to miss, and every one of the Iwagakure Anbu immediately spotted it. Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s hands blurred as he rapidly formed seals. "Earth Style: Earth Wall!" An earthen barrier sprang up in the fireball''s path, absorbing its impact. mes shed against the barrier, bursting into a dazzling disy of sparks¡ªlike a massive flower blooming in the night. Swish! Swish! Swish! Kunai flew from Hui''s hand, slicing through the air toward the top of the earth wall. Just as they neared the barrier, Huiunched another volley, striking the first kunai mid-flight. ng! ng! ng! The kunai collided, altering their trajectory in mid-air, angling towards a blind spot¡ªright where Hunter was bound to the tree. The Iwagakure Anbu Jonin closest to Hunter¡¯s position saw this and reacted instantly, leaping forward with his own kunai to deflect the projectiles. He managed to knock away two of them, but the third one slipped past. With a grimace, the Jonin gritted his teeth and blocked the kunai with his forearm. Thud! The de buried itself in his arm, and he sucked in a sharp breath through clenched teeth. Ignoring the pain, he quickly positioned himself in front of Hunter, shielding him from further attacks. "Where do you think you¡¯re going?!" Seeing that both attacks had been thwarted, Hui didn¡¯t hesitate. He turned and bolted into the forest, moving swiftly through the darkness. Four other Anbu Jonin roared in anger and immediately gave chase, leading their teams after him, determined to bring him down. Kamizuru Ishigawa activated his sensory jutsu, focusing on the fleeing figure. He quickly detected the chakra signature¡ªenough to identify the runaway as a Jonin-level opponent. And in the same moment, he sensed two other chakra signatures approaching¡ªboth Jonin level as well. That meant¡­ These three were all Jonin! It¡¯s that infamous elite squad from Konoha¡¯s Anbu. And the captive Konoha Anbu member must know crucial information for them to act like this! Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s mind raced, piecing everything together with stunning uracy, matching Hui¡¯s predictions exactly. ¡°Night Bird, take Squad Six and escort the prisoner back to the main base! All other units, follow me!¡± Kamizuru Ishigawa barked his orders,unching himself after Hui. In mere moments, the clearing was left with just four figures behind. Among them was Night Bird¡ªthe Jonin who had taken the kunai to the arm. The other three were his subordinates: two Elite Chunin and one regr Chunin. ¡°It seems the Commander has sensed all the members of that Konoha elite squad. But to be safe, we should head back immediately,¡± Night Bird mused, quickly cutting the ropes that held Hunter. ¡°Captain, your arm¡ª¡± one of the Elite Chunin said, his face full of concern. ¡°It¡¯s fine. The kunai wasn¡¯t poisoned, I¡¯ll just bandage it up. Grab the prisoner. We¡¯re moving out¡ªdestination: the main base.¡± Night Bird gave the order, directing his subordinates to carry Hunter as they swiftly departed. What they failed to notice, however, was the shadowy figure trailing them from behind¡ªa figure moving as silently as a ghost. It was Hui¡¯s Shadow Clone¡ªa clone undetectable by Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s sensory jutsu. This was a clone unlike any other¡ªcreated using a technique of Hui¡¯s own invention, the Light Shadow Clone. While traditional Shadow Clones were formed from chakra, Hui¡¯s Light Shadow Clone was forged from light energy and mental energy. As such, Kamizuru Ishigawa, who could only sense chakra, couldn¡¯t detect this unique clone. Everything was unfolding just as Hui had predicted. Kamizuru Ishigawa had taken the bulk of his forces to pursue, leaving Hunter alive and opting to take him back for further interrogation instead of ending his life outright. Hui had anticipated everyone¡¯s reactions perfectly. And the reason his clone hadn¡¯t struck immediately after Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s departure was simple¡ªHui had wanted to wait until they were further away, increasing his chances of sess. After traveling about a kilometer towards the Iwagakure base, Hui¡¯s clone made its move. It leapt from the trees, sword in hand, and lunged at Night Bird. Even though the Iwagakure Jonin was injured, he remained a Jonin-level threat¡ªHui¡¯s priority target. ¡°Who¡¯s there?!¡± The sound of wind rustling through the trees reached Night Bird¡¯s ears, and he spun around, raising his kunai defensively. By the faint torchlight, he caught sight of a figure descending upon him, sword shing in the darkness. There was no time for jutsu¡ªNight Bird had to rely on pure reflexes. He gritted his teeth, eyes locked onto the de, kunai raised to parry. But that was exactly what Hui¡¯s clone wanted. Light Burst! In an instant, a blinding re of light exploded from the clone¡¯s de, filling the air with searing brightness. Night Bird, who was staring directly at the sword, felt a sharp pain in his eyes. Instinctively, he squeezed them shut. The sh was too intense and too sudden, turning his vision into a nk, white haze. sh! The sound of a de slicing through flesh and bone filled the air, followed by a gush of blood. Hui¡¯s clone¡¯s sword had cleaved through Night Bird¡¯s neck, sending a crimson arc spraying through the night. ¡°Captain!!¡± Night Bird¡¯s three subordinates reeled back in shock, their faces pale as their leader¡¯s headless body fell to the ground. But Hui¡¯s clone didn¡¯t hesitate. It lunged forward, unleashing a blindingly fast sh¡ªSilver Moon¡ªthat cut down one of the charging Elite Chunin in an instant. The next moment, he struck down the second Elite Chunin with a powerful Mountain Cleave, cutting through him with ease. In the blink of an eye, the Iwagakure Anbu squady dead, save for thest remaining Chunin, who was still carrying Hunter. The man¡¯s face turned deathly white, paralyzed with fear at the massacre. Without mercy, Hui¡¯s clone swung its de, severing the Chunin¡¯s throat with a single stroke. In just a few seconds, Hui¡¯s ambush had decimated the entire Iwagakure squad. Tossing aside the dead Chunin¡¯s body, Hui¡¯s clone hoisted the unconscious Hunter onto its back. Hunter, draped over Hui¡¯s small frame, seemed to sense who was carrying him. Struggling to open his eyes, his voice came out as a raspy whisper. ¡°Captain¡­ I¡­ didn¡¯t¡­ reveal¡­ any secrets.¡± With those words, he slipped back into unconsciousness. join my patreon for 60+ advanced chapters: Chapter 69: Into the Shadows Chapter 69: Into the Shadows Deep in the pitch-ck forest, Hui¡¯s shadow clone smiled faintly at Hunter¡¯s words. Even though Hunter had already slipped into unconsciousness, Hui still murmured softly to the figure on his back, "It''s okay, rest now. I¡¯ve got this." Meanwhile, Hui¡¯s main body, having failed to execute his sneak attack, swiftly retreated. As he had anticipated, once Kamizuru Ishigawa sensed three Jonin-level chakra signatures, he immediately led the majority of his forces in hot pursuit. ¡°Fire Style: Great Fireball Jutsu!¡± ¡°Wind Style: Great Breakthrough!¡± At a critical moment, Hui regrouped with Lightning and Hatake Sakumo. The two synchronized their hand signs, unleashing abination of fire and wind jutsu. The wind-fed mes roared through the forest, forming a massive fireball that surged towards the Iwagakure Anbu pursuing them. The jutsu¡¯s expansive range forced the pursuers to halt and defend themselves with earth-style barriers. Amidst the chaos, Hui and his team took advantage of their pursuer''s dy, sprinting towards the trap-filled area they had prepared earlier. When the mes finally dissipated, and the Iwagakure Anbu saw the distance between them and the Konoha trio widening, their anxiety grew, and they pressed forward with urgency. Not long after, Kamizuru Ishigawa and his elites arrived on the scene. ¡°Continue the pursuit!¡± hemanded. Having been outmanoeuvred by this Konoha squad once already, Kamizuru Ishigawa was determined to capture them himself. The losses he had suffered¡ªeight entire Anbu squads¡ªburned like a brand in his mind, making his heart twist with anger. That was forty trained Anbu operatives, each representing countless hours of training and significant resources. And they had all been cut down in a sh by this Konoha squad. The loss was a wound that he could not let heal, a wound that demanded retribution. The chase resumed. At a certain point, Hui nced back at hisrades, exchanging a knowing look with them. He then slowed his pace, allowing Lightning and Hatake Sakumo to continue ahead. They were nearing the trapden zone, and it was time for Hui to take his stand. Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s Anbu force quickly entered the trap zone, moving swiftly under the cover of night. Suddenly, Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s foot brushed against something, and his instincts red to life. ¡°Careful, traps!¡± he shouted. His years of experience as a seasoned ninja kicked in, even before his mind fully registered the sensation underfoot. This was pure reflex¡ªan instinct honed by countless battles. If it had been daylight, the traps might have been more obvious. But under the darkness of the dense forest canopy, the moonlight and starlight were barely more than shadows. Their shlights cast narrow beams, but many areas remained cloaked in ckness. In such an environment, even the sharpest senses were dulled. Whizz! Whizz! Whizz! Kunai flew from every direction, slicing through the night. Their speed and the darkness made them nearly impossible to see¡ªonly the faint whistle of their flight hinted at their presence. ¡°Earth Style: Earth Wall!¡± Earthen walls shot up, surrounding the Iwagakure Anbu and blocking the hail of kunai. Thud! Thud! Thud! Kunai struck the earth barriers with dull thuds, their momentum absorbed. As expected, the traps were halted. Hui had anticipated this, knowing that his initial traps would likely be countered. But the aim of these traps wasn¡¯t to kill¡ªit was to drain their chakra and buy time for Lightning and Hatake Sakumo to get further away. ¡°Keep moving!¡± Kamizuru Ishigawa shouted. Emerging from behind the crumbling walls, he led the Anbu onward. But they had barely made it a few steps when one of the Elite Chunin suddenly stumbled, his foot plunging into a concealed pit. Inside, sharp kunai pierced through his leg. ¡°Argh!!¡± His scream echoed through the trees, sending a wave of dread through the remaining Anbu, slowing their steps to a cautious pace. Trap after trap sprang up along their path, inflicting injuries though none were fatal. But two or three more of the Iwagakure forces were severely hurt. Kamizuru Ishigawa frowned, sensing the trap-riddled terrain. He activated his sensory jutsu, pinpointing a lone figure not far ahead, while the other two signatures were already a considerable distance away. ¡°So, you intend to slow us down and let your allies escape, do you? Foolish! All of the Elite Chunin, stay behind. Jonin,e with me!¡± With his n set, Kamizuru Ishigawa led his Jonin forward, confident in his ability to deal with one opponent. After all, their side boasted one Kage-level ninja and four Jonin against just one Jonin and two other escapees. Even without the Chunin, they were more than capable of taking down their prey. The relieved Elite Chunin remained behind, thankful not to plunge headlong into more traps. As for the Jonin, they pressed forward, experienced enough to handle the lurking traps. Hui, observing Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s response, couldn¡¯t help but admire the man¡¯s decisiveness and tactical mind. ¡°Worthy of being the Anbu Commander of Iwagakure,¡± he thought. But did Ishigawa truly think that was enough to break through? Hui¡¯s eyes narrowed as he suppressed his chakrapletely, turning every bit into light energy. Then, his presence seemed to vanish, melting seamlessly into the dark forest around him. As Kamizuru Ishigawa led his Jonin deeper into the woods, he froze, he strained his senses. ¡°He just vanished? How is that possible?¡± He scanned ahead with his sensory jutsu but found nothing¡ªno trace of the enemy he had been tracking, only the distant presence of two others further away. ¡°Commander, what¡¯s happenig?¡± One of the Jonin asked, noticing Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s hesitation. The others slowed, confusion on their faces. In that moment, Hui struck. From his hiding spot among the low shrubs, he lunged forward, striking with a kunai. The de found its mark in the back of the rearmost Jonin, piercing deep. Hui wasted no time, retreating back into the shadows just as swiftly. ¡°Who¡¯s there?!¡± The faint sound of Hui¡¯s attack reached the ears of the remaining Jonin, and their shlights swung around, beams slicing through the darkness. But they caught only a fleeting glimpse of Hui¡¯s silhouette before it vanished into the night. ¡°Urgh¡­¡± The injured Jonin gasped, blood dripping from his mouth as he staggered, pain twisting his features. Without immediate aid, he wouldn¡¯t survive. ¡°Damn it!¡± Kamizuru Ishigawa cursed, his voice a low growl as his eyes scanned the shadows, desperately searching for any sign of the enemy. But all he saw was the unforgiving darkness. join my patreon for 60+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 70: A Change of Plans Chapter 70: A Change of ns "This enemy is capable of blocking even my chakra sensing, he¡¯s a master at stealth!" Kamizuru Ishigawa quickly shared the information with his remaining subordinates. The three remaining Iwagakure Jonin, already on edge, exchanged nervous nces before forming a tight defensive formation, eyes scanning the darkness around them with heightened vignce. Meanwhile, the Jonin who had been stabbed by Hui¡¯s ambushy bleeding on the forest floor, the blood pooling beneath him. Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s expression grew even darker. He could feel the difficulty of the situation, along with a mounting sense of frustration. In broad daylight, or in an open field, such an ambush would never have seeded. He would never have allowed an enemy to attack his subordinates right under his nose. But this environment was entirely different¡ªdeep in a dark, dense forest where visibility was minimal. The thick canopy above blocked any moonlight, plunging them into nearplete darkness, save for the thin beams of their shlights. It felt as if they were fighting blindfolded. In such conditions, even experienced fighters were at a disadvantage, much like a strong adult whose eyes are covered, facing off against a child armed with a stick. The advantage could shift dramatically, and that¡¯s exactly what was happening here. Kamizuru Ishigawa repeatedly cast his sensing jutsu, straining to catch any trace of Hui''s presence. But it was as if his enemy had vanished into thin air. The only chakra signatures he could detect were those of Lightning and Hatake Sakumo, retreating further and further away, almost beyond his sensory range. As for the one who had attacked them moments ago¡ªhe was nowhere to be sensed, like a ghost. This put Kamizuru Ishigawa in a tough spot, caught between two equally risky choices. Should he continue the chase, risking more ambushes from the elusive enemy? Or should he call off the pursuit, abandoning the mission and sacrificing the lives lost so far? "Curse it all!!!" he roared in frustration, his anger boiling over. He felt humiliated¡ªeven as the Anbu Commander of Iwagakure, he was pushed to the edge by a single Konoha operative. Never before had he suffered such a setback in his career, not even during the First Shinobi World War. He activated his sensory jutsu once more, finding that the two distant chakra signatures were nearly beyond his reach. He had to make a decision now¡ªcontinue the chase or not. Just then, a scream pierced the silence from the direction they hade. "Ahhhh!!!" Kamizuru Ishigawa''s face twisted with realization. "No, no, no, no! it can''t be!" Without hesitation, he turned and raced back toward the sound, his remaining Jonin following close behind. As they rushed back, a grim scene greeted them. The remaining Chunin and Elite Chunin had formed a defensive circle, their expressions tense as they scanned the surrounding darkness. "What happened?!" one of the Jonin shouted, sense of dread creeping into his voice. "Captain, Commander! We¡¯re being attacked by someone... we don¡¯t know where they are!" an Elite Chunin reported, struggling to suppress his fear. The sight of hismanders offered some relief, but the terror of the unseen enemy still lingered. Earlier, a sudden cry of pain had alerted them to a new attack. By the time they realized what was happening, three of theirrades had already fallen, killed in the darkness. Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s expression grew even grimmer. From the moment of the ambush on his Jonin to now, barely two minutes had passed, and yet this ghostly Konoha Anbu had already imed three more lives. "Retreat!" he barked through gritted teeth. His rational mind told him that continuing the pursuit would only lead to further losses. Even if they managed to catch up with the Konoha squad, it wouldn¡¯t be worth the casualties they would suffer. He would have to swallow his pride this time, but the next time they met, he would make sure it wasn''t in such a disadvantageous situation. He vowed never to battle this ghost-like enemy unprepared ever again. Seething with frustration, Kamizuru Ishigawa stood his ground, scanning the shadows, unwilling to lose more of his men. At his order, the Iwagakure Anbu began their retreat, many of them releasing long-held breaths. They had been facing an enemy who moved like a ghost, always ready to strike from the shadows. Despite their anger and humiliation, they had no choice but to retreat, storing away the grudge for another day. Hidden in the darkness, Hui let out a quiet sigh of relief as he observed the retreating Iwagakure forces. At the same time, he felt a deep sense of fortune. Though this encounter had brought him a string of sesses¡ªmanaging to take out multiple Iwagakure Anbu, even with theirmander present¡ªhe knew that luck and circumstances had been heavily on his side. It had been the cover of night, the dense forest, and his unique sensory abilities that allowed him to blend into the shadows so seamlessly. And his young, small body made it easier to move undetected. All these factorsbined with his strategic thinking, had allowed him to outmaneuver Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s forces. He was fully aware that a simr oue would be hard to replicate. After this, the Iwagakure Anbu would be much more cautious and likely avoid night missions. But... who could say what his own strength would be the next time they faced each other? Perhaps by then, he wouldn¡¯t need to rely on stealth and tricks¡ªperhaps he would be able to defeat them head-on. But those thoughts were forter. For now, the rescue mission was a sess, and it was time to leave. Yet just as Hui prepared to withdraw, he suddenly halted, his expression shifting. He had received a rush of memories¡ªsent back by his own Light Clone. It wasn¡¯t that his clone had been defeated in battle. Rather, it had intentionally dispelled itself to deliver this information. From the memories, Hui learned that the clone had sessfully rescued Takeshi and was heading back toward the Konoha Anbu gathering point. But along the way, it had encountered other Konoha Anbu. Those Anbu revealed that they were members of the First Unit, who were engaged in a critical mission. If sessful, their mission would heavily weaken the Iwagakure Anbu¡¯s presence in the Land of fog, allowing Konoha to secure victory in the region. However, after hearing the details, Hui realized a critical w in their n: their unitmander did not know that Kamizuru Ishigawa, the Iwagakure Anbu Commander, had entered the Land of fog and was likely heading toward the conflict zone. If Kamizuru Ishigawa arrived, the entire situation would change. His presence,bined with a force of elite Anbu, and his own Kage-level strength, would tip the bnce drastically. Thinking of this, Hui nced at the retreating Iwagakure forces below and made a hard decision. It seemed he couldn¡¯t let them simply leave after all. join my patreon for 60+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 71: No Retreat Chapter 71: No Retreat After learning about the squad''s n, Hui made up his mind to hold off the Iwagakure forces. It was a risky move¡ªamong the Iwagakure Anbu was a Kage-levelmander, Kamizuru Ishigawa. But the environment favoured Hui, and such conditions would be hard to find again. Moreover, the real threat among the enemy ranks was only Kamizuru Ishigawa. The other Jonin, Elite Chunin and Chunin posed no significant threats to him. Still, Hui didn¡¯t rush into action. He knew that the enemy was on high alert, with their light sources gathered together, pushing back the darkness. A hasty attack, even if it seeded in taking down one of them, would likely expose his position. So, he waited for the right moment. Meanwhile, Kamizuru Ishigawa ordered his subordinates to move towards the edge of the forest. It was still hours before dawn, meaning they would remain in darkness for a long time. Based on the earlier events, he concluded that their ghost-like enemy was likely the Konoha Elite Jonin they had identified earlier¡ªan expert not only inbat but also in concealment. Judging by the speed of his attacks and retreats, this Konoha shinobi either knew the terrain intimately or possessed vision unaffected by the night. In these favourable conditions, they had suffered significant losses. Though they were retreating now, there was no guarantee that the shadowy figure would cease his assaults. If he continued attacking, it would be a disaster for them in the pitch-ck forest. Their best option was to leave the woods and head for more open ground. Out in the open, with their shlights and the moonlight above, any attack from that ghostly enemy would be much easier to counter, turning the hunter into the hunted. Hui, tracking their movements, realized the same. If he let them escape the forest, the situation would turn against him. He needed to act now, to strike while they were still in the dense woods. His goal was to eliminate at least one of the Jonin and then draw Kamizuru Ishigawa away. If he seeded, the remaining two Jonin leading the weakened group of Elite Chunin and Chunin would pose no real threat to therger battle. As for the idea of killing Kamizuru Ishigawa himself... Hui dismissed that thought. His earlier attacks had been aimed at taking out one of the Jonin through a surprise backstab, not engaging in a direct confrontation. Kamizuru Ishigawa was no ordinary opponent. As a battle-hardened Kage-level shinobi, his reactions were extremely fast, and Hui had no confidence innding a surprise killing blow. ording to Konoha''s intelligence, Kamizuru Ishigawa was an expert in sensory and Earth Release techniques, but his other abilities remained unknown. It would be foolish to assume that such a high-level ninja didn¡¯t have powerful defensive techniques or trump cards. Hui checked his supplies¡ªonly a few kunai and shuriken remained. He analyzed the formation of the Iwagakure Anbu, searching for a way to eliminate a Jonin, but their cautious movements made it difficult to find an opening. As they neared the edge of the forest, Hui knew he couldn¡¯t dy any longer. He steadied himself, focusing his energy. In a moment, his chakra had fully replenished, and the exhaustion from the earlier dissolution of his Light Clone had faded. He was ready. Hui hurled his remaining kunai and shuriken. One of the kunai carried hisst explosive tag, aimed at Kamizuru Ishigawa to distract him for a few seconds. At the same time, Huiunched himself at full speed, targeting the nearest Jonin with his sword. "Watch out!!" Kamizuru Ishigawa was prepared. Noticing the explosive-tagged kunai, he swiftly formed hand seals, raising a wall of earth from the ground. Boom!!! The explosion thundered through the forest, startling the Iwagakure Anbu, even if only for a moment. And that moment was exactly what Hui needed. "Silver Moon!" It was Hui¡¯s signature sword technique, one he had refined and perfected over countless battles. The sh moved like the rising crescent moon, its silvery light cutting through the darkness. In a sh, the nearest Jonin fell, his life extinguished before he even hit the ground. Without wasting a moment, Hui turned and darted back into the shadows. But this time, his movement was tracked. "You''re not getting away!!" A furious shout echoed through the trees as a figureunched himself after Hui¡ªKamizuru Ishigawa. The two of them sped through the dense forest, their forms vanishing into the darkness. Back at the ambush site, the remaining Iwagakure Anbu, now gripped with fear and uncertainty of the situation, huddled together in a tight formation, clutching their weapons as they watched the forest around them. ¡°Captain, should we follow them?¡± a trembling Elite Chunin finally asked one of the remaining Jonin. The Jonin grimaced, ncing at the lifeless body of his fallenrade, cut down so swiftly by the ghostly enemy. He shook his head, trying to keep his voice steady. ¡°Follow? No, we retreat!¡± The other Jonin nodded in agreement. ¡°Themander can handle that enemy. Our job now is to get out of here!¡± Without hesitation, the remaining Iwagakure Anbu turned and fled, making their way toward the forest¡¯s edge, as if pausing for even a moment would result in certain death at the hands of that phantom in the shadows. It was clear¡ªthis experience had left them deeply scarred. For many of the anbu present here, the thought of dark forests would forever be a source of fear. Meanwhile, Hui sprinted at full speed through the forest, Kamizuru Ishigawa hot on his heels, matching his pace. The earlier ambush had revealed his position, allowing Kamizuru Ishigawa to lock onto him. Now, the Iwagakuremander was focused on a single goal¡ªcatching and killing the Konoha shinobi who had cost him so many of his men. ¡°You damn Konoha rat! After all the lives you¡¯ve taken, do you think you can get away? I¡¯ll make sure you die tonight!¡± Kamizuru Ishigawa''s voice seethed with anger, the fury in his words filling the dark woods. But Hui felt a strange sense of relief. Despite themander¡¯s rage, his speed wasn¡¯t significantly greater than Hui¡¯s¡ªonly slightly faster. This meant that for now, Kamizuru Ishigawa couldn¡¯t catch him. And when it came to running, Hui had plenty of experience up his sleeve. ¡®I¡¯ll wear you down... and then¡­¡¯ Hui thought, steeling his heart. join my patreon for 60+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 72: The Final Strike Chapter 72: The Final Strike As Hui sprinted through the dense forest, he pushed his speed to the limit, appearing as though he was desperately fleeing for his life. Behind him, Kamizuru Ishigawa, filled with rage over the loss of so many of his men, pursued him with equal determination. But a small smirk tugged at the corner of Hui''s mouth. This was exactly what he wanted¡ªKamizuru Ishigawa to chase him relentlessly, exerting every ounce of his strength. Once Kamizuru was caught in this cycle of exhausting himself, Hui would have the opportunity to either escape or, if fortune favoured him, turn the tables and defeat him. Hui¡¯s mind briefly shed back to an incident years ago, when he had used his near-unlimited stamina to oust a Kirigakure Jonin, eventually wearing him down before delivering a lethal strike. Now, with a simr situation unfolding, his ambitions soared. "Why stop at just escaping?" Hui thought. "What if I could make sure Kamizuru Ishigawa never leaves the Land of Fog?" The two sped through the forest, their movements swift and precise, with Kamizuru steadily closing the distance. Hui¡¯s heart sank slightly. Kamizuru was adapting to the darkness faster than expected, and as a Kage-level ninja, especially one who led the Iwagakure Anbu, he had no weaknesses. His stamina was exceptional, and if this continued, Hui feared he would be caught before Kamizuru¡¯s energy was drained. "I need another n," Hui thought, his mind racing as he cleared a small hill. Then, his eyes widened, and his body tensed. Ahead of him, the environment changed dramatically. Beyond the hill, the trees thinned out, leaving only a few scattered saplings. An open clearingy ahead, with patches of grass dotting the ground. And at the far end of that clearing... a vast ravine stretched out. "The Abyss Crossing!" Hui immediately recognized the location. He had seen it on the map of the Land of Fog during one of his studies. During his earlier sprint through the forest, he hadn''t been able to confirm his exact location, but now he realized where he had ended up. The Abyss Crossing was a massive ravine within the Land of Fog, stretching several kilometres across at its widest point. On average, it was around 300 meters wide, with some areas reaching depths close to a thousand meters. The ravine was straight, cutting through thendscape like a scar. Several Legends surrounded the Abyss Crossing. Some said it was a natural formation, while others believed it was created by the Sage of Six Paths or the result of a battle between ancient deities. But Hui knew better. This is no natural formation, he thought. It must have been left behind by one of the Otsutsuki battles, either during Kaguya¡¯s war or the conflict between the Sage¡¯s sons. But none of that mattered now. What mattered was that he was trapped¡ªan endless ravine in front of him, and a Kage-level opponent behind him. "Looks like you¡¯ve run out of options!" Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s voice rang out, filled with glee. Under the moonlight, Kamizuru could see Hui¡¯s small figure standing at the edge of the ravine. A grin spread across the Iwagakuremander¡¯s face. Fortune had finally turned in his favour. "To think the one who killed so many of my men would be so small," Kamizuru mocked as he approached. "No wonder you¡¯ve been so good at hiding. It must be easy with a body like that, But now I¡¯m curious¡ªwhat¡¯s under that mask of yours? Is it the face of a dwarf? Or perhaps a child? No matter. Tonight, you¡¯re not going anywhere." Kamizuru¡¯s voice was filled with cold confidence as he closed in on Hui. Hui said nothing in response. Instead, he tightened his grip on his sword and dashed toward Kamizuru. There was no escape now. If the only way forward was to fight, then he would face this Kage-level opponent head-on. Kamizuru sneered at Hui¡¯s charge. He drew his kunai, prepared to end the fight swiftly. ng! ng! ng! In an instant, their weapons shed in a flurry of strikes. Sparks flew as Hui¡¯s de met Kamizuru¡¯s kunai, the sound of metal against metal ringing out in the night. As they exchanged blows, bothbatants analyzing the other. Kamizuru had the advantage in physical strength, speed, and experience. Even their reaction times were nearly equal, but in every fundamental aspect, Hui was at a disadvantage. Kamizuru Ishigawa truly lived up to his reputation as the Iwagakure Anbumander and a Kage-level ninja. However, Hui had one advantage¡ªhis endurance and ability to heal quickly. If he could avoid being overwhelmed early, the longer the fight dragged on, the better his chances of survival. ng! ng! The two continued their fierce exchange of strikes, but Hui was mostly on the defensive, with few opportunities tounch a counterattack. When he did manage to strike, it had little effect. Still, Hui remained patient, biding his time as he searched for the perfect opening. Minutes passed, and under the pale moonlight, Kamizuru¡¯s eyes fully adapted to the darkness, making his attacks even more precise. sh! Hui grimaced as Kamizuru¡¯s kunai grazed his arm. It was a shallow cut, but blood began to seep from the wound, affecting his movements slightly. The more they fought, the clearer it became that the difference in strength was putting Hui in greater danger. "You¡¯re nothing special under the light," Kamizuru sneered, his confidence growing. He could feel that victory was within his grasp. Still, he remained cautious. Both were shinobi, after all, and neither had yet employed their full arsenal of ninjutsu. sh! Another strike from Kamizurunded, adding another wound to Hui¡¯s body. The situation was growing more precarious for Hui. Kamizuru had already familiarized himself with Hui¡¯s sword techniques and was able to predict each strike with eerie precision. Every time Hui attacked, Kamizuru¡¯s eyes locked onto his de, reading his movements before they even happened. Then, just as Hui swung his sword again, he noticed Kamizuru¡¯s eyes narrowing, tracking the sword¡¯s trajectory. This was the moment Hui had been waiting for. "Light Release: sh!" A blinding white light exploded from Hui¡¯s sword just as it descended, stunning Kamizuru. join my patreon for 60+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 73 Chapter 73 Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s vision was instantly flooded with blinding light as Hui¡¯s attack struck. His eyes instinctively snapped shut in response to the painful sh, and in that brief moment, a cold chill of danger shot through him¡ªa primal fear of death. Without thinking, he trusted his body¡¯s instincts. As the searing pain in his chest confirmed, his enemy hadnded a solid blow. Blood sprayed from the wound as Kamizuru staggered back, desperately forming hand seals mid-air. ¡°Earth Release: Earth Wall!¡± A thick earthen barrier erupted from the ground in front of him, shielding him from any follow-up attacks. Kamizuru tried to pry his eyes open, but all he could see was a giant white orb still burning into his retinas, obscuring his visionpletely. Panic set in as he realised, he couldn¡¯t see. He quickly adjusted, focusing all his senses on detecting any movements around him, his body poised defensively. Whoosh! The sound of something cutting through the air caused him to sidestep just in time, narrowly avoiding Hui¡¯s de as it shed down from above. ¡°Earth Release: Rising Stone Spears!¡± Kamizuru guessed Hui¡¯s position based on the trajectory of the previous attack and sent a series of sharp stone spikes shooting up from the ground. Hui reacted swiftly, his sword cleaving through the stone projectiles as he kicked off one of the spears, propelling himself away tond at a safe distance. Kamizuru forced one eye open, still fighting through the pain and blurred vision. The bright afterimage of Hui¡¯s previous light attack continued to haunt him, making it difficult to focus. Tears streamed from his eyes, clouding his view further. ¡°Damn it!¡± Kamizuru cursed. He hadn¡¯t expected his opponent to possess such a technique¡ªone that didn¡¯t even require hand seals to execute. What made it worse was that he couldn¡¯t sense Hui¡¯s chakra during the attack. The realization hit him like a wave of disbelief: ¡®Is this some kind of jutsu that doesn¡¯t rely on chakra?¡¯ It was absurd, breaking all the rules of ninjutsu Kamizuru knew. Yet, there it was¡ªsomething that defied his understanding of the shinobi world. Meanwhile, Hui pressed the attack, dashing towards Kamizuru once more. Now was the perfect time to strike, with Kamizuru¡¯s visionpromised and his defenses weakened. Though it might have been wise to unleash arge-scale ninjutsu, Hui knew better. Any use of chakra would immediately alert Kamizuru¡¯s sharp sensory abilities, negating the advantage of his stealthy movements. As Hui closed in for another round of closebat, Kamizuru had no choice but to rely solely on his remaining senses. Without his sight, he was forced to defend by reacting to the slightest changes in the air and sound. His years of experience as a sensory ninja allowed him to narrowly avoid most of Hui¡¯s strikes, but it was clear that the tide was turning against him. Despite Kamizuru¡¯s impressive defensive maneuvers, the numerous wounds umting on his body were taking their toll. His breathing grew ragged, and the sharp pain in his chest from Hui¡¯s earlier sword strike still hadn¡¯t subsided. Every time Kamizuru blocked a blow, Hui found another opening to exploit. In one swift movement, Huinded a solid kick, sending Kamizuru crashing into the earth wall he had created moments earlier. Hui didn¡¯t waste the opportunity. With all his strength, he lunged forward and plunged his sword deep into Kamizuru¡¯s abdomen. "I did it," Hui thought, victory in sight. But then, Kamizuru¡¯s lips curled into a wicked grin. Before Hui could react, Kamizuru¡¯s hand shot forward, grabbing onto his wrist with an iron grip. ¡°What?!¡± Hui¡¯s instincts screamed at him, but it was toote. A massive stone fist materialized from behind him, powered by Kamizuru¡¯s Earth Release: Rock Fist Jutsu. It mmed into Hui¡¯s back with crushing force, sending him flying across the battlefield, his body carving a deep groove into the ground before he collided with arge boulder. Cough! Blood sprayed from Hui¡¯s mouth as his body crumpled against the rock. His mask had been shattered in the process, revealing his young but battle-hardened face, contorted in pain. But despite the agony, Hui forced himself back onto his feet, gripping his sword tightly. He had no time to recover fully as Kamizuru was already on the move again. Slice! Hui swung his sword, unleashing a wave of sword energy that cleaved through the rock fist and forced Kamizuru to retreat a few steps. "What terrifying shing power..." Kamizuru muttered, casting a wary nce at the remnants of his jutsu. His vision had begun to recover, and as he squinted through the pain. He realized that the shinobi before him, who had managed to wound him more severely than he thought possible, was younger than he could¡¯ve possibly imagined. "That jutsu... It must be the Second Tsuchikage¡¯s Splitting Technique," Hui said, finally piecing together Kamizuru¡¯s trick. The Splitting Technique allowed Kamizuru to divide his body and chakra into separate entities¡ªan advanced form of cloning that created physical duplicates without the need for hand signs. ¡°I underestimated you,¡± Hui admitted. ¡°You¡¯re the Iwagakure Anbu Commander, after all. I should¡¯ve expected you to have a few more tricks up your sleeve.¡± Kamizuru smirked through the pain, his gaze fixed on Hui. ¡°And I never expected the one responsible for ughtering so many of my men would be a mere child¡ªwhat are you, twelve? You¡¯ve mastered so many techniques... Chakra suppression, stealth, swordsmanship... What a prodigy." The reality of Hui¡¯s age and skill unsettled Kamizuru deeply. If someone this young could pose such a threat now, the danger he would represent in the future was unthinkable. "I can¡¯t let you live. Even if it costs me my life, I¡¯ll drag you down with me!" Kamizuru¡¯s eyes shed with murderous intent, the pressure of his killing intent flooding the battlefield. ¡°You think you¡¯ll kill me?¡± Hui smirked, brushing the blood from his lips. ¡°You¡¯re the one who¡¯s in danger. Your strength has halved after using the Splitting Technique. You should be worried about surviving this encounter.¡± The two shinobi locked eyes, the tension thick with the promise of death. Both knew that only one of them would leave this battlefield alive. join my patreon for 60+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 74 Chapter 74 Under the moonlight, two figures stood on opposite sides¡ªonerge, one small. Hui, the smaller of the two, was covered in dust, blood still staining the corner of his mouth. His body bore multiple injuries, and his clothes were tattered, making him appear rather battered. Kamizuru Ishigawa, therger figure, seemed much better off. After using his Splitting Technique earlier, he had managed to disperse most of his injuries, restoring his vision and clearing away the worst of his wounds. However, the cost of using that technique had left Kamizuru much weaker than he appeared. While he might have seemed rtively unscathed, his chakra reserves were significantly depleted, leaving him in a worse position than Hui, who now stood ready to fight. At a certain point, Hui made his move. Channelling his remaining energy into chakra, he swiftly formed hand seals. "Fire Release: Great Fireball Jutsu!" A massive fireball, several meters in diameter, erupted from his mouth, zing like a fearsome beast as it hurtled toward Kamizuru. The earlier exchange had taught Hui a harsh lesson¡ªshinobi techniques were full of unexpected twists and turns. In this world, jutsu could be bizarre, unpredictable, and deadly. However, one constant remained: all jutsu required chakra to be cast. No matter how strange or powerful the technique, without chakra, it couldn''t be activated. Hui didn¡¯t know the full extent of Kamizuru''s abilities, but he knew that if he could drain Kamizuru''s chakra, he could limit his options for counterattacking. Thus, Hui had resolved to engage in a direct ninjutsu battle. The battlefield was notrge, bordered on one side by a deep ravine and on the other by the dense forest. Kamizuru wanted Hui dead, and Hui wanted Kamizuru dead just as much. But the stakes were clear¡ªif Hui retreated into the forest, Kamizuru wouldn¡¯t follow; the danger there was too great. Conversely, if Kamizuru lured Hui into open ground, Hui¡¯s chances of victory would drop dramatically. Faced with Hui¡¯s iing fireball, Kamizuru didn¡¯t attempt to dodge. Instead, he decided to meet the attack head-on, confident in his remaining chakra reserves. He had sensed Hui¡¯s chakra when he cast the fireball and knew that, despite splitting his own chakra earlier, he still had the upper hand in terms of sheer chakra volume. "Earth Release: Earth Wall!" "Earth Release: Earth and Stone Dragon!" A towering earthen wall rose to intercept Hui¡¯s fireball, followed by the emergence of a fearsome stone dragon, which roared and lunged at Hui. But Hui had already anticipated this and finished weaving his own hand seals. In response to the attack, an identical earth dragon formed from the ground and charged to meet Kamizuru¡¯s attack head-on. The two stone dragons collided midair, sending chunks of dirt and stone scattering in all directions as their forms disintegrated upon impact. So fast! Both fighters thought to themselves, impressed by each other¡¯s speed at executing jutsu. Yet, their hands never stopped moving. "Earth Release: Earth Flow River!" Kamizuru finished his seals, and the ground beneath Hui¡¯s feet softened and began to flow, destabilizing his footing. "Earth Release: Mountain Jutsu [Sandwich Jutsu]¡± Following up immediately, Kamizuru created two massive hemispherical mounds of earth that began closing in on Hui from both sides. It was abination attack designed to immobilize and crush the opponent. This technique was no simple offensive maneuver¡ªit was an offensive strategy capable of subduing even the strongest of foes. In the hands of a powerful shinobi like Kamizuru, it had the potential to trap and crush even thergest-tailed beasts. Most opponents would have been caught in this devastatingbination, but Hui wasn¡¯t like most opponents. His hands shed through another set of seals. "Earth Release: Earth and Stone Dragon!" Another earthen dragon emerged, this time beneath Hui, lifting him into the air just before the giant mounds of earth could trap him. Standing atop the dragon¡¯s head, Hui evaded the crushing force and, as he soared upward, swiftly formed more seals. "Water Release: Great Waterfall Technique!" A massive torrent of water surged from his mouth, crashing down toward Kamizuru below. Kamizuru''s eyes narrowed as he reacted instantly, covering his fist in stone. "Earth Release: Stone Fist!" With one powerful punch, he shattered the water jutsu, sending droplets scattering in all directions. But this was exactly what Hui had been waiting for. As Kamizuru struck down the water, Huinded, his hands touching the ground. "Lightning Release: Earth Walk!" Electricity crackled along the ground, traveling quickly through the water left behind from Hui''s jutsu and shooting straight toward Kamizuru. The water amplified the lightning¡¯s speed and power, and Kamizuru, with his heavy stone-covered arm, couldn¡¯t dodge in time. The lightning coursed through his body, causing him to seize up, muscles momentarily paralyzed. Hui seized the opportunity, rushing forward with his sword drawn. sh! His de cut through the air, aiming to sever Kamizuru¡¯s spine. Kamizuru, in a desperate bid for survival, twisted his body at thest moment, avoiding a fatal blow but still suffering a deep gash across his back. Kamizuru coughed up blood, his face twisting in pain as he staggered. Despite his injury, he managed to steady himself, ring at Hui. Meanwhile, Hui was also feeling the strain. The earlier blow from Kamizuru''s stone fist had caused significant internal damage, and the exertion from casting multiple jutsu had left him drained. Blood trickled from the corner of his mouth as he struggled to maintain his stance. Still,pared to Kamizuru, Hui was in better shape. "It looks like I¡¯ve gained the upper hand in a ninjutsu battle," Hui taunted, a slight smirk on his face. "Hah, don¡¯t get cocky, boy!" Kamizuru spat, his voice filled with venom. Without hesitation, he began forming hand seals again. The fight wasn¡¯t over, not yet. join my patreon for 60+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 75 Chapter 75 "Earth Release: Earth Spears!" In an instant, the ground beneath Hui''s feet erupted as sharp earthen spikes shot up like spears, all aimed directly at him. These spikes were far more focused than the ones used earlier, every single one targeting Hui with lethal precision. At the same time, Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s hands were rapidly forming seals for another jutsu, preparing to unleash the Earth-Style Dragon. In his mind, the oue was clear: Hui would have no choice but to leap into the air to avoid the spears. Once airborne, he would be vulnerable, and Kamizuru''s earth-stone dragon would strike, leaving Hui with no room to escape. Kamizuru had already sensed that Hui''s chakra reserves were nearly depleted, and with no chakra left to defend himself, the earth dragon¡¯s attack would be devastating. However, Hui didn''t follow the script Kamizuru had envisioned. When the spikes emerged from the ground, he did indeed leap, but not upward. Instead, he darted forward, weaving through the gaps between the earthen spears, making a direct charge toward Kamizuru, who was still in the midst of casting his jutsu. Kamizuru''s eyes widened in shock. He had momentarily forgotten that Hui was no ordinary opponent¡ªhe was a mere boy, nimble and able to move through small spaces with ease. Now, faced with Hui¡¯s rapid approach, Kamizuru was forced to abandon his jutsu mid-casting. He drew his kunai, bracing himself for closebat. The two shed again, their des ringing out as sparks flew between them. This time, Kamizuru was more cautious, not daring to look directly at Hui¡¯s de after being blinded by his earlier attack. But this cautiousness made Kamizuru¡¯s movements slightly more rigid, and with his earlier body-splitting technique weakening him, he no longer held the upper hand in strength or speed. For the first time, the battle became evenly matched. But while Kamizuru felt the pressure mounting, Hui remained calm. To Kamizuru, this fight was a battle of survival. To Hui, it was simply a matter of time¡ªtime he needed for his internal energy to recover. Once his energy was restored, Kamizuru''s fate would be sealed. Kamizuru, on the other hand, was unaware of Hui''s ability to replenish his strength, and after their intense ninjutsu exchange earlier, he too was running low on chakra. He knew that his only chance was to seize the perfect moment to unleash his trump card and deliver a fatal blow. The two continued their fierce struggle, exchanging blows as they awaited their opportunities. ng! ng! ng! The sound of their weapons shing echoed through the night, sparks flying with each strike. sh! Hui took a hit, a shallow cut appearing on his arm. sh! Kamizuru¡¯s arm was next, sliced open by Hui¡¯s de. This battle was truly neck and neck. Hui¡¯s reflexes gave him a slight edge, while Kamizuru¡¯s extensivebat experience allowed him to keep pace. Both fighters were umting wounds, their movements slowing as fatigue and injuries took their toll. At one point, a stray thought crossed Hui¡¯s mind: Maybe I should start coating my de with poison. He struck again,nding another sh across Kamizuru¡¯s side, but Kamizuru retaliated with a punch, sending Hui staggering back. Both were growing weaker by the second. Kamizuru¡¯s body was drenched in blood, the crimson liquid pouring from his many wounds, threatening to stain him entirely red. Hui, despite his ability to heal faster than most, was also in rough shape. His pale face andbored breathing betrayed the extent of his injuries. Both of them were waiting. Hui for his energy to recover enough for a decisive strike, Kamizuru for the moment he could unleash his hidden technique and end the fight in one blow. They fought on, each hoping that the other would fall soon. This was no longer just a battle of physical strength. It had be a test of willpower. Whoever faltered first would die. ng! Their weapons shed again, sending them momentarily apart. Kamizuru, panting heavily, nced at Hui and said, "Konoha brat, I acknowledge you. Tell me¡­ what¡¯s your name?" He spoke through ragged breaths, but there was genuine respect in his voice. Kamizuru hade to see Hui as a true opponent, a formidable one worthy of his acknowledgment. Even though he still wanted nothing more than to kill him, Kamizuru respected Hui''s strength. "Hui of Konoha," Hui replied without hesitation. At this point, there was no need for secrets. Either he would die here, or Kamizuru would. There would be no witnesses other than the two of them. The brief exchange ended as quickly as it began. Without waiting for a response, Hui charged once more. There would be no long pauses for recovery in this fight. Hui had no intention of giving Kamizuru time to gather his strength. Kamizuru cursed under his breath and readied his defense. He had hoped to buy himself a moment of respite, but this kid saw right through his n. The two shed once again, sparks flying from their weapons as they pushed their bodies to their limits. The fight grew more desperate. Their wounds worsened, their movements slower, but neither could afford to make a Fogake. The battle was nearing its breaking point. Suddenly, Hui sensed it¡ªhis had recovered enough enrgy. The moment he had been waiting for had arrived. At the same time, Kamizuru''s eyes lit up. He too had found his opportunity. The next instant, Hui¡¯s body erupted with light, and a massive sphere of brilliant white energy, three meters in diameter, enveloped bothbatants. Kamizuru saw the sh of light but didn¡¯t care, ignoring the blinding glow. He had already decided to make his move. In the next moment, Hui was right beside him, sword poised to pierce Kamizuru''s heart. But Kamizuru wasn¡¯t done yet. His face twisted with a crazed expression as he let out a furious roar. "EXPLODE!!" In that moment, Hui felt an overwhelming sense of danger. Acting on pure instinct, he kicked out with all his might,unching Kamizuru away from him. At the same time, he curled his body, leaping backward in an attempt to shield himself. BOOM!!! The explosion was deafening, a brilliant white sh lighting up the sky like a second sun. For a moment, the world seemed to stand still as the light consumed everything in its path. Then, just as quickly as it came, the light vanished, and the world returned to silence. join my patreon for 65+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 76 Chapter 76 The battleground where Hui and Kamizuru Ishigawa had fought was now arge crater, a result of Ishigawa''s self-detonation. His final trump card, a suicidal explosion meant to ensure a mutual demise, had been unleashed without the slightest hesitation. Upon learning of Hui''s age and witnessing his terrifying potential, Kamizuru had decided that the only way to secure the future of his vige was to take down Hui at any cost, even if it meant sacrificing himself. He knew that if Hui were to survive and continue to grow, his future power could rival that of legends. Kamizuru couldn¡¯t risk allowing this threat to exist, even if it meant dying in the process. But Hui hadn¡¯t anticipated that Kamizuru would resort to such a drastic move. He had prepared his own trump card, a technique of his own creation, to finish the battle. However, before he could execute it, Kamizuru detonated, leaving Hui no choice but to react on instinct. Had Hui not sensed the impending danger, had he notunched that final kick and braced his body for the explosion, he would have likely been killed in the st. It was sheer luck,bined with quick reflexes and instincts, that saved him from a worse fate. Even so, Hui was now unconscious, lying on the edge of the forest in a pool of his own blood. His condition was dire. Internal organs had been severely damaged, and his body was critically wounded. Death hovered close. If it weren''t for the residual energy of his "yuan qi" keeping him barely alive, Hui would have perished already. But in his current state, it was uncertain when¡ªor if¡ªhe would awaken. Meanwhile, elsewhere, Lightning and Hatake Sakumo had sessfully made it back to the Konoha Anbu base after Hui had stayed behind to cover their escape. Upon returning, they immediately reported the situation to their squad leader. The squad leader was shaken to the core. Sweat ran down his back as he realized the gravity of the situation. Kamizuru Ishigawa, the Anbu Commander of Iwagakure, had entered the Land of Fog, close to the Hidden Fog Vige. This unexpected move rendered all of the squad leader¡¯s carefullyid ns useless. The presence of a Kage-level enemy could shift the bnce of the entire mission. And now, the squad leader was filled with dread as he learned that Hui had stayed behind to face Kamizuru. While he didn¡¯t know Hui¡¯s exact identity, he was well aware of the special interest the Second Hokage, Tobirama Senju, had in this young Anbu operative known by the codename "Light." From the specific orders Tobirama had given him, it was clear that Hui¡¯s importance to Konoha went far beyond that of an ordinary Anbu member. Under no circumstances could anything happen to him. The squad leader immediately used a reverse summoning jutsu to ry the situation to Konoha. The message quickly reached the desk of Tobirama Senju himself. Upon reading the report, Tobirama wasted no time. He set off for the Land of Fog at once, ordering the squad leader to abandon all other ns and focus entirely on rescuing Hui. Soon, all the Konoha Anbu forces in the Land of Fog, along with reinforcements from nearby areas, converged on Hui¡¯s location. Their mission was clear: save Hui at all costs. But Iwagakure¡¯s Anbu were also on the move. Having noticed the sudden surge of Konoha activity, they deduced that something significant was happening and began to converge on the area as well, with the intent of assisting Kamizuru Ishigawa. As both sides approached the region around the Horizontal Abyss, tension built. The two opposing forces finally shed near the massive chasm, just as a deafening explosion echoed through the night. Both sides paused, the sound of Kamizuru¡¯s self-destruction halting their advance. With their battle momentarily forgotten, the Anbu from both viges rushed toward the source of the explosion. When they arrived, what they saw was a massive crater, littered with torn clothing and fragments of flesh. Among the wreckage, Lightning spotted the unconscious form of Hui, lying in a pool of his own blood. The Iwagakure Anbu saw him as well. In an instant, the two forces broke into a fierce battle. Konoha¡¯s Anbu fought desperately to protect Hui, their hearts pounding with urgency, while the Iwagakure Anbu were enraged at the sight of what they believed to be the death of theirmander, Kamizuru Ishigawa. However, the battle did notst long. Both sides quickly realized their priorities: Konoha¡¯s Anbu had to save Hui, and the Iwagakure Anbu, devastated by the loss of theirmander, found themselves on the losing side. After suffering further casualties, the Iwagakure forces retreated, vowing vengeance. And so, the skirmish ended. But the consequences of what had transpired were far from over. The death of Iwagakure¡¯s Anbumander was a monumental event, one that sent shockwaves throughout the ninja world. Iwagakure came dangerously close to dering war on Konoha, and within days, news of Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s death in the Land of Fog spread across the nations. Spection ran wild. Who could have killed a Kage-level figure like Kamizuru? The rumors centered around a mysterious Anbu from Konoha, code-named "Ghost." Descriptions of this "Ghost" painted a picture of a slender, small-framed figure¡ªsuggesting someone quite young. Yet the exact identity of the Anbu responsible remained a mystery. Until, one monthter, when the spection died down, a shocking revtion came to light. Iwagakure had not taken Kamizuru¡¯s death lightly. For weeks, they had been conducting secret skirmishes with Konoha¡¯s Anbu, determined to uncover the truth. In one such battle, they managed to capture a Konoha Anbu operative. Under intense interrogation, they extracted key information. Much of it was irrelevant, but one piece of intel stood out. The one who had killed Kamizuru Ishigawa was none other than the leader of Konoha¡¯s First Squad, Fourth Unit¡ªa boy known by the codename "Light." And his real name¡­ was Hui. He was only eleven years old. The captured Anbu operative knew this because he had been part of the rescue mission sent to retrieve Hui after the battle. And on that fateful night, he had seen Hui¡¯s face in the pool of blood, and had recognised him immediately. The news spread like wildfire. Hui, the eleven-year-old boy from Konoha, had in the Anbumander of Iwagakure. This revtion hit the ninja world like a thunderp, shaking every vige to its core. The ninja world would never be the same. join my patreon for 65+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 77 Chapter 77 When the news spread that Konoha¡¯s Anbu operative, codenamed "Ghost," was an eleven-year-old boy, the first reaction across the ninja world was disbelief. No one wanted to believe that this could be true. After all, Ghost was the one who led an Anbu team to wipe out more than eight squads of Iwagakure¡¯s Anbu, and who singlehandedly killed Kamizuru Ishigawa, themander of Iwagakure¡¯s Anbu forces. How could someone with such strength be only eleven years old? The im was simply absurd. "That must be a simple rumor. Who in their right mind would spread such nonsense? Do they think we''re fools?" The Second Mizukage of Kirigakure dismissed the news outright, refusing to believe a word of it. "An eleven-year-old at Kage level? If such a person exists, they wouldn¡¯t be a human." The Second Raikage gave a simrly skeptical response. As for the Second Kazekage of Sunagakure, he was too busy studying the tailed beasts to pay any attention to the news. The initial response from the five major viges was to dismiss the story as a hoax. Most smaller ninja viges followed suit, with no one taking the rumors seriously. However, the Tsuchikage of Iwagakure stepped forward, publicly affirming the uracy of the information. He dered, under his authority as Tsuchikage, that the news was genuine and could be trusted. At that point, the rest of the ninja world began to take the im seriously. When a leader of one of the five great nations vouches for the validity of something, the likelihood of it being true skyrocked. And if it was true¡­ Hiss!¡ªEveryone collectively drew a sharp breath. Eleven years old. At Kage level. The idea alone was simply too unbelievable. But the implications of this revtion began to dawn on everyone. Iwagakure¡¯s decision to release this information was clear. They were essentially telling the entire ninja world: Look, Konoha has a prodigy¡ªone who might be the next Hashirama Senju or Madara Uchiha. And the message was clear to all other viges: You know what must be done. To ensure everyone understood, Iwagakure took it one step further¡ªthey issued a public bounty. Iwagakure officially ced "Light," the Konoha Anbu operative known as Hui, on their "must-kill" list. They announced that whoever could kill this boy would be rewarded with a staggering 50 million ryo. The news sent shockwaves through the ninja world. "It¡¯s true! This is incredible!" "A genius at eleven years old, already a Kage-level fighter. He could be the next God of Shinobi!" "If this talent is allowed to grow, even if he doesn¡¯t be as powerful as Hashirama, he could still easily rival Tobirama." "We must eliminate him before he matures. We can¡¯t afford to let someone like him live!" The other major viges quickly agreed that such a threat could not possibly be allowed to grow unchecked. If a new powerhouse were to rise in Konoha, it could destabilize the delicate power bnce between the viges. The First Shinobi World War had erupted after Hashirama¡¯s death. If he had lived, no one would have dared challenge Konoha. Now, with Hui emerging as a potential new powerhouse, the same fear gripped the other viges. Even though there was no guarantee that Hui would reach Hashirama¡¯s level, no one was willing to take that risk. Moreover, Hui was no pacifist like Hashirama. He had been raised under the tutge of Tobirama Senju, a far more pragmatic and ruthless leader. The viges knew what Tobirama was capable of, and if Hui inherited his ideals, the consequences could be dire. Thus, Hui quickly found himself on the assassination lists of the other major viges. Each of the great nations ced bounties on his head, and orders to kill him on sight were issued. The smaller ninja viges, many of whichcked even a single Kage-level fighter, dared not provoke Konoha by targeting him, but they certainly took note of his name. Hui became famous across the ninja world almost overnight. In Iwagakure, he was known as "Ghost." In other viges, he earned the title "Konoha''s Light." Nearly every ninja in the five great nations had now heard of Hui, the eleven-year-old Anbu who had reached Kage-level strength. When the news finally reached Konoha, the vigers were just as skeptical. Many people in Konoha knew Hui¡ªhe was a familiar face, a handsome young boy who always seemed focused and hardworking. To them, he was just another promising genin. There was no way someone like him could be a member of Anbu, let alone a Kage-level fighter. However, as the rumors continued to swirl, and no one could find Hui, curiosity turned to concern. Finally, someone worked up the courage to ask the Second Hokage, Tobirama Senju, directly. The answer they received was shocking. Tobirama confirmed that Hui was indeed "Light," the Anbu operative who had killed Kamizuru Ishigawa. The revtion sent Konoha into an uproar. "What?! It¡¯s really him!" "Unbelievable! Hui¡¯s only eleven!" "He only graduated from the academy five years ago, and now he¡¯s reached this level?!" "This is incredible! Could Hui be the next God of Shinobi? If he reaches the level of the First Hokage, Konoha would be invincible!" "But the other viges have ced bounties on him, and they¡¯re actively trying to kill him!" "Hmph! Hui is Konoha¡¯s genius, our future. If anyone tries to harm him, we¡¯ll defend him with our lives!" "That¡¯s right! Hui¡¯s safety is Konoha¡¯s priority!" The news spread like wildfire. Even the powerful ninja ns of Konoha, such as the Uchiha, Hyuga, and Ino-Shika-Cho, began to discuss Hui¡¯s meteoric rise and what it could mean for the vige¡¯s future. Among them, the leader of the Nara n seemed to understand the bigger picture. After some thought, he remarked quietly to his fellow n members: "It seems the Second Hokage is not just grooming Hui as a ninja... Could it be that he¡¯s preparing him for something greater? For...a Hokage? Is Hui the future Hokage in Tobirama¡¯s eyes?" join my patreon for 65+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 78 Chapter 78 The Nara n was the first to deduce Tobirama Senju¡¯s intentions, but they kept their suspicions to themselves. After all, Hui was only eleven years old, and the possibility of him bing Hokage was still far off in the future¡ªmost likely after Hiruzen Sarutobi. To the Nara n, Hui was too young to be the Third Hokage, but he could very well be the Fourth. So, they concluded that as long as they built a good rtionship with Hui over time, it would benefit them in the future. Other ninja ns, though not entirely sure of Tobirama¡¯s specific ns, recognized the value Tobirama ced on Hui. The information they had gathered painted a clear picture. Hui had joined the Anbu at the age of six and by eleven, he had be the captain of Team Four in the First Division of the Anbu. Out of his five years in the Anbu, over four of those years had been spent directly guarding the Hokage. He was allowed unrestricted ess to the Senju npound and had mastered several of Tobirama¡¯s signature jutsu. All signs pointed to one thing: Hui was effectively Tobirama¡¯s ¡°student.¡± Thus, in the minds of Konoha¡¯s many ninja ns, Hui was a person worth investing in. The entire ninja world, and especially Konoha, became abuzz with talk about Hui. However, the focus of all this attention¡ªHui¡ªwas currently unconscious, lying in a room in the Senju n¡¯spound. He had been asleep for a month, unable to wake up. Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s self-detonation had inflicted severe injuries on Hui, and had it not been for the "Yuan Qi" within his body keeping him alive, he might have died alongside Ishigawa. Even though Hui had survived, the damage to his body had been catastrophic, leaving him in a deepa with no clear signs of recovery. In the bright room, sunlight streamed through the windows, casting light on Hui as hey in bed, his face pale but serene. Two figures stood by his bedside. One was the current Second Hokage of Konoha, Tobirama Senju, and the other was Mito Uzumaki, wife of the First Hokage and the jinchuriki of the Nine-Tails. Tobirama gazed at Hui¡¯s unconscious form with an air of curiosity. "I wonder just how much stronger this kid will be when he wakes up. His constitution is¡­ remarkable." From his tone, it was clear that Tobirama had no doubt that Hui would recover, even though he had been in aa for a month. Mito Uzumaki nodded in agreement. "Hui¡¯s body is extraordinary. If I didn¡¯t know better, if I hadn¡¯t watched him grow up, I¡¯d almost suspect he wasn¡¯t human." She, too, was astonished by what she had seen. The natural energy constantly flowing into Hui¡¯s body was simply unprecedented. When Hui had first been brought back to Konoha, Mito had been shocked at the severity of his condition. Given the state of his body, she initially thought that there was no hope for his survival. But after a few days, her fears eased. As weeks passed, she became less worried and more amazed. Even the Nine-Tails, sealed within Mito, was taken aback by Hui¡¯s recovery. ¡°What kind of creature is this kid, really?¡± the Nine-Tails grumbled in Mito¡¯s mind. It could feel the endless flow of natural energy being absorbed into Hui¡¯s body, fueling his recovery and growth. The sheer absurdity of it all made the Nine-Tails wary. The Nine-Tails had lived long enough to know many ancient secrets, including the existence of the Ten-Tails. The Ten-Tails was the origin of all chakra, a force of nature in itself. And the way the Ten-Tails had grown¡ªby absorbing energy from the world¡ªwas eerily simr to what was happening with Hui. Sometimes, the Nine-Tails couldn¡¯t help but wonder: Could this child be a new ¡°Divine Tree¡±? A new Ten-Tails? "Ridiculous... but he¡¯s clearly human¡­or not. Ugh, whatever. I¡¯ll just wait and see what happens over the years. Damn it, I just wish I could break free from this cursed seal!" the Nine-Tailsmented. But before it could continue its tirade, several chains manifested within its mental space, tightening around it. The chains belonged to Mito Uzumaki¡¯s sealing jutsu, and the Nine-Tails was once again silenced, forced into submission. "Ugh! Curse that woman!" it roared internally before resigning itself to sleep. Meanwhile, Tobirama and Mito, after confirming that Hui¡¯s condition was stable, left the room. They, too, were curious to see just how much stronger Hui would be when he finally awoke. Little did Hui know that while hey in aa, he had be the focus of attention for much of the ninja world. Many had already begun to regard him as the next "God of Shinobi." Inside his body, Hui¡¯s Yuan Qi had stopped coalescing into a single entity. Instead, it now permeated his entire form, constantly drawing in natural energy from the world around him. Some of this energy was being assimted like before, but most of it was being used to repair and rebuild his body. It wasn¡¯t just healing¡ªit was reshaping. It was as if the Yuan Qi within Hui found his body too weak and was now reconstructing it to a new design. What Hui would be after this transformation was still uncertain, even to him. Time passed. And another month went by. The secretive wars between the ninja viges grew fiercer. In the span of that month, two or three more small countries were wiped out, disappearing from the world map. It was a sad but inevitable reality. Small countries would ultimately be swallowed by the tides of history, leaving only a few as buffer zones between the great nations. Escaping such a fate was nearly impossible¡ªunless a god-like ninja emerged to forcibly change the course of history. So far, no such figure had ever appeared. Even in the original timeline, the only significant outlier had been Amegakure. While it had produced strong figures like Hanzo the Smander, andter Pain, neither had been able to elevate Amegakure to the level of a great nation. Escaping that destiny was simply too difficult. And so, the Cold War continued while the five great nations maintained an uneasy peace. Hui had not been seen for months, neither in Konoha nor on the battlefield. Yet, no one had forgotten him. In fact, many believed that Tobirama had intentionally kept Hui out of sight to protect him, allowing him to grow stronger in secret. This only made the other four great nations more determined to kill him. But inside Konoha, Hui¡¯s long-awaited transformation had finallye to an end. On this day, Hui began to wake up. join my patreon for 65+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 79 Chapter 79 Hui¡¯s longshes trembled slightly, then slowly lifted, revealing a pair of beautiful eyes. These eyes were unusually deep, yet they exuded a sense of purity. Thebination was mesmerizing, creating a allure that could draw anyone in, rendering them unable to look away. The pupils of his eyes contracted slightly, and faint patterns seemed to surface within, resembling intricately carved inscriptions or naturally urring designs. However, the patterns soon faded, and his eyes returned to normal. ncing around, Hui quickly recognized the familiar surroundings¡ªthis was the Senju n''spound, where he had grown up as a child. "So, I was saved and brought back to Konoha," Hui murmured. Reflecting on his recent battle, he let out a sigh. "Every Kage-level ninja is indeed extraordinary," he muttered, recalling how he had nearly fallen to Kamizuru Ishigawa¡¯s final move. Who could have guessed that Ishigawa¡¯s ultimate trump card would be self-detonation? For a moment, Hui thought of a certain future blonde boy who constantly shouted, ¡°Art is an explosion!¡± Maybe that boy''s inspiration came from Ishigawa, he mused, but he quickly pushed the thought aside and smirked. "Although I almost died, you could say this was a blessing in disguise," he said to himself, his gaze shifting to the window. The mysterious patterns briefly reappeared in his eyes as he focused his vision outside. "I can clearly see that stone on the mountain... five kilometers away. Incredible," Hui marveled. Not only could he see things at a great distance, but his near-sight had also drastically improved. He turned his attention to a corner of the room, noting even the smallest specks of dust, things imperceptible to the naked eye. "Not only can I see far, but I can also perceive even the tiniest details up close," he remarked, continuing to familiarize himself with his new vision. ¡°And it''s not just my vision...¡± As a small bird flew past the window, Hui instinctively followed its movement. He could vividly track every motion, every beat of its wings, as if time itself had slowed down. His perception was beyond anything he''d ever experienced¡ªlike the difference between watching a 2D movie and a fully immersive 3D experience. Colors seemed richer, the world sharper, more detailed. Everything seemed clearer. To put it simply, if the average person¡¯s view of the world was 270p, and his previous perception was standard definition, then now... Hui felt like he was seeing the world in ultra-high definition. The rity of it all was simply mesmerizing, like a person with severe nearsightedness suddenly putting on the perfect pair of sses, or stepping out of a dimly lit room into a brilliantly illuminated gallery. He smiled as he watched the bird soar through the sky. It was now undeniable¡ªhis eyes were no longer ordinary. The transformation reminded him of something from his past life¡ªdivine sight, a power beyond the ordinary. Heavenly Eye, Hui thought with a hint of amusement. "I knew I was cultivating something simr to immortality. Turns out I really was!" he chuckled, continuing to explore his abilities. After some time, Hui made several key discoveries about his new eyes. First, his vision had improved dramatically. His eyesight was several times better than a normal person¡¯s, allowing him to see far-off objects and detect even the smallest details up close. Second, his dynamic vision had also evolved. He could now track the movements of fast-moving objects with incredible precision, making it almost impossible to miss anything. In essence, his eyes had be a hybrid of the Byakugan and Sharingan, though without the Byakugan''s X-ray vision or the Sharingan''s copying or illusion abilities. Nevertheless, it was still an impressive upgrade, and Hui had a feeling his eyes had yet to fully evolve. He suspected there would be even more abilities in the future. But it wasn''t just his vision that had changed¡ªHui clenched his fists, feeling a surge of power coursing through his body. His strength had increased significantly, and it felt as though his body was brimming with an immense, untapped energy. "Not only is my body stronger, but my eyes have also awakened some kind of divine power. I don¡¯t know how long I¡¯ve been unconscious, but my body has undergone a massive transformation. And I can feel it¡ªI have ess to far more energy than before!" Hui marveled at the changes within himself, reveling in the sense of power. "If I had known that getting injured would trigger such a transformation, I wouldn¡¯t have needed Ishigawa to self-destruct. I would¡¯ve jumped off a cliff myself!" Hui joked to himself. If Ishigawa could hear this, he¡¯d probably be furious enough to rise from the dead and try to strangel Hui. Suddenly, Hui''s sharp hearing picked up the sound of footsteps approaching his room. His senses had also undergone a transformation. Now, when he focused, he could hear all sorts of sounds, and sense things from the surrounding area. Momentster, the door to his room opened, and one of the Senju n members entered. Seeing Hui awake, the n member was overjoyed and quickly greeted him before rushing out to report the good news. Soon, Hui heard several sets of footsteps approaching. Among them was one person moving quickly, their steps light but urgent. Before long, the door swung open, and a figure rushed into the room, throwing themselves into Hui¡¯s arms. It was Tsunade. She hade running as soon as she heard that Hui had woken up. Now, she clung tightly to him, tears streaming down her face. Hui gently patted her back and spoke softly, his heart filled with warmth and a hint of guilt. "Alright, no more crying. I¡¯m fine, see? In fact, this whole thing only made me even stronger." Although every mission was for the sake of the vige, Hui knew he was not alone. If anything had happened to him, it would¡¯ve caused Tsunade great pain and sorrow. "He¡¯s right, Tsunade. Hui hase out of this ordeal even stronger," Mito Uzumaki said as she entered the room, smiling at the pair. Behind Mito, Tsunade''s parents entered as well, smiling warmly as they looked at their daughter and Hui. A short whileter, Tobirama Senju appeared in the room without warning, his lips curling slightly as he watched the scene before him. "Alright, enough now. Everyone¡¯s watching," Hui said with a smile, gently patting Tsunade¡¯s back, his tone yful and light. join my patreon for 65+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 80 Chapter 80 In Konoha''s familiar training field, stood two figures¡ªonerge and one small. It was the second day since Hui had awakened, and yesterday, he had spent the entire day with Tsunade. "Hui, your body has undergone a tremendous transformation, and we''re still analyzing the specifics. But for now, let¡¯s see how much your strength has improved," Tobirama said, eager to gauge Hui''s current abilities after his recent metamorphosis. "Grandfather Tobirama, I¡¯m ready!" Hui replied eagerly. He too wanted to know just how much stronger he had be. In an instant, Hui moved. His speed was incredible, and he vanished from his original spot, reappearing beside Tobirama in the blink of an eye. He threw a punch, the force of the wind trailing behind it. Tobirama responded in kind, meeting Hui¡¯s fist head-on with his own. However, the moment their fists collided, Tobirama inhaled sharply. His arm went numb from the impact, forcing him to take two steps back before a sharp pain registered in his fist. "Such strength!" Tobirama eximed, quickly dodging the follow-up punch that Hui sent his way. That single exchange made Tobirama reconsider. He no longer entertained the idea of engaging Hui in a direct fistfight. But soon enough, Tobirama realized that avoiding Hui¡¯s attacks wasn¡¯t as easy as it seemed. Hui¡¯s speed had increased dramatically, and his taijutsu was on apletely different level from before. With just his taijutsu alone, Hui had already reached the level of a Kage-level ninja, Tobirama thought, feeling a mixture of awe and disbelief. Hui was barely eleven years old, not yet twelve, and his physical prowess was astonishing, beyond what seemed possible for someone his age. But then again, Tobirama reflected, Hui was no longer an ordinary human. His physical structure appeared to be fundamentally different from that of a regr person, though the exact nature of this change was still under study. After a brief exchange of taijutsu, Tobirama realized that without resorting to ninjutsu, he would inevitably lose. And if he lost... well, that would be quite embarrassing! So... "Water Release: Water Dragon Bullet Technique!" After being kicked away by Hui, Tobirama swiftly formed hand seals. Normally, the Water Dragon Bullet required dozens of hand seals, but Tobirama had condensed it to just four. In the blink of an eye, the seals werepleted, and despite the absence of water in the area, a massive water dragon, over 30 meters long, materialized out of thin air, roaring toward Hui. As Tobirama formed the seals, Hui also realized that the taijutsu phase of their battle had ended. It was now time for a ninjutsu showdown. His hands moved in a blur as he performed the exact same seals as Tobirama but even faster,pleting them right after Tobirama andunching the same Water Dragon Bullet Technique. The two water dragons collided in midair, shing violently and sending massive sprays of water into the air. As the water droplets rained down, they transformed into senbon needles, an original technique of Hui¡¯s inspired by a future ninja named Kisame Hoshigaki. The senbon rained down, targeting Tobirama from all directions. However, Tobirama¡¯s body flickered, disappearing from his original position. He reappeared to the side of Hui, holding a spear made of rapidly rotating water. "Water Release: Hard Whirlpool Water de!" This technique condensed a powerful water vortex into a spear, capable of shredding anything in its path. As Tobirama hurled the spear toward Hui, its speed and force were overwhelming. The resulting water tornado could devastate anything it touched, and its range depended on the user¡¯s chakra reserves. Tobirama clearly considered Hui a formidable opponent, using such a powerful technique against him. But Hui was prepared. Facing the iing water spear, Hui responded with an identical technique. Aside from forbidden techniques and the Flying Thunder God Technique, Hui had mastered nearly all of Tobirama¡¯s ninjutsu. The two water spears collided, triggering a massive water tornado that shook the entire training field. The powerful winds whipped through the area, startling several ninjas training nearby. The sheer force of the sh sent shivers down their spines. The overwhelming burst of chakra also caught the attention of the vige¡¯s sensor ninja, and soon, ninja from all around the vige began converging on the training field. When they arrived, they were ready to assist, thinking Tobirama might be in danger. However, they were quickly stopped by a group of Anbu operatives. These were not Hui¡¯s Fourth Division Anbu, who were supposed to guard Tobirama but rarely did. These Anbu were the ones who always remained by Tobirama¡¯s side, ensuring his protection at all times. Once the Anbu halted their advance, the Konoha ninja looked toward the training field, and that¡¯s when they noticed the small figure. "It¡¯s Hui!" "The Light of Konoha, the boy known as ¡®The Ghost¡¯ in Iwagakure!" "Unbelievable! He¡¯s holding his own against Lord Second in a ninjutsu duel, and he¡¯s only eleven?!" "Of course, he¡¯s the one who single-handedly killed the Iwagakure Anbumander!" "Hui... the rumors weren¡¯t exaggerated at all. His potential is terrifying¡ªlike seeing the next First Hokage, the next God of Shinobi!" "That¡¯s Konoha¡¯s genius! Our vige¡¯s future¡ª Light!" As they watched Hui and Tobirama exchange ninjutsu, the Konoha ninja were left speechless, their hearts swelling with pride. Hui was their vige¡¯s prodigy, and he was growing stronger before their very eyes. For Hui, this ninjutsu duel was exhrating. He had never fought so freely before, unleashing all of his techniques without restraint. After all, in the past, he had alwayscked chakra. And even now, it wasn¡¯t enough! "Shadow Clone Technique!" "Wind Release: Great Breakthrough!" "Fire Release: Great Fireball Technique!" "Combination Ninjutsu: Wind-Fire Ball!" Hui created a shadow clone and began chaining togetherbination ninjutsu, merging wind and fire techniques for even greater destructive power. Seeing this, Tobirama smiled and responded in kind, forming his own shadow clones. "Water Release: Water Dragon Bullet Technique!" "Lightning Release: Ground Spear!" "Combination Ninjutsu: Lightning-Water Dragon!" Ninjutsu after ninjutsu erupted from Hui and Tobirama, transforming the training ground into a battlefield of elemental chaos. It was as if the two had be living textbooks of ninjutsu, demonstrating to the gathering crowd the true power of elemental techniques. The duel continued until both Hui and Tobirama had expended nearly all of their chakra. Neither had emerged victorious, but that wasn¡¯t the point. Neither of them had used their trump cards¡ªHui hadn¡¯t unleashed his light and sword techniques, and Tobirama had refrained from using the Flying Thunder God or any forbidden jutsu. Even so, the oue was clear. Hui had reached the level of a Kage-level ninja¡ªand not a weak one at that. If he were to face Ishigawa again, Hui was confident that he wouldpletely overpower him. join my patreon for 65+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 81 Chapter 81 The battle between Hui and Tobirama left Konoha''s ninjas astounded, their hearts filled with awe. Of course, most of their astonishment came from Hui. Tobirama¡¯s strength was a given, but Hui, despite being known as a powerful young ninja, had only been a story to them until now. Seeing it firsthand was an entirely different experience. People tend to subconsciously downy others'' achievements, attributing their sess to external factors. In their minds, they thought Hui¡¯s aplishments must have been due to outside help. But now, they were forced to acknowledge the truth. This eleven-year-old boy was indeed the "Light of Konoha"¡ªthe Anbu captain who led his squad to hunt down eight Iwagakure teams and single-handedly killed three Iwagakure Jonin, as well as their Anbumander, the kage-level ninja, Ishigawa. As Hui and Tobirama left the training field, Konoha¡¯s shinobi couldn¡¯t stop talking, their voices filled with excitement and disbelief. "He¡¯s incredibly strong. Hui¡¯s abilities weren¡¯t exaggerated at all. In fact, I think we¡¯ve all underestimated him." "This is what a true genius looks like. At just eleven, he can fight evenly with the Second Hokage using ninjutsu. Even if he doesn¡¯t be the next First Hokage, he¡¯ll definitely be the next Second Hokage!" "Yes! And even though Lord Tobirama didn¡¯t use the Flying Thunder God Technique, Hui¡¯s strength is undeniable, and he¡¯s still just eleven!" "Ah, when I was eleven, I was only a Chunin. I thought I was some kind of prodigy... but Hui? He¡¯s eleven and already at the kage level. The difference between people is just too big." "Don¡¯t even mention it. I was still a Genin at eleven, not even close to Chunin level." "No way, I need to start training my kid harder. He doesn¡¯t have to be like Hui, but he¡¯d better reach Chunin level by the time he¡¯s eleven!" The conversation was filled with admiration, excitement, and even self-reflection. The strength Hui disyed had a profound impact on everyone. But it wasn¡¯t just the ordinary ninjas who were affected. Many members of Konoha¡¯s prominent ns were present too, and their thoughts were moreplicated. Particrly, the ninjas from the Uchiha n felt the weight of what they had witnessed. The Uchiha were known for their pride, stemming from their powerful bloodline and natural talent. In any age group, the Uchiha were typically the strongest. But after witnessing Hui¡¯s abilities, many felt a sense of difort. They were supposed to be geniuses, but there was no one in their n who couldpare to him. The same feelings stirred in the Hyuga n. Like the Uchiha, they were known for their talent, but none of their n members could rival Hui. It was a harsh reality check for them. Of course, they were overthinking things. Hui was an outlier, an exception, not a representative of anyone''s abilities. "Hui has grown so strong. He¡¯s no weaker than me now," Hiruzen Sarutobi said with a deep sigh. He was one of the few in the vige who had watched Hui grow from an elite Chunin into the Kage-level ninja he had be today. Witnessing that transformation left him full of emotions. After all, Hui was only eleven, while Hiruzen himself was already nearing thirty. "Sensei, let¡¯s keep training!" Jiraiya said, his fists clenched with determination. He felt invigorated by Hui¡¯s disy of power. Even Orochimaru, standing nearby, seemed unusually excited, clearly influenced by the intensity of the battle. "This is youth!" shouted a boy in a green jumpsuit, running around the training grounds¡­ while doing handstands. "Hui-kun is so cool! Aaaah!" "I saw Hui-kun again! This is my youth!" "Hui-kun, I love you!!!" A group of eleven- and twelve-year-old girls, fresh graduates from the ninja academy, squealed and screamed in excitement. They had been Hui¡¯s ssmates and were now hopelessly captivated by him. The duel between Hui and Tobirama sent ripples throughout Konoha, but in just a few days, the waves reached far beyond, spreading throughout the shinobi world. Konoha was filled with spies from other viges, and they wasted no time in sending detailed reports back to their respective viges. The reports included descriptions of all the ninjutsu Hui had used, confirming that he had indeed reached kage-level strength. Now, there was no longer any doubt. Previously, some viges had held onto the hope that Hui¡¯s victory over Ishigawa had been a fluke, the result of some unknown external factors. But now they understood: Hui¡¯s sess was purely due to his own strength. An eleven-year-old, kage-level ninja. "He must not be allowed to grow any further, absolutely not!" "If we get the chance, we have to eliminate him, no matter the cost. I don¡¯t want to face another God of Shinobi!" "Senju Hashirama, Senju Tobirama, and now Hui... Konoha nevercks geniuses. Is it because of the fertilend they upy?" "Hui... I will kill you and avenge Ishigawa." With Hui¡¯s reappearance after his two-month absence, the shinobi world was once again shaken. But the person at the center of it all? Hui didn¡¯t care in the slightest. Before his recent transformation, Hui had believed in keeping a low profile. But now? He felt he could walk through the shinobi world openly and without fear. He was no longer the chakra-deprived ninja he once was. His chakra reserves were now several times greater than they had been just two months ago. And with the changes to his eyes and body, Hui was confident that his strength now ced him among the elite of the shinobi world. Of course, walking openly didn¡¯t mean being reckless. This was still the shinobi world, full of unknown dangers. You never knew when an enemy might use a drop of your blood to perform a deadly jutsu, or when you might face someone with the power to alter memories and minds. There were cursed weapons that could permanently seal you, strange gourd-shaped objects that could trap you with a single word¡­ In short, the shinobi world was dangerous, and filled with unpredictable threats. Plenty of kage-level ninjas had perished over the years. So, being open didn¡¯t mean being careless. Hui understood this perfectly well. After the battle, Hui returned to spend time with Tsunade, prioritizing his time with her. But it seemed that Tobirama didn¡¯t want to see Hui idle. The very next day, an official letter of appointment was ced in front of Hui. The appointment read: "For your distinguished achievements in the Land of Mist, Mochizuki Hui, Captain of the First Division¡¯s Fourth Squad, is hereby promoted to the position of Captain of the First Division. This appointment takes effect immediately." And just like that, eleven-year-old Hui became an Anbu division captain¡ªthe youngest in Anbu¡¯s history. join my patreon for 65+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 82 Chapter 82 Looking at the appointment letter in his hand, Hui could only sigh in resignation. It seemed there was no escaping his fate with the Anbu. But there was no helping it. Tobirama had been grooming Hui for a purpose, and his previous goal for Hui''s time in the Anbu hadn¡¯t been fully realized yet. Hui still needed to remain in the Anbu for a while longer. Only those who had experienced true darkness could fully yearn for the light. The shinobi world was far from pure, and a Hokage needed the courage and ruthlessness to wield the shadows. Thus, Hui had one more task ahead of him¡ªone that Tobirama had specially prepared. Upon bing the division captain, Hui officially stepped down as the squad leader of the Fourth Squad. From now on, he wouldn¡¯t be conducting missions with the Fourth Squad. It left him feeling a bit mncholic; the Fourth Squad had been one of the most significant parts of his life so far, carrying many of his cherished memories. Now, as the division captain, the Fourth Squad would slowly fade from his day-to-day life. However, as long as he was alive and the Fourth Squad remained, that bond would never truly break. With that in mind, Hui set aside his wistfulness. It was time to assume his new responsibilities. But before he officially took up his new post, there was something he needed to do¡ªvisit Shuhei Takahara¨CHunter. Hui had only recently learned that Hunter had suffered irreparable damage to his body during the incident two months ago, his injuries inflicted by Iwagakure¡¯s Anbu. He would never be able to serve as a shinobi again. When Hui finally met Hunter, he had expected to find a broken man¡ªdowncast and dejected. To his surprise, what he saw was a young man with a wide smile, ying with children nearby. "Captain?!" Hunter eximed, noticing Hui¡¯s arrival. He quickly rushed over, his face lighting up with joy. "It¡¯s been so long! It¡¯s great to see you again!" He spoke with such excitement and energy, clearly thrilled by the reunion. "I was right all along, wasn¡¯t I? I knew you¡¯d be famous throughout the shinobi world, Captain!" Hunter beamed with pride, as if it was his own aplishment. Hui could see the warmth in Hunter¡¯s eyes, a zest for life that was unmistakable. Any words offort Hui had prepared vanished. Instead, he smiled and said, "It¡¯s not just me who¡¯s famous¡ªit¡¯s the Fourth Squad, including you." Hunterughed heartily at that. "I¡¯m a hero of the vige too! You don¡¯t know this, but my little cousin really looks up to me!" Hunter pulled the young boy over proudly. "Ahhh!!! It¡¯s you, Hui¡ªthe Light of Konoha!" the boy squealed, his eyes sparkling like stars as he stared at Hui, looking at him as though he were a celebrity. Hunter: £¨*£Þ-£Þ*£© Hui: (£þ¨Œ£þ) ? Guess this runs in the family then? It seemed that after his recent battle, Hui had amassed quite a number of fans in Konoha, though most of them were children under the age of twelve¡­ After calming down his young admirer, Hui turned back to Hunter. "What will you do now, Hunter?" "Me? I¡¯ll be working at the ninja academy, teaching kids about ninjutsu and academic subjects. Those don¡¯t require chakra, after all," Hunter said with a casual shrug, clearly having already nned his future. Hui smiled at his friend¡¯s optimism. "Then, I¡¯ll leave the vige¡¯s future in your capable hands." "Don¡¯t worry, Captain! The Anbu has you, and the academy has me!" Hunter dered confidently. After a while, Hui bid Hunter farewell and left. He felt as though a weight had been lifted from his heart. As Hunter watched Hui walk away, his eyes sparkled with hope but also a tinge of regret. "I wish I could¡¯ve remained under yourmand, Captain," He whispered softly, his voice carried away by the wind and drowned out by his cousin¡¯s excited chatter. With his visit to Hunter over, Hui returned home to pack. After all, he wasn¡¯t just taking up his new position in Konoha¡ªthe First Division of the Anbu was currently stationed outside the vige. The Cold War was still ongoing, and the First Division was currently in a small country called the Land of Waves. As the newly appointed division captain, Hui needed to head to the battlefield to assume his duties. When Tsunade found out that Hui was once again being sent on a mission, she nearly stormed into Tobirama¡¯s office in a fit of rage. Thankfully, Hui managed to stop her. "Don¡¯t worry, Tsunade. This time, nothing bad will happen. Don¡¯t forget¡ªI¡¯m a kage-level shinobi now, with exceptional strength. And you know how cautious I am. Trust me, okay?" Hui reassured her. Still, Tsunade wasn¡¯t convinced, her expression showing her lingering concern. After all, Hui had already been carried back to the vige in critical condition¡ªtwice¡­ In the end, though, Tsunade reluctantly let him go. After all, it was a mission, and Hui was now an Anbu division captain. Still, deep down, something had shifted for Tsunade. She now had a clear vision of her future path. She was determined to be the greatest medical ninja, one who could heal anything! As for Hui, after saying his farewells to Tsunade, he set off for the Land of Waves. It was a small country situated between the Land of Fire, the Land of Earth, and the Land of Lightning Country, in a buffer zone that bordered the Land of Fire. Truth be told, the Land of Fire had always treated the Land of Waves fairly well, treating them like a younger sibling. Konoha had even helped Land of Waves withstand attacks from other viges in the past. However, during thest great shinobi war, the Land of Waves had turned against the The Land of Fire. When the four great nations joined forces to invade the Land of Fire, many smaller nations, including the Land of Waves, saw it as an opportunity to carve out some territory for themselves. Once the war began, Land of Waves wasted no time in dering war on the Land of Fire andunching an attack. What Land of Waves hadn¡¯t expected was for Konoha to emerge victorious against overwhelming odds, defeating all four great nations and their shinobi viges. After the war, Land of Waves lived in constant fear that Konoha would retaliate for their betrayal. Four years passed, and the Land of Fire had shown no signs of seeking revenge, leading Land of Waves to slowly let down their guard. But with the current unrest in the shinobi world, and the covert wars being waged by mysterious forces (which everyone knew were really the Anbu of the great viges), old fears of Land of Waves resurfaced. With Hui¡¯s name now known throughout the shinobi world, Land of Wave¡¯s leaders grew even more anxious. In response, Waves quickly aligned itself with the Land of Earth and the Land of Lightning, hoping the strength of those two great nations would help protect them from Konoha¡¯s retribution. Hui¡¯s mission as captain of the First Division? To wipe out the Vige of Waves, even under the protection of Iwagakure and Kumogakure¡¯s Anbu. join my patreon for 65+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 83 Chapter 83 Exterminate the vige... When Hui learned the specifics of his mission, he was stunned. Vige of Waves was a small shinobi vige, with its most powerful ninja being just an elite Jonin. At one point, the vige had two other elite Jonin, but they had died in thest Shinobi War. Aside from that lone elite Jonin, Vige of Waves had one Jonin, eight elite Chunin, and neen Chunin. The remaining members were over three hundred Genin. In total, the entire poption of Vige of Waves was barely over four hundred people, most of whom were shinobi. It was a ninja n-type vige that did not ept any civilians. Hui''s First Division still had thirty-two members, including him. Hui himself was Kage-level, one was an elite Jonin, six were Jonin, and the rest were elite Chunin. On paper, it wasn''t difficult for the First Division to wipe out Vige of Waves. Despite therge number of shinobi in Vige of Waves, most were low-level Genin with littlebat power¡ªa force that was more like cannon fodder. Additionally, even though Vige of Waves had allied itself with Iwagakure and Kumogakure, it wasn''t much of a concern for Hui''s division. The Land of Waves bordered the Land of Fire, but Iwagakure and Kumogakure weren''t particrly interested in protecting this territory. The only reason they had agreed to help Vige of Waves was to irritate Konoha. In reality, both Iwagakure and Kumogakure had sent only a token of support to Vige of Waves. Each vige had dispatched a small squad of shinobi, and these were the type of squads that could retreat at any sign of danger. In other words, Vige of Waves was doomed from the start. Their fate was sealed, and this night, the vige would not escape annihtion. Though the mission seemed straightforward, Hui¡¯s heart was heavy. What did it mean to exterminate a vige? At a minimum, it meant ughtering over eighty percent of its poption and turning the survivors into fleeing refugees who would never dare return to their vige. This mission was destined to be filled with bloodshed and killing. It was the first time Hui had been tasked with something like this. And he would be the one giving the order. With a heavy heart, Hui made his way to the Land of Waves. Following the signals left by the First Division, he located their camp and officially took over. There was no need for Hui to issue any more directives. The First Division had already scouted and mapped out every detail of Vige of Waves before his arrival. All that remained for Hui was to set the time for the operation. That night, the weather was ominous. Dark clouds nketed the sky, and lightning flickered across the heavens. Thunder rumbled ominously, and the rain fell in torrents, striking the earth and trees with a deafening roar. Nearby the Vige of Waves, a cavey hidden in the shadows. Inside the cave, the dim light of torches flickered on the walls, casting a faint, eerie glow. In the gloom, thirty-one shinobi stood in formation, waiting. They wore white masks and matching uniforms, swords strapped to their backs. These were the members of Konoha¡¯s Anbu¡ªHui¡¯s First Division. Standing in front of them was a small figure, a boy who seemed no more than eleven or twelve years old. He was their captain¡ªKonoha¡¯s Light, known in other viges as the ¡®Ghost¡¯. Tonight was the night, the Vige of Waves would be annihted. The group of grim reapers stood ready, waiting for the finalmand. Inside, Hui¡¯s heart was heavy. He loathed this mission. He knew that the decision to betray Konoha had been made by the vige¡¯s three leaders, and most of the vigers had nothing to do with it. People from Konoha were human, and so were the people of Vige of Waves. Surely, among the four hundred vigers, there were innocent people. But... Hui took a deep breath, pushing down thepassion and hesitation welling up within him. In a cold voice, he gave the order: "Target: Vige of Waves. Move out." "Yes, sir!" the Anbu responded in unison. ¡­ Thunder roared in the sky, lightning briefly illuminating the world before everything was plunged back into darkness. Vige of Waves was built along the mountainside, with only one road leading into the vige. The vige gate sat along this road, nked by two guard towers, where several Chunin stood watch. In the past, there hadn¡¯t been guard towers. The "only road" into the vige applied only to ordinary people. For shinobi, there were countless ways to infiltrate Vige of Waves. The vigecked protective barriers, and it was far too easy for skilled ninjas to sneak in. The towers had been erected recently, more out of fear and paranoia of Konoha''s retribution than any real defense. Knowing the towers wouldn''t provide much protection didn¡¯t stop the vige from setting them up¡ªit offered a small sense of security, however hollow. Since the incident involving Hui, the entire vige had been on edge, the atmosphere growing more oppressive by the day. Atop one of the guard towers, a group of Chunin huddled together, talking quietly. "Captain, do you really think Konoha wille for revenge? It¡¯s been two months already. Maybe we¡¯re just overthinking things?" one Chunin asked hopefully, longing for some reassurance. The captain shook his head with a sigh. "From the moment we chose to betray Konoha in thest war, a confrontation became inevitable. There¡¯s no avoiding it." Silence followed his words, the others too anxious to respond. Finally, another Chunin spoke up: "Captain, do you think if we surrendered and begged for forgiveness, Konoha would spare us?" When it came to Konoha, no one in Vige of Waves had even entertained the thought of resisting. All they could think of was surrender. After all, Konoha was one of the Five Great Shinobi Viges, and in thest war, they had defeated four other viges despite being outnumbered. Everyone knew what that meant for their strength. "I don¡¯t know¡­ But I heard our leader reached out to Iwagakure and Kumogakure for help first," the captain replied, though his voice was heavy with doubt. He cursed their vige leaders under his breath. How had someone with such a pig-headed brain managed to rise to the rank of elite Jonin and lead the vige? It seemed like they were marching straight into ruin under hismand! If only I were stronger! he thought bitterly, frustration welling up inside him. But in the end, he could only sigh. That was the reality of the shinobi world. Only the strong could lead. Suddenly, thunder crashed in the sky, and a sh of lightning briefly lit up the ground below. "What the¡ª?! Who¡¯s there?!" the captain shouted, immediately going on alert as the other guards scrambled into defensive positions, peering down at the road below. But it was too dark to see anything. Another bolt of lightning streaked across the sky, illuminating the road. That was when they saw him. A lone figure, standing on the road, small and slight, with a white mask obscuring his face. The captain¡¯s eyes widened in terror as recognition struck him. "It¡¯s¡­ it¡¯s the Ghost!!!" join my patreon for 65+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 84 Chapter 84 ¡°What?!¡± ¡°Konoha¡¯s Ghost?!¡± The others eximed in panic upon hearing the name, their faces immediately turning pale. As the lightning faded, darkness once again swallowed their surroundings, and everything went pitch ck. ¡°Hurry, sound the rm!¡± The captain didn¡¯t have time to think¡ªhe shouted, trying to warn the vige of the impending danger. But suddenly, his voice was cut off. With the next sh of lightning, his eyes widened in disbelief as he stared at the masked figure that had appeared in front of him. His mouth opened, as though he wanted to say something, but all that came up was a gush of blood blocking his throat. He copsed to the ground, unable to utter a word. It wasn¡¯t just him¡ªseveral other Chunin had fallen as well. In the brief seconds of darkness, all of them had been silently killed. ¡°Wasn¡¯t that just Captain Light? The captain¡¯s so strong!¡± One of the Konoha Anbu belowmented in awe, his eyes filled with admiration. He was a sensory-type ninja, yet in that brief moment, it was as if Hui hadn¡¯t existed at all in his sensory range. But Hui had been in his line of sight the entire time! ¡°No wonder he¡¯s called the Ghost, by the others.¡± Such stealth abilities, paired with his lightning-fast attacks, made the Anbu understand why the Iwagakure shinobi had dubbed Hui the ¡°Ghost.¡± In the darkness, Hui was a phantom, an unseen killer capable of ending lives before anyone even realized. ¡°Move!¡± Hui¡¯s voice came from above, snapping the Anbu out of his daze. His expression grew cold as he drew his de and rushed toward Vige of Waves with hisrades. But the gate wasn¡¯t the only entry point. Hui had divided his 31 subordinates into three teams, each attacking from a different direction, ensuring that no one from the Vige of Waves would escape. The ughter began. That night, amidst the torrential rain and frequent thunderps, any smaller sounds were perfectly masked by the storm. The rain poured relentlessly, beating down on the rooftops, the leaves, and the ground, muffling the softest of noises. Most of the vigers had already gone to sleep, with only a few restless souls still awake. For many, this was a night of silent death. The Konoha Anbu infiltrated homes silently, one by one, eliminating the vigers as they slept. If the lives of the Vige of Wave¡¯s inhabitants were like candles, then from a higher vantage point, it would appear as though those candles were being snuffed out one by one, from the vige¡¯s perimeter toward the center. Hui himself joined in the ughter. Without using any chakra, his small frame moved swiftly and silently through the night, killing like a ghost. One by one, people were in by his de. Even those who were startled awake barely had time to react before Hui¡¯s sword cut their throats. The ughter continued until Hui entered a particr house, where the violence momentarily halted. This house was sparsely furnished, cold, and empty. Inside, there was no one visible. But upon entering, Hui could feel the rapid breathinging from beneath the floor. He stood still, his eyesnding on a picture frame on the wall. The photo showed a family of three¡ªone adult and two children¡ªsitting on a grassy field in a neat row, arranged from smallest torgest. The adult, a middle-aged man, was the Chunin captain whom Hui had just killed at the gate. The two children¡ªa boy of about twelve or thirteen and a little girl, perhaps five or six years old¡ªsat in front of him. The girl¡¯s big, innocent eyes sparkled with curiosity, while the boy looked proud but held the girl protectively in his arms, as if afraid she might fall. It was a happy family, or at least it had been. Hui stared at the photograph, momentarily dazed. He could hear thebored breathing and frantic heartbeatsing from beneath the floorboards, and in his mind''s eye, he could almost see the boy holding his hand over the girl¡¯s mouth, trying to keep her quiet, trying to keep her from crying. A heavy weight settled in Hui¡¯s chest. His own breathing grew rougher. He gripped his sword tightly, feeling a dampness in his palms. To his surprise, he realized that, despite being the Ghost who had killed countless people, his hands were sweating. For what seemed like several minutes¡ªthough it may have only been a few seconds¡ªthe room was silent, save for the sound of heavy breathing. Then, a sh of light flickered, and a cold-faced Hui emerged from the house, heading toward the next target. The ughter resumed. As the massacre continued, the flickering lights of life in the vige slowly dimmed, one by one, until only a few remained. When Hui finally reached the innermost part of the Vige of Waves, he heard the sound of shing metal. ng! ng! ng! Two figures were locked in fiercebat in the rain. Sword and kunai shed, creating a rapid series of metallic ringing sounds. The twobatants were Vige of Waves¡¯s elite Jonin and one of the First Division¡¯s elite Jonin. Trying to silently assassinate an elite Jonin was nearly impossible, especially one who had been on edge, filled with paranoia. The elite Jonin of Vige of Waves hadid many traps around his residence. While the thunderstorm helped mask the sounds of the Anbu¡¯s approach, it also concealed the sound of the traps being triggered. When one of the Anbu inadvertently set off a trap, the Jonin had been alerted. But it was toote. By the time he woke, nearly the entire vige had already been ughtered. Now, he was surrounded by over ten Anbu. ¡°Konoha! Damn you, you bastards!¡± the elite Jonin roared in fury, his voice hoarse with rage. He could feel the bloodlust emanating from the Konoha shinobi around him, and their bloodstained swords and uniforms told him everything he needed to know. The vige¡­ it had already fallen. ¡°Captain!¡± Several Anbu greeted Hui respectfully as he arrived, further tightening the elite Jonin¡¯s nerves. Distracted, he was caught off guard, and the Konoha Joninnded a deep cut on his arm. But instead of pressing the attack, the Konoha Jonin retreated to stand behind Hui. The elite Jonin clutched his wounded arm, panting heavily, his gaze locking onto Hui. His pupils contracted, and a name escaped his lips. ¡°Ghost¡­¡± Then, his face paled as he realized the truth. ¡°Konoha will never spare Vige of Waves, will it?¡± Hui¡¯s presence¡ªhis small stature, his mask, and the way the other Anbu deferred to him¡ªwas unmistakable. ¡°No. There will be no Vige of Waves left to spare,¡± Hui replied coldly, moving swiftly as he spoke. His speed was terrifying. As he moved, a sh of light briefly blinded the elite Jonin, forcing him to squint and turn his head away. In that moment, Hui was upon him, his sword plunging into the Jonin¡¯s heart. One strike¡ªinstant kill. From this day onward, there would be no Vige of Waves on thend of Waves. join my patreon for 65+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 85 Chapter 85 Vige of Waves was annihted without any surprises. Huipleted his first mission tainted with darkness, officially exposing him to the true nature of such grim tasks. It wasn¡¯t a good feeling¡ªthis kind of experience shed with a person¡¯s core beliefs and shook their spirit. For someone without strong resolve, it might lead to aplete descent into the darkness. Deep down, Hui rejected such missions. But he also understood that a great leader must face,prehend, and wield such darkness when necessary. Being a leader required not onlypassion but also the ability to be cold and ruthless. He wasn¡¯t just an individual anymore¡ªhe was the captain of Anbu''s First Division. Furthermore, in the future, he might even be the head of the entire Konoha Anbu, or possibly, the Hokage. So no matter how much he despised these kinds of tasks, he knew he had to ept them. "Captain, it''s done. Everything¡¯s been taken care of," one of the Anbu members reported, his body still faintly reeking of blood. ¡°Light, this side is clear as well,¡± Lightning reported as he approached. He had taken over as the leader of Team 4 after Hui¡¯s promotion. Currently, though, Team 4 only consisted of Lightning and Hatake Sakumo, as new members hadn¡¯t yet been assigned. "Captain, we¡¯ve dealt with everything, including the squad from Kumogakure. But there was no sign of the Iwagakure team." Another Anbu quickly arrived, delivering news that caused everyone to pause. Hearing this, Hui closed his eyes. His Yuan Qi radiated outward like a third eye, scanning the surroundings. A momentter, he reopened his eyes and looked toward a specific direction. "Two o''clock, three kilometers out. Pursue!" Boom! Thunder roared across the sky, lightning shing as the rain continued to pour heavily. The Iwagakure squad was fleeing at full speed, trying to escape from Vige of Waves. It was pure chance that one of their members had been unable to sleep that night and had happened to spot the Konoha Anbu''s actions. That gave them just enough time to make a break for it. But luck wasn¡¯t on their side¡ªthey had still been discovered. To Hui, the pitch-ck night was as clear as day. With his elite-level physical abilities, he quickly closed the distance on the four fleeing Iwagakure shinobi. When they saw Hui approaching, their faces turned pale with fear. ¡°Konoha¡¯s Ghost!¡± It only took a moment for them to recognize who he was. After all, Hui had made his name in battle against their Iwagakure Anbu, having assassinated many of their members, including their previousmander, the elite shinobi Tsuchikawa Ishigawa. Every Iwagakure ninja knew Hui¡¯s name. Seeing him now sent chills down their spines. This was the "Ghost" who had killed theirmander, and ording to thetest intelligence, his strength was definitively at the Kage level. Facing him, they knew they had no chance of survival, especially with more Konoha Anbu following behind him. ¡°I¡¯ll hold him off! The rest of you, run!¡± the squad leader shouted through gritted teeth before charging toward Hui, intending to engage him in closebat to buy time. He chose to fight hand-to-hand rather than use ninjutsu for a reason. Based on the intelligence, the Konoha''s Ghost¡¯s mastery of ninjutsu was exceptional. He could use nearly all elemental jutsu as well asplexbination techniques. Engaging him in a ninjutsu battle was suicidal. Additionally, the squad leader believed that because Hui was only eleven, his body couldn¡¯t possibly be as physically strong as that of an adult. He assumed that taijutsu would be Hui¡¯s weakness. But he was wrong¡ªdead wrong. What he didn¡¯t know was that during Hui''s sparring session with Tobirama, no other shinobi had been present to witness Hui¡¯s taijutsu prowess. The intelligence report he had received was iplete. As soon as the squad leader lunged at Hui, his movements appeared sluggish in Hui¡¯s eyes, as though he were moving in slow motion. Hui swiftly identified an opening and struck with his sword, killing the squad leader instantly. He hadn¡¯t even managed to dy Hui for a few seconds. Seeing their leader fall so quickly, the remaining three Iwagakure shinobi were filled with despair. Their limbs went weak, and their minds were in turmoil. One of them copsed to the ground, supporting himself with his hands, paralyzed by fear. They were swiftly executed by Hui, who showed no mercy. Though interrogating them for information might have been an option, Hui wasn¡¯t in the mood tonight. So they were simply killed on the spot. When the other Konoha Anbu arrived, they found Hui standing motionless in the rain, letting the downpour wash over him. Boom! Thunder continued to rumble, shes of lightning illuminating the sky, as darkness and light alternated in rapid session. ¡°Rest here for the night. We¡¯ll depart for Land of Mushrooms in the morning,¡± Hui ordered. The Anbu had been drenched by the rain, and if they didn¡¯t rest and dry off, they risked falling ill. What Hui didn¡¯t know was that elsewhere, an Iwagakure shinobi had arrived at Vige of Waves on a reconnaissance mission. Upon discovering the vige had been wiped out, he quickly ryed the news back to his superiors. Along with that message, he sent another piece of information: a single character for Ghost, which he had found etched into the dirt at the site where the Iwagakure squad had been killed. It seemed one of the dying shinobi had scratched the character into the ground with his fingers in a desperate attempt to leave a clue. Although the message was iplete, that one character was enough. Somewhere in Land of Mushrooms, upon receiving this report, a man shot up from his seat. ¡°Ghost? It must be Konoha¡¯s Ghost! Hui, you¡¯ve finally shown yourself!¡± he growled, his voice filled with murderous intent. The man was short in stature, almost childlike in size, yet his face showed that he was in his thirties. His appearance wasn¡¯t remotely handsome; in fact, he was quite ugly, with arge, distinctive nose. Despite his unimpressive looks, no one in Iwagakure dared to underestimate him. He was an idol to many of their shinobi. His name was ¨­noki of the Two Scales, the current leader of Iwagakure¡¯s Anbu. ¨­noki was the grandson of Iwagakure¡¯s First Tsuchikage and a student of the Second Tsuchikage. He was also the inheritor of the Second Tsuchikage¡¯s Bloodline Expansion: Dust Release. In addition, his predecessor, Ishigawa, the former Anbu leader, had been his kin and his closest friend. After Hui had killed Ishigawa, ¨­noki had personally requested to take over as the head of Iwagakure¡¯s Anbu, driven by a singr purpose¡ªvengeance. For two months, he had scoured the battlefield, consumed with thoughts of avenging Ishigawa. But Hui had been silent during that time, leaving ¨­noki¡¯s thirst for revenge unquenched. Now, finally, news of Hui had surfaced. And Hui was close¡ªjust within Land of Mushrooms. ¡°Prepare to move out. Our target is Vige of Waves!¡± ¨­noki ordered decisively. This time, he intended to tear Hui apart at the atomic level with his Dust Release. join my patreon for 65+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 86 Chapter 86 ¨­noki¡¯s heart was filled with hatred for Hui. This time, he had taken on the role of Anbu Commander with a single goal in mind: to enter the battlefield of the Anbu and personally avenge hisrade. Two months had passed, and he had finally received word of Hui¡¯s whereabouts. To his satisfaction, they weren¡¯t far apart. However, Hui remained unaware that ¨­noki was tracking him down. Even if he knew, he wouldn''t have been overly worried. While the prospect was concerning, it wasn¡¯t enough to make him panic. The unknown is what¡¯s most terrifying, especially in the ninja world. A shinobi is only truly fearsome when their abilities are a mystery. But as for ¨­noki, while Hui couldn¡¯t im to know him inside out, he knew enough¡ªespecially about the Dust Release. ¨­noki¡¯s greatest strengthy in his mastery of Dust Release, an incredibly fearsome technique developed by the Second Tsuchikage. This technique fused three chakra natures¡ªwind, fire, and earth¡ªinto a jutsu thatbined attack and barrier capabilities. The caster could form a transparent, shape-shifting barrier and release it toward their target. Dust Release is a nature transformation kekkei t¨­ta not a kekkei genlkai. The true terror of Dust Release was its ability to disintegrate opponents down to an atomic level, leaving them in nothing but dust. It also packed enough power to causerge-scale explosions. ¨­noki, as the inheritor of Dust Release, wielded this terrifying technique. Given its nature, Hui deduced that ¨­noki would also be proficient in the individual elemental jutsu of wind, fire, and earth¡ªthough, aside from a few Earth-style jutsu, ¨­noki was rarely seen using anything else. After all, with a technique like Dust Release, who would bother with anything less? Hui was sure that ¨­noki¡¯s greatest weapon was his Dust Release. If he had any other hidLightningcards, he would have revealed them during the Five Kage battle against Madara Uchiha in the original story. Thus, as long as he could dodge the Dust Release, dealing with ¨­noki wouldn¡¯t be too difficult. Of course, for most shinobi, just dodging ¨­noki¡¯s Dust Release was already an impossible feat. But Hui wasn¡¯t just any ordinary shinobi. Night gradually deepened. Though the thunder and lightning had ceased, the rain continued, now reduced to a light drizzle. ¨­noki led several Anbu squads, stealthily advancing toward Hui¡¯s position. His thirst for vengeance drove him, but he hadn¡¯t lost his reason. Based on their intelligence, the Ghost¡ªHui¡ªpossessed extraordinary sensory abilities. If they recklessly charged forward and were detected, Hui could easily escape, rendering their efforts futile futile. ¨­noki also knew that Hui earned his nickname, "Konoha¡¯s Ghost," for a reason. In the darkness of night, he moved like an apparition, leaving no trace of his presence. For this reason, ¨­noki decided to wait until daybreak before making his move. But first, he needed to confirm Hui¡¯s exact location. All he knew was that Hui was near Vige of Waves. As dawn broke, the first rays of sunlight bathed thend. After a night of rest, Hui¡¯s Anbu team members were refreshed and alert. "The sun¡¯s finally up. Looks like today will be a good day," Lightning remarked as he approached Hui. Watching the sunrise after a night of hard work made him feel grateful to be alive, especially after the previous night¡¯s bloody mission. "Yeah, it does seem like a nice day... wait." Hui¡¯s expression suddenly shifted, his face growing serious. He had sensed arge number of chakra signatures approaching, about five or six kilometers away. Since his recent physical transformation, Hui¡¯s sensory range had doubled, reaching an impressive seven to eight kilometres. His perception ability was now one of the best in the entire ninja world. Activating his enhanced vision, Hui¡¯s eyes revealed mysterious patterns, and he quickly scanned the area five kilometers ahead. There, he saw a group of thirty to forty shinobi rapidly approaching. Their uniforms were unmistakable¡ªthey belonged to Iwagakure''s Anbu. Among them was a smaller figure leading the group, with a distinctivelyrge nose. Hui¡¯s mind raced, and he immediately recognized who it was. "¨­noki of the Two Scales... so he¡¯s in the Anbu?" Hui thought, surprised. He hadn''t expected the future Third Tsuchikage to have an Anbu background. Of course, he didn¡¯t realize that ¨­noki had only joined the Anbu due to his quest for vengeance. "Eleven o''clock, five kilometers out¡ªapproaching from Iwagakure¡¯s Anbu. One Kage-level shinobi, two elite j¨­nin, six j¨­nin, and twenty-eight elite ch¨±nin. They''re closing in on us," Hui reported calmly. The Konoha Anbu members tensed immediately. "Our position''s beenpromised!" Lightning reacted swiftly, looking to Hui for further instructions, along with the rest of the team. Hui deliberated for a few seconds before issuing his orders. "We retreat. Their forces outnumber us, and they have a Kage-level shinobi. Since there¡¯s no mission conflict, there¡¯s no need for a confrontation." Truth be told, Hui was tempted to test his skills against the future Third Tsuchikage. However, he suppressed his urge. It wasn¡¯t the time for recklessness, especially when leading a team of over thirty Anbu. While he might be able to handle the situation, he couldn¡¯t guarantee the safety of his subordinates. By the time ¨­noki and his squad reached the mountain cave where Hui¡¯s team had been, they found it empty. Judging by the traces left behind, they hadn¡¯t left long ago. ¨­noki gritted his teeth in frustration. He hated the thought of having to continue searching. "You all rest here and wait for me, I¡¯ll be back in a minute," hemanded before ascending into the sky. ¨­noki possessed the ability to fly¡ªone of the few shinobi in the entire world with that capability. From his aerial vantage point, he scoured the terrain below, searching for Hui¡¯s trail. It didn¡¯t take long. Hui¡¯s group of thirty-two was toorge to remain concealed for long. And unlike the dense forests of the Land of Fire, Land if Waves woods were sparse, making stealth difficult. Soon enough, ¨­noki spotted his targets. His eyes lit up with excitement, and he quickly flew toward them. Hui, sensing ¨­noki¡¯s approach, stopped and looked up toward the sky. "Coming straight for me? It seems this guy had a close rtionship with Ishigawa," Hui muttered to himself before ordering his team to spread out. ¨­noki descended from the sky, positioning himself directly above Hui¡¯s group. He red down coldly. "Ghost of Konoha, Hui... today, I¡¯ll make sure you be a real ghost!" ¨­noki¡¯s voice dripped with killing intent. Hui raised an eyebrow, removing his mask as he gazed back up at ¨­noki. "Quite the familiar words there. Thest person who said that to me... well, I killed him two months ago." His calm retort hung in the air, making the atmosphere even more tense. join my patreon for 65+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 87 Chapter 87 As Hui and ¨­noki exchanged words, the killing intent in the air became palpable. ¨­noki hade for revenge, filled with a burning desire to kill Hui. Hui, sensing the murderous aura from ¨­noki, also became filled with a desire to eliminate him. "That guy, Ishigawa, also had the surname ¡®Kmizuru'' I wonder how he was rted to you? If he was your friend, that¡¯s quite tragic. You''ll never see him again, after all," Hui said with a smirk, his voice dripping with mockery as he gazed at ¨­noki. He had already deduced that Ishigawa and ¨­noki were likely rted, perhaps even by blood. These words were designed to provoke him. ¨­noki¡¯s breath grew rough, and in an instant, his fury boiled over. "Dust Release: Detachment of the Primitive World Technique!" ¨­noki sped his hands together, and a translucent, drop-shaped barrier materialized between his palms. It rapidly expanded, stretching into a sharp, spear-like light beam. Zing! With a piercing sound, the beam shot toward Hui. However, for Hui, this attack was far too slow. He swiftly leaped out of the way, simultaneously flinging several kunai upward toward ¨­noki. His taunt was working wonders. Swish, swish, swish! ¨­noki easily dodged the kunai, his body floating gracefully in midair. But Hui had more in store. The second wave of kunai collided with the first, altering their trajectories and sending them streaking directly toward ¨­noki¡¯s blind spots. Hearing the whistling sound of the kunai behind him, ¨­noki immediately soared higher to evade. He then dived toward Hui, forming hand signs as he descended. "Earth Release: Fist Rock Technique!" In an instant, ¨­noki¡¯s fist was encased in solid rock, growing to an enormous size. He aimed the rock-encrusted fist at Hui and plummeted toward him, the weight of the stone elerating his fall. On the ground, Hui''s eyes flickered with the mysterious patterns of his Heavenly Eye technique. His keen dynamic vision allowed him to track ¨­noki¡¯s flight path with precision, calcting his attack range and the exact moment he wouldnd. Just as ¨­noki was about to strike, Hui shifted his feet, narrowly avoiding the blow. He immediately followed up with a sword sh aimed at ¨­noki¡¯s throat. ¨­noki blocked the strike with his rock-covered fist, deflecting the de with a metallic clink. But Hui wasn¡¯t done. ¨­noki, seeing his attack fail, raised his hand again. A cubic, translucent barrier began forming between his palms. "Dust Release: Detachment of the Primitive World Technique!" Once again, ¨­noki unleashed Dust Release. This time, the cube rapidly expanded, attempting to envelop Hui and disintegrate him into atoms. Hui, wary of this deadly technique, quickly retreated the moment he saw ¨­noki¡¯s hands move, escaping the range of the Dust Release barrier. Hui began forming hand seals at an astonishing speed¡ªabout six seals per second, a remarkable feat considering he hadn¡¯t specialized in hand seal training. "Fire Release: Great Fireball Technique!" A massive fireball erupted from Hui¡¯s mouth, surging toward ¨­noki. The zing inferno wasrge enough to obscure ¨­noki¡¯s visionpletely. However, the fireball barely touched the Dust Release barrier before being disintegrated into nothingness. "Impressive as ever, Dust Release. If Ishigawa had possessed this power, it might¡¯ve been me buried underground instead of him," Hui remarked casually as he advanced toward ¨­noki, sword in hand. ¨­noki¡¯s breathing became even morebored. He too drew a kunai and charged at Hui, their des shing in the air. ng, ng, ng! The sound of their des colliding echoed through the battlefield. Hui moved with a fluid ease, while ¨­noki became increasingly frantic, forced into a defensive stance as Hui¡¯s relentless attacks kepting. In closebat, Hui had the clear advantage. "Trying to use ninjutsu while engaged in closebat? How naive," Hui taunted, continuing to suppress ¨­noki effortlessly. Despite the intensity of the fight, he even found the time to taunt his opponent. ¨­noki, realizing he was no match for Hui in close quarters, sought an opening to create distance and cast his jutsu. However, every time he attempted to retreat, Hui pressed forward, keeping their distance close. In this tight range, ¨­noki knew that if he attempted to weave signs for a jutsu, Hui¡¯s sword would be at his throat before he could finish. Panic surged within ¨­noki. He had underestimated Hui¡¯s prowess in taijutsu and swordsmanship¡ªskills that rivalled his ninjutsu. He had to break free from this suffocating rhythm he was trapped in. In a desperate move, ¨­noki steeled himself, allowing Hui¡¯s sword to graze his arm. Enduring the pain, he seized Hui¡¯s arm with his free hand. "Earth Release: Added-Weight Rock Technique!" Instantly, Hui¡¯s body grew heavy, the ground beneath him sinking under the sudden weight. ¨­noki, feeling a glimmer of hope, smirked and prepared to stab Hui with his kunai. But once again, he underestimated Hui. With a swift flick of his sword, Hui targeted ¨­noki¡¯s arm¡ªthe one gripping his wrist. If ¨­noki continued his assault, he would lose his arm. Realizing this, and knowing that stabbing Hui would not be a fatal blow, ¨­noki hesitated. In the end, he released Hui and leapt backward, retreating into the air. "Not bad, but it seems you¡¯re still not ruthless enough," Huimented, feeling the weight lift from his body. His taunt infuriating Oniki further. Without giving ¨­noki any respite, he dashed forward again, ready to continue the assault. This time, ¨­noki wasn¡¯t about to let Hui close the distance. He soared higher into the sky, out of sword range, and began firing Dust Release attacks from above. However, Dust Release required time to form and aim. For someone with Hui¡¯s dynamic vision and quick reflexes, dodging the attacks was easy. Despite ¨­noki¡¯s aerial advantage, Hui remained unharmed. But he knew he needed to find a way to strike back. Though he couldn¡¯t fly, an idea crossed his mind¡ªthere was a technique he could try. A smile tugged at the corner of Hui¡¯s lips. "Maybe this will work¡­" join my patreon for 70+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 88 Chapter 88 As Hui dodged ¨­noki''s attacks, thoughts raced through his mind while his hands moved quickly to form seals. "Fire Release: Great Fireball Jutsu!" A massive fireball shot from his mouth, soaring toward ¨­noki. The fireball was enormous, with a diameter of four or five meters¡ªan impressive girth for a fireball, not that smaller fireballs were bad. However, ¨­noki easily evaded it, flying swiftly through the air. He didn¡¯t even bother using Dust Release to block it, knowing it would be a waste of chakra. "Fire Release: Great Fireball Jutsu!" Once again, another massive fireball erupted from the ground, this time heating the air around ¨­noki, making his face flush red from the intense heat. Hui didn''t stop there¡ªhe continued to unleash more and more fireballs, forcing ¨­noki to keep dodging. But this constant barrage was draining Hui¡¯s chakra reserves rapidly. In just a few moments, he had almost exhausted all of his chakra, leaving him with the reserves of a low-level ninja. "Flight... it really is such a frustrating ability," Hui muttered, watching ¨­noki hover in the air. However, a faint smile crept onto his lips. ¨­noki, from above, sensed something was off. Despite his advantage, he couldn¡¯t shake the feeling of unease. This boy was not only proficient in almost every elemental jutsu but also excelled in taijutsu and swordsmanship. And now, seeing how vast his chakra reserves were, ¨­noki realized Hui had no apparent weaknesses. This kid is far too dangerous¡­ If there¡¯s ever another war between Iwagakure and Konoha, he¡¯ll cause us unimaginable losses. He must be eliminated, ¨­noki thought grimly, determined to kill Hui. Hui, still gazing upward, spoke again. "I admit, flight is a powerful technique that requires quite some skill. It¡¯s not fair to call it a ''cheap'' ability." "Of course," ¨­noki replied coldly, watching for Hui''s next move, "any abilityes from hard work. My flight technique is no exception!" Hui nodded. "Indeed, it''s an incredible power, and I respect that," he said, before forming more hand seals. "Fire Release: Great Fireball Jutsu!" Another fireball hurtled toward ¨­noki. Hui seemed relentless as if determined to hit him with fire. ¨­noki smirked, assuming that Hui was trying to wear him down by exhausting his chakra used for flight. Does he really think I''ll run out of chakra just from maintaining flight? Too naive... But maybe I can use this to my advantage¡­ ¨­noki mused, hatching a n of his own. After a few more Great Fireballs, Hui paused his assault. As he did, droplets of rain began to fall, lightly pattering the ground. Dark clouds gathered overhead, and shes of lightning flickered within the clouds, heralding a brewing storm. ¨­noki nced at the sky andughed. "You¡¯re not seriously hoping the storm will strike me with lightning, are you?" Hui smiled slightly. "It seems I can¡¯t hide anything from you." "Ridiculous. These clouds aren''t enough to produce real lightning strikes," ¨­noki scoffed, shaking his head in disdain. But Hui¡¯s grin widened. "Is that so? Well then¡­ how about I make the lightning fall?" As Hui spoke, his hands blurred through more seals, and soon a crackling ball of electricity formed in his palm. ¨­noki''s confidence wavered, an uneasy feeling settling over him. He knew he had to act fast, but before he could react, Hui thrust his arm into the air, the lightning ball suspended above him. "Lightning Release¡­" Hui shouted as the ball elongated, transforming into the shape of a sword made of pure lightning. At that moment, the storm clouds seemed to respond to the call. Lightning surged from the sky, connecting with the sword Hui had conjured, creating a massive bolt of energy that arced from the ground all the way to the dark clouds above. "Lightning Cmity sh!" With a final shout, Hui swung the colossal lightning sword down toward ¨­noki. BOOM! Thunder roared as the enormous de of lightning descended from the heavens, its blinding light illuminating the battlefield. The destructive force of the attack was undeniable¡ªthere was simply no way to escape. ¨­noki, in a moment of pure instinct, summoned his most powerful offensive yet defensive technique. "Dust Release: Detachment of the Primitive World Technique!" A giant white cube formed in ¨­noki¡¯s hands and expanded rapidly, creating a barrier in front of him just in time to block the iing lightning strike. The sh between the Lightning Cmity sh and Dust Release produced a deafening explosion. The intense light from the lightning strike was absorbed into the Dust Release barrier, neutralizing its effects. ¨­noki sighed in relief, his heart racing. The attack had been powerful¡ªcertainly an S-rank technique¡ªbut it couldn''t prate the defences of Dust Release, the pinnacle of kekkei t¨­ta. "Too bad, kid. Against Dust Release, even your most powerful jutsu is useless," ¨­noki muttered, his confidence returning. But just as he allowed himself to rx, a voice whispered from behind him. "Exposing your back to the enemy is a dangerous habit, old man," Hui¡¯s voice echoed in ¨­noki''s ears, sending a chill down his spine. ¨­noki''s eyes widened in horror. Before he could react, a sharp pain erupted in his back. His strength drained rapidly as Hui, who had created a shadow clone during the earlier fireball barrage, struck him from behind. BAM! Hui kicked ¨­noki hard, sending him crashing to the ground below. Hui''s shadow clone vanished in a puff of smoke, havingpleted its job. The skies cleared as the storm dissipated, and the massive lightning sword vanished along with it. Lying on the ground, ¨­noki was barely conscious. A sword had pierced through his back, its tip jutting out from his chest. His body was scorched from the earlier lightning attacks, and he was on the brink of death. Hui stood over him, staring down coldly. "Killing you might provoke a war, but if Grandpa Tobirama were here, I¡¯m sure he¡¯d agree with me." With those words, Hui watched as the life slowly drained from ¨­noki¡¯s eyes. join my patreon for 70+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 89 Chapter 89 Just as Hui was about to finish off ¨­noki, an unexpected change urred. ¨­noki, lying on the ground, abruptly turned, and a burst of white light erupted from his hands. "Dust Release: Detachment of the Primitive World Technique!" It was the Dust Release, aimed directly at the nearby Hui. However, Hui seemed to have anticipated it. He swiftly retreated, dodging the attack. This gave ¨­noki a very brief window of opportunity. Despite the excruciating pain ravaging his body, he used thest of his chakra to rise into the air and fled without looking back. Seeing this, Hui did not pursue him. "Captain, should we chase after him? He¡¯s so badly injured, he won¡¯t get far!" one of the Konoha Anbu members, who had been watching the epic battle from afar, finally dared to approach, his face filled with excitement and exhration. The recent battle had been a spectacle, leaving them all awestruck and boiling with adrenaline. But Hui shook his head, refusing the suggestion. "No, I never intended to kill him this time. Otherwise, thatst sword strike would have pierced his heart," Hui exined, noticing the confused expressions on his subordinates'' faces. "¨­noki is different from Ishigawa. He is the grandson of the First Tsuchikage and the inheritor of the Second Tsuchikage¡¯s Dust Release. He holds immense influence in Iwagakure and is almost certain to be the next Tsuchikage. He is far too important to Iwagakure. If I were to kill him here, there¡¯s a 90% chance that Iwagakure would dere war on Konoha. "Although Konoha does not fear war, starting a conflict over someone like ¨­noki is not worth it. Besides, if Iwagakure were to dere war, who knows if the other viges would join in? ¡°Konoha has only had peace for five years. We are in a period of rapid development, and I don¡¯t want to see Konoha dragged back into the vortex of war." After hearing this, the Anbu members finally understood, nodding in agreement. It was true¡ªplunging Konoha into war over ¨­noki, especially during this crucial time of growth, would be a massive loss for them. "Let¡¯s move on and continue with our mission." "Yes, Captain!" they replied in unison, their voices filled with respect. Witnessing Hui defeat ¨­noki had left them in awe, and their admiration for his long-term vision only deepened. Although Hui was just over eleven years old, it didn¡¯t stop him from being a leader they respected wholeheartedly. On the other side, as ¨­noki realized that Hui wasn¡¯t pursuing him, he breathed a sigh of relief. He forced his body to keep flying, even though pain continuously wracked him. The sword still embedded in his body was something he didn¡¯t dare pull out¡ªdoing so would surely kill him. This battle had ended in a devastating loss for him. He didn¡¯t want to think about it any longer, just hoping to find a safe ce tond. Spotting Iwagakure¡¯s Anbu rushing towards the battlefield below, ¨­noki felt a sense of relief. His body rxed, and he began to fall from the sky. His injuries were far too severe, and the flight had used up nearly all his remaining chakra. He was on the verge of death¡ªif he didn¡¯t get treatment soon, he would likely perish. The Iwagakure Anbu below noticed ¨­noki¡¯s falling form, their expressions changing dramatically. One of them quickly leaped into the air, catching ¨­noki¡¯s body and bringing him safely to the ground. "Commander?!" Seeing the sword lodged in ¨­noki and feeling the wet blood staining their hands, the Anbu member''s face turned pale. But he received no response, as ¨­noki had already passed out. "Quick, get the medics!" ... When ¨­noki finally woke up three dayster, it was from a nightmare. He jolted awake, drenched in sweat. "Ghost!!!" The memory of Hui piercing his heart with a sword in the dream left him gritting his teeth in anger, but there was a hint of fear in his eyes. It had been over a decade since ¨­noki hadst felt such terror. He hadn¡¯t been this close to death in a long, long time. Thest time he felt this way was when he faced that man from Konoha¡ªUchiha Madara! This time, he had entered the Anbu battlefield full of rage and confidence, determined to kill Hui and avenge Ishigawa. But after a one-on-one confrontation, he had been utterly crushed, nearly losing his life. From start to finish, Hui hadpletely overwhelmed him. And now, as his thoughts cleared, ¨­noki realized the reason he was still alive¡ªit was because Hui had chosen not to kill him. After all, that sword could have pierced his heart. Hui¡¯s words after ¨­noki fell made it clear. If it weren¡¯t for the desire to avoid war, ¨­noki would already be dead. This realization left a deep psychological impact on ¨­noki, casting a shadow over his mind. While ¨­noki was dealing with this mental blow, Hui had already moved on to the Land of Mushrooms, beginning another mission¡ªone filled with even more bloodshed. Though Hui¡¯s heart rejected these kinds of missions, he carried them out with unwaveringmitment. If Konoha were to avoid being stabbed in the back in the next great war, which would inevitably happen, these smaller rebelling viges had to be wiped out. As far as Hui was concerned, every life had value, and all lives were equal. However, in his heart, the lives of Konoha¡¯s people were more important. Therefore, those other lives had to be sacrificed. Perhaps out of a sense of guilt orpassion, Hui always made his kills quick and clean, ending lives in a single strike before they even realized what was happening. It was the only kindness he could offer these innocents. Along the way, Hui also encountered Anbu from Kumogakure, but they were no match for him and were easily wiped out. This was the battlefield of the Anbu. When it came to enemies from other viges, Hui showed no mercy. Of course, he also knew how not to push things too far, avoiding actions that could spark a full-scale war between the viges. Still, Hui¡¯s return to the Anbu battlefield quickly became known throughout the ninja world, reaching the ears of all the major hidden viges. The name "Konoha¡¯s Ghost" resounded once more, as Hui walked in the shadows, continuously iming the lives of Anbu from other viges. As for the battle between Hui and ¨­noki, it remainedrgely under wraps. Iwagakure felt too ashamed of the oue and saw no reason to publicize it. Why reveal Hui¡¯s true strength? It was better to let other viges sh with him. On Konoha¡¯s side, Hui wasn¡¯t one to brag. After all, it was just the not-in-his-prime ¨­noki¡ªwhat was there to talk about? If he had defeated the Second Tsuchikage, now, that would be worth bragging about. Time marched on. Hui continued to shine on the Anbu battlefield, cutting down any opposition in his path. The name "Konoha¡¯s Ghost" echoed throughout the ninja world¡ªan unstoppable force in the dark. join my patreon for 70+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 90 Chapter 90 Puchi!!! As Hui plunged his sword into the enemy''s heart, he withdrew the de without a flicker of emotion on his face. After months of constant bloodshed, he had grown even more ustomed to it. "Captain, all targets have been neutralized," Hatake Sakumo reported as he leapt to Hui''s side. His voice had changed¡ªit was now t and cold. It wasn¡¯t that his rtionship with Hui had soured, but rather that months of operating in the shadows, surrounded by death, had darkened his heart. It wasn¡¯t just Hatake Sakumo. All the members of Hui''s First Anbu Unit had grown simrly somber, their spirits eroded by the relentless missions in the dark. Even Hui had be less talkative, fully immersed in the darkness he had once only glimpsed. This gradual descent into darkness was dangerous. "Rest and wait for the next mission," Hui ordered. After every mission, the First Unit would take a day or two to recover before diving back into the next task. Several months had passed, and Hui had turned twelve. His power hadn¡¯t increased much during this time¡ªhe had hit a bottleneck, and it would take time for the natural energy within him to fully assimte with his yuan qi. But that didn¡¯t mean there were no gains. Hisbat experience and knowledge had grown significantly, especially from shing with the Anbu of various viges. It wasn¡¯t just the Anbu either. Many smaller ninja viges, each with unique abilities, had crossed his path. These ninja, while not more powerful than elite j¨­nin, often possessed kekkei genkai abilities, offering strange and challenging encounters. On multiple asions, Hui had almost been caught off guard. But thanks to his cautious nature and deep reserve of tricks, he always managed to survive. Now, Hui had be one of the most feared figures in the hidden world of the Anbu. In just a few months, hundreds of ninja had fallen at his hands, many from the Anbu units of rival viges. Whenever Hui encountered them, death was almost always the oue. This notoriety gave even more rise to the name "Konoha¡¯s Ghost," a title that sent chills through the Anbu of every major vige. His reputation had grown so fearsome that Iwagakure¡¯s leadership had issued an order: any Anbu member who encountered Hui was allowed to abandon their mission without punishment. This was the highest form of acknowledgement, as missions in the ninja world were of the utmost priority. It wasn¡¯t just Iwagakure. The Anbu from the other three great viges also wished for a simr order. They dreaded the idea of encountering Hui, the Konoha''s Ghost¡ªa grim reaper of the night. After months of observation and battles, the other viges had learned much about Hui¡¯s abilities. They knew that he was a versatile ninja, excelling in every field. His aplishments since entering the Anbu battlefield were staggering. Statistics showed that no one who had faced the Konoha''s Ghost during a mission had everpleted their objective. Less than ten percent of those who crossed his path managed to escape with their lives. The remaining ny percent met their end. Hui¡¯s list of in enemies was extensive and illustrious. Starting with the former Iwagakure Anbumander, Ishigawa, he went on to kill numerous deputymanders and team leaders from other viges. By rough estimates, Hui had at least killed two Kage-level opponents, seven or eight elite j¨­nin, and over fifty j¨­nin in just a few months. The number of elite and regr ch¨±nin he had in was even higher. If these fallen ninja had survived and banded together, they would have formed a powerful army. Yet, they had all been killed by one person¡ªHui¡ªwithin a few short months. These terrifying achievements solidified Hui''s reputation as Konoha''s Ghost. "Captain, how much longer will we have to live like this?" Hatake Sakumo asked one night, as the moon hung high and the cool breeze whispered through the trees. The two sat on the branches of arge tree overlooking a cliff. Hui stared up at the moon, lost in thought. Below, Lightning leaned against the trunk, resting with his eyes closed. "It¡¯ll end soon," Hui replied. "The small nations capable of posing a threat to the great viges have almost all been wiped out. The ones left are buffer zones for therger nations, so there¡¯s no need to deal with them." Hui¡¯s words provided some relief, not just to himself but to his entire unit. The dark wars waged by the Anbu were finally nearing their end. Truth be told, Hui would rather have participated in the Great Ninja Wars than endure this ongoing Cold War. In the Great Ninja Wars, the targets were enemy ninjas with justifiable skills¡ªjustifiable kills. But in this conflict, Hui had been forced to kill not only Anbu from rival viges but also ninjas from small hidden viges, and sometimes even civilians. His hands had be stained with the blood of countless innocents during these missions. Often, when he slept, his dreams were haunted by the faces of those innocent people, their eyes filled with pleading and despair. At times, this torment nearly drove Hui to the brink of copse. Whenever he woke in a cold sweat from these nightmares, Hui found himself questioning the meaning of his existence. What was the point of him being in this world? In the beginning, his goal was simply to be strong, to fear nothing. Then, it evolved into protecting the few people he cared about. Eventually, he dedicated himself to protecting Konoha. This evolution marked a kind of growth in his spirit. But if protecting what he loved required the sacrifice of countless innocent lives, wasn¡¯t that too brutal, too cold? Life is meant to be equal for everyone, and no one should have the right to take it away so easily. Thus, Hui was left to wonder about the meaning behind his actions, as his heart became mired in doubt. "Finally, it¡¯sing to an end," Hatake Sakumo said with a sigh, his whole body seeming to rx. "Yes," Hui muttered, gazing at the distant moon, his thoughts drifting back to Konoha. Was Tsunade looking at the moon, too? "Hey, Hui, when did you start stargazing so much? And I¡¯ve noticed you¡¯ve been staying upte a lottely. Don¡¯t you get tired?" Lightning suddenly appeared beside Hui, crouching on the branch and peering down at him. "Staying upte... maybe because I''m afraid of falling asleep at night," Hui answered with a wry smile. He truly had be the Konoha''s Ghost. "I guess I''m scared that when I wake up the next day, it won¡¯t be the sun greeting me, but a disaster." join my patreon for 70+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 91 Chapter 91 Hui eventually fell asleep, and when he awoke the next day, it was the rising sun that greeted him, not an unexpected disaster. ¡°Captain, we¡¯ve received a mission from the vige,¡± a member of the Anbu reported, approaching Hui. This was the liaison between the First Unit and Konoha, using a bird summons formunication. Hui unfolded the slip of paper with the mission details and paused when he saw only four words written on it. His expression softened, and a smile curved his lips. Turning to his subordinates, who were all watching him closely, Hui spoke. ¡°The mission is over. We can go back to the vige.¡± His words left everyone stunned for a moment, but then their faces, hidLightning beneath their masks, lit up with joy. ¡°The mission is over¡­¡± ¡°Back to the vige¡­¡± ¡°We¡¯re finally going home!¡± ¡°Great! The mission is over!¡± In an outburst of excitement, one of the Anbu couldn¡¯t contain themselves and shouted out loud. ¡°We¡¯re going home, back to the vige!¡± ¡°Hahaha, the mission is finally done!¡± ¡°One year¡ªthis mission has finallye to an end!¡± The Anbu members, who had be somber and cold over the course of the bloodshed, suddenly felt the warmth of joy, as though sunlight had pierced through the darkness in their hearts. For nearly a year, they had been away from Konoha, constantly surrounded by killing and death. Now, the thought of returning home lifted their spirits. ¡°It¡¯s been a long time. We should go home,¡± Lightning said, feeling a sense of longing. He came from a n and had many family members and friends in the vige. After such a long absence, he had missed them dearly. ¡°Yes, you should go back and continue your blind dates, settle down, and start a family. How wonderful that would be,¡± Hui teased Lightning with a mischievous grin. Lightning: (¨‹¥Ø¨‹#) That damned brat!!! Amidst the joyfulughter, the long and bloody Cold War finally came to an end. Spanning a full year, this war had affected the entire ninja world, drastically altering its power dynamics. ording to iplete reports, over fifty small nations and HidLightningviges were wiped out, thirty ninja ns were annihted, and more than 100,000 innocent civilians perished. The number of small nations left in the ninja world had dwindled to fewer than twenty. This war reshaped the politicalndscape of the ninja world, bringing it closer to the form it would take decadester. The five great nations expanded their territories and eliminated potential threats. However, the cost was steep. The Anbu forces of all five great viges suffered severe losses. By the end of the war, thebined death toll of the Anbu units across all five viges had reached over 1,500. Had these viges not been continually replenishing their Anbu ranks, the entire initial deployment of Anbu would have been wiped out. This war had led to a significant turnover within each vige¡¯s Anbu forces. Over half of those who had first entered the battlefield were now dead. Even in Hui¡¯s First Unit, the loss had been substantial. The First Unit had started with forty-one members, including the unit leader. By the time Hui tookmand, there were only thirty-two left, including himself. Now, at the end of the war, only twenty members remained, meaning more than half of the original team had died, never to return from the smaller hidLightningviges where they had fallen. Throughout Konoha¡¯s Anbu forces, more than 260 members had perished in this war. It was a brutal and bloody conflict, with a higher death rate than even the Great Ninja Wars. Yet, in every war, heroes emerge¡ªthose who stand out, zing brightly, bing legends. Iwagakure¡¯s hero, ¨­noki, with his Dust Release, had crushed countless opponents, earning a fearsome reputation. Many skilled ninjas had been disintegrated into atoms by his jutsu. ¨­noki¡¯s name became one that struck fear into the hearts of the Anbu from other viges, as they hoped never to face him. But even ¨­noki couldn¡¯t outshine Mochizuki Hui. This battlefield had been Hui¡¯s stage, where no one could stop him from performing. His path of invincibility began with the killing of Iwagakure¡¯s Anbumander, Ishigawa, and from there, it was an unstoppable march. By now, Hui¡¯s name was known across the entire ninja world. The titles "Light of Konoha" and "Konoha¡¯s Ghost" were enough to make countless Anbu tremble in fear at the mere mention of his name. However, Hui¡¯s fame was mostly confined to the shadows, discussed among the high-ranking officials and elite ninjas of the major viges. Given that the Cold War was conducted in secrecy, the events that transpired were hidLightningfrom public knowledge. Even though it was well known that the five great nations had yed a role in the upheaval, as long as the great viges didn¡¯t acknowledge it, it was as if it hadn¡¯t happened. As for Hui, who had openly revealed his name, he was officially seen as merely carrying out his standard missions, unconnected to the destabilization of the smaller nations. Regardless, everything was now over. The politicalndscape of the ninja world had been set, and the likelihood of another ninja war breaking out in the near future was slim. A long period of peace awaited the ninja world. After receiving news that the war was over, Hui and his team couldn¡¯t wait to return to Konoha. They hurried back, eager to finally go home. Three dayster, they arrived in Konoha. There was no grand ceremony to wee them back. After all, they were Anbu, people of the shadows, invisible to the light. Just as they had silently left Konoha to fight in the shadows, risking their lives countless times to protect the vige, they returned just as quietly. There was no glory or fanfare for them. They simply returned to their dusty homes, as though they had never left at all. For many of them, the only trace of their departure was the knowledge that some of theirrades would never return. When Hui returned, he went straight to the Senju n and headed for Tsunade¡¯s home. The moment he saw her, he pulled her into a tight embrace, resting his head against her hair as he whispered softly: ¡°I¡¯m home.¡± ¡­ The year was Konoha Year 22, and it was the darkest year for the smaller nations in the ninja world. Dozens of small countries were annihted, and countless ninja ns were wiped out. This year also set the stage for the geopoliticalndscape that would shape the ninja world for decades toe. And in this year, the twelve-year-old Mochizuki Hui emerged from the shadows, forging a legendary name for himself. To the Anbu of the four other great nations, he was the Reaper¡ªthe Ghost, whom they feared so much they were permitted to abandon their missions if they encountered him. join my patreon for 70+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 92 Chapter 92 The once quiet and sparsely popted Anbu base was now bustling with activity. Many Anbu ninjas were moving about, busy with various tasks. Although the Cold War had ended, it didn¡¯t mean that the Anbu could now rxpletely. There was still much work to be done, though none of it was as dangerous as before. Most of these tasks involved rying information, patrolling, and protecting important figures. Mochizuki Hui had returned to the Anbu as well, and this was his fourth day back in Konoha. He had rested for the first three days, and now it was time for him to resume his duties. As a division captain, he was responsible for ten squads, all awaiting his task assignments. Unlike others, Hui was in a position to issue such orders himself; typically, the Second Hokage directly assigned tasks to the Anbu. "Anbu, assemble." Suddenly, amand rang out, halting the Anbu in their tracks. They quickly gathered in the base¡¯s hall. Unlike the previous full assembly, this time, only about a hundred Anbu remained. Once everyone was in position, the Anbu Commander appeared on the tform, his gaze sweeping over the crowd before he began to speak. "Today, I have two announcements to make. First, due to a directive from the Hokage, the Anbu¡¯s personnel will be reduced. The Anbu will revert to a size of seventy members. This means that half of the current members will be leaving the Anbu. ¡°Second, Captain Mochizuki Hui of the First Division, for his outstanding performance and significant contributions during the recent operations, has been promoted by the Second Hokage to the position of Deputy Commander of the Anbu, effective immediately." His words sent a ripple of shock through the gathered Anbu, but no one voiced any objections. As members of the Anbu, their duty was simply to follow orders without question. The reasons behind orders, or whether they were right or wrong, were not theirs to consider. Their only task was to execute these orders. Besides, the reasons for these two orders were clear to everyone. The first directive was a consequence of the end of the Cold War; Konoha no longer needed such arge Anbu force, and it was better to allow more members to return to the light. As for the second announcement, no one would challenge Hui¡¯s promotion despite his young age. His strength, mindset, and wisdom had earned the respect and approval of every Anbu member. To them, Hui¡¯s promotion to Deputy Commander felt natural. Many felt joy and pride for him, celebrating his achievements in their hearts. Hui himself had long anticipated this. He had known for some time that he would eventually be Deputy Commander, and one day, Commander. It was only a matter of time, and it seemed that time hade sooner than expected. At just twelve years old, Mochizuki Hui was now Deputy Commander of Konoha¡¯s Anbu. He had officially entered the ranks of Konoha¡¯s upper leadership, gaining the right to have a say in the vige¡¯s future development and decisions. At twelve, he had be a member of Konoha¡¯s high council. As the sun set, thest golLightningrays illuminated the training grounds of Konoha, casting long shadows from the three figures standing there. "So much has changed over the years... I almost don¡¯t recognize this ce anymore," Lightning said, his eyes scanning the surroundings with a distant look, lost in nostalgia. "Yeah, I remember six years ago when we first formed the Fourth Squad here. Back then, you and I had quite the ¡®friendly¡¯ introduction," Hui replied, a faint smile appearing on his face as old memories resurfaced. "Ha, you brat, you¡¯ll never let me live it down, will you?" Lightning chuckled and shook his head, looking up at the setting sun. "I miss those days... back when Captain Bear and Wind were still around, and you were just an adorable little kid." Hui rolled his eyes at that, responding, "Back then, you were full of energy¡ªnothing like the moody single guy you¡¯ve now be." Lightning blinked, and then his face darkened as a vein twitched in his forehead. "You brat! Don¡¯t call me a single dog!!!" he shouted at Hui, his rage growing when he noticed Sakumo Hatake holding backughter nearby. "Alright, alright, enough with the jokes," Hui said, calming down hisughter before his expression turned serious. He looked at Lightning earnestly. "Lightning, it¡¯s time for you to leave the Anbu." Hui¡¯s words made Sakumo raise his head in surprise, and he opened his mouth as if to say something, but when he saw Lightning¡¯s silent reaction, he began to understand. No wonder Lightning had invited Hui to this ce. It seemed Lightning had already decided to leave the Anbu. "Lightning, you¡¯re not young anymore. You have family, and parents, and staying in the Anbu just isn¡¯t right for you anymore. Plus, staying in the darkness for too long isn¡¯t good for anyone. People should live in the light," Hui said, ncing at the fading sun on the horizon. Deep down, he too longed to return to the light. Despite how much sess he had found in the Anbu, being hailed as the "Konoha¡¯s Ghost" by other viges and promoted to Deputy Commander of Konoha¡¯s Anbu, Hui would dly give it all up if he could. The Anbu might sound morous, but in reality, once inside, you realize there¡¯s little warmth¡ªonly coldness and brutality. It was a unit that walked solely in darkness. "Yeah, people should return to the light eventually," Lightning sighed, his feelings conflicted. On one hand, he wanted to return to a normal life in the light, but on the other, he wanted to stay by Hui¡¯s side to witness his continued growth. "So, Lightning, go back," Hui said firmly, almost like an order. "Alright, then I¡¯ll wait for you in there," Lightning replied with a smile. A weight seemed to lift from his heart, and though the sun had set, plunging the world into twilight, Lightning felt a sunrise within himself¡ªone that brought warmth and hope. "And you, Sakumo, what are your ns?" Hui asked with a smile, turning to Sakumo Hatake. Sakumo hesitated for a moment before responding in a yful tone; "Well, since you¡¯ve be the Deputy Commander, and Lightning¡¯s leaving, I guess that makes me the next Captain of the First Division¡¯s Fourth Squad, right? With you as Deputy Commander here, I¡¯ll have all the backing I need to do as I please!" His words brought smiles to both Hui and Lightning. "Ah, so you¡¯ve been eyeing the Captain position all along! As expected, the Fourth Squad is full of sneaky brats!" Lightning teased, pretending to be angry as he raised his fist, only for Sakumo to quickly dodge behind Hui. "Deputy Commander, help! Someone¡¯s trying to hit your subordinate!" Sakumo cried. Hui, ying along, shouted, "Who? Who dares? I¡¯ll drag them to a hundred matchmaking sessions!" "YOU BRAT!!!" Lightning yelled, his voice echoing across the training ground. That night, Den, the former Captain of the First Division¡¯s Fourth Squad, known by the codename "Lightning," officially retired from the Anbu, leaving the darkness to return to the light. join my patreon for 70+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL[ Chapter 93 Chapter 93 Lightning had finally left the Anbu, returning to the light. With his departure, the once-formidable Konoha Anbu First Division''s Fourth Squad had dwindled to just one member¡ªMochizuki Hui. Not only Lightning but many of the other familiar faces from the Anbu had also left, returning to their lives as regr shinobi. By the next day, the Anbu¡¯s ranks had been reduced to just seventy members. Sakumo Hatake, however, did not leave. He had be the new captain of the Fourth Squad, determined to stay by Hui¡¯s side and witness how this brilliant light would guide Konoha forward. As for Hui, after being promoted to Deputy Commander of the Anbu, his life wasn¡¯t filled with the expected bustle or social obligations. It seemed as though no one even acknowledged that the Anbu had a new Deputy Commander. But that was impossible. The Deputy Commander of the Anbu was part of Konoha''s upper echelon, and such a significant personnel change was undoubtedly known by the various high-ranking ninja ns and vige leaders. So, the reason why no one bothered Hui? There was only one exnation: the Second Hokage, Tobirama Senju, had shielded him from everything. Hui couldn¡¯t help but feel grateful. Having a Hokage as a mentor and protector certainly made lifefortable. It was precisely because of thisfort that Hui resolved to ensure that Tobirama wouldn''t perish during the peace talks with Kumogakure. At first, Hui had believed Tobirama would die during the First Great Ninja War and assumed it would happen when Hui was about six or seven. But when the war ended without anything significant happening like peace talks with Kumogakure, Hui realized that the timeline here followed a different path. This means that about twenty years after the First Shinobi World War, assuming hui¡¯s estimations were correct, (around the thirty-seventh year of Konoha), Kumagakure wouldunch an attack on Konoha, resulting in Senju Tobirama leading an elite ninja force to defeat them, after which the Raikage would requested peace talks with Konoha. However, during the peace talks, a coup by Kinkaku and Ginkaku would lead to the deaths of the Raikage and Senju Tobirama. This would subsequently trigger the Second Shinobi World War. If this timeline were correct, Tobirama would die when Hui is twenty-seven years old. This gave Hui plenty of time to act. Even at his current age of twelve, Hui was confident he could change Tobirama¡¯s fate. By seventeen, with his Qi fully assimted with natural energy, not only would he be able to save Tobirama, but he could potentially alter the course of the entire war. And by twenty-seven, who knew how powerful he might be? Perhaps he would already be strong enough to dominate the entire ninja world. With that in mind, the worry that had lingered in Hui''s heart for so long finally eased. Now, he felt like there was nothing to do but wait. Time would bring him everything he needed. ¡°An invincible, yet lonely life,¡± Hui mused to himself with a smirk as he headed toward the training grounds to find Sarutobi¡¯s team. With the drastic reduction in Anbu personnel and no pressing missions due to the newfound peace in the ninja world, Hui found himself with an abundance of free time. After all, he was only the Deputy Commander, not the Commander, so he didn¡¯t have too many responsibilities. When Hui arrived at the training grounds where Sarutobi Hiruzen and his students often trained, he immediately saw Hiruzen instructing Jiraiya, while Orochimaru and Tsunade trained independently. This was typical of the Sarutobi squad. Jiraiya was the only one who needed direct guidance, as Orochimaru and Tsunade were both far more naturally gifted. Orochimaru had an uncanny ability to learn techniques quickly, while Tsunade was focused on mastering superhuman strength and medical ninjutsu, skills that required little guidance from Hiruzen. On the other hand, Jiraiya, though he had matured somewhat after the incident with Danzo, still had a carefree nature that made disciplined training difficult for him. ¡°Hey, Sarutobi-sensei, Jiraiya, Orochimaru, how are you all?¡± Hui greeted them with a wave, immediately drawing their attention. When they saw Hui, their faces lit up. Tsunade rushed over, practically throwing herself at him, clinging to him tightly. ¡°Hui! Congrattions on bing the youngest Deputy Commander in the history of Konoha¡¯s Anbu!¡± Sarutobi said, his tone filled with awe and admiration. As the leader of Konoha''s elite Jonin squad and a prominent figure in the vige¡¯s leadership, Sarutobi had been one of the first to hear about Hui¡¯s promotion. ¡°Haha, it''s nothing, really. It¡¯s all thanks to Tobirama-sama¡¯s support. I still have a long way to go,¡± Hui responded humbly. ¡°Don¡¯t be so modest. Apart from your age, you''re already as close to perfection as it gets. I wouldn¡¯t be surprised if your strength has already surpassed mine,¡± Sarutobi continued, still marveling at Hui¡¯s rapid rise. To him, Hui¡¯s aplishments were nothing short of miraculous. At just twelve years old, Hui had in two Kage-level opponents during the Cold War, along with numerous elite Jonin and regr Jonin. Such feats were almost unbelievable. If Hui weren¡¯t someone Sarutobi knew personally, he would have never believed it. ¡°No, no, my strength is nowhere near yours, Sarutobi-sensei. I still have much to learn from the leader of Konoha¡¯s Jonin,¡± Hui replied, maintaining his humility. Though he wasn¡¯tpletely lying, as Sarutobi was in his prime and undoubtedly a force to be reckoned with, Hui wasn¡¯t entirely sure who would win in a direct confrontation. Of course, Hui didn¡¯t think he¡¯d lose either. ¡°Oh please, Hui¡¯s strength can¡¯t bepared to Sensei¡¯s. At most, he¡¯s only slightly stronger than me!¡± Jiraiya grumbled under his breath, clearly annoyed by the praise Hui was receiving. ¡°Just slightly stronger than you? Jiraiya, you sure have high hopes for yourself!¡± Hui thought with a chuckle, though outwardly, he said, ¡°Yes, yes, I¡¯m just a tiny bit stronger than you, Jiraiya. Our gap is only a fraction.¡± Sarutobi smiled wryly at their exchange. Jiraiya, as a Chunin, had no idea how powerful Hui really was. Hui was a ninja whose very name, the ¡°Konoha¡¯s Ghost,¡± sent shivers down the spines of other vige¡¯s Anbu. In fact, the Anbu of other viges were allowed to abandon missions without penalty if they encountered Hui. Watching Jiraiya¡¯s ignorance, Sarutobi suddenly had an idea. Though Jiraiya had matured, he stillcked consistent motivation. His drive was unstable because he hadn¡¯t fully grasped just how vast the gap was between him and true powerhouses. But if Hui, someone Jiraiya¡¯s age, could demonstrate that gap, maybe it would give Jiraiya the push he needed. With that in mind, Sarutobi smiled and spoke up, ¡°Jiraiya, haven¡¯t you always said you wanted to surpass Hui? Why don¡¯t the two of you spar right now, so you can see how much further you have to go?¡± join my patreon for 70+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 94 Chapter 94 Upon hearing Sarutobi Hiruzen''s suggestion, Jiraiya¡¯s eyes lit up with excitement. "Alright, alright! I¡¯ve been wanting to see just how strong this ''favourite student'' of Sensei''s really is!" Mochizuki Hui had long since be the ¡°golden child¡± of Konoha. Many children in the vige grew up under the pressure of Hui¡¯s brilliance, and Jiraiya was one of the most affected, especially due to Sarutobi constantly praising Hui. Now, finally having a chance to spar with Hui, Jiraiya was overjoyed. If he couldnd a good hit on Hui¡­ "This¡­ is this really okay?" Hui nced at the excited Jiraiya and pretended to be reluctant. "There¡¯s nothing wrong with it! It¡¯s decided¡ªHui and Jiraiya will have a lively training match!" Sarutobi waved his hand, sealing the deal. "Alright then, but let¡¯s make sure we just go through the motions," Hui said, feigning reluctance before agreeing. "Hui, give Jiraiya a good beating so he knows his ce!" Tsunade chimed in eagerly. Even Orochimaru¡¯s eyes sparkled with curiosity, eager to witness the gap between them and Hui. With that, Sarutobi, Tsunade, and Orochimaru moved aside, leaving Jiraiya and Hui in the center of the training field. "Come on, Hui! I¡¯ll show you just how strong I¡¯ve be!" Jiraiya dered as he rushed toward Hui, gripping a kunai. Sarutobi could only facepalm. Jiraiya boasting about showing Hui his strength? It wasughable. Watching Jiraiya charge, Hui¡¯s lips curved into a slight smile. To Hui, Jiraiya¡¯s speed was akin to a slow-motion film, even without activating his divine "Heaven¡¯s Eye" ability. With a simple sidestep, Hui easily dodged Jiraiya¡¯s attack and grabbed his wrist. With a slight flick of his arm, Jiraiya was sent flying across the field. "What incredible strength!" Jiraiya thought as he tried to regain his bnce mid-air,nding awkwardly on the ground. Quickly forming hand seals, Jiraiya unleashed a fireball from his mouth. However, the moment he began his hand seals, Hui could have easily ended the fight right then and there, but he chose not to. Instead, Hui mirrored Jiraiya¡¯s hand seals, casting the same jutsu. But though they performed the same jutsu, the difference in power was staggering. Jiraiya¡¯s fireball was a mere two meters in diameter, while Hui¡¯s was a massive six-meter fireball that swallowed Jiraiya¡¯s attack effortlessly. Eyes wide with shock, Jiraiya scrambled to retreat, barely dodging the iing mes. He reached the edge of the training field just as the fireball dissipated. Before he could catch his breath, Jiraiya suddenly felt the ground beneath his feet shift. The next thing he knew, he was buried up to his neck in the dirt, his head sticking outically. "Ah, this feels familiar. Didn¡¯t someone else get buried by Sarutobi-sensei in this exact spot six years ago?" Tsunade crouched down next to Jiraiya¡¯s head, teasing him. Jiraiya''s face darkened. "Damn it!!!" "You¡¯re too weak, Jiraiya. Compared to Hui, you¡¯re nothing." Orochimaru chimed in, causing even more lines of frustration to form on Jiraiya¡¯s face. "I just got caught off guard! Let me out, and we¡¯ll go at it again!" Jiraiya shouted at Hui. Hui raised an eyebrow, then smiled mischievously. "Alright," he said, pulling Jiraiya from the ground. What followed was a merciless barrage from Hui. In terms of taijutsu, Huinded each punch with pinpoint precision. When it came to ninjutsu, even when casting the same jutsu, Hui¡¯s versions were five to six times more powerful than Jiraiya¡¯s. As for genjutsu? Jiraiya couldn¡¯t even begin topare¡ªhe was utterly overwhelmed. No matter what Jiraiya did, Hui responded with techniques that were vastly more powerful. Eventually, even Orochimaru joined the fray, but he fared no better. Despite his immense talent, Orochimaru was still only twelve, with the strength of an elite Chunin to Jonin level. Jonin-ss enemies were nothing new to Hui¡ªhe had already killed too many to count. To Hui, Orochimaru and Jiraiya simply couldn¡¯t bridge the gap in power between them. "The difference is too vast, Jiraiya, Orochimaru. You¡¯re still far from reaching Hui¡¯s level." Sarutobi sighed, shaking his head. Watching the fight, he could tell that Hui hadn¡¯t even been serious. His strikes carried no killing intent, and Sarutobi knew that Hui¡¯s true strengthy in his lethality. As an Anbu operative, Hui¡¯sbat prowess was honed for killing. "Dammit!" Jiraiya gasped, exhausted and utterly defeated. "Yes, the gap is enormous," Orochimaru admitted, looking disheveled but not nearly as shaken as Jiraiya. He wasn¡¯t as easily discouraged because Orochimaru had always known that Hui was far beyond them. "Honestly, you¡¯re both already very impressive," Hui said, offering some encouragement. "Especially you, Orochimaru. To have such strength at your age¡ªthere are very few like you in the vige, or even the whole ninja world. Your foundation is solid, and once you build on it, your power will skyrocket." "And as for you, Jiraiya¡­ well, maybe we should talk about something else," Hui added teasingly, clearly picking up on Sarutobi¡¯s intention to motivate his student. Jiraiya clenched his fists, unable to refute the words. "Hahaha! Jiraiya is actually doing well," Sarutobi said, ying the peacemaker. "He just hasn¡¯t reached his full potential yet. Let¡¯s trust that he¡¯ll get there with enough hard work." Jiraiya''s face softened a bit at the praise. "Well, Sarutobi-sensei, you keep working with Jiraiya. I¡¯m going to train with Tsunade on her strength techniques," Hui said, shrugging before leaving with Tsunade. As a true prodigy, Hui hadn¡¯t spent much time training in superhuman strength techniques. But seeing how dedicated Tsunade was, he figured it was time to put in some effort and help her improve. After Hui and Tsunade left, Sarutobi decided not to continue training with Jiraiya and Orochimaru that day. They were both too drained, and it was clear they needed time to recover. Besides, the psychological blow they had just suffered needed to be processed. That had been the point of the sparring session, after all. Sarutobi could only hope that Jiraiya woulde to understand and not let him and Hui''s efforts go to waste. join my patreon for 70+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 95 Chapter 95 The scorching sun hung high in the sky, making people irritable. If someone had just been utterly defeated moments earlier, that irritation only worsened. Jiraiya was in exactly that mood¡ªfrustrated and restless. He couldn''t find a way to vent his frustration, so it just festered inside him. ¡°Damn it, the gap between Hui and me is only growing wider,¡± he muttered, feeling ufortable. ¡°I need to find a way to get stronger!¡± he said, desperately thinking of a method to bridge the widening gap. But no matter how much he thought, he couldn''te up with anything substantial. Hui was simply too strong, and this recent sparring match made Jiraiya feelpletely overwhelmed. Before, he had always heard Sarutobi-sensei speak highly of Hui, but the actual extent of Hui''s strength was always a bit abstract to him. There had never been a clearparison or demonstration. This time, however, Jiraiya felt the gap firsthand. It was like an insurmountable chasm between them. And it wasn¡¯t just Hui. In that battle, Jiraiya also realized how powerful Orochimaru had be. Even though they had been teammates and hadpleted many missions together, most of those missionscked any real danger, so Jiraiya hadn¡¯t truly felt how strong Orochimaru had be. Not to mention Tsunade. Jiraiya had experienced her monstrous strength firsthand, and it terrified him. As a result, Jiraiya was the only one in the Sarutobi team whose power had fallen far behind the others. In other words, if they ever faced a real crisis, he might once again be the "burden." This was something Jiraiya simply could not ept. He didn¡¯t want to feel helpless and desperate again, like he did in the past. ¡°Wait, maybe I can use that technique!¡± Suddenly, Jiraiya¡¯s eyes lit up, and he jumped to his feet, filled with excitement. ¡°Although Sarutobi-sensei said I need to form a contract with another creature to use it, it shouldn¡¯t be a problem. Maybe I¡¯ll be able to summon a powerful toad! If that happens, my strength will soar, and even if I can¡¯t surpass Hui, I can at least catch up to Orochimaru.¡± Talking to himself, Jiraiya quickly formed hand seals. ¡°Boar, Dog, Bird, Monkey, Ram! Summoning Jutsu!¡± ¡°Jiraiya, stop!!¡± Sarutobi Hiruzen¡¯s panicked voice rang out. He had originally nned tofort Jiraiya and reignite his determination, but instead, he saw Jiraiya recklessly performing the Summoning Jutsu! This was bad. The Summoning Jutsu required a contract with a creature to work properly. Who knew what could happen without one? But it was toote. As Jiraiyapleted the hand seals, a powerful force grabbed hold of him, pulling him into another dimension. All that was left behind was his fading scream. Sarutobi stared at the spot where Jiraiya had disappeared, his heart pounding with anxiety. Meanwhile, Jiraiya, who had been sucked into the other dimension, felt as if the world around him was spinning. The next moment, he found himself high up in the sky, rapidly falling. Luckily, he wasn¡¯t too high up, and with his reflexes, he managed tond safely. ¡°That was close! What is this ce? Whoa, that¡¯s a giant toad¡­ and a huge snake!!¡± Jiraiya barely had time to catch his breath before his attention was drawn to the massive creatures in front of him¡ªa huge toad and an enormous snake were facing off. Without thinking, Jiraiya rushed over, grabbed the snake¡¯s tail, and flung it aside with all his might. ¡°Phew, that was scary!¡± Jiraiya sighed in relief, though he wasn¡¯t quite sure why he had a sudden distaste for snakes. ¡°Human child.¡± A voice suddenly spoke from behind Jiraiya, startling him. ¡°Who¡¯s there? Who¡¯s talking?¡± He spun around but saw no one, just the giant toad staring at him. ¡°The toad¡­ the toad can talk?!¡± Jiraiya eximed, staring at therge, reddish-brown toad, who was none other than Gamabunta. ¡°You¡¯re just a puny human, yet you somehow made it to Mount Myoboku!¡± Gamabunta replied, equally surprised but not entirely shocked. He had been expecting this. ¡°What do you mean by that?¡± Jiraiya asked, sensing there was something deeper behind the toad¡¯s words. It was almost as if they had been expecting him. ¡°Follow me,¡± Gamabunta said, not offering any further exnation just yet. Though confused, Jiraiya obediently followed Gamabunta, taking in the strange and foreign surroundings as they walked. Everything here seemed familiar yet different¡ªtrees, mushrooms, grass, and even insects were all gigantic. Jiraiya couldn¡¯t tell if he had shrunk or if he was in and of giants. The air here felt particrly fresh, and he found himself feeling strangely at ease. Even his breathing seemed smoother. As they walked, Jiraiya also noticed numerous stone statues, most of them resembling toads, all frozen in meditative poses as if practicing some kind of jutsu. Everything in this ce was so new and fascinating to Jiraiya that he couldn¡¯t help but get lost in the wonder of it all. After a while, Gamabunta brought Jiraiya to a massive toad statue, from which a strange liquid flowed out of its mouth. To be honest, it looked a bit disgusting. Perched on top of the stone toad was an old green toad with white hair and eyebrows. The elderly toad wore a robe and looked remarkably like a human elder. ¡°Great Lord Fukasaku, here is the human child,¡± Gamabunta said, addressing the elder toad with deep respect. Fukasaku nced at Jiraiya and nodded. ¡°So, he has finally arrived.¡± Jiraiya, still bewildered, spoke up, ¡°It¡¯s almost like you knew I wasing.¡± ¡°Yes, we knew,¡± Fukasaku replied with certainty. ¡°It was foretold by the Great Toad Sage.¡± Apparently, the arrival of Jiraiya had long been predicted by the Great Toad Sage, Gamamaru. In one of his dreams, he had seen a vision and spoken these words: ¡°One day, a human child will find his way to Mount Myoboku. When that timees, impart to him the power of the sages and the prophecy. That is the dream I had for myself¡ªa prophecy.¡± Since no human had formed a contract with Mount Myoboku for a long time, and even longer since anyone had stumbled upon it by ident, when Jiraiya appeared, they immediately knew he was the child of prophecy. There was no doubt about it. join my patreon for 70+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 96 Chapter 96 "You being able to arrive at Mount Myoboku is proof that you have been chosen as the child of destiny!" Fukasaku dered firmly. Jiraiya was stunned, his mouth agape in disbelief. He asked, "So, what is the prophecy you have for me?" Fukasaku shook his head and replied, "I don¡¯t know. But you can train here while waiting for the Great Sage¡¯s prophecy." Jiraiya blinked, a bit confused, but then a smile slowly spread across his face. A chosen one, huh? Training here and getting stronger... that actually sounds pretty good! ¡­ Back in Konoha, Sarutobi Hiruzen wore a troubled expression, filled with guilt. If it weren¡¯t for him pushing Jiraiya, none of this would have happened. Now, Jiraiya had vanished, and he had no way to even begin searching for him. He felt utterly helpless. "Don¡¯t worry, Sarutobi-sensei, Jiraiya has always been lucky. I¡¯m sure he¡¯lle back safe this time as well," Huiforted him, though he couldn¡¯t shake his own concern. He wasn¡¯t entirely sure if, due to his own presence in this world, Jiraiya would still end up at Mount Myoboku. If not... "Yes, Sarutobi-sensei, Jiraiya may seem reckless, but he¡¯ll be fine," Tsunade added, trying to reassure him. "It¡¯s all my fault," Sarutobi sighed heavily. "I shouldn¡¯t have taught him the Summoning Jutsu without a proper contract in ce." Hui wasn¡¯t sure what to say. In truth, he also felt a bit guilty. He knew that something like this might happen, but he hadn¡¯t warned anyone in advance. However, Hui had been conflicted. If he had told Jiraiya about it, would Jiraiya have continued beingzy for the rest of his life? After all, Jiraiya¡¯s pivotal moment was when he arrived at Mount Myoboku! "How about this," Hui suggested after thinking for a moment. "If Jiraiya doesn¡¯t return within three days, I¡¯ll start searching the locations where summoning creatures live. We¡¯ll find him eventually." In reality, they wouldn¡¯t have to wait long. If Jiraiya truly went to Mount Myoboku and things unfolded like in the original story, he would soon return to Konoha after forming a contract with the toads. "No, this was my mistake," Sarutobi Hiruzen said decisively. "If anyone¡¯s going to search for him, it should be me." But by the afternoon, Jiraiya had returned on his own. Everyone breathed a collective sigh of relief, thankful that nothing had gone wrong. Before Jiraiya could even brag about his experience, Sarutobi gave him a stern scolding. Hui, pretending to be angry as well, watched as Jiraiya squirmed with guilt. After the scolding subsided, Sarutobi finally asked Jiraiya what had happened. Jiraiya, now excited, eagerly began to recount his adventure, embellishing every detail. He bragged about how amazing and powerful Mount Myoboku was, even iming that the legendary Sage of Six Paths had trained in its techniques. He dered that Mount Myoboku was the greatest of the three summoning realms. Jiraiya also portrayed himself as a "child of prophecy," destined to be the strongest shinobi and the future hero of the ninja world. His exaggerated storytelling earned him skeptical looks from everyone else. Hui and the others exchanged nces, silently agreeing that they didn¡¯t believe a word of it. "Come on, everything I said is true!" Jiraiya shouted, his frustration clear as a ck line formed on his forehead. "Alright, alright, we believe you," Hui replied quickly, attempting to cate him. However, the half-hearted assurance only deepened Jiraiya¡¯s frustration. "Ugh! Damn it!" he shouted, but his outburst only earned him moreughter from the group. Regardless, Jiraiya¡¯s life had finally "gotten back on track." He was now set on the path that would one day make him one of the great legends of the ninja world. In the following days, everything started to return to normal. Konoha and the entire ninja world entered a period of calm development. Hui resumed his duties as the rtively idle vice-captain of the Anbu, spending most of his time training with Tsunade. Jiraiya continued to travel between Mount Myoboku and Konoha, steadily improving his abilities. Orochimaru, on the other hand, seemed more mysterious by the day, constantly learning new techniques with a determination to master every jutsu. At this point, Orochimaru hadn¡¯t yet strayed down the dark path he would one day follow. The key events that would shape his future had yet to ur. Specifically, two major tragedies¡ªhis parents¡¯ deaths and, even more critically, the death of Tsunade¡¯s younger brother, Nawaki¡ªhad not yet happened. [tl/n: I think there was a mention of his parents dying in the first war?] These events would make Orochimaru painfully aware of the fragility of life, pushing him toward forbidden research in a desperate attempt to conquer death. Nawaki¡¯s death in particr had a profound effect. Even after Orochimaru had grown powerful, he couldn¡¯t prevent Nawaki¡¯s death, which urred right under his nose. This was something Orochimaru found difficult to ept. Unable to cope with the frailty of human life and the inevitability of death, Orochimaru changed. He grew cold and callous, obsessed with the idea of immortality and transcending human limitations. Hui knew all of this and had no intention of letting Orochimaru walk that path. He nned to alter Orochimaru¡¯s fate, allowing him to shine in a role more fitting of his brilliance. But for now, there was no need to rush. Hui was subtly influencing Orochimaru, nting seeds of different ideas without drastically altering his course. At this moment, Orochimaru wasn¡¯t yet someone in need of intervention. Time passed peacefully, and before long, three years had gone by. During these three years, Konoha had developed rapidly, and the vige was constantly changing. In this time, several significant individuals who would shape the future of the ninja world were born. Among them were Minato Namikaze, Choza Akimichi, Shikaku Nara, and Inoichi Yamanaka... There were also Uzumaki Nagato and Uzumaki Kushina... This was the 25th year since the founding of Konoha, and Hui was now fifteen years old. One day, he suddenly received a new mission¡ªone that involved a small country known as the Land of Whirlpools. The rulers of thisnd were the Uzumaki n. Though the Land of Whirlpools had survived thest great conflict, it now seemed to be facing new trouble. When Hui saw the details of the mission, his eyes gleamed. If his memory served him correctly, the Land of Whirlpools would be destroyed around this time. This mission would likely lead him to witness yet another bloodbath, perhaps even involving several famous shinobi. Undoubtedly, it would be a mission drenched in blood and filled with death. join my patreon for 70+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 97 Chapter 97 This time, the Land of Whirlpools was facing serious trouble, with signs of activity from various Anbu teams from other viges within its borders. This situation had raised rms in the Land of Whirlpools, and it had also caught the attention of Tobirama Senju. Although the Land of Whirlpools hadn¡¯t officially requested Konoha¡¯s help, the Second Hokage was concerned and decided to send Hui to investigate. However, Hui already had a good idea of what might be causing the trouble. In fact, the trouble in the Land of Whirlpools was most likely rted to the tailed beasts. Yes, the tailed beasts! Since ancient times, the ninja world had known of the nine tailed beasts, each an incredibly fearsome existence. How terrifying were they? Terrifying enough to make people tremble just at the mention of their names, terrifying enough to quiet a crying child! Each tailed beast represented one of the pinnacle forces in the ninja world. And yet, these nine ferocious beings were captured by Uchiha Madara and Senju Hashirama¡­ After that, they were sealed away by Konoha¡­ Then, they were even distributed to other viges¡­ They became weapons of war for the great nations¡­ This oue might have been unfortunate for the tailed beasts, but it didn¡¯t diminish their importance. Once sealed, tailed beasts became formidable weapons. The human vessels who contained them were called jinch¨±riki. Konoha kept the Nine-Tails for itself, so its jinch¨±riki was known as the Nine-Tails Jinch¨±riki. The current Nine-Tails Jinch¨±riki was none other than Uzumaki Mito, the wife of the God of Shinobi, Senju Hashirama, and the grandmother of Tsunade. She was also a princess of the Land of Whirlpools. But Uzumaki Mito was now quite old and likely wouldn¡¯t be able to contain the Nine-Tails much longer. This had be an issue over the past couple of years. Konoha needed to find a sessor for the position of Nine-Tails Jinch¨±riki, or else when the seal on the Nine-Tails broke, without Senju Hashirama or Uchiha Madara around, the Nine-Tails would be incredibly difficult to deal with. And the best candidates for containing the Nine-Tails woulde from the Uzumaki n, found in the Land of Whirlpools. Thus, the Land of Whirlpools was extremely important to Konoha. If Hui recalled correctly, the Land of Whirlpools would be destroyed around this time. Afterward, the surviving members of the Uzumaki n would split into two groups. One group would scatter across the ninja world, living in secrecy¡ªlike Nagato¡¯s parents. The other group would remain on the inds of the Land of Whirlpools, living through constant strife and hardship¡ªlike Uzumaki Kushina, who waster brought to Konoha due to her special nature. As for the Land of Whirlpools itself, it was located on a small ind off the eastern coast of the Land of Fire, surrounded by the sea. Being so close to the Land of Fire, it maintained a close rtionship with Konoha. The Uzumaki n, which ruled the Land of Whirlpools, was a powerful n dating back to the Warring States Period, famed for their expertise in sealing techniques, which were unrivaled in the ninja world. The Uzumaki n lived on the maind of the Land of Whirlpools, in a vige known as Uzushiogakure. Like the Senju and Uchiha ns, they were descendants of the Sage of Six Paths, inheriting the Sage¡¯s powerful life force. The Uzumaki n was known for theirrge chakra reserves and unique physiques, which made them the perfect jinch¨±riki. They were also the creators of various sealing techniques, including those that could suppress tailed beasts. After Hashirama and Madara established Konoha, the Warring States Period ended, and the Uzumaki n founded the Land of Whirlpools, flourishing in their ancestralnd. Thanks to their favorable location and strong rtionship with Konoha, they thrived, bing a prosperous nation at peace with the world. However, the original Naruto story barely touched on the destruction of the Land of Whirlpools. No exact date or culprits were mentioned. All that was said was that the nation was destroyed because of its powerful sealing techniques. As Hui pondered the situation, he began to analyze the likely causes. Before the Second Shinobi War, many of the war factions in the ninja world sought to expand their territories by force to secure national interests. This led to the development of powerful jutsu and the training of elite ninjas in preparation for war. The tailed beasts, as weaponsparable to nuclear bombs, naturally became a key part of these preparations, leading to the creation of jinch¨±riki. However, to create a jinch¨±riki, two conditions were necessary: First, powerful sealing techniques were needed to seal the tailed beast inside a human host. Second, a suitable host with the right physical traits was required to contain the beast. From this, one can deduce a likely scenario: the Land of Whirlpools was destroyed because other nations coveted the Uzumaki n¡¯s sealing techniques, which were crucial for creating jinch¨±riki. The Uzumaki n, after all, was unrivaled in the art of sealing. Throughout history, members of the Uzumaki n had been chosen to serve as jinch¨±riki. Furthermore, the Land of Whirlpools was rich and prosperous, making it an attractive target for nations seeking war resources. As for why Konoha didn¡¯te to their aid? There were two possibilities: First, Konoha may have been unable to help due to being embroiled in its own conflicts. Second, Konoha may not have had enough time to respond. The first possibility seemed unlikely, given that the Land of Whirlpools was destroyed between the First and Second Shinobi Wars, a period of rtive peace for Konoha. That left the second possibility: the attack on Uzushiogakure had been a coordinated effort by several nations, who struck suddenly and swiftly before either the Uzumaki n or Konoha could react. By the time Konoha realized what was happening, it was already toote. The forces involved in the attack must have been many, and they must have been powerful. In Hui¡¯s mind, this destruction of the Land of Whirlpools and the downfall of the Uzumaki n were the result of a carefully nned robbery¡ªa brutal act of murder and theft by the various nations as they prepared for war. When Hui and his team finally arrived in Uzushiogakure, they were greeted by a bustling and prosperous scene. Buildings stood tall and crowded together, and the streets were packed with people going about their day, shoulder to shoulder. The ce was filled with life and energy, making it hard not to admire the peaceful, thriving atmosphere. Walking through the lively streets, Hui couldn¡¯t help but marvel at the development of the Land of Whirlpools. The vige had truly prospered. Had the Uzumaki n chosen to adopt the ninja vige system like the great nations, Uzushiogakure could have grown into the sixth great hidden vige within a decade or two. But as Hui looked up at the sky, a feeling of unease settled in his chest. Something was wrong. There was an oppressive force in the air, something he couldn¡¯t quite ce. It wasn¡¯t just a barrier¡ªit was a sealing barrier. This barrier wasn¡¯t just for defense. It had offensive capabilities as well. It was this very barrier that had saved the Land of Whirlpools during thest Cold War. With such a powerful barrier, it was no wonder that the ninja of Uzushiogakure seemed so carefree,pletely unaware of any looming danger. However, Hui knew better. Beneath this peaceful surface, there were dark forces at work. After thest Cold War, three years of stability had lulled the Land of Whirlpools and the Uzumaki n into a false sense of security, making them forget the brutal reality of the ninja world. The Land of Whirlpools had be a juicy target for many nations¡ªa piece of fattened prey, ready to be devoured. join my patreon for 70+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 98 Chapter 98 "Lord Hui, please follow me," a curious yet respectful voice rang out. It belonged to a red-haired girl in herte teens, her voice clear and ethereal. The girl was Uzumaki Mina, daughter of the current leader of the Uzumaki n, and thus a princess of the n. She was leading Hui to the Uzumaki n leader''s office for a meeting. Hui had not attempted to conceal his arrival when he led his subordinates to Uzushiogakure. After all, the rtionship between Konoha and Uzushiogakure was solid, and Hui''s mission was to assist the Uzumaki n with their current troubles. There was no need for secrecy in this case. In fact, given the strong alliance between Konoha and Uzushiogakure, even though Uzushiogakure had imposed strict restrictions on entry due to the recent disturbances, Hui¡¯s status as the Vice Captain of Konoha¡¯s Anbu made him an exception. While other viges'' Anbu were still struggling to find ways to breach Uzushiogakure''s defensive barrier, Hui had already entered the vige and was now about to meet with its leader. The current leader of Uzushiogakure was Uzumaki Suihei, the younger brother of Uzumaki Mito. Despite his age, he still carried himself with energy and authority. Upon Hui¡¯s arrival, Uzumaki Suihei greeted him warmly. "So, you are Vice Captain Hui? Indeed, a prodigious talent. Both my sister and Lord Tobirama have spoken highly of you." Hui responded humbly, "They are too kind." While speaking, he quietly observed the man before him. Despite Suihei¡¯s friendly demeanor, Hui sensed that this man was no ordinary figure. In fact, he could tell that Uzumaki Suihei was immensely powerful. Being a member of the Uzumaki n, with his strong and pure bloodline, Suihei¡¯s chakra reserves were easily three to four times greater than those of an average Kage-level ninja. His bodynguage and movement suggested formidable skill in taijutsu. As for ninjutsu, while Hui hadn¡¯t seen it firsthand, anyone who could rise to the position of Uzushiogakure¡¯s leader surely possessed powerful jutsu. However, these abilities weren¡¯t what truly caught Hui¡¯s attention. What made him wary was the dangerous aura that emanated from Uzumaki Suihei¡ªa presence that set off all of Hui¡¯s finely tuned instincts. Over the past few years, as Hui¡¯s mastery over natural energy deepened, his intuition and perception had sharpened considerably. This feeling of danger was a sign Hui had learned to trust, and he suspected it was linked to Suihei''s expertise in advanced sealing techniques¡ªa skill the Uzumaki n was renowned for. Truth be told, Hui had always been envious of sealing techniques. Throughout the entire "Naruto" storyline, sealing jutsu had proven to be an indispensable force. The potential of sealing techniques seemed limitless, whether it was restraining the most powerful beings like the nine tailed beasts or even the Ten-Tails, or sealing away someone as indestructible as Kaguya Otsutsuki. Sealing techniques, without a doubt, were a force to be reckoned with. Moreover, Hui had a particr idea in mind¡ªone that required mastery over sealing techniques. Breaking the small talk, Uzumaki Suihei shifted to the matter at hand. "Lately, we¡¯ve encountered numerous unidentified ninjas within the borders of the Land of Whirlpools. I assume you must have encountered them on your way here. Do you have any insight into their identities?" Hui nodded before speaking, "Indeed, we encountered several groups of unknown ninjas. Judging from their behavior and methods, it¡¯s highly likely that they are Anbu operatives. Furthermore, it appears they aren¡¯t from just one vige, but from several." Suihei¡¯s pupils contracted upon hearing this. He had suspected the presence of Anbu but had assumed they were from a single vige. The revtion that multiple viges were involved brought to mind memories of the Cold War three years ago¡ªa dark time for all small nations and viges. He nced at Hui, the refined young man who had risen to prominence during that very war. Hui¡¯s title, "Konoha¡¯s Ghost," had be synonymous with power and death, spreading across the entire ninja world. "So many Anbu from different viges converging on the Land of Whirlpools¡­ What could their purpose be?" Suihei furrowed his brows, deep in thought, unable to grasp why hisnd had be the focus of so many foreign powers. As the leader of Uzushiogakure and a native, Suihei found it difficult to see the broader picture, unlike Hui, who had a more objective view. Still, even though Hui had a good idea of why these Anbu were in the Land of Whirlpools, he decided not to reveal his suspicions just yet. He needed evidence, and more importantly, he needed time to set his ns in motion. Tobirama¡¯s directive had been simple: investigate the situation in the Land of Whirlpools. But Hui had grander ambitions. He wanted to do more than just gather information; he had a much bolder goal in mind. He wanted to see if it was possible to¡­ take control of the Land of Whirlpools! As mentioned in the original story, the Uzumaki n''s immense strength in sealing techniques had made them a target for the other nations, ultimately leading to their destruction. Hui, too, recognized the fearsome power of these sealing techniques. Sealing techniques were dangerous because they werergely unknown. Hui himself had little knowledge of them, which only fueled his desire to learn more. And the best ce to study the most authentic, most powerful sealing techniques? Uzushiogakure. In the original story, Konoha had gained many of the Uzumaki n¡¯s sealing techniques thanks to Uzumaki Kushina, who taught them to Minato Namikaze. Some may also havee from Uzumaki Mito. However, there was no doubt that Uzushiogakure still held the most extensive and powerful collection of sealing techniques. Hui wanted to acquire these techniques. However, this would be no easy task. As an outsider, gaining ess to all of Uzushiogakure¡¯s secrets was nearly impossible¡ªunless he became one of them, at least partially. There was another way: wait for Uzushiogakure to fall, then collect all of its secrets without restriction. But Hui had no intention of allowing the Uzumaki n to be destroyed. In fact, he hoped to bring the entire n into Konoha. Therefore, careful nning was necessary. Hui needed to maneuver strategically if he was going to achieve his aims this time. join my patreon for 70+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 99 Chapter 99 While Hui was meeting with Uzumaki Suihei, the news of his arrival in the Land of Whirlpools quickly spread. The various Anbu squads operating in the country swiftly ryed this information back to their respective viges. Many higher-ups in different viges were taken aback. The name "Konoha''s Ghost," which had been dormant for three years, had reappeared¡ªand in the very ce where they were plotting their next move: the Land of Whirlpools. Thisplicated things. When vige leaders received the news, their first reaction was concern. Hui wasn¡¯t just known for his terrifying strength; his strategic mind was equally formidable. Three years ago, during the Cold War, he had single-handedly tipped the scales in Konoha''s favor. "It looks like we''ll need to send reinforcements," many concluded, realizing that the forces they had already deployed wouldn''t be enough to handle the Konoha''s Ghost. While the decision-makers behind the scenes scrambled, the Anbu agents already in the Land of Whirlpools were the ones most immediately affected. Many of them had been involved in the Cold War and knew Hui¡¯s capabilities firsthand. "I can''t believe the Konoha''s Ghost himself has shown up," one middle-aged ninja said grimly as he and his squad rested in a forest. His expression was dark, and there was a hint of fear in his eyes, as if recalling a memory that chilled him. "Captain, is the Konoha''s Ghost really that strong?" a younger ninja in his twenties asked, unable to hide his curiosity. Ever since he joined the Anbu, he had noticed how the mention of the Konoha''s Ghost made veteran members uneasy. The captain nced at the young ninja, his voice tinged with the weight of experience. "Strong? He''s like a real ghost. You don''t hear himing, and before you know it, he''s there, taking your life." A cold shiver ran through him as he spoke, clearly recalling events that still haunted him. "Do you know why I became a squad captain?" Without waiting for an answer, he continued, "It¡¯s because I was one of the few who managed to escape from Hui during the Cold War. We were part of a group of several squads, and we scattered to run. By sheer luck, Hui chased the others, and I survived. After that, I was promoted, and now, three yearster, I¡¯m a captain." The captain¡¯s story left the young ninja speechless, his mouth slightly agape in disbelief. "This... it sounds unbelievable. How can one person be so powerful?" Another younger ninja chimed in, equally shocked by the revtion. "Well," the captain said with a grim chuckle, "during thest Cold War, nearly sixteen hundred Anbu were killed. Over a hundred and fifty of those deaths were at Hui¡¯s hands. That¡¯s almost ten percent of the total casualties. And we¡¯re not just talking about ordinary ninjas¡ªhe killed two Kage-level shinobi, along with seven or eight elite j¨­nin, and over fifty j¨­nin." His body trembled slightly as he recounted the statistics. When the viges received the reports, everyone had been left in shock, chilled by the sheer number of deaths caused by the Konoha''s Ghost. "That¡¯s why our vige, Iwagakure, created the rule: if you encounter the Konoha''s Ghost during a mission, you¡¯re allowed to abandon the task without punishment. Do you know why, despite the recent personnel cuts, there are still so many openings in our Anbu? It¡¯s because many of the older members refuse to face the Konoha''s Ghost again." The captain sighed, his words weighing heavily on the younger ninjas. As a veteran of Iwagakure¡¯s Anbu, he fully understood the terror of encountering Hui. The mass exodus of older Anbu members following the war had created openings for many newer recruits, but they hadn¡¯t experienced the fear firsthand. Listening to the captain¡¯s story, the younger ninjas were left speechless, a deep chill settling in. They had heard bits and pieces of the legend surrounding the Konoha''s Ghost, but they had never imagined the details would be this terrifying. "I just hope we can make it through this mission alive," the captain said with a somber tone. Although he had escaped Hui once before, he had no desire to face him again. If it were possible, he¡¯d rather return to Iwagakure immediately¡ªor even quit the Anbu altogether. His words sent another wave of unease through the younger ninjas, making them feel a cold sweat trickling down their spines. And it wasn¡¯t just the Iwagakure Anbu who were anxious. Other viges¡¯ Anbu agents were simrly unnerved by the news of Hui¡¯s arrival. Many of the veterans began recounting the stories of the Konoha''s Ghost to the newer members, exining the formidable foe they now faced. For those new to the Anbu, hearing the legends of the Konoha''s Ghost left them feeling deeply unsettled. Some even started to regret epting the mission. However, not everyone was intimidated. Among the newer members, a few felt their spirits ignite. They hadn¡¯t personally experienced Hui¡¯s power, so theycked the instinctual fear that the veterans had. To them, Hui was a powerful ninja, but not an invincible one. After all, no matter how strong a shinobi was, they weren¡¯t invincible. In the ninja world, strength wasn¡¯t always the deciding factor. A well-timed technique or an unexpected strategy could turn the tide in any battle, even allowing a weaker shinobi to defeat a much stronger one. Many of these eager new Anbu had special abilities¡ªunique jutsu or bloodline limits¡ªthat had allowed them to triumph against stronger opponents in the past. Why couldn¡¯t they be the ones to defeat the Konoha''s Ghost? If they seeded, the fame and recognition they would earn would be boundless. Thus, the Anbu agents in the Land of Whirlpools became divided into two groups: those who feared an encounter with the Konoha''s Ghost and hoped to avoid him at all costs, and those who yearned to face him, driven by the desire to im victory and make their mark on history. join my patreon for 70+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 100 Chapter 100 As Hui strolled through the streets of Uzushio Vige, he observed his surroundings with curiosity. Apanying him was Uzumaki Mina, the Uzumaki n princess. The meeting with Uzumaki Suihei had ended, and now Uzushio and the Konoha Anbu were working together to identify which viges the Anbu operatives in the Land of Whirlpools were from and what their true objectives were. There was no need for Hui to personally handle such matters, so he left it to his subordinates. Feeling a bit bored, Hui decided to explore Uzushio Vige. As for why Uzumaki Mina, the n''s princess, was his guide, it was partly due to Hui''s status, and partly because Mina herself was quite intrigued by him. "Would you like to try this ce, Hui-kun? They serve excellent chicken here," Mina suggested with a smile, noticing Hui''s gaze linger on a small restaurant. Her eyes sparkled with curiosity as she nced at the young man beside her, who was two or three years yunger than her. Though Hui appeared harmless, Mina knew of him well. It wasn¡¯t just that Hui had earned a fearsome reputation across the ninja world, known as the Konoha''s Ghost. Mina had also heard about him through her correspondence with Uzumaki Mito, her aunt. Mito often praised Hui, further piquing Mina¡¯s interest. She had been curious about him for some time now. "Sure, let¡¯s give it a try," Hui agreed, deciding to see if the chicken was as good as advertised. If it was, he thought, he could bring Tsunade here sometime¡ªafter all, she loved chicken. They exchanged casual conversation as they entered the small restaurant. After ordering a dish of chicken, Hui found the vor to be quite good¡ªdefinitely worth rmending to Tsunade. "Hui-kun, it¡¯s impressive that someone so young has already made such a name for himself in the ninja world," Mina said suddenly, ncing at Hui after they had finished eating. She found it hard to reconcile the seemingly gentle boy before her with the legendary Konoha''s Ghost who had terrified so many. "Not at all, there¡¯s still much for me to learn," Hui replied modestly. "I wonder¡­ could I see a demonstration of your strength? I''m just really curious. If you''re notfortable with it, please forget I asked," Mina said, hesitating as she voiced her request. She had long been curious about Hui''s abilities and wanted to witness firsthand the power that had struck fear into the hearts of so many. Hui paused, then smiled. "Of course, I don¡¯t mind. In fact, I¡¯ve been wanting to see Uzumaki n¡¯s sealing techniques for quite some time." He agreed readily. He had been looking for an opportunity to observe the Uzumaki n¡¯s famous sealing techniques, and now Mina had provided him with the perfect chance. "Great! Please, follow me to the training ground," Mina said, leading the way. The Uzumaki n¡¯s training grounds were simr to those in Konoha. However, the area seemed rather quiet, with no one else present when Hui and Mina arrived. "Shall we begin?" Hui asked, standing in the center of the training ground and inviting Mina to make the first move. Mina didn¡¯t hesitate. After all, she was facing a Kage-level shinobi and couldn¡¯t afford to hold back. Swiftly forming hand seals, she sent several wind des flying toward Hui. It was a wind release jutsu, not a sealing technique. Though the Uzumaki n specialized in sealing, it didn¡¯t mean that all their members only used seals. Seeing the iing wind des, Hui casually responded with his own wind release jutsu, sending stronger wind des to counter hers. His des quickly shattered Mina¡¯s, continuing forward toward her. Mina deftly evaded the attack, moving swiftly as she closed the distance between them. It seemed she intended to engage in closebat. Truth be told, closebat wasn¡¯t always favorable for female shinobi, as they often had a physical disadvantagepared to their male counterparts. Hui, at just fifteen, was already taller and more physically imposing than seventeen-year-old Mina. Not to mention, Hui¡¯s body had been thoroughly enhanced, with strength, speed, and reflexes that far surpassed ordinary humans. As soon as they shed, Mina immediately felt the terrifying power behind Hui¡¯s movements. Her expression changed, realizing she couldn¡¯t afford to waste time in a prolonged fight. She quickly activated her true specialty. It was a sealing technique. As she leapt back, Mina formed a series of rapid hand seals, and Hui suddenly felt a strange force locking his body in ce. ncing down, he noticed sealing marks had appeared on the ground beneath him. He hadn¡¯t seen how the seals were ced, but the force was weak. With a simple exertion of strength, Hui broke free of the binding, shattering Mina¡¯s seal. "Interesting!" Hui¡¯s eyes lit up. Even though he had broken free with ease, the seal itself intrigued him. Mina was shocked. Her binding seal, though not incredibly powerful, should have been enough to restrain most j¨­nin for at least a few seconds. Yet Hui had shaken it off instantly, further proving his overwhelming strength. "What¡¯s this seal called?" Hui asked, clearly fascinated. "It¡¯s called the Binding Seal. It restricts the movement of anyone caught within its range," Mina exined, before forming more hand seals tounch another jutsu. Hui responded in kind, casting his own jutsu. However, the ninjutsu was merely a distraction. Mina¡¯s true aim was to use the opportunity to prepare her next sealing technique. Hui sensed what she was doing but chose not to interfere. He was more than happy for Mina to continue using sealing techniques against him¡ªafter all, that was exactly what he wanted to observe. However, it seemed that her seals required specific conditions to be used, as she wasn¡¯t casting them freely. After their ninjutsu shed, Mina rushed forward again, aiming a punch at Hui. But just as her fist was about to make contact, she switched to an open palm, grabbing hold of Hui¡¯s arm. As soon as her hand made contact, sealing marks rapidly spread from her palm, covering Hui¡¯s entire arm in moments. He felt a strange force sealing the chakra in his arm, preventing him from channeling it. However, Hui¡¯s physical strength was exceptional. With a quick shake of his arm, he dislodged Mina¡¯s grip, breaking free of the seal. He raised his arm and could feel the odd energy from the seal weakening, and it would soon dissipatepletely. join my patreon for 70+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 101 Chapter 101 The strange energy in Hui¡¯s arm was preventing him from controlling his chakra, but with a mere thought, he activated the light energy within his body and swiftly expelled the foreign force from his arm. "Sealing techniques are indeed fascinating," Hui remarked as he looked at Uzumaki Mina. Though her sealing technique hadn¡¯t been effective against him, the principles behind it intrigued him greatly. Mina, however, smiled wryly. "Sealing techniques may seem remarkable, but they¡¯re extremely difficult to learn. It¡¯s much easier to focus on ninjutsu," she said, her toneced with frustration. Hui paused, contemting her words. It seemed that the Uzumaki princess didn¡¯t hold sealing techniques in high regard, which was somewhat surprising to him. "Your strength is truly impressive, Hui-kun. No wonder you¡¯ve earned such a reputation at such a young age," Mina continued, clearly impressed by the brief exchange they¡¯d just had. "It¡¯s mostly a matter of opportunity," Hui replied modestly. He noticed that Mina didn¡¯t seem inclined to continue fighting, and though he was slightly disappointed, he understood her reasons. The more powerful sealing techniques, like the Dead Demon Consuming Seal or the Four Symbols Seal, required a significant price to perform, and in a spar like this, there was no need for her to go to such lengths. "I¡¯ve never been to Konoha. Hui-kun, could you tell me more about the vige?" Mina asked, her curiosity evident. She had spent her whole life on the ind of the Land of Whirlpools and had never ventured outside, leaving her quite eager to learn about the world beyond. "Of course. Konoha is..." Hui began, and the two continued their conversation, casually discussing life in the vige as they wandered through Uzushio. Days passed in much the same way. Hui spent his time leisurely exploring Uzushio Vige, eating good food, enjoying thepany of a beautiful guide, and rxing¡ªan enviable life. But while Hui enjoyed his downtime, his subordinates were far from idle. In a dense forest, a battle had just ended. "Captain, these ninja aren¡¯t talking. We couldn¡¯t extract any valuable information from them," a ck-haired youth reported to another man with white hair. Both appeared to be in their twenties. The ck-haired youth looked ordinary, while the white-haired one had strikingly handsome features. "Yeah, I figured. Finish them off here," Hatake Sakumo¡ªalso known as Konoha¡¯s White Fang¡ªreplied calmly, his mind drifting to the mission Hui had assigned him before departing. Hui had tasked him with investigating the origins of these mysterious ninjas and uncovering their purpose in the Land of Whirlpools. If necessary, Hui had given Sakumo permission to eliminate them. After several encounters over the past few days, Sakumo had pieced together a reasonable theory about these mysterious figures. Although there was no concrete proof, it was clear that these individuals were from the Anbu. Their movements and behavior were perfectly aligned with typical Anbu operating procedures, though they still seemed somewhat inexperienced. "The three different groups we¡¯ve encountered so far don¡¯t seem to be from the same vige. What could all these Anbu be after in the Land of Whirlpools?" Sakumo pondered aloud, forming some hypotheses but not daring to draw any conclusions just yet. However, his years of experience in the Anbu had taught him one thing¡ªsomething big was about to happen in Uzushio. "Keep looking for these mysterious ninjas. If we can¡¯t get any useful information, we¡¯ll just eliminate them all!" Sakumo¡¯s voice was cold. At twenty-one, he had already reached the level of an elite j¨­nin, and one of the best at that, so he was confident in his abilities. He didn¡¯t know what these Anbu were nning, but one thing was certain¡ªwhatever mission they were on, it wouldn¡¯t matter if they were all dead. Without the manpower toplete the mission, it would be as good as failed. Sakumo¡¯s ruthless approach was shaped by his years of experience in the Anbu, particrly the bloody and brutal war he had participated in three years ago. The memories of those battles had hardened him, making him one of the most feared operatives in the Anbu. The name "Konoha¡¯s White Fang" had already be legendary within the Anbu ranks, and it wouldn¡¯t be long before his fame spread across the entire shinobi world. "Yes, Captain!" The ck-haired youth responded with respect, fully trusting Sakumo¡¯s judgment. Though the ck-haired ninja was strong¡ªa bona fide Tokubetsu J¨­nin¡ªhe wasn¡¯t a squad captain. The reason he wasn¡¯t a leader was simple: he was part of the legendary First Division, Fourth Squad¡ªthe same squad that had once been led by none other than Hui himself. Getting into this squad was no easy feat, but those who did were guaranteed bright futures. Many prominent Konoha ns, including the Uchiha and Hy¨±ga, had tried to ce their own shinobi in the Fourth Squad, but they had all failed. Entry required the approval of both Sakumo, the squad captain, and Hui, the Anbu¡¯s vice-captain. In the end, Hui had personally selected three Tokubetsu J¨­nin to join the squad, creating one of the strongest Anbu teams, consisting of an elite j¨­nin and three highly skilled Tokubetsu J¨­nin. With Sakumo¡¯s decision made, the bloodshed began. No longer focusing on interrogation, Sakumo¡¯s squad shifted to a more direct approach: eliminate all Anbu operatives they encountered. This was the power Hui had entrusted to Sakumo¡ªthe authority to make his own decisions when the situation called for it. As the situation in the Land of Whirlpools began to take a darker turn, the rest of the shinobi world wasn¡¯t quiet either. Ninjas from various viges were silently converging on the Land of Whirlpools, each avoiding the territory of the Fire Country and Konoha. Even when these ninjas discovered each other¡¯s movements, they pretended not to notice. Everyone knew that their objectives were the same. These ninjas came from several different viges, including some figures Hui was quite familiar with¡ªsuch as ¨­noki from Iwagakure, the future Third Mizukage from Kirigakure, Chiyo and the future Third Kazekage from Sunagakure, and A, the future Third Raikage from Kumogakure. These were all powerful shinobi who would one day be renowned across the ninja world. And now, they were all quietly making their way toward the Land of Whirlpools. There, something destined to shake the entire shinobi world was about to unfold. And Hui, in the midst of this brewing storm, would soon solidify his ce as a legendary figure known to all in the ninja world. join my patreon for 70+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 102 Chapter 102 On this day, Hui remained in Uzushio, overseeing his ns and awaiting reports. Meanwhile, Hatake Sakumo continued leading his squad in relentless assaults. Every ninja from other viges, particrly those from Anbu, that Sakumo¡¯s sensor-nin detected were swiftly and mercilessly eliminated. The reputation of "Konoha¡¯s White Fang" was spreading further. That same day, numerous ninjas from various hidden vigesnded on the shores of the Land of Whirlpools, preparing to execute their long-nned schemes. Uzushio, however, remained as peaceful and lively as ever. Despite Uzumaki Suihei¡¯s knowledge that foreign Anbu were infiltrating the country, he seemed unconcerned, as though he had unwavering confidence in himself and the Uzumaki n''s strength. While Suihei remained calm, Hui spent the next few days refining his ns. When not strategizing, he sparred with Uzumaki Mina, extracting every possible bit of knowledge about sealing techniques from her. In exchange, he shared various ninjutsu training methods with her, although none of it was too crucial. "Your talent is truly astonishing, Hui-kun. You seem like you were born to master sealing techniques. If only you were part of the Uzumaki n!" Mina sighed, both impressed and envious as she watched Hui deftly execute the Binding Seal, a technique she had secretly exchanged with him. The trade felt uneven to Mina. She had taught Hui the C-rank Binding Seal, while in return, he had given her a B-rank Wind Release technique, Vacuum Sphere. Though she was grateful, she couldn¡¯t help but feel guilty, believing Hui had given more than he received. But Hui didn¡¯t mind at all, smiling as if it were nothing. After just a single day, Hui had fully mastered the Binding Seal, which had taken Mina much longer to learn. He not only performed the technique with incredible precision but also executed it faster and more efficiently than she ever could. It felt as though Hui was the seasoned expert, and she the beginner¡ªa realization that left Mina slightly demoralized. "Haha, really? I found the seal quite simple," Hui remarked with a chuckle, sensing Mina¡¯s feelings. "Simple? You have no idea how long it took me to learn that technique. Hui-kun, do you have some kind of special training method?" Mina asked, her eyes lighting up as she considered the possibility that Hui had a secret approach to mastering techniques so quickly. Hui paused, then, after a moment of thought, gave her a puzzled look. "Isn¡¯t it just a matter of having hands?" he replied, his tone teasing. Mina froze, her face stiffening. "Having¡­ hands?" she repeated in disbelief. Was he implying shecked hands? Noticing her expression, Hui realized he might have taken the joke too far. "Oh, wait!" he added quickly, trying to smooth things over. "It¡¯s not just about having hands..." Mina¡¯s expression softened a little, but then Hui delivered the punchline: "You also need a brain." Mina was leftpletely speechless, her face turning to stone as she processed his words. Was he saying shecked both hands and a brain? She didn¡¯t know whether tough or cry, while Hui simply grinned, clearly amused by his little prank. At that moment, an Anbu appeared beside Hui. "Vice-Captain, this is thetest report from White Fang," the ninja said, handing Hui a folded note. Hui¡¯s eyes brightened as he took the note, quickly scanning its contents. After reading it, he paused for a moment, then gave his orders. "Tell White Fang his mission isplete. Also, recall all operatives currently deployed." "Understood!" The Anbu disappeared immediately after receiving the orders. "Hui-kun, what did you find?" Mina asked curiously, noticing his serious demeanor. "We¡¯ve identified the origin of the mysterious ninjas," Hui replied. He didn¡¯t bother hiding the truth. "They¡¯re from several viges¡ªKirigakure, Sunagakure, Iwagakure, Kumogakure, Takigakure, Kusagakure¡­ a lot of them." Mina¡¯s eyes widened in shock. "So many of the hidden viges? I need to tell Father!" she eximed, grabbing Hui¡¯s hand and rushing him toward Uzumaki Suihei¡¯s office. When Suihei heard the news, his expression darkened. "So many Anbu from different viges infiltrating the Land of Whirlpools? What are they nning? Are they trying to destroy us?" he muttered, his calm demeanor slipping as worry crept in. "Why wouldn¡¯t they?" Hui said seriously. He met Suihei¡¯s gaze and continued, "If these Anbu are all here at the same time, I can¡¯t think of any reason other than to wipe out the Land of Whirlpools." Suihei¡¯s breath caught in his throat, and he frowned deeply. "But with just these Anbu, they wouldn¡¯t be able to destroy our country. The Uzumaki n is strong," he argued. "True, if it were only the Anbu, it wouldn¡¯t be enough. But what if each of these viges sent elite squads, with just thirty ninjas per squad? With that kind of force, they could destroy Uzushio," Hui exined calmly. "But there¡¯s no way a force like that could slip past Konoha without being noticed, right?" Mina chimed in, still clinging to the hope that their alliance with Konoha would protect them. "Normally, you¡¯d be right," Hui acknowledged. "But what if all these viges were working together?" Mina¡¯s face went pale at the thought. While the hidden viges were often at odds, if they had united for amon purpose¡­ "Father, we need to contact the Second Hokage and ask for help right away!" Suihei agreed, his voice urgent. Hui¡¯s words had shaken him, and he now realized that the situation was far more dangerous than he had initially thought. If they didn¡¯t act quickly, the Land of Whirlpools could indeed face destruction. join my patreon for 70+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 103 Chapter 103 ¡°Don¡¯t worry,¡± Hui reassured them calmly. ¡°I¡¯ve already arranged for a request for support to be sent. Konoha¡¯s reinforcements should be on their way soon.¡± His words brought a slight sense of relief to Suihei and Mina, though both still felt uneasy. Learning of such arge alliance against them was deeply unsettling. The sheer number of viges working together against a rtively small nation like Uzushio felt unfathomable. ¡°I still don¡¯t understand why all these viges would unite against us,¡± Suihei muttered, frowning as he turned to Hui, hoping the young strategist might offer some insight. From their earlier conversation, Suihei could tell this young ninja had sharp instincts, perhaps even sharper than his own. Hui met his gaze thoughtfully, his expression turning serious. After a moment, he replied, ¡°The tailed beasts.¡± ¡°Tailed beasts?¡± Suihei repeated, understanding only partly but sensing something significant behind Hui¡¯s statement. ¡°Yes, the tailed beasts. More urately, the technique to control them effectively through seals. Haven¡¯t you noticed? Among the hidden viges with Anbu now in Uzushio, Suna controls the One-Tail, Kumo controls the Two-Tails and Eight-Tails, Kiri has the Three-Tails and Six-Tails, Iwa holds the Four-Tails and Five-Tails, and Takigakure possesses the Seven-Tails. ¡°In other words, every vige with tailed beasts has sent their Anbu here¡ªexcept for Konoha. This suggests they¡¯re here to acquire sealing techniques that would allow them to control these powerful creatures.¡± Hui¡¯s analysis continued, ¡°It¡¯s been eight years since the viges have seen peace. There are those who are growing restless, beginning to desire conflict again. And with the tailed beasts as potential weapons, some viges may see war as inevitable.¡± Suihei hesitated, then shook his head. ¡°But the Uzumaki n doesn¡¯t even possess such a perfect sealing technique. Our control methods aren¡¯t guaranteed for every tailed beast.¡± ¡°I believe you,¡± Hui replied, nodding. ¡°But what matters isn¡¯t what¡¯s true¡ªit¡¯s what the other viges chose to believe. And perhaps they aren¡¯t just here for the tailed beast seals. They could also be targeting your other sealing techniques, as well as Uzushio¡¯s resources. ¡°Your country has be prosperous and stable, perhaps even on par with the Land of Wind. And if some factions are pushing for war, Uzushio¡¯s wealth would be a tempting first conquest.¡± Hui¡¯s exnation struck Suihei deeply, leaving him momentarily speechless before he sighed, acknowledging the truth. It was as Hui had said¡ªUzushio, affluent but without the strength of a great power, was an easy target. After a long breath, Suihei turned to the guard outside his office. ¡°Call a meeting with all the vige leaders in one hour!¡± ¡­. Meanwhile, deep within the Land of Whirlpools, in a secluded area, a secret meeting of foreign leaders was already underway. Gathered around a circr table sat a group of famous figures from the ninja world. ¡°To think we¡¯d all actually coordinate like this,¡± said ¨­noki, scanning the others at the table with a sense of irony. ¡°Even during thest Shinobi War, we all fought Konoha independently.¡± ¡°Enough small talk. Let¡¯s get to the point. Once we take Uzushio, how will we divide the spoils?¡± Ai, the Raikage-in-waiting, demanded impatiently. ¡°We each take a share of the tailed beast sealing techniques,¡± proposed the future Third Kazekage, seated across the table. ¡°After that, everything else is up to our own efforts.¡± ¡°Agreed. Each vige ims what they can by their own strength,¡± the Third Mizukage added with a nod, endorsing the Kazekage¡¯s n. ¡°Then it¡¯s settled,¡± ¨­noki agreed. He trusted his abilities to secure a fair share of the spoils. ¡°So, let¡¯s talk strategy,¡± ¨­noki continued, his tone shifting. ¡°How should we approach the attack on Uzushio?¡± ¡°We could simply advance from separate directions,¡± Ai suggested bluntly. ¡°Against a small vige like Uzushio, even half of the forces we¡¯ve gthered would be too much. They won¡¯t be able to put up much of a fight.¡± He sounded confident, given their formidable gathering: four Kage-level leaders, a dozen elite j¨­nin, and scores of additional skilled ninjas. With that much strength, even a fortified Uzushio seemed trivial. ¡°True, Uzushio itself can¡¯t stand against us. But don¡¯t forget¡ªKonoha¡¯s Anbu are already here, and with them, Konoha¡¯s infamous ¡®Konoha''s Ghost,¡¯¡± ¨­noki reminded the group, thinking back to his own encounter with Hui three years ago, his face darkening. Ai raised an eyebrow, unimpressed. ¡°So, the rumors are true¡ªyou lost to that boy, didn¡¯t you, ¨­noki?¡± ¡°Indeed, I did,¡± ¨­noki admitted without hesitation. ¡°Three years ago, he was just twelve, yet he had already reached the strength level of a Kage. Who knows how much he¡¯s improved since then? ¡°In this operation, we should all stick together. Remember what happened during thest Shinobi War. We don¡¯t want to end up like that again.¡± The others fell silent, briefly recalling the decisive role that Tobirama Senju¡¯s tactics had yed against them during thest conflict. The Kazekage frowned. ¡°Senju Tobirama¡¯s sess was due to his Space-Time Ninjutsu and his Reanimation Jutsu. I doubt the Konoha''s Ghost has mastered both.¡± ¡°True,¡± the Mizukage agreed. ¡°If Hui had mastered those techniques, Konoha would be unstoppable. The Flying Thunder God alone was nightmare to face.¡± He still remembered vividly the terror of facing Tobirama in the past and had no wish to encounter a simr foe again. ¡°Perhaps not,¡± ¨­noki conceded. ¡°But don¡¯t forget: in six years, Hui rose from a fresh genin to Kage-level. In three years since, he could have easily gained other abilities or even mastered entirely new techniques. None of us truly knows his current strength.¡± Privately, ¨­noki harbored no desire to face Hui alone. If their forces ultimately divided, he would ensure Iwagakure¡¯s troops attacked from a different angle than Hui¡¯s position. Though his pride was stung by his earlier defeat, he had no intention of underestimating Hui¡¯s strength now. join my patreon for 70+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 104 Chapter 104 ¡°Hmph, just hearing about the ¡®Konoha''s Ghost¡¯ scares you this much? Face it, ¨­noki, you¡¯re really getting old,¡± Ai scoffed. He hadn¡¯t been part of thest Anbu conflict and had never fought against, or even seen, Hui. In Ai¡¯s mind, Hui was just another powerful ninja, no different from any other. ¨­noki shrugged, unfazed by Ai¡¯s taunts. ¡°Well, if that¡¯s how you feel, I¡¯ll leave Hui to you. After all, you don¡¯t see him as a threat.¡± He was more than willing to let Ai underestimate Hui. ¡°Fine by me,¡± Ai replied swiftly. ¡°He¡¯s just a fifteen-year-old kid anyway.¡± The others exchanged nces but ultimately agreed. None were intimidated by Hui¡¯s reputation, but if someone else was willing to take on the strongest obstacle in Uzushio, none saw reason to decline. ¡°So, when do we strike?¡± asked the Third Kazekage, looking around at the group. ¡°The sooner, the better. I don¡¯t want to drag this out long enough for Konoha to send reinforcements,¡± the Third Mizukage said with a shrug. A surprise attack would only work if they took Uzushio before Konoha reacted; anything else would put them in a dangerous position. ¨­noki nodded. ¡°Then it¡¯s decided. We attack tomorrow, advancing from different directions. Other than the sealing techniques for the tailed beasts, the spoils go to whoever ims them first.¡± As the leaders finalized their n, back in Uzushio, the Uzumaki n¡¯s own leaders were urgently meeting to discuss the looming threat. Tension was high as each expressed their anger and fear. ¡°This is absurd! Are we just supposed to surrender?¡± ¡°Ridiculous! We don¡¯t even have any perfect sealing techniques for controlling tailed beasts!¡± ¡°They¡¯re only using that as an excuse. They¡¯re here for our resources!¡± ¡°But if the hidden viges are working together, how can we stand against them?¡± ¡°Perhaps we could just give them some kind of seal¡ªmake them think it¡¯s for taming tailed-beasts and let them try it themselves!¡± ¡°Are you suggesting surrender already? They haven¡¯t even attacked yet!¡± ¡°It¡¯s not surrendering; I just don¡¯t want Uzushio dragged into a full-blown war!¡± The room was filled with tension and arguments until finally, Suihei raised his voice, silencing the room. ¡°Enough! This is a strategy meeting, not a ce to air yourints!¡± His sharp tone brought everyone to a halt. After a pause, one elder finally spoke up, ¡°Then, Lord Suihei, what is your n?¡± Suihei took a deep breath. ¡°I¡¯ve already sent word to Konoha requesting assistance. If we can hold off the attack for three days, Konoha¡¯s border forces will arrive. Our goal now is to strategize how we¡¯ll defend Uzushio for those three days and minimize our losses.¡± The tension in the room eased somewhat. ¡°With our sealing techniques, three days should be manageable!¡± ¡°Yes, we can hold them off for at least three days!¡± ¡°As long as Konoha¡¯s support arrives in time, we¡¯ll be fine.¡± ¡°But not all of the Uzumaki live in Uzushio; most are scattered across the country!¡± another voice spoke up, more urgently. ¡°True¡ªthe protective barrier is only in Uzushio. If we concentrate our defenses here, what will happen to those outside the vige?¡± Suihei sighed, ¡°I¡¯ve already ordered all Uzumaki across the nation to gather here, but I can¡¯t guarantee they¡¯ll arrive in time.¡± Sending Uzumaki scattered across the country to return quickly was his only solution, but he knew it might not be enough. ¡°I suppose it¡¯s all we can do for now.¡± ¡°Curse the greed of those four great hidden viges. If not for their endless greed, we wouldn¡¯t be facing this!¡± The group exchanged grim nces. Although no one said it, many had already resigned themselves to the loss of n members who were too far to reach safety. Hui, seated quietly in the corner, watched as they debated. Despite his status as Konoha¡¯s Deputy Anbu Commander, he hadn¡¯t attended many critical meetings¡ªespecially not one that could decide the fate of an entire vige. He had thought the Uzumaki leaders would do everything in their power to save their n members, but it seemed reality was moreplex. The meeting soon ended, and the leaders departed to prepare for the possible siege. Hui stayed in ce, lost in thought as he waited for the right moment to act. ¡­. Meanwhile, on the other side of Uzushio, another meeting was taking ce among the assembled shinobi forces. The leaders who had gathered just hours ago now met again, their faces tense. ¡°It seems our position has been exposed,¡± ¨­noki began, addressing the group. He had received reports that many Uzumaki n members across the Land of Whirlpools were suddenly moving toward Uzushio. Combined with the silence from their advance squads, he was sure that their mission had beenpromised. ¡°Our cover¡¯s blown? Then we might as wellunch the attack sooner rather thanter¡± the Third Kazekage replied nonchntly. He wasn¡¯t surprised they¡¯d been discovered; it was bound to happen eventually. As long as they conquered Uzushio before Konoha could respond, it wouldn¡¯t matter. ¡°That Ghost¡¯s subordinates are quite effective,¡± the Third Mizukage noted. ¡°To think they already figured out our intentions. No doubt it was Konoha¡¯s Anbu who detected us; Uzushio alone couldn¡¯t have organised this intelligence this soon.¡± ¡°Well, if our cover¡¯s blown, let¡¯s start now.¡± Ai seemed unconcerned. In fact, the thought of facing Hui, the Konoha''s Ghost, seemed to ignite his fighting spirit. ¡°Then it¡¯s settled. Gather everyone and prepare to take Uzushio,¡± ¨­noki ordered, his gaze serious as he met each leader¡¯s eyes. And so, the elite shinobi of the four great viges, joined by forces from smaller hidden viges, began their march on Uzushio. The campaign to conquer the Land of Whirlpools had officially begun. join my patreon for 70+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 105 Chapter 105 With ¨­noki and the other leadersunching their attack, the Land of Whirlpools was plunged into chaos. Wherever they went, the invaders killed any Uzumaki they found, using this as a tactic to strike fear into the hearts of the remaining popce. In each captured town, they left a few shinobi to gather resources, nning to transport everything of value back to their respective viges once the campaign concluded. This brutal invasion wasn¡¯t just about defeating the enemy¡ªit was about seizing everything they could while leaving no chance for the Uzumaki to recover. The so-called expression of ¡®killing the chicken to take the egg¡¯ was vivid here. As they pushed forward, countless Uzumaki n members fell, and the numbers of Uzumaki dwindled swiftly. When word of these massacres reached Uzushiogakure, outrage swept through the vige. Many of the Uzumaki were ready to charge out and face the enemy head-on, but Uzumaki Suihei and the other leaders knew better. Their priority was to remain behind the protection of the sealing barrier surrounding Uzushio, buying time for Konoha¡¯s promised reinforcements to arrive in three days. With their bloody advance, it took only a few hours for ¨­noki¡¯s forces to reach Uzushio itself. ¡°So this is Uzushio,¡± Ai said, standing at the gates with thirty elite ninja. ¡°Once we breach this ce, everything we came for will be ours.¡± Ai¡¯s assigned path led him straight to Uzushio¡¯s main gates, where he was also responsible for taking on Konoha¡¯s feared ¡°Ghost.¡± ¡°I wonder where the others are,¡± he muttered. ¡°Though, it¡¯s better if they take their time. Less interference that way.¡± At hismand, one of his shinobiunched a lightning jutsu, aiming to st open Uzushio¡¯s gates. But before the attack even reached the gates, a barrier blocked it, dissipating the attack on impact. Inside, an Uzushio elder sighed in relief and called out, ¡°I recognize you¡ªAi of the Hidden Cloud! Does your vige intend to start a war?¡± Although they had a good idea of why these outsiders were here, the Uzumaki would try diplomacy first, hoping to buy a little more time. ¡°A war? With the likes of you? Land of Whirlpools?¡± Ai scoffed, sizing up the barrier as he considered how to break through it. The elder continued firmly, ¡°Perhaps on our own, we would be no match for you, but don¡¯t forget that our allies are the Fire Nation and the Hidden Leaf. Konoha¡¯s forces are already on their way, and you¡¯ll pay dearly for this attack.¡± The mere mention of Konoha¡¯s name irritated Ai. ¡°Konoha? As if we¡¯re afraid of them!¡± Thest war between the Hidden Cloud and Konoha had been a bitter memory for him, marked by the loss of close friends and their ultimate defeat. The reminder only strengthened his resolve. ¡°Just you wait! The Uzumaki will remember this day, and you¡¯ll live in fear of our revenge!¡± the elder called out, enraged by Ai¡¯s response and utter disregard for Konoha¡¯s and Uzumaki¡¯s power. ¡°Revenge?¡± Ai said dismissively, raising his hand slowly, his fingers extended toward the barrier. ¡°The Uzumaki have no future. Are you threatening me with ghosts?¡± In an instant, blue lightning surged around him, coiling along his limbs. This technique cloaked him in an armour of lightning, amplifying his body¡¯s physical abilities to the extreme. Known as the Lightning Release Chakra Mode, this armor increased both his defensive abilities and his speed while boosting his reflexes. Within moments, Ai¡¯s body was engulfed in flickering blue lightning, giving him a powerful, almost otherworldly aura. To the Uzumaki watching from within the vige, it seemed as if a thunder god had descended before them. Nervously, they exchanged nces, sweat forming on their brows as they sensed the sheer force radiating from their opponent. ¡°What... what is he nning?¡± one of the Uzumaki ninjas muttered, his voice shaking. ¡°That¡¯s Lord Ai¡¯s Hell Stab! He¡¯s getting serious!¡± a Hidden Cloud shinobi near Ai remarked, excitement gleaming in his eyes. It had been some time since he¡¯d seen Ai use this technique, but the memory of its destructive power remained vivid. ¡°Hell Stab: Four-Finger Thrust!¡± Ai called out, his hand glowing with concentrated chakra at his fingertips. In a sh, he closed the distance between himself and the barrier, moving with such speed that his form was almost indistinguishable from a streak of lightning. A sharp crack echoed as Ai¡¯s attack connected, sending spider-web cracks rippling across the barrier¡¯s surface. The Uzumaki on the other side stared in horror and disbelief. This barrier was known for being able to withstand attacks from multiple Kage-level shinobi at once. It was the Uzumaki¡¯s strongest defence, their guarantee of security¡ªyet Ai had nearly shattered it in one blow. ¡°Thank goodness it held!¡± someone murmured, exhaling in relief. Though the barrier appeared damaged, it remained intact, with the cracks already beginning to repair themselves. This barrier possessed a unique self-repairing mechanism, and despite its appearance, Ai¡¯s attack hadn¡¯t fully prated it. Ai took a step back, his eyes narrowing as he assessed the barrier. He could tell it was far more resilient than he¡¯d initially expected. ¡°Well, if that¡¯s the case, I¡¯ll just have to hit harder,¡± he said, his eyes gleaming with determination. Ai refused to believe that this barrier was beyond his ability to break. He wasn¡¯t alone in facing this challenge. On the other side of Uzushio, ¨­noki, the Third Mizukage, and the Third Kazekage were encountering simr obstacles. All were focused on finding a way to breach the barrier protecting Uzushio. join my patreon for 75+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 106 Chapter 106 Since the Four-Fingered Hell Stab didn¡¯t work on the barrier, Ai decided to increase the attack''s precision and pration power. This time, he raised his hand with only one finger extended. With a surge of chakra, an even more intense blue glow radiated from his fingertip, enveloping his entire body in ayer of crackling energy. Swoosh! The sound of slicing through the air echoed as Aiunched himself forward, his speed so blinding that he seemed like a bolt of lightning streaking towards the barrier. Crack! This time, even more cracks splintered across the barrier¡¯s surface, spreading out like a massive spiderweb that stretched skyward. ¡°Break already!¡± Ai roared, pushing his finger forward with all his might. But despite his efforts, the barrier held, still intact though strained. ¡°Damn it!¡± Ai muttered in frustration as he stepped back, watching the barrier gradually begin to repair itself. Inside Uzushiogakure, the Uzumaki shinobi erupted in cheers. The barrier had saved them once again. ¡°Just wait until the Leaf¡¯s reinforcements arrive, Ai! Then we¡¯ll see what you do!¡± an Uzumaki elder shouted confidently, seeing Ai forced to retreat. ¡°Cowards hiding behind a turtle shell! you think you¡¯re so safe, huh?!¡± Ai snarled, before taking another stab at the barrier, so fast it startled the Uzumaki elder into retreat. ¡°Keep trying if you want; your boasts mean nothing to me!¡± the elder retorted, annoyed. He left, but not without a lingering sense of unease¡ªthe Cloud ninja attacking their barrier looked like anything but human. ¡°If this ¡®Konoha''s Ghost¡¯ from the Leaf is here, why hasn¡¯t he shown himself?¡± Ai called out, hoping his voice would provoke someone within the vige intoing out to fight him directly. ¡°Come inside by yourself if you want to meet him! Or are you too scared to break down the barrier?¡± the elder shouted back, pausing briefly before retreating. The exchange only aggravated Ai further. No matter how much he pushed, it was clear the barrier wouldn¡¯t yield to him alone. He took a deep breath, his mind racing. A few momentster, he saw a figure descending rapidly from the sky¡ª¨­noki. He¡¯d encountered simr difficulties on his side of the barrier. Even his Dust Release hadn¡¯t been enough to break through the defenses of Uzushiogakure. ¡°Having trouble too, huh?¡± Aimented as ¨­nokinded beside him. As much as Ai didn¡¯t want to admit it, ¨­noki¡¯s Dust Release was arguably the most destructive attack in their group. ¡°The Uzumaki¡¯s barrier is more powerful than we anticipated. If we don¡¯t do this together, we¡¯ll be just wasting time,¡± ¨­noki said, looking seriously at Ai. ¡°Fine, we¡¯ll break this turtle shell together,¡± Ai replied, putting his irritation aside in favor of pragmatism. For the moment, he knew he needed to cooperate. ¡°Come on, let¡¯s join the others,¡± ¨­noki said as he floated back up, and Ai followed along below. Before long, their forces were assembled. The Third Tsuchikage-to-be ¨­noki, the Third Raikage Ai, the Third Kazekage, the Third Mizukage, Sunagakure¡¯s senior advisor Chiyo, and the future leader of Takigakure all stood together, ready to break the barrier. Seeing this massive gathering of powerful shinobi, Uzumaki Suihei immediately summoned more n members to help reinforce the barrier, taking his ce at its core. Meanwhile, Hui remained at a distance, apanied by the Fourth Unit of the White Fang. Even from afar, ¨­noki recognized him immediately. ¡°Konoha''s Ghost¡­ Hui,¡± ¨­noki muttered with a hint of bitterness. ¡°It¡¯s been a while, ¨­noki,¡± Hui replied, sizing up the group assembled outside the barrier. The sight took him by surprise¡ªso many shinobi, each bound to be legendary figures in the future. No wonder theirbined chakra was so overwhelming. ¡°Is this the so-called Ghost of the Leaf? Doesn¡¯t look like much¡ªhe¡¯s just a kid,¡± the Third Kazekage sneered, eying Hui with disinterest. Now that Hui was here, their attention shifted from attacking the barrier to facing him. They had all heard tales of him and had studied hisbat record. Hui met the Third Kazekage¡¯s gaze, arching a brow. This man, the so-called ¡°strongest Kazekage,¡± would one day end up as nothing more than a puppet in the hands of Sasori¡ªa tragic fate for any shinobi. ¡°What¡¯s with that look?¡± the Kazekage demanded, sensing an unsettling mix of amusement and¡­ pity? ¡°Oh, nothing,¡± Hui replied, shaking his head as if lost in thought. ¡°I was just thinking about certain people¡¯s fates. It¡¯s¡­ well, not great.¡± The Kazekage¡¯s eye twitched in irritation. ¡°Predicting our futures now, are we? How amusing,¡± the Mizukage chimed in. ¡°Perhaps you should worry about your own future. As of today, you won¡¯t be having one.¡± Hui nced over at the Mizukage, feeling a sense of curiosity. This man¡¯s story in the original lore was sparse¡ªalmost nonexistentpared to the others. Yet here he was, standing alongside some of the most powerful ninja in the world. ¡°You¡¯re mistaken,¡± Hui retorted, keeping his tone calm. ¡°My future couldn¡¯t be brighter. It¡¯s you who might want to be thinking about what lies ahead.¡± ¡°Bold words, kid,¡± Ai replied with a scoff, his eyes zing with excitement. He wasn¡¯t one for careful observation, but he could sense the strength radiating from Hui, and it fueled his eagerness to fight. ¡°Cloud ninja, am I right?¡± Hui responded, lips curving in a slight smile. ¡°Well, you¡¯re right about one thing¡ªI intend to take all four of you down.¡± join my patreon for 75+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 107 Chapter 107 When Mochizuki Hui made his bold deration, a hush fell over the crowd. Even the Uzumaki n¡¯s ninjas turned to him with a mix of astonishment and doubt in their eyes. ¡°Hahaha! Hahahaha! That¡¯s hrious! You actually think you can take down all four of us on your own?¡± The Third Kazekage burst intoughter, finding Hui¡¯s words utterly absurd. After all, they were four Kage-level ninjas! And here was this fifteen-year-old brat, iming he could beat them all single-handedly. Such arrogance! ¡°Oh? And who says you¡¯re all that strong?¡± Mochizuki Hui¡¯s gaze shifted to the Third Kazekage, his voice dripping with disdain. Though he was only fifteen, he radiated an overpowering aura, amanding presence that made everyone pause. For a fleeting moment, ¨­noki¡¯s eyes seemed to ze over, as if he were looking at another figure¡ªa shadow that had once haunted his nightmares: Uchiha Madara. No. This kid couldn¡¯t be allowed to grow any stronger. Absolutely not. Breathing heavily, ¨­noki clenched his fists, the words resounding fiercely in his mind. ¡°I had expected the Ghost of Konoha to be a truly impressive ninja, but it turns out you¡¯re just an arrogant brat. What a disappointment,¡± scoffed Chiyo, joining the fray. At this point in time, she was still a youthful, formidable shinobi¡ªnot yet the elder crone she would be in the future. Currently an elite J¨­nin, Chiyo had not yet reached the peak of her power. ¡°Enough talking with him. Can¡¯t you all see he¡¯s just stalling for time? Clearly, he¡¯s waiting for reinforcements from Konoha. Let¡¯s focus on breaking this barrier first. Once it¡¯s down, we¡¯ll have free rein to deal with this kid however we please!¡± Ai barked out his observation, having easily seen through Mochizuki Hui¡¯s strategy. His impatience stemmed partly from his own eagerness to get inside and battle Mochizuki Hui. The others immediately understood his point, nodding in agreement. They would no longer let Mochizuki Hui dy them; their focus now turned to breaking through the Uzumaki n¡¯s barrier. ¡°Ah, looks like my stalling tactics didn¡¯t work after all,¡± Mochizuki Hui muttered with a sigh. He had indeed been trying to buy time, even if only for a minute. Sometimes, a minute couldpletely shift the tide of battle. But a few exchanged words were all the time he could manage to stall them. No matter, though. ¡°Get ready, everyone! Attack together!¡± ¨­noki shouted, his hands already sped in preparation. In the next moment, a transparent, white Dust Release technique formed in ¨­noki¡¯s palms, a crystalline shape aimed directly at Mochizuki Hui¡¯s position. ¡°Ai, you go first. Use your One-Finger Thrust to create a fracture in the barrier. We¡¯ll break it down together from there!¡± ¨­noki instructed, turning toward Ai. As a close-range fighter, Ay¡¯s strongest move was his One-Finger Thrust, so ¨­noki¡¯s n was for him to crack the barrier first, allowing the others to follow up with additional strikes to shatter it. At this suggestion, the expressions on the faces of the Third Kazekage and the Third Mizukage subtly shifted, though they remained silent. Ay, however, merely shot ¨­noki a nce before starting his hand seals. Use his One-Finger Thrust to crack the barrier first? Hah, he wasn¡¯t an idiot! If any of them decided to attack him at the precise moment he used his One-Finger Thrust, he would likely be shattered along with the barrier. These people were only allies for the time being. Once this incident was over, they would be enemies again. In fact, even before this incident was over, once the barrier was down, they would likely cease to be allies at all. Such a fragile alliance was not something Ai would trust with his life. If it were him in their position, he would have attacked without hesitation, killing a future enemy while simultaneously breaking the barrier. Only a fool would pass up an opportunity like that. Seeing Ai ignore ¨­noki¡¯s suggestion and proceed with his own hand seals, the Third Kazekage and Third Mizukage felt a faint sense of disappointment. They had hoped to exploit the moment as well. ¨­noki, too, sighed with regret. Truthfully, he had intended to pull Ai into such a trap, but a part of him had hesitated. Breaking through the barrier wouldn¡¯t necessarily mean the end of their mission; they would still have to deal with the Uzumaki n¡¯s ninjas and Mochizuki Hui. The Uzumaki n¡¯s warriors didn¡¯t appear overly powerful, but who could say what kind of trump cards they might be hiding? And most importantly, there was Mochizuki Hui. After his crushing defeat at Mochizuki Hui¡¯s hands three years ago, ¨­noki had been haunted by a shadow of fear. He¡¯d researched Hui¡¯s history, realizing what an extraordinary talent and fearsome strength this boy possessed. Hui had defeated him three years prior, and ¨­noki had no idea how far he might have advanced since. If he and the others killed Ai but then lost the battle as a result, it would be a disastrous mistake. But now, it seemed he didn¡¯t need to worry¡ªAi was too sharp to fall for their tricks. Pushing these thoughts aside, ¨­noki called out, ¡°Ready!¡± At hismand, the four of them prepared to unleash their attacks. In ¨­noki¡¯s hands, a transparent white cube formed. Dust Release: Detachment of the Primitive World Technique! Above the Third Kazekage¡¯s head, a massive ck cylinder materialized. Ma Release: Iron Sand Cylinder! The Third Mizukage held aloft a huge, bone-white spear of ice. Perhaps he was from the H¨­zuki n, given his ability to wield Ice Release. Ice Release: Giant Ice Spear! Meanwhile, Ai¡¯s body crackled with ck lightning that took the shape of a panther. Lightning Release: ck Lightning! All four Kage-level attacks were ready. ¡°Go all out on the defences!¡± shouted Uzumaki Suihei from the other side of the barrier. He knew that this attack would be decisive. If they held, then the attackers would likely give up and withdraw. But if the barrier fell, they would be in serious trouble. At that moment, Uzumaki Suihei and hisrades funnelled nearly all their chakra into maintaining the barrier. Meanwhile, Mochizuki Hui, observing his setup, allowed himself a faint smile. Everything was ready. But there was no need to rush. With that thought, he and the members of Squad Four, led by White Fang, swiftly retreated from the vicinity of the barrier. Hui was certain the barrier would be broken, making their position dangerously close to the st zone. ¡°Attack!!!¡± ¨­noki¡¯s voice rang out, and in the next instant, the four Kage-level ninjas unleashed their full might. Powerful waves of energy burst forth from their hands and collided with the Uzumaki barrier around the Whirlpool Vige. The Uzumaki ninjas poured their chakra into the barrier, desperately maintaining it against the onught. For a moment, the sh of forces turned the world blindingly white. Then, a sharp sound echoed in the air. Crack! The barrier surrounding Whirlpool Vige... shattered. join my patreon for 75+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 108 Chapter 108 The barrier was shattered! This barrier, which had protected Whirlpool Vige through countless assaults and served as the Uzumaki n¡¯sst line of defense, finally sumbed under thebined might of four Kage-level shinobi. As the barrier fractured, the faces of the Uzumaki n¡¯s ninjas turned pale. The break was not only physically jarring, but it also struck a deep psychological blow. Their sense of security had vanished. ¡°It¡¯s over!¡± ¡°Damn it! What are we supposed to do now?¡± ¡°This is bad!¡± Panic set in. The Uzumaki ninjas were visibly shaken, their morale crumbling. Even Uzumaki Suihei wore a grim expression as a heavy sense of dread settled in his heart. In contrast, ¨­noki and his allies exhaled in relief. Good, the turtle shell was finally broken. If theirbined full-force assault had failed, they would¡¯ve left Whirlpool Vige and returned to their viges with only the supplies they¡¯d seized from the Land of Whirlpools. ¡°Yes! It¡¯s down!¡± ¡°These Kage-level masters are incredible, breaking such a powerful barrier!¡± ¡°Now, let¡¯s raze Whirlpool Vige!¡± The shinobi from various viges grinned, their faces brimming with bloodlust and excitement at the sight of the broken barrier. ¡°Konoha''s Ghost,e and fight me!¡± Ay bellowed, his gaze searching for Mochizuki Hui. Not only Ay, but also ¨­noki was on the lookout, his first thought upon shattering the barrier being to eliminate Mochizuki Hui, their greatest threat. Unlike them, the Third Mizukage and the Third Kazekage seemed less concerned with Hui. Still, they recognized that this moment was an ideal opportunity to kill the Konoha''s Ghost. ¡°It seems the Konoha''s Ghost¡¯s rise ends here,¡± remarked the Third Mizukage as he moved, furrowing his brows when he couldn¡¯t spot Hui. At that moment, a voice sounded near him, quiet but unmistakable. ¡°Is that so?¡± At the same instant, a swirling, blue-white chakra sphere appeared just behind the Third Mizukage, speeding toward his back. It was the Rasengan. This chakra-intensive technique required no hand seals. Given Hui¡¯s thorough understanding of its mechanics, there was no reason he wouldn¡¯t have mastered it. The sudden voice made the Third Mizukage¡¯s face contort in shock. The attack was too sudden, leaving him with no time to dodge. He twisted his body as best as he could, while swinging his arm backward to intercept the blow. But his fist was intercepted. No¡ªcaught. It was Mochizuki Hui, who had appeared next to the Third Mizukage without warning andunched a direct attack. Grasping the Mizukage¡¯s arm, Hui swiftly activated a sealing technique. Binding Seal! The technique took effect immediately, freezing the Mizukage in ce. The Binding Seal might only be a C-rank jutsu, but rank alone didn¡¯t decide everything¡ªit depended on who wielded it, and their mastery over the technique. If Uzumaki Minai had used it, she wouldn¡¯t have been able to immobilize the Mizukage, not even for a second. But with Hui, a Kage-level shinobi, the seal¡¯s effect was pushed to an entirely new level. Boom!!! ¡°Urgh!¡± The Rasengan struck the Mizukage¡¯s body, forcing a spurt of blood from his mouth. \Yet, the intense pain jolted him back to awareness, allowing him to break free from the Binding Seal¡¯s grip. He leaped forward, desperate to evade another attack. Hui didn¡¯t hesitate and jumped back, vacating his previous position just in time. Boom!!! In the spot where Hui and the Mizukage had been standing, a crater opened up as white Dust Release energy, ck lightning, and iron sand needles collided in a fierce st. ¡°Tsk tsk, you don¡¯t even hold back against your own allies. Such ruthlessness,¡± Hui sneered as he nced at the smoking crater, throwing a yful look at ¨­noki and the others. His gaze shifted to the Third Mizukage, who was now kneeling and guarded by a group of Mist ninjas. A small, satisfied smirk tugged at his lips. Three years was more than enough time for Hui to grow stronger. Although the natural energy within him hadn¡¯t yet fully assimted with his Primordial Qi, his physical abilities and the energy he could wield had reached unprecedented levels. In terms of pure strength, Hui¡¯s physical prowess now surpassed what it had been three years ago by an entire tier. Hui had sparred with both the Second Hokage, Tobirama Senju, and Hiruzen Sarutobi, and could overwhelm them using taijutsu alone. Over the past three years, his ability to harness chakra and light energy had also grown tremendously. His reserves now matched ten Kakashis¡ªten ¡°Kaka¡¯s¡± worth of energy, to be precise. In other words, energy constraints were no longer a pressing issue for Hui. Of course, it wasn¡¯t enough for him to unleash endless jutsu on demand just yet. His growth in physical ability and energy capacity was the result of natural development, requiring only a bit of practice on Hui¡¯s part to adapt. Because of this, he spent most of the past three years focusing on technique development. Let¡¯s not forget, Hui inherited the creative brilliance of the Second Hokage, Tobirama Senju. And he himself was exceptionally talented. As a result, in three years, Hui had created numerous new techniques. During the surprise attack just now, he had used one of these techniques, a light-based jutsu. He called it Invisible Man. The principle was simple yet effective. By adjusting how light refracted around him, Hui could redirect iing light to bypass his body and cast onto the area behind him, effectively making him invisible¡ªlike a perfect cloak of invisibility. Of course, this technique wasn¡¯t without its drawbacks. To achieve true invisibility, he had to remain perfectly still¡ªnot only in body but also in breath, preventing any energy fluctuations from revealing his presence to the sharp senses of Kage-level shinobi. As soon as he started moving, however, the refractions would ¡°blur,¡± making him appear like a ripple in water. While the four Kage-level shinobi broke through the Whirlpool Vige barrier, Hui activated the technique and vanished from sight. His first target was the Third Mizukage. As he had noted before, the unknown was the most dangerous element. Hui already had some knowledge of ¨­noki, Ay, and the Third Kazekage¡¯s abilities. The Third Mizukage, however, was an enigma, making him the greatest threat. Naturally, he prioritized him as his first target. Still, Hui hadn¡¯t been entirely certain that the Mizukage would be his target when heunched his ambush. He had to strike at whoever came closest to his position, and he could only guess where the Mizukage would move. In the end, his luck seemed to hold. The Third Mizukage was indeed the nearest, giving him the perfect opportunity to strike. And his ambush was a sess. The direct hit from the Rasengan had left the Mizukage incapacitated and out ofmission for now. join my patreon for 75+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 109 Chapter 109 Mochizuki Hui¡¯s words left the Third Mizukage with a dark expression, though ¨­noki and the others remained unfazed. Kill an ally? Ha! What ally? ¡°Heh, fitting for the Konoha''s Ghost, moving through this battlefield as silently as a ghost,¡± the Third Kazekage said, his previous underestimation of Hui reced by wary respect. ¡°I warned you all¡ªthis kid is slippery. But it doesn¡¯t matter. By the end of today, the Konoha''s Ghost will be no more,¡± ¨­noki dered coldly, his killing intent sharp as a sword. He was determined to ensure that Mochizuki Hui would not leave here alive. Hui, however, didn¡¯t even nce in their direction. His gaze was fixed on the Third Mizukage. At that moment, the Third Mizukage, supported by his subordinates, looked pale and shaken. Hui¡¯s ambush had been swift and brutal. Despite the Mizukage¡¯s attempt to dodge, he¡¯d still taken a Rasengan to the back, leaving him severely injured and effectively out of the fight. ¡°Why haven¡¯t you left with your subordinates yet?¡± Hui asked, addressing the Mizukage. ¡°Didn¡¯t you notice? ¨­noki and the others were ready to kill you along with me just a moment ago.¡± The Third Mizukage¡¯s face darkened. He knew all too well that he¡¯d nearly been coteral damage. He¡¯d seen how ¨­noki had set a simr trap for Ay, and he¡¯d been prepared to do the same to him. Ironically, it turned out he was the real fool here. ¡°Leave? Why would I leave? I¡¯ve seen your future, Konoha''s Ghost¡ªand it¡¯s death. I¡¯ll witness your end myself,¡± the Mizukage replied icily. ¡°Tsk, tsk. How foolish,¡± Hui mocked, his toneced with sarcasm. ¡°Do you honestly believe that if I die here, they¡¯ll spare you? You¡¯re injured and this battlefield is isted. They could kill you, me it on our battle, and everyone would believe it. Do you think you can walk away safely when the three of them decide to turn on you?¡± Hui¡¯s words,bined with his mocking gaze, drove his point home. ¡°Hmph! You¡¯re trying to sow discord between us right in front of us?¡± the Third Kazekage scoffed. ¡°No matter what you say, we¡¯re allies here, and we only have one enemy: you.¡± ¨­noki and Ay said nothing, neither affirming nor denying the Kazekage¡¯s statement. In truth, no one present actually believed in this fragile alliance. Hui¡¯s words had merely revealed what they already knew. The Third Mizukage¡¯s expression grew even darker. He understood the reality of the situation. If Hui died here, he, weakened as he was, would likely be the next target. It wasn¡¯t difficult to imagine. If it were one of them injured and vulnerable, he knew he¡¯d act in the same way. ¡°Hmph. Almost believed them for a second there,¡± he muttered, then turned to his subordinates, teeth clenched. ¡°We¡¯re leaving!¡± He chose to retreat, unwilling to trust this alliance¡¯s paper-thin loyalty any further. As he led the Mist ninjas away, the remaining shinobi from various viges let them go without a word. Losing the Third Mizukage might weaken their collective power, but it also meant one less rival vying for the spoils of Whirlpool Vige. With the barrier around Whirlpool Vige broken, nothing could stop them now. Not long after, one-fifth of the shinobi forces present had departed, including one Kage-level ninja, two elite J¨­nin, and eight J¨­nin. A formidable force anywhere in the ninja world¡ªbut ultimately, just one-fifth of the assembled army. p, p, p! The sound of apuse drew everyone¡¯s attention. It was the Third Kazekage. He looked at Mochizuki Hui with grudging admiration. ¡°The Konoha''s Ghost truly lives up to his reputation. We¡¯d heard tales not only of your strength but of your cunning. ¡°Today, you¡¯ve proven it. One surprise attack, a few words, and you¡¯ve weakened us by a fifth.¡± But his voice grew cold. ¡°However, we won¡¯t let you pull that off again. ¨­noki, you wanted to kill the Konoha''s Ghost, didn¡¯t you? Let¡¯s end this.¡± He gestured to ¨­noki, clearly intending to corner Hui together. ¡°We shouldn¡¯t have wasted our time talking. Should¡¯ve gone after him from the start,¡± Ay said, his tone frustrated. Yet, despite his words, he hadn¡¯t actually taken any action so far. And now, once again, he spoke but didn¡¯t move. ¨­noki sighed inwardly. This so-called alliance was fragile to the core, on the brink of falling apart at any moment. This was precisely why Hui had so easily sown discord and driven the Third Mizukage away. If possible, ¨­noki would¡¯ve preferred they split up and moved independently. But Hui¡¯s sudden assault earlier had left him uneasy. He was truly afraid. He feared that if this boy grew any stronger, he might be another Madara Uchiha. In Mochizuki Hui, ¨­noki saw the same terrifying potential. This boy had to die. ¡°Let¡¯s finish him together, then,¡± ¨­noki said, sping his hands together as he prepared to activate Dust Release. The Third Kazekage¡¯s iron sand reappeared behind him, floating ominously in the air, ready to attack at a moment¡¯s notice. As for Ay, he still hesitated to engage in closebat. Taijutsu was his specialty, but getting close to Hui meant risking bing coteral damage from ¨­noki and the Kazekage¡¯s attacks. After all, his allies posed just as much danger as Hui. ¡°If it were one-on-one, I might humor you a bit. But three-on-one? You¡¯ll have to y without me,¡± Hui said, turning sharply as if to run. ¡°!!!¡± The three shinobi were momentarily stunned. Was this the same arrogant Konoha''s Ghost who¡¯d dered he¡¯d take them all down? Was this the same Mochizuki Hui who¡¯d driven off the Third Mizukage with just a few sentences? This speed, this urgency in his escape¡­ was this really the same person? ¡°Trying to flee, are you? Everyone else, stick to the original n. The three of us will pursue him!¡± ¨­noki shouted. This was a rare opportunity, and there was no way he would let Hui slip away. ¡°Don¡¯t hesitate! Do you really want to face another ¡®God of Shinobi¡¯ someday?¡± he barked at Ay and the Third Kazekage, growing anxious as he watched Hui put distance between them. Ay and the Third Kazekage¡¯s faces hardened. ¡°Everyone else, stay on task. We¡¯re going after him!¡± theymanded, and with that, the three of them set off in pursuit of Mochizuki Hui. As Hui ran, he could sense the three Kage-level shinobi closing in behind him, and a small smile yed at the corner of his mouth. join my patreon for 75+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 110 Chapter 110 ¨­noki, Ay, and the Third Kazekage quickly vanished from sight as they pursued Mochizuki Hui, leaving the battlefield behind to settle their own score. ¡°It¡¯s time. Today, we will end Uzushiogakure,¡± dered the leader of Takigakure, now the highest-ranking figure left among the allied forces. Although Takigakure wasn¡¯t on par with the Five Great Nations, it still held considerable power over the smaller viges. ¡°Advance!¡± Chiyomanded. As an elite J¨­nin and a high-ranking member of Sunagakure, she held significant authority among the shinobi. ¡°Don¡¯t underestimate us!¡± ¡°You think Uzushiogakure is yours to conquer?¡± ¡°Bring it on!¡± ¡°It¡¯s a Fight to the death!¡± The Uzumaki n ninjas were seething with rage, growling and ring at the shinobi of the invading viges. ¡°Lord Hui has drawn the strongest enemies away! Now, Uzumaki warriors, charge!¡± roared Uzumaki Suihei as he charged forward. ¡°Hmph, Fools! Attack!!¡± With those orders, the battle erupted. Although the Uzumaki n had a numerical advantage, the invading shinobi held the upper hand in skill and power, boasting eight elite J¨­nin and over twenty J¨­nin among their ranks. But the Uzumaki n wasn¡¯t entirely outmatched. They had Konoha¡¯s ANBU on their side, brought by Mochizuki Hui. Although few in number, these ANBU were elite fighters adept in coordination. Each team of one J¨­nin and three elite Ch¨±nin could effectively hold off an enemy elite J¨­nin. Furthermore, White Fang Hatake Sakumo, an elite J¨­nin, was among their ranks, supported by six other J¨­nin. Together, they brought considerable power to the battlefield. With Konoha¡¯s ANBU joining the fray, the Uzumaki n stood a fighting chance. Though still at a disadvantage, they wouldn¡¯t be defeated easily. ¡°Your resistance is pointless. Once the three Kage-level shinobi return from killing the Konoha''s Ghost, you¡¯re all finished!¡± sneered the Takigakure leader, attempting to demoralize the Uzumaki side. Indeed, his words struck fear into their hearts. If those three returned, no resistance could prevent their downfall. ¡°So what?¡± came a defiant shout from one of the Uzumaki leaders. ¡°This is the Land of Whirlpools! This is our home, where our families live! We won¡¯t let anyone destroy this ce. If you want to take over Uzushiogakure, you¡¯ll have to walk over our dead bodies!¡± The Uzumaki ninjas¡¯ spirits surged as they remembered what they were fighting for. ¡°That¡¯s right! For our families!¡± ¡°If you want to destroy the Uzumaki n,e test my de!¡± ¡°Let¡¯s take them down!¡± Driven by these fierce derations, the Uzumaki n charged with renewed vigor, their battle cries piercing the air. ¡°Then let¡¯s pave our way to Uzushiogakure with your corpses!¡± ¡°Your resistance is futile. You¡¯re all destined to die!¡± The invading shinobi, equally inmed by battle cries, roared in response, charging to meet the Uzumaki n. ¡°I didn¡¯t expect to see you here, White Fang of Konoha,¡± Chiyo remarked as she manipted her puppets to attack Hatake Sakumo, recognizing the short white de in his hand. This was the up-anding Konoha prodigy known as White Fang. ¡°Chiyo of the Sand, Known as Sunagakure¡¯s most gifted puppeteer since its founding,¡± Sakumo replied cautiously, Keeping a sharp eye on her puppets, knowing they were coated with poison. Konoha had already lost an ANBU to a poison that defied all known antidotes¡ªa lesson he wouldn¡¯t forget. ¡°A true prodigy of Konoha,¡± Chiyo mused. ¡°What a pity that today you will meet your end.¡± Konoha¡¯s prodigies seemed endless; there was that Ghost earlier, and now the White Fang was before her. ¡°Don¡¯t be so sure. You¡¯ve all underestimated the Deputymander. He has a surprise nned,¡± Sakumo replied, a confident edge to his voice. He knew of Hui¡¯s preparations and was well aware of his n. Chiyo hesitated for a moment, her confidence shaken by Sakumo¡¯s words. But she dismissed it as a mere bluff meant to throw her off bnce. ¡°Is that so? I¡¯ll look forward to it then!¡± she scoffed, retaking control of herposure. ¡°I doubt that surprise wille before he falls to those three. After all, a Kage-level ninja facing three opponents? How long could he possiblyst? He¡¯ll be dead long before any surprises arise.¡± Though Chiyo felt a moment of uncertainty, her veteran instincts kicked in. She wouldn¡¯t be easily swayed and returned his taunt with one of her own. ¡°Oh, we¡¯ll see soon enough. His surprise is almost here,¡± Sakumo said, the smirk on his face concealed beneath his mask. ¡°Hmph! You¡¯re deluded! Whatever this surprise is, unless it¡¯s Tobirama Senju himself, nothing can change your fate!¡± Chiyo snarled, her puppets striking even faster. To this, Sakumo replied with a hint of mischief, ¡°Who says it isn¡¯t? The Second Hokage is already on his way.¡± Chiyo¡¯s eyes widened in shock, her movements slowing. That slight hesitation was all Sakumo needed. His white de shed with a sudden burst of light as he sliced through the puppet in his path. This was his White Fang sh, a technique inspired by Mochizuki Hui¡¯s Silver Moon and Mountain-Splitting techniques. Sakumo immediately closed the distance, advancing on Chiyo. Puppet masters excelled in controlling their puppets from afar, but up close, their taijutsu skills were oftencking. For a puppet master, closebat could be deadly. Seeing Sakumo approaching, Chiyo¡¯s eyes narrowed in rm. She leapt backward, desperate to increase the distance between them. But she couldn¡¯t match Sakumo¡¯s speed. As he drew close enough to strike, a sudden wall of earth rose between them. It was an Earth release technique, cast by a J¨­nin from the allied forces. Although he was upied with his own fight against an elite Ch¨±nin, he managed to spare a moment to support hisrade. ¡°If the Second Hokage actually came here, then be prepared for the Second Great Shinobi War!¡± Chiyo snapped as she widened the gap, sending her puppets back toward Sakumo. Both were elite J¨­nin, each a hair¡¯s breadth from reaching Kage-level. Chiyo would never allow Sakumo to break through and target their weaker allies. ¡°The Second Hokage cannote here,¡± came a sudden voice from deeper within Uzushiogakure, ¡°but I can.¡± A group of figures was swiftly approaching the battlefield. join my patreon for 75+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 111 Chapter 111 ¡°Sarutobi Hiruzen?!¡± Chiyo¡¯s eyes widened in shock as she recognized the new arrival. Standing before her was none other than Konoha¡¯s esteemed Kage-level ninja, known as the ¡°Hokage¡¯s Heir,¡± Sarutobi Hiruzen. And he wasn¡¯t alone. Next to him was another familiar face. ¡°Shimura Danzo?!¡± Another Kage-level ninja had arrived. Although Danzo wasn¡¯t as famous as Hiruzen, he was undeniably a formidable shinobi in his own right. ¡°This can¡¯t be¡­ How could your reinforcements arrive so quickly?¡± Chiyo¡¯s voice trembled with disbelief, unable toprehend how Konoha¡¯s top-tier support had reached the Land of Whirlpools so swiftly. After all, the allied forces had only just arrived themselves. It wasn¡¯t just Chiyo; the other shinobi from the allied viges were equally horrified. They, too, recognized Sarutobi Hiruzen and Shimura Danzo, fully aware that both were Kage-level threats. ¡°Damn it, how are they even here?!¡± ¡°Konoha¡¯s reinforcements couldn¡¯t havee this fast! It has to be an illusion!¡± ¡°This is terrible. With these two here, the entire course of the battle has flipped!¡± ¡°Where are the others? It¡¯s just one Konoha''s Ghost! Why haven¡¯t they returned yet?!¡± ¡°What now? We¡¯re no match for Sarutobi Hiruzen and Danzo!¡± Panic erupted among the allied forces. Until this moment, they had been confident, certain that their three Kage-level leaders would soon return and shift the battle decisively in their favor. But now, instead of their leaders, it was Konoha¡¯s elite who had arrived first. It defied all logic. For Hiruzen and Danzo to travel such a distance in such a short time was nearly impossible, barring the legendary Flying Thunder God technique of the Second Hokage, Tobirama Senju. Could Tobirama himself being? The thought alone sent chills through the allied shinobi. Nervous nces darted around the battlefield, each ninja half-expecting to see the figure of Tobirama. Unlike the invading forces, the Uzumaki n¡¯s shinobi erupted with joy at the sight of their allies. ¡°Reinforcements have arrived! Konoha is here to help¡ªUzushiogakure is saved!¡± ¡°With Lord Hiruzen and Lord Danzo here, victory is ours!¡± ¡°Haha! Now it¡¯s your turn to worry about survival!¡± ¡°Charge! Destroy them!¡± The Uzumaki shinobi¡¯s spirits soared. The emotional whish from despair to hope had left them energized and eager to fight. Even Uzumaki Suihei, though surprised by the arrival of Sarutobi Hiruzen and Danzo, was too excited to question their appearance. Reinforcements were here, and that was all that mattered. ¡°Surprised, aren¡¯t you, Chiyo?¡± Hatake Sakumo taunted, his tone brimming with admiration for Hui. ¡°This was the ¡®surprise¡¯ our Deputy Commander had nned for you.¡± Sakumo himself had only learned of Hui¡¯s n earlier that day. Hui had requested reinforcements from Konoha days earlier, long before anyone had known the full scale of the threat to the Land of Whirlpools. Even Sakumo hadn¡¯t been fully aware of the mysterious shinobi¡¯s purpose in thend of whirlpool. Initially, they had assumed the presence of ANBU meant nothing more than a few covert missions. It was inconceivable that four of the Great Shinobi Viges, along with smaller ones, would form an alliance to annihte an entire nation. The idea seemed like fantasy. Yet, Mochizuki Hui, a Kage-level shinobi, had pieced together the clues and, trusting his instincts, had requested reinforcements. Sakumo marveled at Hui¡¯s boldness. Most shinobi of his rank, with such strength and skill, would have assumed they could handle any threat alone. But not Hui. And Sakumo understood now that this request had been part of an even grander n. Of course, Sakumo wasn¡¯t aware that Hui had already known the threat facing the Land of Whirlpools. With that foreknowledge, deducing the course of action became much easier. Hui knew that once news spread of his presence in the Land of Whirlpools, the other viges wouldn¡¯t be able to sit still. They would dispatch powerful ninjas, not only to ensure the Land of Whirlpools was destroyed but also to trap him within the country. So, Hui had chosen to openly meet with Uzumaki Suihei in Uzushiogakure. One of his objectives was to make sure the entire shinobi world knew of his presence. By estimating how long it would take for word to reach the other viges, and how long it would then take them to mobilize their forces, Hui had timed his request for reinforcements perfectly. He had calcted that Konoha¡¯s response would arrive in the Land of Whirlpools before the allied viges¡¯ shinobi, but he had instructed Hiruzen and Danzo to hold their distance, waiting for the right signal. And that signal was the shattering of Uzushiogakure¡¯s barrier. Of course, Hui hadn¡¯t been entirely certain that his n would seed. He had based it on conjecture and intuition drawn from the information he¡¯d gathered. But if the worst had happened and the reinforcements had been unnecessary, Konoha would have simply made the trip in vain, with nothing lost. If the n seeded, however, it would devastate the allied forces and weaken the elite ranks of the Great Shinobi Viges. And indeed, the viges had dispatched elite ninja squads to the Land of Whirlpools, led by none other than the future Third Kage of each vige. This development was slightly unexpected. With the elite J¨­nin and their leaders present, Hui realized that victory in this war woulde at a high cost. Thus, his preemptive strike against the Third Mizukage had aimed to weaken the allied forces by a fifth, removing one of the Kage-level leaders and disrupting their morale. Even so, Hui understood that this battle would still take a heavy toll. ¨­noki, Ay, and the Third Kazekage were all powerful shinobi with wide-range destructive jutsu. If they unleashed their full power indiscriminately, many Konoha ninjas would be caught in the crossfire. To minimize the damage, Hui had lured the three of them away, leaving the battlefield to the non-Kage-level shinobi. Now, with Sarutobi Hiruzen and Shimura Danzo entering the fray, two Kage-level reinforcements would soon turn the tide decisively in Uzushiogakure¡¯s favor. Once the allied ninjas were eliminated, they could concentrate their efforts on ¨­noki, Ay, and the Third Kazekage, who would then be no match against thebined forces of Konoha. Of course, the sess of this n hinged on Hui¡¯s ability to hold off all three of them. But Hui wasn¡¯t worried in the slightest. Because his intention wasn¡¯t simply to dy ¨­noki and the others. He intended to defeat them. This battle in the Land of Whirlpools was the perfect test of his three years of nning, his strategic acumen, and his growth. And he would use ¨­noki, Ay, and the Third Kazekage to measure the progress he¡¯d made. join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 112 Chapter 112 "Retreat, now!" Chiyo didn¡¯t hesitate¡ªwithout those three, they stood no chance against Sarutobi Hiruzen and the others. Staying would be a death sentence. ¡°You want to leave now? Don¡¯t you think it¡¯s toote!¡± Hiruzen¡¯s voice rang out across the battlefield, shaking the hearts of the many shinobi. Their goal was theplete annihtion of these invaders; letting them escape was out of the question. ¡°Damn, it¡¯s the barrier!¡± the Takigakure leader cursed, realizing in horror that the barrier surrounding Uzushiogakure, which they had shattered earlier, was somehow back up. Uzumaki ninjas were already reinforcing it, preventing any chances of retreat. Elsewhere in the Land of Whirlpools, a group of shinobi continuously funneled chakra into the barrier. At the center of this effort was Uzumaki Mina. It was part of Mochizuki Hui¡¯s n: once Hiruzen and Danzo entered the battle, they were to restore the barrier. Chiyo felt a shiver run through her. As Hiruzen approached, she felt her scalp prickle with fear. This was no ordinary shinobi but a Kage-level figure who had shone brightly in thest Shinobi World War. She knew she was entirely outmatched. Her only hope now was that they could hold out until their own Kage-level leaders returned. If not, they were as good as dead. With their escape route cut off, Chiyo and the remaining allied shinobi could only grit their teeth and prepare for battle. The war raged on, but the tables had turnedpletely. Meanwhile, Mochizuki Hui could sense that ¨­noki and the other two were closing in on him. His n was working. ¡°Damned brat, you can¡¯t escape us!¡± ¨­noki shouted from the air, hands sped as he readied Dust Release to block Hui¡¯s escape. Ay activated Lightning Release Chakra Mode, transforming into a streak of blue lightning that was nearly upon Hui. The Third Kazekage, using Ma Release, shaped his iron sand into wings, taking to the skies as well. Although fast, his speedgged slightly behind ¨­noki and Ay. All four of them were Kage-level shinobi, and before long, they had left the vicinity of Uzushiogakure. Suddenly, Hui formed hand seals and created two shadow clones, each clone running off in a different direction. The three Mochizuki Huis split up. The tactic threw ¨­noki and the others off for a moment before they scoffed inwardly. Foolish. Using the Shadow Clone technique in a battle of this scale was nothing short of reckless. Shadow clones required substantial chakra and produced only partial replicas of the original¡¯s power, often leading to a decrease in the user¡¯s own chakra reserves. ¡°What a waste of chakra,¡± ¨­noki thought. ¡°One for each of us,¡± he called out, deciding they would each pursue one clone. Even if they couldn¡¯t determine which was the original, it didn¡¯t matter; shadow clones were fragile, dissolving with even minor damage. They could quickly eliminate the clones and converge on the real Hui. Ay and the Third Kazekage split off, each pursuing a different Hui. Surprisingly, Hui¡¯s shadow clones moved with impressive speed. Of course, Hui would never make such a rookie mistake. His Shadow Clone technique was one he¡¯d modified extensively. With his chakra reserves equivalent to ten Kakashis, as well as his remarkable chakra recovery rate, he had refined the technique to better suit his own strengths. His ¡°Shadow Manifestation¡± clones retained a full ny percent of his power, making them nearly as effective as the original. However, these clones came with a limit¡ªhe could only maintain two. But two,bined with himself, was more than enough. Now, the chase resumed in full force. In the direction pursued by the Third Kazekage, Hui decided the distance was sufficient and stopped abruptly. ¡°This is far enough,¡± he said, turning to face his opponent as he removed his mask, revealing his youthful, striking features. The Third Kazekage paused,nding on the ground opposite Hui with a hint of surprise in his gaze. Though he knew the Konoha''s Ghost was only fifteen years old, seeing his boyish face in person was still jarring. ¡°You actually stopped. Are you inviting death, Konoha''s Ghost?¡± the Third Kazekage taunted, his hands forming seals as he spoke. The ck iron sand surrounding him split apart, floating menacingly before consolidating into needles, all aimed at Hui. ¡°Why don¡¯t youe find out on your own?,¡± Hui replied coolly, though the Kazekage seemed done with conversation. He was intent on testing whether the young shinobi before him was indeed the real Hui. ¡°Iron Sand Drizzle!¡± The Kazekageunched his attack, sending the iron sand needles hurtling toward Hui. They were densely packed and covered a broad area, making it impossible to evade with taijutsu alone. Earth Release: Earth Wall! Hui quickly formed hand seals, raising a wall of earth from the ground to intercept the needles. Thud! Thud! Thud! The iron needles embedded themselves in the wall, but the Kazekage immediately manipted them to fly over and around the wall, aiming once more for Hui. Of course, Hui had anticipated this. As he formed the Earth Wall, he activated a technique that allowed him to move stealthily through the ground. Emerging from beneath the Kazekage, he unsheathed his de and shed upward. The Kazekage reacted swiftly, condensing a shield of iron sand to block the strike. Spikes jutted from the shield¡¯s surface, aiming to impale Hui. Hui leapt back, keeping his distance. ¡°Offense and defense together? Impressive,¡± hemented, eyeing the Kazekage¡¯s hovering iron sand. ¡°Is that so? Then let me show you just how impressive it really is,¡± the Kazekage replied, reforming his wings of iron sand and ascending once more. As he rose, he released a volley of iron sand feathers from his wings, each feather a deadly projectile aimed at Hui. These feathers moved at incredible speed, almost invisible to the untrained eye. But Hui¡¯s perception was remarkable. Although his clones couldn¡¯t fully replicate the abilities of his ¡°Heavenly Eye,¡± they retained his exceptional dynamic vision. The iron sand feathers were clearly visible to him, allowing him to dodge them with ease. Watching his target evade his attacks, the Third Kazekage¡¯s eyes narrowed. ¡°It seems you¡¯re no ordinary brat after all,¡± he muttered, his expression growing tense as he readied for the next exchange. Hui remainedposed, a slight smile ying on his lips as he prepared to continue their duel. join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 113 Chapter 113 While Mochizuki Hui dodged the Third Kazekage¡¯s relentless attacks, the Kazekage observed him closely, gathering intelligence on Hui¡¯s abilities. First, there was Hui¡¯s speed¡ªduring their chase, it became clear that Hui was exceptionally fast, possibly even faster than the Kazekage himself. His reactions were equally impressive, showing an almost supernatural agility and lightness. The Third Kazekage hadn¡¯t yet assessed Hui¡¯s strength directly, but he knew one thing for sure: close contact was to be avoided. In his ambush against the Third Mizukage, Hui had used a mysterious immobilizing technique that required no hand seals, followed by a devastating chakra sphere, also cast without seals. These techniques were dangerous and likely not the only tricks up Hui¡¯s sleeve, so it was best to maintain distance. Additionally, reports suggested that Hui was a versatile shinobi, skilled in nearly all types of jutsu¡ªincluding genjutsu¡­ What?! As soon as the thought crossed his mind, darkness enveloped his vision. He realized immediately that he had fallen into a genjutsu. Genjutsu: Bringer-of-Darkness Technique! Without hesitation, the Third Kazekage folded his iron sand wings into a spiked sphere around himself, allowing his body to drop toward the ground. He knew he couldn¡¯t break free from the genjutsu right away, nor did he have anyone nearby to assist him. The best course of action was simply to protect himself. At the same time, Hui leaped high into the air, clenching his fist and concentrating a massive amount of chakra into it. Super Strength! Boom!!! Hui¡¯s chakra-infused punch struck the iron sand sphere, mming it into the ground with an explosive force that sent up a cloud of dust. The sheer power of the blow shattered the iron sand sphere, driving the Third Kazekage into the ground. Had it not been for a protectiveyer of iron sand armor simr to Gaara¡¯s, he would likely have been severely injured. But even as hended, a chill ran through him¡ªhe had no idea how Hui managed to strike with such force and precision. Before he could recover, Hui came down with another attack, this time channeling chakra into his foot andunching a powerful kick at the Kazekage. Sensing the imminent threat, the Kazekage leaped out of the way with all his strength, narrowly avoiding Hui¡¯s kick. Crack! Boom!!! Hui¡¯s kick struck the ground, shattering it and leaving arge crater. The sight of such raw power made the Kazekage¡¯s pupils contract in shock. It was now clear to him what technique Hui had used in his earlier attacks, and he couldn¡¯t help but think, What kind of monster is this boy?! Such overwhelming power, executed without hand seals, was simply unreasonable. Swallowing his horror, the Kazekage quickly manipted his iron sand to form a massive cube, hurling it at Hui from above. Hui¡¯s stance shifted, his hands gathering chakra as he prepared to counter the attack. Boom!!! Hui¡¯s punch smashed into the iron sand cube, shattering it like fireworks. The force scattered the iron sand, leaving the Kazekage astounded. As the cube dispersed, Hui leaped forward, swiftly closing in on the Kazekage. Having witnessed Hui¡¯s brutal strength, the Kazekage had no intention of letting him get any closer. He quickly retreated, reshaping his iron sand into giant needles that shot toward Hui as he advanced. While airborne, with no solid ground to push off from, most shinobi would find it nearly impossible to dodge such an attack. But Hui wasn¡¯t like most shinobi. His keen eyesight allowed him to track the needles¡¯ paths, and he twisted his body midair, slipping through the gaps between the iron sand spikes. Hui swung his fist down once more, but the Kazekage shielded himself with an iron sand barrier. Though Hui¡¯s punch shattered the shield, it slowed his advance, giving the Kazekage a brief reprieve. Undeterred, Hui formed hand seals in midair, and with a p, a swirling column of water appeared, cascading downward like a torrent toward the Kazekage. Faced with the water jutsu, the Kazekage hastily raised an enormous iron sand wall to defend himself from the onught. Water crashed down from the sky, eventually forming a shimmeringke on the battlefield. Both shinobinded on the water¡¯s surface, chakra flowing through their feet to maintain their bnce. The Kazekage red at Hui, who charged across the water¡¯s surface toward him, frustration and anger simmering beneath his calm exterior. Despite his years as a formidable shinobi, he found himself in the rare position of being entirely on the defensive. But remembering Hui¡¯s monstrous strength and speed, he knew he couldn¡¯t risk closebat. He focused his chakra, condensing his iron sand into wings once more, aiming to gain altitude andunch attacks from above, beyond Hui¡¯s reach. However, as soon as he rose, he felt a tug at his feet. The water beneath him had formed tendrils,tching onto his legs and dragging him down. Although the force was weak and he broke free with minimal effort, it dyed him just long enough that he couldn¡¯t ascend any higher. ¡°Damn it!¡± he cursed, quickly reshaping the iron sand into a thick shield to slow Hui¡¯s approach, hoping to buy himself a few moments to evade. The Kazekage raised an enormous rectangr barrier of iron sand between himself and Hui, effectively blocking Hui¡¯s path. Hui merely smirked. Without hesitation, he drew his de, channeling blue-white lightning chakra through it. Then, in one swift motion, he stabbed his sword into the base of the iron sand wall, letting the water carry the current through. Zzzzt! A faint buzzing sound reached the Kazekage¡¯s ears, and his expression changed as he realized what was happening. But it was toote. The lightning coursed through the water, reaching his feet and spreading through his entire body, causing him to seize up. For a regr shinobi, the lightning would have only briefly numbed their legs. But the Kazekage wore iron sand armor, and iron sand was an excellent conductor of electricity. From his earlier punch, Hui had deduced that the Kazekage wore iron sand armor. This realization had inspired him to create a water-based battlefield to conduct his lightning-style chakra, setting a trap to immobilize his opponent. It worked. As the Kazekage¡¯s body went numb, Hui leaped into the air, bypassing the iron sand shield. He raised his fist, aiming a powerful blow at the now defenseless Kazekage. Seeing Hui¡¯s descending form, the Kazekage felt a surge of panic, his pupils dting with terror. In an instant, Hui¡¯s fist connected with the Kazekage¡¯s body. Boom!!! The Kazekage¡¯s body plummeted to the ground like a bomb, creating a massive crater on impact. The thunderous explosion masked the sounds of shattering iron sand and breaking bones, while blood sprayed into the air as water and earth mixed together. The Third Kazekage had been defeated. join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 114 Chapter 114 The sh between Mochizuki Hui and the Third Kazekage had ended in Hui''s favor. In truth, the Third Kazekage¡¯s power wasparable to ¨­noki¡¯s three years prior¡ªwhom Hui had already defeated back then. Although both ¨­noki and the Kazekage had grown stronger over the years, their progress was limited; they were nearing their peak, soon to teau or even decline. Hui, however, had grown tremendously in those three years. Young and full of potential, he had many more years of growth ahead of him. Against the Third Kazekage, Hui hadn¡¯t even needed to use his full arsenal. The battle ended quickly, almost as if to say, ¡°I barely tried, and you¡¯ve already fallen.¡± As he nced at the unconscious Kazekage sprawled on the ground, a slight smile yed at Hui¡¯s lips. ¡°One down. I wonder how the main body is faring,¡± he muttered, confirming that the Kazekage was fully incapacitated before dragging him out of the crater and heading off in a specific direction. Meanwhile, the battle between Hui¡¯s main body and Ay raged on. Unlike the Kazekage, who relied on ranged jutsu, Ay fought like a berserker, all raw strength and physical prowess. Their battle was a ferocious exchange of taijutsu¡ªa true sh between warriors. ¡°Lightning Release Chakra Mode¡­ what a technique,¡± Hui murmured after another collision, eyeing the towering figure d in crackling lightning chakra. The enhancements to Ay¡¯s body in this mode were immense, bolstering not only his attack power but also his defenses. For Hui, the defensive benefits of this mode were especially interesting. He had more than enough offensive techniques at his disposal, sometimes too many to choose from. Hui thought to himself, It¡¯s the author who can¡¯t remember all my abilities! But what hecked were defensive techniques that could enhance his body¡¯s durability, rather than relying solely on external defenses. While he possessed formidable regenerative abilities, his physical resilience wasparatively low. In a world where most shinobi focused on offense, achieving a bnce of high defense and regeneration could make him nearly invincible. ¡°Who would¡¯ve thought the Ghost of Konoha, known for his ninjutsu, could match me in taijutsu? You¡¯re more powerful than anyone realized, Mochizuki Hui!¡± Ay said, his voice full of wonder as he looked at the young shinobi before him. Ay had assumed his own mastery in taijutsu was unrivalled, a skill nearly at its zenith. Yet this young shinobi, known for assassination and jutsu, was more than capable of holding his ground. Not only did Hui match Ay¡¯s speed and reaction time, but his monstrous strength even surpassed Ay¡¯s in certain moments. Ay also knew that while Hui had only been using taijutsu so far, he possessed a vast arsenal of deadly jutsu. In Ay¡¯s eyes, this boy was practically a perfect shinobi¡ªwless, with no apparent weaknesses. ¡°To inherit the super strength of the Senju is one thing, but for you to possess such power at your age¡­ it¡¯s terrifying. I understand now why ¨­noki wants you dead so badly,¡± Ay said grimly. ¡°If you¡¯re given the time to mature, you might well reach the same heights as Hashirama Senju and dominate the entire shinobi world. I¡¯ll do whatever it takes to ensure that doesn¡¯t happen.¡± With a focused gaze, Ay raised his hand, bringing his four fingers together, and concentrated chakra into his palm. Hell Stab: Four-Finger Thrust! In a sh, Ayunched himself like a bullet toward Hui, his speed tearing up the ground beneath him. This was his strongest technique, the one that had fractured Uzushiogakure¡¯s protective barrier with ease. Hui¡¯s eyes narrowed as Ay closed in. Even he knew better than to face the full force of the Hell Stab head-on. Despite their previous taijutsu exchanges, Hui had been somewhat cautious, recognizing Ay¡¯s extreme defences. In their shes, Hui¡¯s super strength had barely scratched him. Even attacks like Naruto¡¯s Rasenshuriken in the original storyline had failed to kill him. Ay had single-handedly fought the Eight-Tails to a standstill, exhausting both himself and the tailed beast. He¡¯d even managed to hold off ten thousand Iwagakure shinobi on his own, only falling after three days and nights of relentless battle. For most shinobi, defeating Ay would seem impossible. But Hui had a solution. The concept of Ay¡¯s "strongest shield" and "strongest spear" was a paradox that reminded Hui of a technique Naruto would one day use to defeat him: using his own attack against him. As Ay charged in with the Four-Finger Thrust, Hui¡¯s eyes sharpened, and a mysterious pattern appeared in his pupils. His enhanced vision, now rivalling the Uchiha¡¯s Mangeky¨­ Sharingan or the Hyuga¡¯s Byakugan, allowed him to track every nuance of Ay¡¯s movement with precision. He could feel his eyes evolving, as though they were on the verge of awakening new powers. With his Heavenly Eye fully active, Ay¡¯s movements slowed in Hui¡¯s perception, and his path became crystal clear. Summoning a Rasengan, Hui met Ay¡¯s charge head-on. Ay¡¯s expression shifted with satisfaction. His Four-Finger Thrust could be adjusted in an instant¡ªHui was walking into his trap. At thest moment before contact, Ay narrowed his eyes and withdrew three fingers, changing his technique. Hell Stab: One-Finger Thrust! The single-fingered thrust was Ay¡¯s ultimate attack, a lethal spear of chakra powerful enough to pierce anything. In that moment, Hui sensed the deadly intensity of the chakra spear. Taking this attack head-on would shatter his arm and rip through half of his torso. But Hui¡¯s eyes gleamed with determination. He twisted his body at thest possible instant, dodging the spear by a hair¡¯s breadth, and drove his Rasengan directly into Ay¡¯s wrist. The impact bent Ay¡¯s arm inward, forcing his thrust to turn against himself, and Ay¡¯s own spear impaled his right chest. ¡°Urgh!¡± Ay staggered, his eyes wide with disbelief as he copsed to the ground, blood seeping from his mouth. ¡°It seems that while your shield is strong, your spear is deadlier,¡± Hui remarked quietly, standing over the fallen Ay. This battle was his victory. join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 115 Chapter 115 Looking down at the fallen Raikage, Mochizuki Hui couldn¡¯t help but reflect. If he hadn¡¯t already known how to counter Ay¡¯s "strongest spear and shield," he might have had a gruelling battle ahead. He would have had to pull out all the stops, from genjutsu to light-based sword techniques. But defeat? That had never crossed his mind. Hui was confident¡ªthere were few left in the shinobi world who could best him now. Even with his prior knowledge of Ay¡¯s weakness, Hui had approached the fight with the utmost respect. That¡¯s why he hade himself, not leaving the job to a clone. Only his true form could fully wield the power of his Heavenly Eye, which had been essential in this fight. In a sense, the battle had been decided from the very start. Hui¡¯s knowledge of Ay¡¯s abilities created a critical advantage. The Raikage was powerful, but the information gap was insurmountable. ¡°Now, only ¨­noki remains,¡± Hui murmured, wondering how the battle with his clone and ¨­noki was progressing. ¡°But my shadow clone carries ny percent of my strength¡ªit should be enough to handle him. Right?¡± With that, he approached the incapacitated Raikage and applied a Binding Seal. Although Ay was clearly exhausted and couldn¡¯t fight back, Hui didn¡¯t want to risk any surprises. After all, a desperate shinobi could be unpredictable. He had no intention of killing Ay, so after binding him, Hui used medical ninjutsu to stop the bleeding. Without treatment, Ay would likely have bled out. Hoisting the Raikage over his shoulder, Hui began leaping back toward Uzushiogakure. As he moved, a thought struck him¡ªhe should further improve his shadow clones, perhaps finding a way to share vision or even synchronize thoughts with them. But would that cause mental strain? He sighed, mulling over theplexities of the technique. Meanwhile, his final clone had just wrapped up its battle. ¡°Cough¡­ I lost three years ago, and now, three yearster¡­ I lose again,¡± ¨­noki muttered, his hands braced against the ground as he struggled to catch his breath, looking worn and battered. His face was pale and damp with sweat, and tears streamed from his eyes, leaving a stinging sensation in his heart. A fresh scar ran from his left shoulder to his lower right ribs, still bleeding. He was utterly drained¡ªhis chakra reserves nearly depleted. ¡°You must have known that in the three years since ourst fight, I¡¯d only grown stronger,¡± Hui¡¯s clone said, towering over him as if reiming victory from three years prior. ¡°Don¡¯t worry; I¡¯m not going to kill you. You still have your uses.¡± ¨­noki looked up, incredulous. ¡°I¡¯m puzzled. Why haven¡¯t Ay and the Kazekage returned yet? Don¡¯t tell me your shadow clone could hold out against both of them for this long¡ªthat¡¯s impossible. Did you lead them into some trap when you fled?¡± As Hui¡¯s clone gazed at ¨­noki in silence, a wave of relief swept over the Iwagakure shinobi, sensing that Hui wasn¡¯t nning to end his life. He wasn¡¯t sure why Hui had spared him or what ¡°use¡± he could be, but he wasn¡¯t about to question his fortune. ¡°A trap? If that¡¯s how you want to interpret it, sure,¡± Hui replied. Hui let ¨­noki think what he wanted; there was no need to rify the truth and unnecessarily spark the old man¡¯s pride. Hui¡¯s clone, though nearly as strong as his original form, still held only ny percent of his full power. If ¨­noki decided to fight with desperation, it could prove costly. ¡°So it¡¯s true¡­ Hui, I¡¯m curious. Even if you¡¯ve managed to capture me, what¡¯s your n for Uzushiogakure¡¯s current situation? Are you foolish enough to think you could use me as leverage to negotiate for the vige¡¯s safety? If that¡¯s your aim, forget it. They¡¯d prefer I die here rather than be used as a bargaining chip by you.¡± ¨­noki attempted to gather his chakra to stand, but the effort was futile¡ªHui had sealed his chakra, rendering him powerless. In his mind, ¨­noki reyed the battle and the techniques Hui had used. He¡¯d been struck by that same binding seal that had immobilized Ay, as well as by the overwhelming force of Hui¡¯s ¡°Silver Moon¡± and ¡°Light¡± techniques. Hui¡¯s arsenal was vast, with each jutsu one that an ordinary shinobi would spend a lifetime perfecting. Witnessing Hui¡¯s continued growth and the breadth of his abilities, ¨­noki couldn¡¯t shake the bitter feeling that he was looking at the next Hashirama or Madara. ¡°No, I don¡¯t have any such intention. But you¡¯ll understand what I have nned soon enough. For now, just follow me back to Uzushiogakure,¡± Hui replied, urging ¨­noki to walk ahead. Defeated, ¨­noki had no choice but to obey. Back in Uzushiogakure, the battle had already ended. With Hiruzen Sarutobi, Danzo Shimura, and their reinforcements, the allied shinobi from various viges were forced to surrender after sustaining heavy losses. Those who remained alive realized that continuing the fight would only mean certain death. Reluctantly, they surrendered, hoping that once Ay, ¨­noki, and the Kazekage returned, they might still serve as hostages in negotiations. Hiruzen and Danzo understood this motivation and epted the surrender. ¡°Danzo, keep an eye on these prisoners. I¡¯m taking a team to go support Hui,¡± Hiruzen said, his voice tinged with urgency. His concern for Hui¡¯s safety was evident. ¡°No, leave them to White Fang,¡± Danzo replied, decisively. At this stage, his heart was still free from the darkness that wouldter consume him, and he was just as anxious about the young prodigy, Hui¡ªthe light of Konoha. ¡°Alright, White Fang, watch over them. We¡¯re going,¡± Hiruzen agreed. He turned to Sakumo, who nodded in acknowledgment, prepared to guard the captives. But Sakumo¡¯s lips curved into a slight smile as he turned to Hiruzen and Danzo. ¡°I don¡¯t think you¡¯ll need to go anywhere.¡± The two Kage-level shinobi froze, looking at Sakumo in confusion. Sakumo wasn¡¯t looking at them, though. His gaze was fixed on the distance. ¡°Because the Deputy Commander has already returned.¡± Hiruzen and Danzo spun around, eyes widening at the sight before them. From afar, Mochizuki Hui was approaching with calm, measured strides, carrying the unconscious body of the Third Kazekage over one shoulder. With a few leaps, hended gracefully before the assembled shinobi. Hui gave a slight nod. ¡°No need to go anywhere. My clone and main body will be back with Oniki and Ay in no time.¡± join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 116 Chapter 116 ¡°Main¡­ main body? What does that mean?¡± Sarutobi Hiruzen asked, bewildered. ¡°It means that this isn¡¯t the original¡ªjust an avatar. Hmm¡­ you could think of it as a shadow clone,¡± replied another voice from the forest. Everyone turned to see another Mochizuki Hui emerging, this time carrying the unconscious figure of Ay. It was the true Hui. With a few quick leaps, hended beside the group, gently cing Ay on the ground. ncing toward the forest, he said, ¡°It seems we¡¯re all here now.¡± ¡°Indeed, all here,¡± came yet another voice. Hui appeared once more, this time alongside the exhausted figure of ¨­noki as they emerged from the trees. Seeing this, the assembled shinobi¡ªwhether from the Uzumaki n, the various viges, or even Konoha itself¡ªwere left utterly speechless. Some felt as though their minds were ying tricks on them, or worse, that they¡¯d fallen under a genjutsu. ¡°Weren¡¯t you asking how I¡¯d resolve this crisis?¡± Hui said to ¨­noki, jolting the elder shinobi from his stupor. Looking around, ¨­noki took in the sight of the unconscious Ay and the Third Kazekage, along with Sarutobi Hiruzen, Shimura Danzo, and three versions of Hui himself. Dizzy and disoriented, he struggled to find words. ¡°You¡­ you¡­!¡± he stammered, finally too stunned to say anything coherent. ¡°What is going on?!¡± Hiruzen demanded, still in shock. ¡°Ah, as you can see, it took some effort, but I was able to subdue all three of them,¡± one of Hui¡¯s clones said, turning to Hui¡¯s original self. ¡°Now that you¡¯re here, we¡¯ll be on our way. Everyone, goodbye.¡± With that, both shadow clones disappeared into thin air. ¨­noki¡¯s eyes widened, his breathing in short, heavy gasps. ¡°I was defeated¡­ by a shadow clone?!¡± He couldn¡¯t ept it, the idea that he, a renowned shinobi, had been outmatched by a mere shadow of Hui¡¯s strength. ¡°Not exactly a shadow clone,¡± Hui replied calmly. ¡°I call it a ¡®Shadow Manifestation,¡¯ an enhanced version of the shadow clone technique.¡± It was just a name, after all, and he didn¡¯t mind revealing it. A surge of humiliation and bitterness washed over ¨­noki. He opened his mouth, but no words came. All he felt was defeat, a bone-deep feeling that weighed him down, making him slump with resignation. ¡°This¡­ this is absurd!¡± shouted one of the elite j¨­nin from the allied viges, his voice filled with disbelief as he looked between the unconscious bodies of Ay and the Third Kazekage and the defeated ¨­noki. These were no ordinary shinobi but legendary figures in the ninja world, and yet they¡¯d all been defeated by one person. He couldn¡¯t fathom it. ¡°I must be trapped in a genjutsu! Release! Why won¡¯t it break?!¡± he cried, furiously attempting to dispel the illusion. After several failed attempts, he copsed to his knees, muttering incoherently to himself. Chiyo watched in stunned silence, sighing deeply. She looked at Hui¡ªthe young shinobi who had singlehandedly defeated three sessors to the title of Kage. It was something she¡¯d never thought possible, something that should have been unimaginable. Her mind drifted to the battle. Four Kage-level shinobi, ten elite j¨­nin, and more than thirty regr j¨­nin had marched in, determined to obliterate the Land of Whirlpools and take down Hui in the process. But it hadn¡¯t gone as nned. The Mist Vige had been forced to retreat after a single ambush and a few well-chosen words. The remaining forces were dismantled, with half of their soldiers killed or captured. And the three leaders they¡¯d relied on were now lying defeated. It all felt like a dream¡ªone she couldn¡¯t wake from. Lost in thought, Chiyo¡¯s resolve faltered, and she felt an unexpected wave of despondency. This bewilderment wasn¡¯t limited to Chiyo. Shinobi from the allied viges stared in silent disbelief, questioning everything they thought they knew. Even the Uzumaki n, who had won the battle, felt uncertain about how to react. It was a decisive victory, one that had preserved Uzushiogakure, but they were too stunned to feel joy. They couldn¡¯t help but stare at Hui, a storm of emotions surging through them. Uzumaki Suihei was no different, still frozen in astonishment. For a fleeting moment, he felt like he was looking at his brother-inw, Hashirama Senju¡ªbut no, Hui was something else entirely. ¡°Konoha¡­ has given rise to a truly remarkable shinobi,¡± he murmured quietly. The Konoha shinobi, meanwhile, had moved past their initial shock, ovee with admiration and pride. This was especially true for the members of the ANBU. Many of them had joined the organization because of tales about the Konoha''s Ghost. Now, standing before them was that very figure¡ªtheir Deputy Commander, the young shinobi who had defeated three Kage-level enemies alone. Regardless of the methods he¡¯d used, there, lying before them, were the unconscious bodies of two Kage-level shinobi and a third, humiliated and resigned. This feat was something beyond imagination, something practically unheard of in the ninja world. And yet, they were witnessing it now, in the flesh. It had been aplished by none other than their Deputy Commander, Mochizuki Hui. ¡°As expected of our Deputy Commander,¡± Sakumo Hatake said, his gaze filled with admiration. ¡°From now on, Konoha¡¯s light will illuminate the entire ninja world.¡± ¡°Remarkable, Hui! I never imagined your strength had reached this level!¡± Hiruzen marveled, unable to contain his admiration. He¡¯d known Hui since he was six, having watched over him for the past nine years as he grew from a promising young shinobi into a powerhouse capable of defeating three Kage-level foes. The sight filled Hiruzen with a deep sense of pride and satisfaction, a sense of shared achievement. Even Shimura Danzo, usually reserved, couldn¡¯t hide his amazement. Though he hadn¡¯t interacted much with Hui, he had long regarded him as an exceptional junior. Over the years, he had been increasingly impressed by Hui¡¯s strength and reputation, and when Hui took on the role of Deputy Commander of the ANBU, he¡¯d seen him as a rising talent of the next generation. Yet, today, Danzo was forced to recognize that Hui had already transcended thatbel. Hui¡¯s strength and intellect were now beyond his own, and perhaps even surpassed Hiruzen¡¯s. A strange feeling of inadequacy and bewilderment welled up inside Danzo. ¡°Why are you all standing there in a daze? Let¡¯s clear the battlefield,¡± Hui said with a small smile as he noticed everyone staring at him. He understood that what he¡¯d aplished today might seem shocking to them. The group snapped to attention, responding almost instinctively with a resounding, ¡°Yes!¡± In that moment, Hui wasn¡¯t just their Deputy Commander¡ªhe was their leader, Konoha¡¯s shadow in every sense of the word. join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 117 Chapter 117 With the crisis in the Land of Whirlpools drawing to a close, only the final wrap-up remained. ¡°Hui, what do you n to do with these captives?¡± asked Sarutobi Hiruzen, as he and Hui surveyed the aftermath. Their victory was significant¡ªmost of the elite forces from the allied viges had been wiped out, and they had sessfully captured three future Kage candidates, along with several elite j¨­nin from Iwagakure, Kumogakure, and Sunagakure. ¡°Well, we¡¯ll be ransoming them back to their viges. If they want their people returned safely, they¡¯ll need to pay a substantial price,¡± Hui replied without hesitation. In warfare, victory was only valuable if it could be leveraged for gains, and the lives of the captured Kage candidates were no exception. ¡°Still, let¡¯s report back to Grandpa Tobirama first and see what he thinks before we make any final decisions,¡± Hui added. Despite having a n in mind, he knew that Tobirama, as Hokage, should make the ultimate call on such matters. ¡°You¡¯re right,¡± Hiruzen nodded in agreement. ¡°With such high-ranking captives, we can¡¯t handle this lightly.¡± ¡°Lord Hui,¡± Uzumaki Suihei approached Hui, gratitude shining in his eyes. ¡°If it weren¡¯t for you, Uzushiogakure would surely have fallen today, and the Land of Whirlpools itself might have been destroyed.¡± Hui turned to him and spoke with equal sincerity, ¡°Uzushiogakure and the Uzumaki n have always been Konoha¡¯s closest and most trusted allies. As a shinobi of Konoha, I can¡¯t stand by while others threaten you. And besides,¡± he continued with a warm smile, ¡°this is Granny Mito¡¯s homnd. You¡¯re her family. If anything happened to you, she¡¯d be heartbroken.¡± Suihei was deeply moved. Hui, at just fifteen years old, already exhibited wisdom, loyalty, and maturity beyond his years. ¡°Still¡­ while Uzushiogakure survived, half of the Uzumaki n outside the vige¡­¡± Hui trailed off with a sigh. ¡°I just hope that the other viges will stop targeting the Uzumaki.¡± Suihei¡¯s expression tightened at Hui¡¯s words, and a shiver of dread ran through him. The attack had been swift and unexpected, and if it hadn¡¯t been for Hui¡¯s intervention, the Land of Whirlpools would have been devastated, and the Uzumaki n might have been wiped out entirely. Even though the n had survived, the cost was steep. Half of the n members outside Uzushiogakure had perished, and the vige had lost nearly a fifth of its resources to the Mist ninjas who escaped earlier. A loss of twenty percent might be manageable for now, but if other viges continued to view the Land of Whirlpools as a target, their future was bleak. A homnd was impossible to defend continuously. Today¡¯s victory had only been possible thanks to Hui¡¯s intervention and strategy. But what about the next time? If Konoha was too far to respond quickly, the n¡¯s fate would be inevitable. The thought alone made Suihei¡¯s breathing shallow. How could he face his ancestors if, under his leadership, the n was eradicated? ¡°These other viges suffered heavy losses here today,¡± Hui continued, breaking into Suihei¡¯s thoughts, ¡°so they¡¯ll likely bear a grudge against the Land of Whirlpools. Konoha will do its best to protect you¡­¡± Hui¡¯s tone was deliberately cautious, his voice quiet with a hint of uncertainty. His goal was clear: he wanted the entire Uzumaki n to relocate to the Land of Fire. But he wasn¡¯t about to say it outright. Instead, he needed Suihei to recognize the threat on his own and ultimately ask Konoha for help. That way, the power would remain in Konoha¡¯s hands. And as expected, Suihei¡¯s anxiety deepened at Hui¡¯s words. He opened his mouth to respond but couldn¡¯t find the words. ¡°Don¡¯t worry,¡± Hui reassured him. ¡°For now, the Land of Whirlpools should be safe.¡± The implication was clear: in the short term, there was little to fear, but beyond that¡­ ¡°Let¡¯s go and reinforce the seals on these three,¡± Hui suggested, tactfully steering the conversation away. Rushing Suihei wasn¡¯t necessary; the longer he mulled over the situation, the more obvious the choice would be. Without a safe haven, the Uzumaki n would eventually face extinction. ¡°Yes, three Kage-level shinobi¡­ not a risk we can take,¡± Hiruzen agreed, ncing at ¨­noki, Ay, and the Third Kazekage. The sight made him pause, a hint of mncholy crossing his face. They were all shinobi of his generation¡ªonce rivals in the previous ninja war, each leading their respective viges. Yet here they were, subdued and defeated by a single shinobi who was little more than a boy. The sheer absurdity of it made him feel like he was dreaming. Once word of this victory spread, he knew the ninja world would be in shock. But it was the kind of story that would be impossible to keep quiet about. Hui¡¯s strength had reached a level that no longer needed concealment. The impact he would have now wouldn¡¯t inspire caution but rather pure awe. This¡­ this was true power. join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 118 Chapter 118 Konoha, Hokage¡¯s Office. Tobirama Senju scanned the report in his hands, his usually stern face softened with a rare hint of a smile. It was a mission report from Mochizuki Hui detailing the events in the Land of Whirlpools. As he read, Tobirama couldn¡¯t help but feel satisfaction at what he saw¡ªeverything he had hoped for, and more. As someone who understood Hui¡¯s potential better than anyone, Tobirama was aware of the young shinobi¡¯s strength. So, though it was impressive to hear that Hui had taken down ¨­noki and two other Kage-level shinobi alone, it wasn¡¯t entirely shocking. What did impress him, however, was Hui¡¯s handling of the situation¡ªhis strategies, his careful treatment of the Uzumaki n, and the clever ns he devised for his captives. At that moment, Tobirama felt a new thought arise in his head. Until now, he had seen Hui as a future Hokage, although he had always intended for Sarutobi Hiruzen to seed him as the Third Hokage, with Hui perhaps following as the Fourth. After all, Hui was only fifteen; it seemed impossible to appoint someone so young as the leader of the vige. But now¡­ watching Hui¡¯s unprecedented growth, Tobirama felt himself wavering. Hui wasn¡¯t just strong¡ªhe was already every bit the equal of Hiruzen. In fact, Hui might even surpass Hiruzen in several ways,cking only the years of experience. So why insist that Hiruzen should be Third Hokage while Hui waited for the fourth position? Fifteen may be young, but twenty... twenty wasn¡¯t so unreasonable. If Tobirama remained Hokage for just five more years, he could pass on the mantle directly to Hui. As the thought cemented in his mind, Tobirama made his decision. He would pave the way for Hui to be Konoha¡¯s Third Hokage. With a firm mind, he sent a response to Hui, instructing him to handle the situation as he saw fit and promising to support any consequences that followed. It was both a remarkable show of trust and a significant test. This approach would bring Hui to the forefront, familiarizing Konoha and the ninja world with his presence and leadership. Slowly, he would delegate responsibilities to Hui, helping everyone grow ustomed to the idea. And when the time came, the vige would be ready for a Hokage at the young age of twenty. Meanwhile, Hui, upon receiving Tobirama¡¯s reply, was momentarily taken aback. Giving out such authority was a rare urrence, and he knew the responsibility it carried. But Tobirama had given him the freedom to handle things himself, so he quickly set his n in motion. Not long after, the hidden viges of Iwagakure, Kumogakure, and Sunagakure received a rather pointed ¡°bill¡± from Hui. The message informed the viges that the shinobi they had sent had disrupted peace efforts in the region and uwfully invaded a neighbouring country. Their actions had caused immense harm to the sovereignty and well-being of the Land of Whirlpools¡¯ citizens. As a result, Konoha, as an ally of the Land of Whirlpools, had detained these individuals for educational purposes. As the viges responsible for these shinobi, Iwagakure, Kumogakure, and Sunagakure were expected to pay restitution for the damage caused. The bill included a detailed list of reparations: supplies, scrolls containing powerful jutsu, and a fee for Konoha¡¯s ¡°services.¡± The message ended with a warning: should they refuse to bear responsibility, Konoha would be forced to take further actions to seek justice for the people of the Land of Whirlpools. When the scrolls arrived at the viges, they ignited a firestorm. The three major viges initially dismissed the demands as an borate scheme, confident it was impossible. They had, after all, secretly sent three Kage-level shinobi on this mission. Not even Tobirama himself could have defeated and captured them all. But as they delved deeper, uncovering the reality about the Land of Whirlpools mission, their disbelief turned to shock. The reports were urate¡ªtheir three elite shinobi had indeed been captured by Konoha, led by none other than Mochizuki Hui. It defied reason, a feat that shouldn¡¯t have been possible. As they learned more about Hui¡¯s carefullyid ns, his reputation in the ninja world surged, and word of his astonishing victory spread. ¡°For one shinobi to take on three Kage-level opponents¡­ and capture them?!¡± whispered one shinobi. ¡°This is unbelievable! Those three are not ordinary shinobi but esteemed figures from thest ninja war. Each of them a prodigy in their vige!¡± ¡°It¡¯s more than that. I¡¯ve heard that each of those Kage candidates was being groomed to be their vige¡¯s next leader, and that¡¯s why they were entrusted with the mission to the Land of Whirlpools. But to think that ¡®Konoha''s Ghost¡¯ could capture all three of them¡­¡± ¡°He¡¯s terrifying. Isn¡¯t he only fifteen?¡± ¡°You¡¯re not wrong. I¡¯ve kept an eye on him, and I never would¡¯ve imagined he¡¯d grow so powerful in just three years.¡± ¡°A Kage at fifteen? It¡¯s almost like an illusion, something out of a genjutsu¡­¡± ¡°A Kage at fifteen? You underestimate Konoha''s Ghost,¡± another voice corrected. ¡°Don¡¯t forget, Hui reached the Kage level three years ago, at twelve, when he killed two Kage-level opponents in the ANBU War.¡± ¡°That¡¯s true. Hui became a nightmare to his enemies during that war. Now, he¡¯s even stronger, taking on three Kage-level shinobi at once. His strength is¡­ frightening.¡± ¡°Maybe¡­ Konoha really will give rise to another Hashirama Senju.¡± As they discussed Hui¡¯s feats, the ninja world was flooded with a mixture of shock, fear, and awe at the emergence of someone who could rival the legacy of the First Hokage. join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL (1/2) bonus chapter for hitting 200 ps in webnovel Chapter 119 Chapter 119 Mochizuki Hui had never intended to keep the events in the Land of Whirlpools a secret. He knew it was impossible to hide such arge-scale incident, and honestly, why should he? He was no longer the promising child prodigy of his younger days, when secrecy had been essential to avoid bing a target for the other hidden viges. Back then, Hui had been powerful, but drawing too much attention would have hindered his growth. But now, his strength had ascended to an entirely new level¡ªhe was the shinobi who had taken on three Kage-level opponents and won. His abilities were among the best the shinobi world had to offer, rivaling even the Kages of the Five Great Shinobi Viges. Why conceal his abilities now? Knowledge of his strength no longer threatened him; if anything, it would serve as a deterrent. Just as the world knew of the ¡°fastest shinobi alive,¡± Tobirama Senju. Everyone was aware of his techniques¡ªthe Flying Thunder God, Reanimation Jutsu, his mastery over water-style jutsu¡­ Yet who would dare to attack Tobirama to stop him from growing stronger? Tobirama¡¯s reputation alone was enough to ward off any would-be threats. Now Hui found himself in a simr position. His strength had reached a level where, even if others learned of his abilities, no one would dare to challenge him. So, for the first time, he could stand in the open, unrestrained, and let his abilities shine without fear. It wasn¡¯t long before the story of what happened in the Land of Whirlpools spread across the shinobi world. Hui¡¯s name now reached beyond the ears of vige elites and ANBU operatives, reaching ordinary shinobi and even civilians. He had truly be a household name across all thends. ¡°Is it even possible for a fifteen-year-old to aplish all this?¡± Teenage shinobi everywhere were struck with a strange mixture of awe and despair. They were the same age as Hui, yet the gap between them was a chasm¡ªalmost as though they existed in different dimensions. For many, especially those who¡¯d been considered ¡°geniuses¡± in their own right, this realization led to frustration and disillusionment, and for some, it marked the beginning of a shadow that would loom over them indefinitely. In the eyes of ordinary shinobi and civilians, Hui¡¯s aplishments were nothing short of miraculous, even difficult to believe. Many had heard the name ¡°Mochizuki Hui¡± before, but it had quickly faded from memory. After all, the shinobi world was full of prodigies, many of whom eventually fell short of their potential, either reaching their limits early or dying young. Few paid attention to yet another ¡°talented child.¡± But now, avoiding Hui¡¯s name was impossible. ¡°Fifteen years old¡­ already Kage-level? This is unreal!¡± ¡°Agreed! I could maybe believe it if he were twenty-five, but fifteen? It just doesn¡¯t make sense.¡± ¡°But the j¨­nin and higher-ups are saying it¡¯s true, so it must be.¡± ¡°But¡­ fifteen? At that age, he¡¯s still just a boy! How could a boy hold such overwhelming power?¡± Some were still skeptical; after all, Hui¡¯s feats defied everything they believed about the limits of what a human could achieve. However, as the rumors grew and confirmation came from senior shinobi across the hidden viges, the world had no choice but to ept the truth: the stories of Konoha¡¯s Mochizuki Hui were real. At that point, the entire shinobi world seemed to erupt with excitement. Every corner buzzed with discussions about Hui, with almost seventy percent of the poption now knowing his name. In the midst of this fervor, someonepiled a biography of Hui, detailing his life and achievements with uncanny precision, almost as if it had been written by someone who had been by his side all along. The document began to circte widely: Mochizuki Hui: A Timeline
  • Six years old: Graduated from Konoha¡¯s ninja academy, joining the ANBU directly afterward, setting the record as the youngest ANBU member in history.
  • Six to seven years old: Worked on securing the Hokage¡¯s protection team until the First Great Ninja War broke out. During his first mission against enemy forces, Hui¡ªalongside an eleven-year-old teammate¡ªtook down an elite ch¨±nin.
  • Seven years old: Reassigned to the rear defense line of the Konoha-Kirigakure battlefield, hepleted numerous missions, including killing a j¨­nin from Kirigakure inbat as a ch¨±nin-level shinobi. Soon after, he was assigned to a high-stakes assassination, eliminating a noble under heavy guard¡ªtwo sensory-nin, several j¨­nin, and ch¨±ninpleting the mission without being detected and elerating Konoha¡¯s progress in the war.
  • Seven to eleven years old: A mysterious four-year gap during which he reportedly trained under the Second Hokage, Tobirama Senju.
  • Eleven years old: Hui returned to ANBU in a covert operation known as the ¡°Cold War.¡±
    • Over the next year, he fought through countless battles, rising to be the youngest squad captain in ANBU history and establishing a reputation.
    • During this period, he killed two Kage-level shinobi¡ªincluding Iwagakure¡¯s ANBUmander¡ªand numerous elite j¨­nin and j¨­nin, including defeating a particrly famous foe: ¨­noki.
    • His actions during the ANBU War led Iwagakure to create an official mandate allowing their shinobi to abandon missions without repercussions if they encountered ¡°Konoha¡¯s Ghost¡± inbat.
  • Twelve years old: Became the youngest deputymander in ANBU history.
  • Twelve to fifteen years old: An apparent hiatus spent in training, during which little was heard of him.
Present: At fifteen, Hui reappeared on the world stage in what woulde to be known as the ¡°Land of Whirlpools Incident.¡± With a few calcted moves and negotiations, he convinced the Kirigakure forces to retreat, then used a wellid trap to outmaneuver the elite forces of three major viges. In the final battle, he defeated three Kage-level shinobi, each renowned as the next leader of their respective viges. ¡­. The impact of this biography rippled throughout the shinobi world, leaving all who read it in awe. Many shinobi found themselves humbled, some even daunted by their own inadequacy. Ordinary vigers, spellbound,mitted his name to memory, and among children across thends, a new idol emerged: Mochizuki Hui. ¡°What a genius¡ªhe¡¯s practically the next ¡®God of Shinobi!¡¯¡± ¡°With Hui, Konoha won¡¯t have to worry about anything for decades.¡± ¡°Why couldn¡¯t someone like that have been born in our vige?¡± ¡°For someone to be so strong at his age¡­ Hui really is Konoha¡¯s shining light.¡± ¡°Amazing! He¡¯s like a living legend!¡± ¡°Mochizuki Hui is destined to be a true legend of the shinobi world.¡± The entire shinobi world had been ignited by Hui¡¯s presence. join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 120 Chapter 120 In Kirigakure, the Third Mizukage sat silently, reading thetest report. When he had first encountered Mochizuki Hui at the Land of Whirlpools, the sudden ambush and a few choice words had forced him to retreat. He had left the battle with a seething frustration and a burning anger in his heart. After all, he had achieved only half his objectives; the most critical sealing techniques had eluded his grasp. In his mind, he had been the most disadvantaged among all the viges. But now, reading through the details of what had actually transpired, the Third Mizukage began to feel that maybe he had actually been lucky¡ªprofited, even. Yes, he thought, he hade out ahead. While his forces hadn¡¯t secured the powerful sealing techniques, he had sessfully withdrawn with the supplies he¡¯d taken from the Land of Whirlpools, returning to the Land of Water with minimal losses among his elite shinobi. Compared to the disastrous oues for ¨­noki and the others, his vige had fared extraordinarily well. ¡°This Mochizuki Hui... what a terrifyingly formidable youth,¡± the Mizukage murmured to himself. ¡°To think that he had such foresight and strength to maneuver all of us as if we were mere pawns.¡± He felt a tinge of respect alongside his lingering anger. Though he had been wounded in Hui¡¯s ambush, he hadn¡¯t fullyprehended just how powerful the boy was, capable of singlehandedly defeating ¨­noki and the others. It was hard to believe, but facts were facts. And yet, his mind turned to another question, and his gaze sharpened. ¡°I wonder how Mochizuki Hui ns to deal with those three... a wrong move, and the entire shinobi world could be at war.¡± A glint of hope flickered briefly in the future Mizukage¡¯s eyes, though it was quickly reced by caution. If war erupted, the three major viges would certainly unite. In such a conflict, Kirigakure¡¯s stance would be crucial in tipping the bnce. But then, his thoughts turned to the Second Hokage, Tobirama Senju, and his two formidable jutsu: the Flying Thunder God and the Reanimation Jutsu. The reason the Four Great Viges had lost the previous war was because of Tobirama¡¯s abilities. Less than a decade had passed since that war, and by all reports, Konoha had rebounded swiftly, growing even stronger than before. Inparison, while the other viges had also recovered, their rate of growth paled next to Konoha¡¯s. Despite their numbers, the thought ofunching an offensive was not as appealing when considering Konoha¡¯s newly increased strength¡ªespecially with Mochizuki Hui now among their ranks. ¡°A true shame... Konoha always manages to produce geniuses,¡± the Mizukage sighed, resigning himself to the thought that even if a new war started, it would aplish little. "Well, let''s wait and see how Mochizuki Hui handles those three. For now, Kirigakure has already gained its spoils." Mochizuki Hui was well aware that the Third Mizukage hade out ahead this time, but he wasn¡¯t particrly concerned. There was a saying, after all: ¡°Reckoninges in due time.¡± Some matters were simply a question of timing. Once he finished handling the situation at hand, he would eventually turn his attention to Kirigakure as well. ¡°Hui, those viges have responded,¡± Sarutobi Hiruzen announced, walking up with a stern expression. ¡°They¡¯re using us of uwfully detaining their shinobi, infringing on their personal freedoms, and demandingpensation. Otherwise, they say they¡¯ll dere war on Konoha!¡± Hearing this, Hui raised an eyebrow, then let out a dryugh. ¡°Seems they¡¯ve learned quickly.¡± His tone turned cold as he added, ¡°Tell them that if they don¡¯t hand over the reparations within three days, they can collect the corpses of ¨­noki and the others. And as for their threats of war, remind them that while Konoha doesn¡¯t seek war, we certainly don¡¯t fear it.¡± Hiruzen, catching the steel in Hui¡¯s tone, gave a simr smile. He, too, felt no fear. At this point, Konoha had be emboldened thanks to Hui¡¯s triumph in the Land of Whirlpools. Should any vige make the mistake of dering war, Konoha¡¯s shinobi were more than prepared to fight with everything they had. Hui¡¯s reply reached the other viges quickly, fanning the mes of outrage across their ranks. ¡°They¡¯repletely overconfident¡ªKonoha¡¯s bullying has gone too far!¡± ¡°Fine, then! Let¡¯s fight them! There¡¯s no way one vige alone can stand against all of us!¡± ¡°Just because they have Mochizuki Hui doesn¡¯t mean he¡¯s the seconding of Hashirama Senju! His arrogance is uneptable!¡± Outrage ran high, and some shinobi were eager tosh out at Konoha. But not everyone was so rash, and several voices urged caution. ¡°A war isn¡¯t that simple. If it came down to it, we¡¯re not guaranteed a victory.¡± ¡°Konoha¡¯s prosperity is undeniable; geographically, they¡¯ve flourished beyond what we could achieve over thest nine years.¡± ¡°And if we really did go to war, our top fighters¡ªeven without ¨­noki and the others¡ªcouldn¡¯t match Konoha¡¯s might. How could we hope to win?¡± ¡°Let¡¯s negotiate. This time, we¡¯ve taken a hit, but there¡¯s no reason to hand them everything they¡¯ve asked for.¡± In the end, the viges decided to negotiate with Hui, reluctantly admitting to themselves that the odds of victory were slim. Upon receiving the message, Hui merely chuckled. Negotiations were exactly what he had intended all along. Three dayster, representatives from the other viges arrived at Uzushio Vige to negotiate. After three more days of intense discussion, they finally reached an agreement. With that, the incident in the Land of Whirlpools drew to a close. Hui obtained a wealth of resources from the other viges, including various supplies, scrolls, and most importantly, critical war materials like explosive tags and specialized shinobi tools. Losing these would prevent the viges fromunching any major offensives for at least two years, as it would take that long to replenish these resources. In exchange, Hui agreed to drop his demands for certain high-level jutsu from the other viges. It was never his intention to im these jutsu in the first ce; they had merely been a bargaining chip to abandon during the negotiations. All in all, the oue was better than he had expected. Once the negotiations concluded, Hui released ¨­noki, Ay, and the Third Kazekage. However, each of them left with their chakra sealed by Hui¡¯s unique jutsu. These seals would take a year to dissipate, effectively neutralizing their abilities for that time. The year-long seal was his insurance. Although he was confident that no vige would dere war, there was always the chance that someone might act recklessly. With the seals in ce, the threat of immediate conflict was diminished. And why limit it to a year? Hui knew that within that time, his natural energy reserves would fully integrate into his chakra system, further amplifying his power. By then, his strength would have doubled, if not more. At that point, he would have no need to fear any of the Four Great Viges. join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 121 Chapter 121 With the crisis in the Land of Whirlpools over, the future of the Uzumaki n still rested on the shoulders of Uzumaki Suihei, the n head. Recently, he found himself living each day under the weight of a difficult decision, gued by sleepless nights as Mochizuki Hui¡¯s words echoed in his mind. Slowly, Suihei realized that the Uzumaki n now stood at a critical crossroads. One misstep, and their fate could be sealed in disaster. The world had changed drastically since the Warring States Era. Back then, the ns held the greatest power and ruled as independent forces. A mighty n was its own authority, protected by its own strength. But as the era of the Hidden Viges dawned, ns across the shinobi world fell from dominance. In the current age, even the most powerful ns found themselves defenseless against the might of the Five Great Hidden Viges. It wasn¡¯t just the Uzumaki n. No n, regardless of strength, could thrive independently in the new world order. Now, the only viable path for any n was to integrate with a powerful Hidden Vige, developing under its protection¡ªjust as the Uchiha and Hyuga with Konoha, the Kamizuru with Iwagakure, and the Hozuki with Kirigakure had done. Each of these ns still retained significant influence within their viges, and they faced little of the danger that loomed over independent ns. While forming arge Hidden Vige on their own was another option, Suihei knew this path was nearly impossible. Building a Hidden Vige required rapid expansion, an influx of people, and resources they simply did not have. The ns would need countless children, raised and trained over time, to form a sufficient force for a vige. But realistically, it was an impossible task. Suihei knew what he had to do to safeguard the n¡¯s future; he saw it clearly. The only path forward was to join a powerful vige. But the Uzumaki were different from other ns. They had already achieved the ultimate goal of a n: forming their own nation, a symbol of their independence and strength. The Uzumaki n had always been proud of this, and it had set them apart from others. However, this very independence now barred them from gaining the shelter they needed. As a fully-fledged shinobi nation, they were like a sapling growing in the shade of towering trees. They were perceived as apetitor by the Great Viges, and Suihei knew that none would tolerate an independent power in their midst. He had long understood these risks but had avoided facing the decision. The Whirlpools¡¯ alliance with Konoha seemed secure enough, and he had thought that at least during his time, the n might be spared any major threat. It was aforting illusion, but the recent crisis had shattered it. The Uzumaki, far from secure, were merely viewed as a prize by stronger powers. The slightest opportunity would see them torn apart. This time, they had survived. But what about next time? How could they defend themselves when they were already so weakened? If he didn¡¯t make a choice soon, he might be known as the n head who lost the Uzumaki homnd and condemned the n to ruin. Now, two pathsy before him: One, continue as before, with high odds of losing everything. Or two, dissolve the Land of Whirlpools and seek refuge under Konoha. Such a choice would be a betrayal of his father¡¯s vision, the dream of a proud Uzumaki nation. Faced with these painful choices, Suihei grew frustrated. He wished he could pass this burden to someone else. Unless... he could simply step down? The thought struck him suddenly. He could choose to leave the position. That way, he wouldn¡¯t be the one dismantling the Land of Whirlpools, and he could avoid the guilt of undoing his father¡¯s legacy. Once he stepped aside, the responsibility would fall to someone else. ¡°Yes, I could step down!¡± Suihei decided at once. He would resign as both n head and the Daimy¨­ of the Land of Whirlpools. And as for his sessor, the choice was obvious: his daughter, Uzumaki Mina. Mina was young, but that wasn¡¯t an issue. As his daughter and the granddaughter of the previous n head, she was the natural choice. And while her strength wasn¡¯t quite on par for a leader yet, Suihei could guide her from the sidelines until she grew into the role. "Then it¡¯s decided,¡± he murmured with a smile, his heart lighter than it had been in weeks. Soon after, Suihei called a high-level meeting and presented his proposal, exining the necessity of joining Konoha. Faced with the facts, the Uzumaki elders, all survivors of the recent events, quickly agreed to his proposal. They understood the dangers of istion all too well now. As for Suihei¡¯s decision to appoint Mina as the new n head, none objected. The Uzumaki had always observed a strong tradition of direct session, and as Mina was from the main family line, her position was a natural one. Furthermore, her role would present an opportunity for others to join the main family line through marriage, which was an appealing prospect for the various branches of the n. And so, at just seventeen, Uzumaki Mina found herself unexpectedly crowned as the n head of the Uzumaki and the Daimy¨­ of the Land of Whirlpools. Well¡­ it onlysted for a few days though. Her first act as Daimy¨­ was to initiate negotiations with Mochizuki Hui regarding the Uzumaki¡¯s integration into Konoha. Hui, naturally, weed the move, though he pointed out that the final decision rested with the Second Hokage, Tobirama Senju. Tobirama, upon hearing of this unexpected yet advantageous proposal, was more than happy to approve the Uzumaki n¡¯s request. Mina, then, issued her first and onlymand as Daimy¨­ of the Land of Whirlpools: the dissolution of the country. As the newly appointed n head, she dered the Uzumaki n¡¯s relocation to the Land of Fire, officially joining Konoha. join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 122 Chapter 122 The vige of Konoha was as lively as ever, bustling with people and vibrant with peace. Amidst the crowd, three figures emerged from the Senju n¡¯s residence¡ªMochizuki Hui, Uzumaki Mina, and Tsunade. ¡°Alright, let¡¯s go. I¡¯ll show you around Konoha today,¡± Hui said, smiling. Uzumaki Mina¡¯s eyes sparkled with excitement. Since her arrival, she had eagerly awaited a chance to explore Konoha, her new home. Now, after meeting with Tobirama Senju and Uzumaki Mito, she was bursting with anticipation. Tsunade, however, couldn¡¯t shake a slight difort upon seeing Mina¡¯s admiration for Hui. The look of reverence Mina gave him stirred something instinctive, somethingpetitive. ¡°Sure! I¡¯ve been waiting for this!¡± Mina said happily, her natural excitement making her appear even younger than her seventeen years, with no trace of the gravity usually expected of a n head. ¡°We haven¡¯t been out in a while either,¡± Tsunade said with a grin, linking her arm with Hui¡¯s as she spoke. ¡°I want grilled chicken!¡± ¡°Alright, alright, we¡¯ll get some,¡± Hui chuckled, yfully ruffling her hair as they strolled down the main street of Konoha. As they wandered deeper into the heart of the vige, the streets began to fill with people. Each step they took seemed to attract even more attention. The three of them together were quite the sight, after all. ¡°Ah!¡± A sudden shriek from a teenage girl nearby interrupted the hum of the crowd, pulling all eyes in Hui¡¯s direction. He turned, slightly confused, to see what themotion was about. ¡°It¡¯s him! Mochizuki Hui¡ªKonoha''s Ghost, Light!¡± the girl cried, eyes wide with disbelief. Her shout sparked a ripple of recognition among the crowd. ¡°Mochizuki Hui! Is it really him?¡± ¡°Konoha¡¯s Light! He¡¯s back!¡± ¡°Where? Where¡¯s Hui?¡± More voices joined the rising chorus as heads turned, and a growing wave of people surged toward them. It wasn¡¯t long before Hui waspletely surrounded by a throng of vigers, each eagerly moring for his attention. ¡°Hui, is it true that you defeated three Kage-level shinobi by yourself?¡± ¡°Hui, I adore you!¡± ¡°Hey, Hui, you were amazing out there!¡± ¡°Would you like some dumplings, Hui? They¡¯re delicious!¡± ¡°I made this for you, Hui, please take it!¡± Offers of food, gifts, and admiring words flooded toward him. Everyone wanted a piece of the vige hero. After the events in the Land of Whirlpools, Hui¡¯s legend had spread throughout the shinobi world, and Konoha was no exception. The people of Konoha had grown up with Hui¡¯s story, watching him rise from a young prodigy to the symbol of hope for their vige. Hui¡¯s aplishments made him a hero to the citizens, an idol to the young, and a role model to all. His return to Konoha stirred the entire street into a frenzy. Hui couldn¡¯t help but feel a mix of emotions, feeling both gratitude and the weight of their high expectations. ¡°Wow, Hui! You¡¯re super popr here!¡± Mina said in awe, her eyes full of admiration. ¡°Of course he is!¡± Tsunade said proudly, holding Hui¡¯s arm just a bit tighter, as if silently stating her im. News of Hui¡¯s return spread like wildfire, and soon even more vigers¡ªespecially the younger shinobi and children¡ªwere running to join the crowd. The scene quickly escted, drawing the attention of Konoha¡¯s security, the Uchiha Police Force. When the Uchiha officers arrived, they attempted to disperse the crowd, but their efforts only seemed to add to the confusion. ¡°Enough! Clear the way or I¡¯ll have to take action!¡± one officer shouted sternly, looking ready to force people back. ¡°Yeren!¡± Another officer quickly grabbed his arm, stopping him from going too far. But some of the vigers noticed and began to mutter. ¡°See? The Uchiha n¡ªthey¡¯re just like people say!¡± one person whispered, stirring the officer¡¯s irritation further. He took a step forward, but the senior officer held him back firmly. Hui watched the scene thoughtfully, noting the tension with the Uchiha. The police force''s irritation with the vigers, coupled with the vigers¡¯ suspicion toward them, painted a picture he couldn¡¯t ignore. He realized it was time to address these tensions soon. Seeing the swelling crowd and knowing they couldn¡¯t stay here much longer, Hui spoke up, urging everyone to disperse and quickly guiding Tsunade and Mina away. ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Mina. I¡¯d hoped to show you around, but things got out of hand.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it, Hui. It just shows how much everyone appreciates you!¡± Mina smiled warmly. ¡°And I can always explore on my own.¡± ¡°I can show you around, Mina,¡± Tsunade interjected. ¡°Hui can stay here.¡± ¡°Yes, please!¡± Mina replied instantly, her eyes lighting up. She had really wanted to see more of the vige, so Tsunade¡¯s offer was perfect. ¡°Alright, you two go ahead. I actually need to speak with Tobirama about a few things anyway,¡± Hui said, smiling as he watched them go. The incident with the Uchiha n was still fresh on his mind, and he¡¯de to a decision¡ªhe needed to learn more about Konoha¡¯s major ns, especially the Uchiha. Since joining the vige, Hui had always felt somewhat distanced from the other ns. Besides the Senju, he had little contact with them. Even ns allied with the Hokage, like the Sarutobi, the Yamanaka, Nara, and Akimichi, remained somewhat isted. Yet Hui understood that if Konoha was to grow stronger, the vige¡¯s ns would need to unify and support one another. Above all, Hui was deeply aware of the importance of understanding the Uchiha. A n with powerful bloodline abilities and a somewhatplex rtionship with the vige, the Uchiha held an influence that could shape Konoha¡¯s future in unpredictable ways. join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 123 Chapter 123 The Uchiha n is one of the most famous ninja ns in the world of Naruto. You could even say it''s the most renowned of all, because the members of the Uchiha n are truly extraordinary. Theye in all types, and each one seems to be overpowered. Especially Uchiha Madara, Uchiha Obito, Uchiha Itachi, and Uchiha Sasuke¡ªthe four great madmen of the Uchiha. They are incredibly famous. Uchiha Madara was the mastermind behind masterminds, one of the future super big bosses, and one of the few individuals at the Six Paths level. He''s known as Lord Madara. Although he spent most of his life in deception and his life ended in a tragedy, it doesn''t diminish his personal charisma in the slightest. Uchiha Obito is another overpowered character. His life was even more tragic than Madara¡¯s, also spending most of his life deceived. But he''s also one of the masterminds and a future Six Paths level ninja. As for Uchiha Itachi, there''s no need for much introduction; he''s practically a cheat code himself. Regarding Uchiha Sasuke, he could be called the cheat among cheats¡ªa Six Paths level ninja at seventeen and one of the strongest in the ninja world at eighteen. Besides these four, there are other well-known Uchiha n members who are equally impressive. For example, Uchiha Shisui and his Kotoamatsukami; Uchiha Fugaku, the father of Itachi and Sasuke; Uchiha Izuna, the old rival of the Second Hokage Senju Tobirama; and one of Tobirama''s subordinates, Uchiha Kagami. Not to mention the techniques like Izanagi and Izanami. In any case, this ninja n is quite remarkable. However, at this time, the situation of this n in Konoha wasn''t very good. Senju Tobirama had no goodwill toward the Uchiha n; his brother died at the hands of the Uchiha, and his elder brother also died because of Uchiha Madara. Now that he''s the Hokage, it was extremely unlikely the Uchiha would have a good time. Take the Konoha Police Force, for example. It sounds prestigious and indeed holds real power and significant authority, but it alsoes with great responsibilities and easily offends vige folks. Since the Uchiha took charge of Konoha''s security, their reputation in the vige has worsened. Yes, it only worsened. The Uchiha n''s reputation in Konoha has never been particrly good. They''re too arrogant as a n, always with cold expressions, looking down on everyone. Bncingw and emotion was challenging, and the Uchiha are cold on the outside but warm on the inside. Because of theirw enforcement duties, they appear somewhat unfeeling in daily life. As a result, the Uchiha npletely lost the people''s support. Moreover, being excluded from Konoha''s upper echelons and having almost no friendly ninja ns in the vige, they lost both public support and the possibility of producing a Hokage. Not only that, but thebination of the Konoha Police Force and the Uchiha n makes their future increasingly difficult. Yet the Uchiha are too powerful, possessing strength that was hard to ignore. This power can''t be utilized by the Hokage, and with Uchiha Madara''s maniptions behind the scenes, the vige''s leadership gradually became wary of them. Especially since the future leaders of Konoha were Senju Tobirama''s subordinates, all influenced by his thinking. Various factors led to the Uchiha n''s tragic ending: being forced into extinction. Mochizuki Hui felt quite regretful about this oue. After all, if the Uchiha n were utilized properly, they could be the sharpest de, capable of piercing the heart of every enemy! Therefore, Mochizuki Hui wanted to try changing the Uchiha n''s future destiny. Knock, knock, knock! "Come in." In the Hokage''s office, Senju Tobirama looked at the entering Mochizuki Hui and spoke: "Hui? You handled the situation with the Land of Whirlpools well. But it''s rare for you toe here on your own initiative. Is there something you need?" Hui nodded, getting straight to the point. ¡°Tobirama-sensei, I came across something that left me feeling a little puzzled.¡± Without revealing his thoughts outright, he exined the scene he had witnessed earlier with the Uchiha in the streets, describing the tension he sensed and the concerns it raised. ¡°Tobirama-sensei, I agree that the Uchiha are well-suited for the police due to their Sharingan, but¡­ is it the best fit for them, considering their personalities?¡± Tobirama paused, studying Hui with a long, assessing look, before replying in a rather indirect way. ¡°The Uchiha are a unique n,¡± he said atst. ¡°They possess a profound depth of emotion. Their capacity to love is unlike that of any other n. But when a Uchiha loses someone they hold dear, that love can turn to hatred, just as intense.¡± His voice hardened. ¡°It¡¯s an unstable n, one inherently drawn to extremes. They are proud to a fault, rarely epting others¡¯ goodwill, and even less likely to admit fault. There have been rare exceptions¡ªmy former subordinate, Kagami Uchiha, for instance, was among the few able to look beyond his n¡¯s dogma. But people like him are scarce¡ªperhaps one or two in a generation at most.¡± Tobirama¡¯s gaze grew distant, a chill permeating his words. ¡°So I would say that the Uchiha, as a whole, are not a n filled with individuals with goodwill. In fact, they¡¯re closer to a n born with an inherent inclination toward evil.¡± He fell silent, awaiting Hui¡¯s reaction. Hui took in the words of Tobirama with a quiet sigh. It was clear that Tobirama¡¯s prejudice against the Uchiha ran deep. Hui understood that Tobirama, having witnessed Madara¡¯s power, feared the possibility of another such figure rising from the Uchiha ranks. Only his elder brother, Hashirama, could contain Madara¡¯s strength, and Hashirama¡¯s ability to suppress him came from his unique Wood Release, a power that died with him. The Uchiha, however, were different. They held numerous Sharingan within their ranks, each with the potential to evolve into a Mangekyou Sharingan. And with each Mangekyou, therey the chance of producing another Uchiha Izuna¡ªor worse, another Madara. Without Hashirama¡¯s Wood Release to bnce such power, Tobirama¡¯s only recourse was vignce. For Tobirama, the mere hint of instability was enough to justify ruthless measures. The man had even developed forbidden techniques to face his former rival, Izuna Uchiha, ultimatelying out on top only because of a brief moment of carelessness. Even now, Tobiramacked confidence in his ability to take down Madara. The best he could hope for was a stalemate. Thus, Tobirama¡¯s policy toward the Uchiha was upromising: at the first sign of unrest, eliminate them without hesitation. join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 124 Chapter 124 Hui fell silent under Tobirama Senju¡¯s piercing gaze. The Uchiha n was indeed problematic¡ªa ticking time bomb, ready to explode at the slightest provocation. Their strength came from their bloodline, meaning any one of them could suddenly grow stronger without warning. And because this growth was fueled by emotions, it was often difficult to predict when, or if, it might turn explosive. Once they lost the person or thing they loved, the Uchiha would be dangerously intense, and this intensity was unpredictable¡ªwho knew if it would take a turn for good or bad? But Hui didn¡¯t believe the Uchiha were inherently evil. They were simply¡­ a group of passionate people, perhaps a bit proud and extreme at times. ¡°Maybe the Uchiha are extreme,¡± Hui began earnestly, looking directly at Tobirama. ¡°But they aren¡¯t purely evil. Love and hatred are both natural emotions, emotions all people should have, and there¡¯s no inherent right or wrong in either. Good and bad only lie in how you use the power love and hate create. ¡°If the Uchiha¡¯s intensity serves to protect Konoha and its people, then the n isn¡¯t inherently evil. With proper guidance, the Uchiha could even be a force of inherent good!¡± Tobirama stared back, listening closely, before responding, ¡°You think I haven¡¯t considered this? But as I said, the Uchiha are a proud people. In their hearts, they¡¯re never wrong! They won¡¯t listen to any guidance, Hui. They don¡¯t care about the opinions of others, nor will they change for anyone else.¡± ¡°No, it can be done,¡± Hui replied, voice resolute. ¡°If they were incapable of change, they would never have joined Konoha, never be a part of the vige, or agreed to take on the responsibilities of the Konoha Police Force. If they¡¯ve already done these things, then they can do more!¡± Tobirama¡¯s expression grew intense as he retorted, ¡°Hui, do you know who inspired the Uchiha to make those changes? My elder brother, Hashirama Senju¡ªthe one revered as the God of Shinobi. Until him, no one else could change the Uchiha. ¡°My brother seeded because he conquered Madara Uchiha, the most powerful Uchiha of his time. So, unless you can be the next God of Shinobi, the Uchiha will never be changed! Do you think you¡¯re capable of that, Hui?¡± Tobirama¡¯s gaze was unyielding, pressing Hui to answer. Of course, Tobirama had already thought of all this. As Hokage, he would¡¯ve dly wielded the Uchiha¡¯s strength if he could control them fully. But Tobirama was Senju Tobirama, not Senju Hashirama. He had been able to defeat Izuna Uchiha, but Madara was another matter. Only his brother could suppress Madara¡¯s power, especially with the Wood Release technique unique to him. Tobirama himself didn¡¯t have that. In the long history of the Shinobi World, there had been only one Hashirama Senju. ¡°I can!¡± came Hui¡¯s confident response. Tobirama looked into his eyes and saw sincerity, confidence, and an unyielding will. ¡°And why do you think that?¡± Tobirama pressed, his gaze growing sharper. ¡°Because I am Konoha¡¯s Light, Mochizuki Hui!¡± Hui replied without hesitation. He stared back at Tobirama, his eyes steady and clear, filled with conviction. Hui believed he could do it. At just fifteen, he was already on par with the Kage of the five great viges. Soon, his body¡¯s assimtion of natural energy would beplete. He might not yet match the peak power of Hashirama or Madara, but he would certainly surpass the other vige leaders. And his growth wasn¡¯t stopping there. Hui was certain he could grow to match the likes of Kaguya Otsutsuki and even surpass her one day. This wouldn¡¯t take as long as people thought. Hui had the confidence to change the Shinobi World, and he had the strength to do it! Tobirama chuckled, a smile tugging at the corners of his mouth. A sudden warmth settled over him. Yes, because the boy before him was Mochizuki Hui¡ªa child who had never disappointed him, one who constantly exceeded his expectations. Hui was the Light of Konoha, the Ghost of the Shinobi World, and, in Tobirama¡¯s heart, the ideal candidate for the Third Hokage. ¡°Good,¡± Tobirama said. ¡°Then I look forward to seeing a new Uchiha emerge one day.¡± After a brief pause, Tobirama continued, ¡°However, while I¡¯m still Hokage, my policy toward the Uchiha will remain unchanged.¡± Hui was taken aback, uncertain of Tobirama¡¯s intention. Tobirama exined, ¡°The Uchiha¡¯s change must happen in the next era¡­ your era. So, Hui¡ªdon¡¯t let me down.¡± Hui¡¯s eyes widened, taking in Tobirama¡¯s implication. The next era, his era. Tobirama intended to groom him as the Third Hokage! In all honesty, Hui hadn¡¯t expected this. He knew Tobirama wanted to train him for a future role as Hokage, but he hadn¡¯t imagined that he would be chosen as the Third Hokage specifically. He was only fifteen! And by all appearances, Sarutobi Hiruzen seemed the more likely candidate for Third Hokage. But that was the reality before him: Tobirama had made his decision. Hui¡¯s heart swelled with gratitude and a growing sense of duty. If Tobirama trusted him this deeply, Hui wouldn¡¯t shrink back or disappoint that faith. ¡°Understood, Grandfather Tobirama,¡± he said, his voice ringing with conviction. ¡°I will change the Uchiha! Not just the Uchiha¡ªI¡¯ll change all of Konoha, the entire Shinobi World. I¡¯ll make this world a better ce. Because I am Konoha¡¯s Light¡ªI am Mochizuki Hui!¡± ¡°Then, let¡¯s see it,¡± Tobirama replied his voice tinged with excitement, and his eyes filled with anticipation. For the first time, he wished that time could hurry forward, so he could see where this remarkable young man would lead Konoha and, perhaps, the entire Shinobi World. With that, their conversation came to a close. Hui refrained from pressing further about the Uchiha because now he understood Tobirama¡¯s thoughts. Yes, the Uchiha¡¯s transformation wouldn¡¯t happen under Tobirama¡¯s leadership. In fact, in Tobirama¡¯s era, the Uchiha¡¯s path would likely only grow more challenging. But sometimes, it was those who endured hardship who would most appreciate the beauty that followed. Only by facing adversity during Tobirama¡¯s time as Hokage could the Uchiha truly value the changes brought about in Hui¡¯s era as the Third Hokage. join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 125 Chapter 125 Time flowed quietly, another year passing since the Land of Whirlpools incident. The shinobi world had returned to a semnce of calm, like ake with no ripples on its surface. But beneath this tranquillity was a slow undercurrent, ready to erupt and spread across the entire shinobi world when the time came. In a modest room within the Senju n¡¯spound, sixteen-year-old Moonlight Huiy motionless on a bed. He¡¯d been lying there for a long time¡ªnot due to injury or any mishap, but because the natural energy within him was nearingplete assimtion. This transformation was unlike his previous assimtions of light energy or chakra; this time, the natural energy had triggered deeper changes in Hui¡¯s body, casting him into a deep slumber. This wasn¡¯t Hui¡¯s first time in a state like this, though, and Tobirama Senju and the others weren¡¯t overly concerned. If anything, his physical attributes seemed to grow stronger during this sleep, so Tobirama arranged for the utmost security around him, making it the most secure ce in Konoha. As Hui slept, natural energy gathered in the room in thick waves, drawn from the surrounding environment and steadily absorbed into his body. He was instinctively taking in this energy while he slept, a phenomenon that, if others saw it, would leave them dumbfounded. Thankfully, only three people and one beast in Konoha knew about it: Mito Uzumaki, Tobirama Senju, Jiraiya¡ªand the Nine-Tails. Mito sensed the growing concentration of natural energy around Hui thanks to her sensitivity to energy as the Nine-Tails¡¯ jinchuuriki. Tobirama was aware due to his research on natural energy, though he had never managed to harness it. And Jiraiya¡ªhe had trained in Sage Mode for four years and instantly recognized what was happening. When he first detected Hui¡¯s absorption of natural energy, he had been stunned. Understanding what was happening, Jiraiya¡¯s eyes had gone red with envy. After years of back-breaking training, struggling against the risk of turning to stone, he could finally absorb natural energy. Meanwhile, for Hui, the natural energy practically willed itself into his body. The Nine-Tails was even more affected, feeling as if his worldview had shattered. Just what was this kid? Was he really not a tailed beast? Or maybe some kind of new species altogether? The fox¡¯s mind whirled as he sensed Hui¡¯s growing power that felt increasingly inhuman. For another month, natural energy continued to umte in Hui¡¯s room, even condensing into a thin mist. Tobirama noticed this strange phenomenon, yet, after confirming Hui was in no danger, he focused only on strengthening security around him. Then, something remarkable happened: Hui¡¯s entire body became encased in a translucent cocoon, a massive egg-like shell formed from condensed natural energy. Evenpared to the Sage Lands¡ªthe three greatnds of Mount Myoboku, Ryuchi Cave, and Shikkotsu Forest¡ªthe natural energy in his room at the moment was unparalleled. Tobirama had a feeling that once Hui awoke, he would undergo aplete transformation. The awakening was near; Tobirama even dispatched a shadow clone to handle Hokage duties so he could personally stand watch outside Hui¡¯s room. Several elite Jonin of the Senju n joined him, all waiting for Hui¡¯s awakening. Finally, one day, a faint cracking sound came from within the room. Tobirama rushed inside and saw that the translucent cocoon surrounding Hui was emitting a faint glow and starting to crack. Crack! Crack! Tobirama¡¯s eyes narrowed as he leaped back, withdrawing from the room. As he watched from outside, the entire room erupted into light, transforming into a brilliant source of radiance that illuminated its surroundings with dazzling splendour. After a long moment, the light subsided. Hui, slightly dazed, opened his eyes. Slowly, he sat up, taking in the room around him with a slight dizziness. Shaking his head, he closed his eyes briefly before reopening them to steady his vision. In that instant, rity washed over his mind, and he remembered everything. ¡°It seems¡­ this time, I¡¯ve gained quite a lot this time,¡± he murmured to himself, closing his eyes to sense the changes in his body, a faint smile curling his lips. ¡°You¡¯re awake, Hui.¡± A voice interrupted his reflections, and Hui turned to see Tobirama standing nearby. ¡°Grandfather Tobirama, I¡¯m grateful for your care during this time,¡± Hui replied, unaware of the exact details of what had happened, but still considerate enough to express gratitude. ¡°It appears you¡¯ve gained much from this experience. Take some time to adjust to your growth ande find me when you¡¯re ready,¡± Tobirama advised, noting Hui¡¯s altered presence and leaving him to process the transformation. After Tobirama departed, Hui closed his eyes once more, immersing himself in the sensations of his new form. Atst, he opened his eyes. These were no ordinary eyes. They seemed to contain entire gxies, ancient histories, and a profound understanding of the world. Glowing runes¡ªsymbols of divine power¡ªfloated within his gaze, casting a shimmering light. Testing his abilities, Hui¡¯s body moved in a sh, and he found himself outside, hand gently enclosing a small bird perched on a tree branch. He looked into the bird¡¯s eyes, and the markings in his own began to emit a faint glow. Suddenly, a force emerged from within the bird, a mysterious essence that Hui drew toward himself. It was¡­ life force! In his hand, the bird appeared to weaken. Its form remained the same, but an unnatural frailty took hold of it, its eyes dimming, almost as if the creature were on the verge of death due to old age. Hui¡¯s smile widened. The markings in his eyes shifted, reforming into another pattern as a stream of life energy flowed back from him into the bird. Instantly, it regained its vitality, eyes brightening with life. Though, it seemed slightly less lively than before, as if its life force hadn¡¯t entirely returned. ¡°I never would have imagined¡­ my eyes have gained the ability tomand life force!¡± Hui¡¯s voice was filled with excitement. The sheer scope of this power stunned even him. ¡°With one thought, I can bestow life¡­ and with another, take it away. These are truly the eyes that govern life itself!¡± join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 126 Chapter 126 A year ago, Hui had felt something stirring within his eyes, as if they were developing a unique power. He had wondered about it, imagined what it might be, but he hadn¡¯t expected the ability to control life force itself. It was so overwhelming a power that he could hardly believe it. Still, Mochizuki Hui was calm by nature. Rather than get carried away, he focused on understanding the extent and limits of his new abilities. After some testing, he discovered his power in detail. Firstly, it only worked on living beings. He could drain life force from other organisms or grant it to them¡ªwhether human, summon beasts, or ordinary animals. But he couldn¡¯t affect inanimate objects; stones, for instance, which had no life force to begin with and couldn¡¯t retain it. Secondly, his ability to drain life force had limits. For example, if the life force of a typical person equaled one unit, he could currently only extract a tenth of a unit at once. Additionally, there was a cooldown period: he could only use his ability again after an hour. The same cooldown applied to granting life force, and each use only allowed him to transfer about one-fifteenth of a unit. This exined why, after using both drain and restore abilities on the bird, it still seemed weaker than it had initially. Mochizuki Hui also found that he could only retain a small fraction¡ªabout a tenth¡ªof the life force he absorbed, while the rest would dissipate shortly after. After thoroughly exploring his new ability, Mochizuki Hui couldn¡¯t help but feel a bit deted. His power seemed impressive on the surface, but the limited amount of life force he could drain or restore in a single use was practically insignificant inbat. Draining a tenth of a person¡¯s life force would do little more than leave them mildly fatigued, like having a light cold. It certainly wouldn¡¯t be enough to weaken an enemy in a meaningful way. It quickly became clear that unless he could extract far more life force per use, this ability wouldn¡¯t be useful in a fight. Imagine if he could drain an entire unit of life force from an ordinary person¡ªhe could end their life instantly or, conversely, restore someone near death state to full strength. Such a quantity would even weaken a powerful ninja considerably. But that was all spection; for now, he had no way to extract that much, and the one-hour cooldown time further limited its practical use. "Did I just end up with a shy but useless power?" Hui sat on the rooftop, pondering why fate had seemingly toyed with him. ¡°No, life force is too profound a concept to be this limited. There must be more I¡¯m not seeing,¡± he reasoned, refusing to give up. There had to be something he was missing that would reveal the full potential of his power. He spent hours thinking, but the answer eluded him. Finally, he sighed. ¡°Maybe this ability will grow stronger with time¡ªa skill that matures as I do,¡± he muttered to himself, hoping that, eventually, he¡¯d be able to controlrger quantities of life force. But still, he couldn¡¯t fully shake his frustration. This power felt too strong to leave up to chance. Then, suddenly, inspiration struck. He jumped to his feet, his eyes alight. ¡°Of course! Life force¡ªit¡¯s meant to be used differently!¡± Hui''s whole demeanor brightened as he pieced it together, grinning widely. ¡°The real power isn¡¯t just about granting and taking away. It¡¯s in the essence of life force itself!¡± He quickly sat down, closed his eyes, and concentrated. Just as he¡¯d hoped, he could sense an entirely new type of energy within himself alongside the light energy, chakra, and natural energy he already wielded. It was life force. ¡°Yes! Let me assimte it!¡± hemanded, feeling his internal energy¡ªhis original essence, Primordial Yuan Qi¡ªbegin to move, slowly drawing the life force toward it, absorbing and assimting it. This was the true potential of life force: rather than merely taking or giving it to others, he could integrate it within himself. Primordial Yuan Qi could devour, assimte, and transform any energy, and life force was no exception. Just imagining the possibilities made his heart race. With enough life force assimted into his Yuan Qi, he might attain near-immortality, with healing abilities surpassing even Hashirama Senju. Hui envisioned himself recovering instantly from wounds, his lifespan stretching across centuries, possibly millennia, as he continued to live within the Shinobi World. ¡°The speed of assimtion is excruciatingly slow¡­ but, for life force, that¡¯s only to be expected,¡± he muttered, a mix of frustration and satisfaction on his face. He estimated it would take at least ten years¡ªlikely longer¡ªto fully assimte life force at this rate. But the reward was worth the patience, he was strong as it is, and would only continue to grow stronger, as he¡¯d gain not only longevity but regenerative capabilities beyondpare. ¡°Now, it¡¯s just a matter of time.¡± He whispered, jumping down from the rooftop. Looking at his hands, Mochizuki Hui grinned. He was eager to explore any other transformations his body might have undergone. After all, with power like this, there was no limit to how far he could go. join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 127 Chapter 127 Having fully grasped his eye¡¯s life-force control and the proper way to use it, Mochizuki Hui turned his focus to examining his body. Testing his physical abilities, he found that his strength, speed, and reflexes had all reached new heights, with greater resilience and tougher defenses. His entire physical prowess had evolved considerably, elevating his taijutsu prowess as well. In fact, the improvement was so vast that his current self could utterly outmatch the Hui of a year ago. Previously, his taijutsu alone was at the level of a Kage, surpassing 99.9% of the shinobi world. Few taijutsu users could evenpare to him then. But now, if his skills were measured solely in taijutsu, he felt confident he was the second-strongest in the shinobi world. Why second? It wasn¡¯t because of the Raikage, A, who also specialized in ninja-style taijutsu. Mochizuki Hui felt that his taijutsu skills were nearly equal to A''s, even slightly superior in certain aspects. The reason he ranked himself second was because of a low-profile shinobi in Konoha, a certain bushy-browed shinobi named Might Duy. Duy was training in a physically overwhelming taijutsu technique called the Eight Gates Formation. Unlike in the original timeline, where Might Duy remained a ¡°genin-for-life,¡± Hui had met Duy one evening by chance. Intrigued by Duy''s spirit and determination, and knowing his potential, Hui mentioned him the next day to Tobirama Senju. This single remark had piqued Tobirama¡¯s interest. After a period of observation, Tobirama was convinced of Duy''s resolve and began providing him with resources to develop his taijutsu skills and master the Eight Gates Formation. Yearster, Duy could now open the Seventh Gate. As for the Eighth Gate¡ªthe Gate of Death¡ªHui didn¡¯t know if Duy could ess it yet, but should he unlock it, Duy¡¯s taijutsu prowess would instantaneously rise to the top of the shinobi world. That was why Hui considered himself only second in taijutsu; Duy alone stood in his way. However, the Eight Gates was a technique unique to Konoha, known only by Duy, who would never stand as Hui¡¯s enemy. So in practical terms, Mochizuki Hui had no rivals in taijutsu across the shinobi world. Satisfied with his body¡¯s transformation, Hui turned his attention to his Yuan Qi. After this metamorphosis, he could now harness twice the Yuan Qi he had before. The increase seemed modest, but in actual practice, the change was astonishing. If Hui¡¯s previous limit was ten units of energy, but now, it was twenty. What did this mean? Mochizuki Hui had nearly achieved ¡°energy freedom,¡± eliminating energy concerns during battles. With twenty units of energy, he could perform a vast array of jutsu, including many powerful,rge-scale techniques. ¡°My body hasn¡¯t disappointed me¡ªI''m much stronger now.¡± Hui nodded in satisfaction. This transformation ced him among the shinobi world''s elite, with power rivaling, and perhaps even surpassing, the Kage of the Five Great Shinobi Viges. His current strength was only slightly below Hashirama Senju and Madara Uchiha but well above the Kage level. He could rightfully be considered a ¡°demi-god¡± of the shinobi world. Of course, this wasn¡¯t some shallow "demi-god" like Hanzo of the Smander. Mochizuki Hui''s strength was the real deal. "But, I¡¯m not done yet." Hui¡¯s eyes lit up, as he didn¡¯t think thistest surge in power was the end of his journey. After all, the energy he had assimted was natural energy. In the world of Naruto, there were only a few ways to ¡°cheat¡± one¡¯s strength. Aside from bloodline limits and tailed beasts, one of the most renowned methods was Sage Mode. From Jiraiya and Naruto to Kabuto and Hashirama Senju, the boost in strength from Sage Mode had been shown to be extraordinary¡­except in the case of the unlucky Fourth Hokage. Minato had barely demonstrated Sage Mode before facing the Six Paths Madara and getting immediately overpowered, giving no chance to show its advantages. Sage Mode, in essence, allowed a ninja to harness natural energy to create ¡°Sage Chakra.¡± This enhanced both offensive and defensive abilities, extending the range of taijutsu attacks and heightening perception. It amplified the user¡¯s ninjutsu, taijutsu, and genjutsu abilities, granting a significant increase in power. In Sage Mode, a ninja could even inflict severe,sting damage on ten-tailed beasts or their jinchuriki¡ªSix Paths-level foes. Generally, the use of Sage Mode would alter a ninja¡¯s appearance, and a full Sage Mode required distinctive eye markings. However, Hui wasn¡¯t sure whether his Sage Mode would have these markings. Yes, his Sage Mode. Having fully assimted both chakra and natural energy, Mochizuki Hui could now ess a Sage Mode unique to himself. He didn¡¯t rush to create Sage Chakra or enter Sage Mode right away, though, as he had another question in mind. What was the ultimate purpose of Sage Mode? The goal of Sage Mode was to allow a ninja to use natural energy, increasing their offensive and defensive capabilities. While Sage Chakra primarily amplified ninjutsu, taijutsu, and genjutsu, Sage Mode¡¯s essence wasn¡¯t about producing Sage Chakra. It was about granting ess to natural energy. After assimting natural energy, Hui realized he didn¡¯t need to enter Sage Mode at all. His base state was already a unique Sage Mode. Unlike Naruto and others, who were bound by a time limit in Sage Mode, Hui¡¯s state was permanent. It was the difference between a limited-time trial and a full, permanent transformation. Now, Mochizuki Hui was no longer simply human. He was something beyond¡ªa true Sage. A Sage, Mochizuki Hui. join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 128 Chapter 128 Marveling at his transformed body, Mochizuki Hui couldn''t help but feel a thrill of excitement. He was nearly at the very peak of the shinobi world. "Did I just be unbeatable too fast?" he mused. He was only sixteen, after all. Other shinobi at that age were barely getting started. Then again, he thought,paring himself to Naruto or Sasuke at sixteen, both of whom had faced off against Six Paths Obito, Six Paths Madara, and even Kaguya Otsutsuki, was hardly necessary. They weren¡¯t even born yet. By the time they arrived, he would already be reigning supreme. After getting a clear picture of his abilities, Hui set off to find Tobirama Senju¡ªnot only to report his progress but to test his strength. While Hui was convinced he had reached the pinnacle of shinobi power, true strength had to be measured against other powerful opponents. And in all of Konoha, there were perhaps only a couple who could provide that kind of test. Tobirama was certainly one of them. Ten minutester, they arrived at an isted area outside Konoha. Hui intended to go all out, so the usual training grounds wouldn¡¯t suffice. ¡°Come, Hui. Let me see just how strong you are now,¡± Tobirama said, fully serious as he regarded the young man before him. He sensed an intensity from Hui that warned him this shinobi was now powerful enough to threaten even his own life. ¡°Alright, here Ie!¡± Hui¡¯s voice had barely faded before he vanished, reappearing an instantter right in front of Tobirama, delivering a punch infused with raw power. Boom! The sound of an explosion echoed through the area as Hui¡¯s punchnded on a massive boulder, shattering it into dust. ¡°As expected of Flying Thunder God!¡± Hui eximed with admiration as he looked at Tobirama, who had already reappeared some distance away. The spatial technique was incredible. But even as he spoke, Hui vanished again, reappearing beside Tobirama. Thud! This time, Tobirama used his own super strength to counter Hui¡¯s punch head-on. The impact caused the ground beneath them to explode outward in a cloud of dust. Tobirama was knocked backward, an exchange that left the hidden Anbu spectators wide-eyed with shock. In a pure test of strength, the Second Hokage had been overpowered! After sending Tobirama flying, Hui wasted no time in following up, closing the distance swiftly to continue his attack. But this time, Tobirama was done with closebat. He quickly threw out several Flying Thunder God kunai and vanished the moment Hui closed in. ¡°There!¡± Hui¡¯s enhanced vision, though not having evolved again, was sharp enough to instantly detect Tobirama¡¯s location. Once more, Hui seemed to teleport, appearing beside Tobirama in the blink of an eye. This unexpected speed made Tobirama momentarily pause his hand seals, forcing him to activate Flying Thunder God again. In an instant, their figures were flickering in and out of sight, darting across the battlefield in a dizzying blur. ¡°Does the Deputy Captain know Flying Thunder God? But¡­ where are his markings?¡± one of the observing Anbu asked in confusion, ncing at his squad leader. The captain shook his head firmly. ¡°No, the Deputy doesn¡¯t know the Flying Thunder God. I served under him for a time during the Anbu wars, and he¡¯s never used it.¡± ¡°Then¡­?¡± The Anbu operative was baffled. How could Hui seem to teleport without Flying Thunder God? ¡°It¡¯s just his speed!¡± the captain exined, awe in his voice. ¡°What you¡¯re seeing is merely his afterimage¡ªhe¡¯s that fast.¡± ¡°Afterimage?¡± The realization left the Anbu in stunned silence as he watched the fight. Such speed was terrifying. If he had to face an opponent like that, he wouldn¡¯t stand a chance. ng! ng! ng! In the sky, sparks flew continuously, but thebatants were moving too fast for anyone to see clearly. Their speed had pushed beyond what normal eyes could track. After another intense exchange, the two finally separated. Water Release: Water Dragon Bullet! A giant water dragon surged from behind Tobirama, roaring as it rushed at Hui. Hui leaped high, gathering chakra in his fist before mming it into the water dragon¡¯s head, shattering it with a single blow. Previously, he might have used Earth Release or a Water Dragon of his own to counter it. But now? It was not necessary. Boom! The water dragon burst apart, its watery form copsing back to the earth. Water Release: Water Severing Wave! Just as Hui obliterated the water dragon, a high-pressure water jet sliced toward him from the side. He inhaled deeply and then exhaled a powerful gust, bending the water beam¡¯s trajectory away from him. ¡°Impressive!¡± Tobirama¡¯s voice held genuine admiration. The Water Severing Wave was no ordinary technique. The high-pressure water stream was sharp enough to slice through Earth Release defenses effortlessly. Hui had seized on water¡¯s flexibility, redirecting the attack with Wind Release instead. As Tobirama spoke, Hui had alreadynded, spewing mes from his mouth without any hand seals. This wasn¡¯t ninjutsu¡ªit was pure natural energy. The Anbu watching from the shadows were awed, assuming it was some advanced seal-less jutsu. But Tobirama sensed no chakra in it. ¡°What is this?¡± Tobirama was taken aback. His hands formed seals swiftly, and a massive water wall spiraled up around him, forming a waterfall that crashed down toward Hui. The deluge overwhelmed Hui¡¯s fire in an instant. But Hui remained unfazed. He thrust his hands into the water pooling at his feet, and blue lightning crackled, surging into the water and transforming into a massive lightning dragon racing toward Tobirama. Once again, he had used natural energy without needing any seals. Hui was starting to relish this style of fighting! join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 129 Chapter 129 As the lightning dragon shot toward Tobirama Senju, itsck of chakra made it almost undetectable. Even Tobirama only noticed it when it was nearly upon him. His eyes narrowed, and he quickly activated Flying Thunder God to evade, but he was just a fraction too slow. The water-conducted lightning had already affected him, leaving his body momentarily stiff upon reappearing at his kunai. ¡°Another one?¡± Hui called, unleashing a second lightning dragon that surged toward Tobirama. Lightning was fast, whether in water or air, and in seconds, the dragon was snapping its jaws right beside him. Boom! A tremendous explosion echoed as the lightning dragon detonated, leaving a deep crater where Tobirama had been. He had managed to escape with Flying Thunder God, but Hui¡¯s eyes were sharp, tracking each of Tobirama¡¯s teleportation points. The moment Tobirama reappeared, Hui smashed one of the kunai marked with Flying Thunder God¡¯s seal to pieces. One by one, he systematically shattered every marked kunai around them. Finally, only a single kunai remained. "This is it!" Hui charged toward thest kunai with unshakeable confidence, sure of victory. But Tobirama didn¡¯t appear at the expected spot. Instead, he appeared directly behind Hui, aiming a kunai straight for his back. Flying Thunder God could be engraved on more than just kunai, after all. In his mind, Tobirama was already celebrating. Deceiving his enemies into overconfidence, only to strike when they least expected it, was a strategy he¡¯d often used¡ªone that had even taken down Izuna Uchiha. But Hui had anticipated this. He knew full well that Flying Thunder God could be marked on any object. With remarkable agility, Hui twisted his body, catching Tobirama¡¯s arm mid-attack. This reaction was nearly impossible for a typical shinobi, but Hui wasn¡¯t an ordinary ninja¡ªhe was a Sage, always in a heightened state of perception. His control and reflexes had reached superhuman levels. Hui activated his jutsu. Sealing Jutsu: Body Binding Seal! In an instant, Tobirama felt his chakra getting sealed off. "A sealing jutsu?!" he gasped. Hui¡¯s proficiency in a technique not recorded in the Scroll of Seals caught himpletely off guard. Although Tobirama knew how to break the seal, he had no chance to do so. Bam! Bam! Bam! With Flying Thunder God temporarily disabled, Tobirama was forced into closebat, where Hui¡¯s taijutsu prowessparable to the Third Raikage in his prime, and even enhanced by his Sage state¡ªput him at a clear advantage. Tobirama, who specialized in ninjutsu rather than hand-to-handbat, was quickly and thoroughly suppressed. ¡°The Second Hokage¡­ is actually losing!¡± one of the hidden Anbu murmured, barely able to process what he was seeing. Konoha¡¯s leader, one of the strongest shinobi in the world, was being dominated by Hui. Despite knowing of Hui¡¯s strength, witnessing him besting Tobirama firsthand was staggering. ¡°Hui is only sixteen, and yet he¡¯s already reached this level. Incredible!¡± ¡°I¡¯m sure of it now¡ªhe¡¯s going to be the next God of Shinobi!¡± another Anbu muttered. Tobirama, meanwhile, was equally astounded. He had sensed Hui¡¯s immense strength from their initial sh, but now, feeling the numbness in his arms and the ache throughout his body, he truly understood the extent of Hui¡¯s power. Hui¡¯s agility and perception were almost unnatural, allowing him to deftly avoid Tobirama¡¯sbat tactics. These traits reminded him of his older brother, Hashirama, but coupled with the natural energy aura Hui emitted, Tobirama suddenly blurted out, ¡°Sage Mode?!¡± Hui paused, a slight smile at his lips. ¡°It is Sage Mode, but¡­ not entirely.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s end here,¡± Tobirama finally conceded, nodding thoughtfully. Continuing would mean escting the fight to life-threatening levels, something he preferred to avoid. He had exhausted almost all his usual techniques, and genjutsu¡ªhis weakest skill¡ªwas practically useless against Hui, who far surpassed him in that area. Tobirama had a few unorthodox techniques remaining, but they were mostly forbidden jutsu designed for mutual destruction, a path he wasn¡¯t willing to take here. Reflecting on the battle, Tobirama felt a pang of nostalgia and pride. The boy he had watched grow up had, without him realizing, reached a level that surpassed even his own. And he was only sixteen! At this rate, Hui would soon be among the most powerful shinobi ever to walk the earth. For the first time, Tobirama had a thought: Mochizuki Hui could truly reach the level of his older brother, the legendary God of Shinobi, Hashirama Senju. And if he did¡­ Tobirama¡¯s eyes lit up with inspiration. Unlike Hashirama, Hui shared his political ideals, inheriting his beliefs and vision for Konoha. If Hui ascended to the status of a God of Shinobi, Konoha would be unstoppable. The entire shinobi world would be united under one banner. At that moment, Tobirama understood why Hui had been so confident when he dered his future ambitions. He could truly be the next God of Shinobi. join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 130 Chapter 130 Hearing Tobirama''s words, Mochizuki Hui nodded, though he felt a bit disappointed. He hadn¡¯t yet had his fill of battle¡ªthere were so many powerful techniques he hadn¡¯t used, especially his Light-based sword skills. Still, he understood that pushing Tobirama further might force him to use his forbidden jutsu, techniques meant for life-or-death situations. It wouldn¡¯t be worth taking things that far for a sparring match. ¡°Hui, tell me more about this ¡®Sage Mode¡¯ of yours,¡± Tobirama said, curious about Hui¡¯s current state and his sage mode. ¡°To be honest, I¡¯m not sure if what I have counts as Sage Mode,¡± Hui began. ¡°But I¡¯ve heard Jiraiya talk about it, and I realized my current state is pretty simr to what he described.¡± He paused, carefully choosing his words. He couldn¡¯t just outright say he¡¯d be a Sage, stronger than any typical user of Sage Mode. his only exposure to anything natural energy rted to was Jiraya, how would he exin his knowledge. ¡°From what I learned from Jiraiya, Sage Mode is a state that allows a shinobi to use natural energy. When I woke up from that sleep, I discovered that a new energy had appeared within me¡ªnatural energy itself! Like my original light energy andter chakra, natural energy is now something I can freely use.¡± ¡°Unlike light energy, natural energy forms techniques much more easily, like the ones you saw me use just now. And it¡¯s not just that¡ªit¡¯s made my body much stronger. My taijutsu, reflexes, and perception have all improved dramatically. I can sense more than ever before, like I can tap into a hiddenyer of the world.¡± Huiid out his current abilities one by one, and Tobirama¡¯s expression grew more serious as he listened. When Hui finished, Tobirama was silent for a moment before he finally said, ¡°This isn¡¯t just Sage Mode. You¡¯ve broken free from Sage Mode¡¯s time limitation!¡± As someone with some knowledge of Sage Mode, Tobirama understood that what Hui described matched the Sage state closely¡ªbut with an important difference. Most shinobi had to master Sage Mode gradually to ess natural energy and increase its efficiency. Hui, on the other hand, seemed to have reached Sage Mode naturally, without needing any special training to ess it. For most shinobi, using Sage Mode meant entering a temporary state to wield natural energy. But Hui¡¯s body already contained natural energy, meaning he was always in Sage Mode. To Tobirama, Hui wasn¡¯t just in Sage Mode¡ªhe was a true Sage. The term ¡°Sage¡± wasn¡¯t unfamiliar to Tobirama. Stories of the legendary Sage of Six Paths had existed for generations, though Tobirama¡¯s investigations into these stories had borne little fruit. Yet now, here was Hui¡ªa true Sage in the flesh. It was far beyond anything Tobirama had expected. Thest time Hui had emerged from one of his slumbers, his power had surged; Tobirama had anticipated a simr increase this time, but he hadn¡¯t expected it to be so dramatic. Hui¡¯s power was no longer even human¡ªit was something beyond. ¡°Still, you¡¯ve only been awake a short time, so more changes could happenter. For now, take some time to fully understand your body,¡± Tobirama advised, feeling that Hui¡¯s importance had be almost equal to that of the entire vige. In Tobirama¡¯s eyes, given a few more years of growth, Hui could secure a brilliant future for Konoha. Not only for the vige but for the entire shinobi world, he could transform the bnce of power, much like his brother had done when he brought an end to the Warring States Period and founded the shinobi vige system. A fully realized Mochizuki Hui could bring about a unified world, fulfilling Hashirama¡¯s dream ofsting peace. After the battle ended, Hui returned to the Senju npound, where he sensed Tsunade¡¯s chakra and realized she¡¯de back. She hadn¡¯t been on a mission¡ªpeace times meant fewer missions overall, and high-status n shinobi like Tsunade often left avable work to civilian shinobi, for whom missions were essential for survival. Any shortage of work could lead to discontent, and discontent bred unrest, which could eventually escte into internal conflict. Thus, for the sake of the vige, the ns willingly gave up many missions. Instead, Tsunade had been out training in medical ninjutsu, refining her skills, and nning a future medical ninja system for the vige. She dreamed that one day, every ninja team would have a skilled medic, improving survival rates for all. ¡°Hui, you¡¯re awake!¡± Seeing him, Tsunade¡¯s face lit up as she ran over and hugged him tightly. Though they¡¯d been together for a while, their feelings had only grown deeper over time. Hui returned her embrace, his heart settling into calm contentment. During the Anbu war, he had lost his sense of direction and purpose, but Tsunade had been the star that guided him through those dark days. For Hui, she was his "brightest star in the night sky," his guiding light through life. For Tsunade, Hui was her other half, an irreceable presence. ¡°As long as you¡¯re awake, that¡¯s all that matters,¡± Tsunade said, her words warming Hui¡¯s heart as he held her even closer. The skies were clear, and a gentle breeze drifted through the serene courtyard where they stood. Sakura petals floated gently down, like a soft rain, as the two held each other tightly amidst the falling blossoms. [tl/n: you might think the chapters are getting shorter, but not really, I¡¯m cutting down a lot of word padding the author has been using, to ensure a smooth read, without having to sift throug too much direscriptory words and redudndet information. Please leave ament if you have any suggestions.. Anyway, this¡¯ll be it for today, have a great day/night.] join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 131 Chapter 131 Three days slipped by, and during that time, Hui grew even more familiar with his body, fully mastering his newfound strength. His level of control had reached what could be called perfection. On the third day, he visited Tobirama Senju to report on his physical state. Just likest time, he kept his eye abilities a secret, simply stating that his vision had improved. Everyone needed a trump card, and his eyes were one of his most powerful. Satisfied with Hui¡¯s condition, Tobirama was pleased. Hui wasn¡¯t just a growing Sage; he was the shinobi destined to be the next God of the Shinobi World. Tobirama saw the potential for change and a brighter future in him. ¡°Hui, get ready. Tomorrow, it¡¯s time for you to take on your final role within the Anbu,¡± Tobirama said as Hui prepared to leave the Hokage''s office. The message was clear: Hui, the current Deputy Commander of Anbu, was about to be promoted to the highest position¡ªAnbu Commander. ¡­. The following day, Hui stood outside the familiar gates of the Anbu base. The atmosphere was as cold and somber as ever, representing the true nature of the Anbu: shadows in the darkness. In this era of peace, most Anbu were stationed in the vige and had assembled here today, casting curious nces up at the three figures on the tform. In the center was Tobirama Senju, the vige leader, and to his left and right stood the two heads of the Anbu: the current Anbu Commander, codenamed "de," and his deputy, "Light," otherwise known as Mochizuki Hui. The serious expressions among the Anbu reflected the significance of Tobirama¡¯s presence, with many specting that a new, major mission awaited them. Tobirama surveyed the gathered Anbu before speaking in a clear, steady voice: ¡°I¡¯ve called all Anbu here to make an announcement. Anbu Commander ¡®de¡¯ will step down from his position. Effective immediately, ¡®Light¡¯ will assume the role of Anbu Commander. The position of Deputy Commander will pass to ¡®White Fang.¡¯¡± ¡°Yes, sir!¡± Hui, de, and White Fang replied in unison, followed by a chorus of affirmations from the assembled Anbu, jolted from their surprise. With that, Tobirama nodded toward de and Hui, then disappeared in a sh of Flying Thunder God. The Anbu remained in stunned silence, processing the announcement. Though many had long expected Hui¡¯s promotion to Commander, hearing the news still sent a jolt of realization through the ranks. Only a few Anbu who had witnessed Hui fight alongside Tobirama remained unfazed. After a few moments, de broke the silence, his tone both calm and tinged with a note of departure. ¡°I¡¯m entrusting Anbu to you now, Light, White Fang.¡± He looked at Hui, then at White Fang, and, with a small smile beneath his mask, turned and walked toward the tunnel, gradually disappearing into the shadows. Hui watched as de¡¯s figure vanished, silently wishing him well. Ultimately, a life of light was far more fitting for most people than the shadows of the Anbu. He hoped de would find peace in the days ahead. With de gone, Hui turned to address the Anbu below, all of whom were now his subordinates. ¡°Anbu has never been a word associated with light, and as Anbu, we are not people of light. Our tasks involve infiltration, espionage, assassination, and destruction¡ªall things that cannot be done openly. We are the ones who live in the shadows.¡± His tone was somber, and the weight of his words settled heavily over the crowd. Yes, they were the ones who lived in darkness. ¡°But!¡± Hui¡¯s voice rose, and he met the eyes of each Anbu before him. ¡°This doesn¡¯t mean we should sumb to the darkness. We may fade without a sound, our sacrifices marked by no monuments. But the peace and calm that every viger in Konoha enjoys is built on our blood and lives. ¡°The tranquil days in Konoha are a result of our unseen efforts, our burdens. We reside in the shadows to ward off the darkness that would harm others. We live in the darkness so that others may live in the light. ¡°So, remember this: while the Anbu may not be a source of light, to Konoha, each of you is the light. We operate in darkness, but we must not let our hearts be consumed by it. Hold onto the light within you, and let that light guide you as you drive away the shadows.¡± Hui¡¯s words left the Anbu shaken, their hearts gripped by a newfound resolve. Yes, they operated from the shadows, using darkness to carry out dark deeds. But their darkness was meant to protect others and bring light to them. They might be darkness to their enemies, but to Konoha, they were a source of light. This was the true essence of the Anbu. Hui hadn¡¯t known if his words would resonate, but even if just one Anbu held onto that message, it would be worthwhile. Suddenly, a voice rang out: ¡°Faith in the light, drive away the dark!¡± It was White Fang, Sakumo Hatake, standing at the front and looking at Hui with steadfast resolve. ¡°Faith in the light, drive away the dark!¡± Another Anbu repeated, and soon more joined in until every Anbu member was chanting it together. They gazed up at Hui, eyes filled with respect and admiration. This was their Commander, only sixteen, but someone they would follow with their lives. On that day, sixteen-year-old Mochizuki Hui officially became the Commander of Konoha¡¯s Anbu, reaching the peak of his Anbu career. He set a new record as the youngest Anbu Commander in history¡ªa record unlikely to be broken. Konoha did not keep Hui¡¯s appointment a secret, and a monthter, news spread to the other Great Shinobi Viges. They learned that in Konoha, a sixteen-year-old had be the Anbu Commander. join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Have a great day/night! Chapter 132 Chapter 132 After bing Anbu Commander, Mochizuki Hui¡¯s life became... busier? Not quite. In truth, it was his new Deputy Commander, Sakumo Hatake, who ended up swamped with work. With Hui as a hands-off leader, Sakumo found himself shouldering many of the daily responsibilities. Hui, of course, didn¡¯t consider it cking; he was merely ¡°delegating reasonably¡± to give Sakumo some valuable experience. But his approach made sense. In these peaceful times, there were few significant issues requiring Anbu intervention. Most Anbu were assigned to guard and patrol duties, with only a few embedded as spies in other countries. The tasks that crossed Hui¡¯s desk were mostly minor, and even Tobirama Senju didn¡¯t mind Hui¡¯s delegation. A few years prior, Tobirama had given simr tasks to Hui, who had already proven himself beyond such basic duties. Now, using these responsibilities to train Sakumo was a logical choice. Tobirama was grooming Hui for the role of Third Hokage, a role Hui would soon need to fill, making Sakumo a natural sessor to lead Anbu when Hui eventually left. However, Hui¡¯s lighter workload didn¡¯t mean he was idle. For him, the priority remained his own growth. His body continued to strengthen under the influence of Yuan Qi, and although that required no active effort on his part, the mastery of techniques did. First was natural energy. Being able to use natural energy directly and without hand seals made it his go-to for future attacks, though he needed to explore its uses more thoroughly. Although natural energy existed in the shinobi world, few people could harness it, leaving little recorded guidance on techniques or jutsu. Hui wanted to develop techniques that could maximize the effect with minimal energy expenditure. Alongside natural energy, he also worked on Sage Chakra. While natural energy would eventually rece chakra as his primary power, chakra was still valuable, given its established systems and extensive jutsu library. Combining chakra with natural energy produced Sage Chakra, allowing him to cast sage-enhanced jutsu with significantly boosted power. Sage Chakra, therefore, became his main tool for offense until he fully mastered natural energy. Ordinarily, Sage Chakra would be difficult to cultivate due to the need to enter Sage Mode. For Hui, a permanent Sage, it was easy¡ªhe just needed to bnce his chakra precisely with natural energy. After only a few days of training, he¡¯d mastered the process, to Jiraiya¡¯s utter disbelief. Jiraiya had looked on in shock, his eyes practically glowing red with envy, as if he¡¯d suddenly be an Uchiha. Once Hui perfected Sage Chakra, he began experimenting with different sage jutsu. The power boostpared to regr jutsu was astonishing¡ªtechniques that would have taken considerable effort before now had several times the strength, and Sage techniques amplified both ninjutsu and taijutsu, making them far more effective. His main focus was on perfecting the Rasenshuriken, a variant of the Rasengan. Knowing it would one day be Naruto¡¯s signature move, Hui saw its potential as a powerful, hand-seal-free sage jutsu. While he experimented with other techniques, nothing else quite matched the Rasenshuriken in terms of versatility and raw power. One day, after finishing his training of the Rasenshuriken, Hui decided to test its power outside the vige. Just as he was about to unleash it, he heard a familiar voice. ¡°Big Ball Rasengan!¡± he heard Jiraiya yell from the distance. Hui looked over to see Jiraiya leaping toward him with a massive Rasengan in hand, which promptly smashed into arge rock behind Hui, shattering it into a deep crater. ¡°Haha! What do you think, Hui? Impressive, huh?¡± Jiraiya boasted, basking in the aftermath. ¡°I¡¯ve upgraded the Rasengan into the Big Ball Rasengan! Want to learn?¡± Hui rolled his eyes. ¡°Learn it? Jiraiya, did you forget? I¡¯m the one who taught you Rasengan.¡± Jiraiya froze, a bit embarrassed. He had indeed forgotten that the Rasengan was Hui¡¯s creation. Just as he was about to make a quick exit, Hui¡¯s grin widened. ¡°Oh, speaking of Rasengan,¡± Hui said with a mischievous smile. ¡°I¡¯ve also made some upgrades. Today I finally perfected it, and I was just about to test it out. You¡¯re just in time to watch.¡± A bead of sweat rolled down Jiraiya¡¯s face as he realized his mistake. The Rasengan was Hui¡¯s invention¡ªof course, he¡¯d taken it even further. Jiraiya opened his mouth, ready to make an excuse to leave, but his words caught in his throat as he watched Hui create a Rasengan in his palm. It spun faster and faster, until it formed a massive, fearsome shape resembling a giant shuriken. ¡°This is¡­ Sage Jutsu?¡± Jiraiya gasped, eyes wide as he felt the overwhelming Sage Chakra emanating from the technique. It was clearly no ordinary jutsu but a true sage technique. ¡°Exactly,¡± Hui replied. ¡°This is Sage Art: Rasenshuriken.¡± With that, Huiunched the Rasenshuriken into the distance. Jiraiya watched in awe as the massive white shuriken flew across thendscape, exploding in a blinding sh that lit up the sky like a second sun. When the light finally faded, a massive crater remained, vast and deste. Jiraiya stared at the empty expanse, his scalp tingling. ¡°That technique¡­ is terrifying!¡± join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Have a great day/night! Chapter 133 Chapter 133 ¡°So, what do you think, Jiraiya? Not bad, right?¡± Hui asked calmly, as if he¡¯d just tossed an ordinary shuriken rather than a powerful sage technique. Jiraiya snapped out of his shock, though he remained tense, unable to find the words to respond. Finally, he forced augh and stammered, ¡°Uh, actually, I just remembered¡ªSarutobi-sensei was looking for me. I¡¯ve got to run!¡± With that, he turned and darted away as fast as he could, as if a mythical beast were chasing him. Hui couldn¡¯t help but smile as he watched Jiraiya flee. When it came to showing off, Hui was unbeatable. ¡°Alright, so sage jutsu ising along nicely. Now, what should I focus on next?¡± he wondered aloud, briefly at a loss. ¡°Right¡ªsealing jutsu!¡± His eyes lit up as he remembered the next thing he needed to work on. Until recently, Konoha had possessed only a limited number of sealing techniques, and none were particrly powerful. But after the recent alliance with the Uzumaki n following the Uzushiogakure incident, Konoha¡¯s Sealing Scroll had gained some impressive new additions. These sealing jutsu served as part of the Uzumaki¡¯s contribution to Konoha, a show ofmitment as they sought to integrate into the vige. With his goal in mind, Hui headed directly to the Hokage¡¯s office. After exining his request to Tobirama, it took only a few minutes before Hui had one of Konoha¡¯s most treasured possessions in his hands: the Scroll of Seals. Opening it, he couldn¡¯t help but notice that Tobirama himself had authored most of the jutsu inside. It was no wonder he was called the Master of Forbidden Jutsu. ¡°Got it!¡± Hui¡¯s eyes brightened as he found the section contributed by the Uzumaki n. ¡°Four Symbols Seal, Five Elements Seal, Eight Trigrams Seal¡­ Ah, these all sound familiar.¡± He pushed down a momentary feeling of nostalgia, then settled in to study the new techniques. Sealing jutsu was unquestionably powerful in the shinobi world. However, their learning curve was steep, and those without strongprehension could hardly hope to master them. While Hui¡¯s aptitude was exceptional, even he couldn¡¯t grasp sealing jutsu at a nce. Hours passed as he pored over the scroll, and only when the sky turned a dusky yellow with the setting sun did he close the scroll, rubbing his temples. ¡°No wonder people call sealing techniques profound and limitless. Just learning these jutsu is challenging enough, let alone modifying them. It¡¯ll take a lot of time and effort... But that¡¯s fine. Time is something I have plenty of.¡± He packed up the Scroll of Seals and headed home, intending to seek out Mito Uzumaki for guidance. After all, she was the Uzumaki princess and the most knowledgeable person in sealing jutsu in the shinobi world. Learning from her would surely be more effective than relying solely on his own study. Unbeknownst to Hui, shortly after he left his training spot, a dark figure emerged, looking thoughtfully in the direction he had gone. ¡°A truly remarkable young shinobi,¡± it murmured. ¡°Not a reincarnation of Indra or Asura, yet capable of reaching such heights. I¡¯ll have to n carefully¡­¡± Back in the Senjupound, Hui returned just in time to spot his ¡°little brother-inw¡± Nawakiing home as well. ¡°Brother-inw!¡± Nawaki¡¯s face lit up, and he ran over. He idolized Hui. ¡°How¡¯s the academy going, Nawaki?¡± Hui asked, ruffling his hair affectionately. He enjoyed Nawaki¡¯s energy and enthusiasm, which reminded him of Naruto¡¯s spirit from the future. ¡°The stuff they teach at the academy? I already know it all! I¡¯m going to graduate early, just like you did!¡± Nawaki dered proudly, admiration shining in his eyes. Hui¡¯s reputation had spread across the entire shinobi world, and in Konoha, his story was well-known. Many young shinobi aspired to follow in his footsteps, and early graduation had even be something of a trend among Konoha¡¯s ninja academy students. However, in these peaceful times, there was no pressing need to rush genin to the battlefield. Only exceptionally gifted students, or those close to the graduation age, were allowed to finish early. Hui didn¡¯t truly want Nawaki to graduate early, though. He believed children should have a full and carefree childhood. ¡°Haha, alright! I¡¯ll look forward to hearing good news, then,¡± he replied with a smile, holding Nawaki¡¯s hand as they walked together into the Senjupound. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Brother-inw! I¡¯ll be the ¡®Tree Emperor¡¯ one day and sweep across the shinobi world, defeating all enemies!¡± Nawaki dered confidently. Hui¡¯s smile faltered slightly. He knew he probably shouldn¡¯t have shared certain heroic stories with Nawaki, as it had given him grandiose dreams of bing the ¡°Tree Emperor¡± and crushing all opponents. His influence had sent Nawaki¡¯s ambitions soaring in a somewhat¡­ unusual direction. ¡°Alright, future Tree Emperor,¡± Hui said, stifling a chuckle. ¡°Go get ready for dinner.¡± After Nawaki left, Hui made his way to Mito Uzumaki¡¯s quarters. Meanwhile, the Nine-Tails within Mito stirred in silent contemtion. If it had once thought Hui seemed inhuman, now the Nine-Tails was certain: this boy was no ordinary human. ¡°It¡¯s only been sixteen years, yet this kid has grown this much. Before long, he might reach the level of Madara Uchiha or Hashirama Senju¡­¡± The Nine-Tails brooded darkly. ¡°But if that happens, what will be of me? Am I really doomed to spend eternity bound inside a human?¡± It thought back to those men¡ªthe ones who had so easily controlled it, who could hold it down with a single hand and yet deem it ¡°too strong.¡± A wave of despair washed over it. Its fate seemed sealed, its future eternally shadowed, much like the dark, damp cell it now inhabited. Just then, Hui entered Mito¡¯s room, finding her lost in thought as she gazed at an old photograph. The picture was of a man with long, wild hair¡ªHashirama Senju. She seemed so absorbed in her memories, stroking the photo with her wrinkled hand, a gentle smile on her face, recalling moments of happiness. Seeing this, Hui¡¯s expression grew serious. Since gaining his life-manipting eye ability, Hui had be sensitive to life force and could now see that Mito¡¯s life was fading, like a candle guttering in the wind. At most, she had three years left to live. Hui knew he could use his eyes to extend her life a little, but he had no ns to do so. In this world, souls were real, and for Mito, death would mean reuniting with Hashirama. Hui sensed that Mito had already epted the idea of death and was simply lingering to watch over her loved ones and the vige a little longer. Understanding this, Hui decided he would not interfere. join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL Chapter 134 Chapter 134 In the end, Mochizuki Hui chose not to disturb Mito Uzumaki. He couldn¡¯t bring himself to interrupt her reverie as she immersed herself in memories of days gone by. Stepping outside, he looked up at the sky. The sun was setting, its final rays disappearing over the horizon. People, like the sun, all have their ends. Just as the sun sets here, it rises elsewhere. And when people pass away in this world, perhaps they find new life in another. Does that mean the shinobi world spans two realms? Hui wondered, feeling a sudden curiosity about the other side. What would it be like to glimpse that other world? Of course, it didn¡¯t mean he had any desire to die. The world of spirits may seem exclusive to the dead, but that doesn¡¯t necessarily mean the living can¡¯t visit. After all, dead souls have been summoned back to the living world; why couldn¡¯t the living go to the world of the dead? After all, this was the shinobi world, where all manner of jutsu could exist. Even if they didn¡¯t exist yet, they could be created. And just who or what was the ¡°Death God,¡± exactly? This sparked another thread of interest in him; he felt that the shinobi world might hold more secrets than it appeared. ¡°Hui? What are you doing here, lost in thought? Come on, I ran into something interesting today!¡± Tsunade¡¯s cheerful voice broke through his musings as she hooked her arm through his, her face full of excitement. ¡°Alright, I¡¯m all ears.¡± Hui smiled warmly, his momentary wistfulness fading. Whatever secrets the shinobi world held, he knew that if he became strong enough, he¡¯d be able to protect everyone he cared for. Time passed quietly, and soon six months had gone by. During that time, Hui had nearly mastered the various sealing techniques recorded in the Scroll of Seals, though he hadn¡¯t yet adapted any of them for regrbat. His only battle-ready sealing technique remained the Body-Binding Seal. The vige itself flourished, thriving in peace. The people had healed from the scars of war and were full of hope for the future. All the while, an unseen figure in the shadows continued to watch, closely observing Hui and seemingly plotting something. For most, six months flew by in the blink of an eye. But for others, those six months had been a gruelling ordeal¡ªespecially for three particr people: Onoki, A, and the Third Kazekage. A year and a half had passed since the Uzushio incident, and the seals on the three had long since been removed. Yet the ¡°seal¡± that Mochizuki Hui had left on their hearts remained unbroken. Once celebrated as strong contenders for the kage positions in their viges, they had been admired as prodigies, as pirs of strength and hope. Now, though they still held these titles, they carried a newbel¡ªa stigma, even: they were three kage-level shinobi who had been bested by Mochizuki Hui in a one-versus-three battle. This encounter was destined to be mentioned repeatedly, a reminder of defeat that would haunt them for the rest of their lives. And each time it was brought up, the memory would sting. For the three of them, the shame was not only in reputation but in the personal defeat they had suffered. In that battle, Hui had not only defeated them but had captured them alive, using them as bargaining chips in negotiations with their viges. The worst part for Onoki and the Third Kazekage was realizing that they hadn¡¯t even fought Hui directly but had been defeated by his shadow clone. For Onoki, this realization was particrly devastating. He would often wake in the dead of night, drenched in sweat from nightmares of Hui leading Konoha¡¯s forces in the destruction of Iwagakure. He was haunted. For a kage-level ninja to fear another shinobi to such an extent was¡­ rare. But once he learned that only Hui¡¯s clone had been the one to defeat him, Hui had be a living nightmare. ¡°This can¡¯t go on¡­ We can¡¯t let this guy grow any stronger!¡± Onoki gritted out, terror shing in his eyes. He feared a day when the dreams he had of Konoha annihting Iwagakure woulde true. If being defeated by Hui the first time had left Onoki wary, being defeated by a mere shadow clone hadpletely shattered his confidence. Hui¡¯s power had grown at a terrifying pace. Each day, the thought of Hui growing stronger added to Onoki¡¯s sense of dread. Now, after a year and a half, he had reached his breaking point. ¡°I can¡¯t let Konoha have a second God of Shinobi!¡± Onoki said through gritted teeth. Fueled by this resolve, he sought out the Second Tsuchikage, Mu, with a proposal: they needed to eliminate Mochizuki Hui. Onoki had resolved to do whatever it took to kill Hui, even if it risked igniting another war. However, he also knew that Iwagakure alone couldn¡¯t achieve this goal. To rid the world of Hui, he would need allies. Three figures instantly came to mind: A, the Third Kazekage, and the Third Mizukage. The four of them had previously united on a mission to Uzushio, forming a temporary alliance for a shared purpose. Back then, the four young shinobi had believed themselves invincible, an unstoppable force ready to crush all obstacles. Instead, they had been thoroughly defeated. In a humiliating turn of events, the Third Mizukage had been forced out of the battle by Hui¡¯s sheer intimidation, while Onoki, A, and the Third Kazekage had been defeated and held captive. Their viges had paid a steep price to secure their release. A year and a half ago, they hade together to achieve a goal. Now, they shared amon enemy. Onoki believed the other three would wee an alliance. Their viges, too, had no desire to see a second God of Shinobi emerge in the form of Mochizuki Hui. Hui was not like Hashirama Senju, who had handed out the tailed beasts in an attempt to maintain peace. If Hui rose to Hashirama¡¯s level of power, the shinobi world wouldn¡¯t receive such a ¡°gift¡±¡ªonly war and annihtion. Yes, Onoki was sure of it: the other three viges must be on the verge of acting against Hui themselves. Even if he didn¡¯t reach out, another vige would likely take the lead soon. The next day, three squads of Iwagakure¡¯s elite Anbu quietly set out from the vige, each squad assigned to a different destination. One squad headed to the Land of Lightning, making their way toward Kumogakure. Another squad traveled to the Land of Wind, bound for Sunagakure. Thest squad took the sea route, crossing the ocean to reach the Land of Water and Kirigakure. Their objective was singr: establish contact with the Second Raikage, the Second Kazekage, and the Second Mizukage, and propose a pact to eliminate Mochizuki Hui. join my patreon for 75+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL (1/2) Chapter 135 Chapter 135 A few dayster, in a remote part of the Land of Wind, arge, well-lit room hosted a square conference table, arranged to amodate representatives from four viges: Iwagakure, Kumogakure, Sunagakure, and Kirigakure. Each vige sent two representatives. At the table sat the Second Tsuchikage Mu, the Second Raikage A, the Second Kazekage Shamon, and the Second Mizukage Gengetsu Hozuki. Behind each of them stood the sessors¡ªOnoki, the future Third Raikage A, the future Third Kazekage, and the future Third Mizukage. This gathering brought together four current Kage and four future Kage¡ªan assembly of the shinobi world¡¯s strongest leaders. Such a gathering hadn¡¯t happened since the first Five Kage Summit organized by Hashirama Senju more than twenty years ago. ¡°Who would¡¯ve thought we¡¯d all end up at the same table again,¡± Gengetsu Hozuki, the Second Mizukage, said with a smirk, casting a look at Mu. The two had been rivals for years; the bandages covering Mu¡¯s body served as evidence of an encounter where Gengetsu¡¯s jutsu had left him wounded. Mu narrowed his eyes at Gengetsu, barely holding back the impulse to retaliate. He¡¯d dly respond with a Dust Release technique, but there were more pressing matters today. ¡°Yes, thest time we were all together was at the invitation of the First Hokage, Hashirama Senju, for the Five Kage Summit. It¡¯s been over two decades,¡± said the Second Raikage A, thinking about the past. Shamon, the Second Kazekage, cut in impatiently, ¡°Now¡¯s not the time for nostalgia. Since we¡¯re all here, let¡¯s get started.¡± Mu nodded, addressing the group, ¡°Then let¡¯s officially begin. We¡¯re all aware of the purpose of this gathering: eliminating Mochizuki Hui¡ªthe Konoha''s Ghost, Light of Konoha, and now Konoha¡¯s Anbu Commander. ¡°This sixteen-year-old shows the potential to be the next God of Shinobi. If we allow him to continue growing at his current rate, it won¡¯t be long before we¡¯re facing another Hashirama Senju. ¡°But this youth is far from the benevolent First Hokage; he¡¯s more abination of Hashirama and Tobirama. Should Konoha harbor someone of his power, I think we all know what that would mean.¡± Mu¡¯s statement lingered in the room, and the Raikage nodded in agreement. ¡°Based on our intelligence, this Mochizuki Hui could very well be the next God of Shinobi. ¡°His growth rate is rming; at only sixteen, he already matched our level of power a year and a half ago. If he keeps advancing, it could take only five years for him to reach that god-like status.¡± The Raikage was especially serious; after hearing about Hui¡¯s fight with his sessor, he had gathered every avable report on Hui¡¯s movements and power. ¡°Yes, that¡¯s clear. Otherwise, I wouldn¡¯t be here,¡± said Shamon, a hint of tension in his voice. Shamon wouldn¡¯t have left his work on developing jinchuriki if it weren¡¯t for the threat of another ¡°God of Shinobi.¡± For those who had witnessed Hashirama Senju¡¯s era, his power was unforgettable. ¡°God of Shinobi¡± wasn¡¯t a self-proimed title; it was earned, a promation from all shinobi who had seen Hashirama in action. Each shinobi who had encountered him was left awestruck by his overwhelming strength. Everyone fell silent at Shamon¡¯s words. Killing Mochizuki Hui wouldn¡¯t be simple¡ªit would be as difficult as eliminating any one of them at this table. ¡°Hui has remained in Konoha¡¯s vige walls for the past year and a half,¡± Mu said thoughtfully. ¡°To kill him, we¡¯d first need to draw him out of Konoha.¡± ¡°That¡¯s easy enough,¡± replied the Raikage. ¡°Hui¡¯s the head of Konoha¡¯s Anbu. If we stage another alliance of this scale, we only need to leak a few hints to Konoha. Hui will likely investigate it himself.¡± Like during the Uzushio incident, anyrge disturbances would almost certainly draw out Konoha¡¯s Anbu Commander. However, there was also the chance that he would delegate the investigation to his Anbu Deputy. ¡°If we can lure him out, the eight of usbined would guarantee his death,¡± Shamon said, his tone firm. But Gengetsu Hozuki cut in with a scoff. ¡°Hui¡¯s a sensory-type ninja. Do you think he wouldn¡¯t detect eight of us waiting for him, with our chakrasbined at this magnitude?¡± Gengetsu¡¯s point made everyone pause in silence. Hui¡¯s sensory abilities were well-known, possibly even as keen as Mu¡¯s. Gathering everyone to ambush Hui was hardly a workable strategy. ¡°If only one or two of us were to face him, would any of us feel confident in victory?¡± asked the Raikage, only to be met with silence once again. ¡°What if we trap him inside a sealed barrier, then make our move?¡± Shamon suggested thoughtfully. ¡°Honestly, that doesn¡¯t seem reliable,¡± Mu replied, shaking his head. ¡°Hui is known for his ninjutsu. He¡¯s mastered various elemental jutsu and has created many of his own. He¡¯s already regarded as an all-rounder. ¡°Since the Uzumaki n joined Konoha, he¡¯s likely studied numerous sealing techniques. For all we know, he might have invented a method to break out of such barriers. ¡°And even if he couldn¡¯t break free immediately, a year and a half has passed since hisst major fight, and we don¡¯t know how much stronger he¡¯s be. There¡¯s no guarantee our barrier could withstand his attacks until we arrive. ¡°Furthermore, let¡¯s assume Hui can¡¯t break the barrier immediately. We can¡¯t forget that Konoha has the Second Hokage, Tobirama Senju. With his Flying Thunder God Technique, he could bypass any barrier and retrieve Hui in an instant.¡± Mu¡¯s analysis left the room in quiet contemtion. ¡°And even if we assume Tobirama is unaware of Hui¡¯s situation, there¡¯s still reverse summoning. ¡°In the past year and a half, Hui could very well have learned the summoning technique. If he has, he could use reverse summoning to escape with the help of a summoned creature. So relying on a barrier trap alone has a very low chance of sess.¡± The group fell silent once again. join my patreon for 80+ advanced chapters: /HyppoTL The Novel will be updated first on this website. Come back and continue reading tomorrow, everyone!